PDF Meridian SL 1 Engineering Update

User Manual: PDF T E X T F I L E S

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 642 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

ENGINEERING

HANDBOOK

Update Package

PO71 3374

Prepared by:

Meridian 1 Product Marketing

Santa Clara, CA

Issue: April 1990

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

Meridian 1

Engineering Handbook

Table Of Contents

Chapter Description Page

................................................ .................................................

l-l

............................................... ..........................................2-l

................................................ .........................................

................................................ .......................................4 1

................................................ .......................................

............................................... ................................

................................................ ....................................7-l

................................................ .....................................

8-l

................................................

........................................................9-l

.............................................. ..................................

.............................................. ..........................................

telemanuals.com

l-l

Chapter Introduction

Meridian 1 Communication Systems are a family of digital multiplex voice and

data

switching systems, built upon a foundation of state-of-the art digital switching

equipment and advanced software program control. Meridian 1 Communication

Systems have a range of System Options available, providing sophisticated voice

and data services for PBX and private CO applications for up to 60,000 users.

The Meridian 1 is the single source solution to the complexities of today’s business

environment and represents the merger of the functionality of existing Meridian

Meridian SL-100, and Meridian systems into a single, modular

communications product portfolio. It offers various system options that are tailored

to meet the application requirements of small, medium, and large sized business

organizations.

The Purpose of this handbook is two-fold:

To focus on capabilities and services that have evolved from the

Meridian SL-1 architecture (Meridian 1 System Options

and 71).

To provide a consolidated source of selective reference material to

assist sales engineers and product support personnel in their everyday

work tasks.

The Engineering Handbook is

NOT

a replacement for existing documentation such as Northern

Telecom Practices and feature Documents, which have their own specific use. Instead it is

structured specifically to address the business applications of the Meridian 1. Modular organization of

the Engineering Handbook has been selected for ease of use.

Engineering Handbook

telemanuals.com

l-2 System Architecture

Chapter 1: INTRODUCTION

discusses the purpose and organization of the handbook

Chapter 2: SYSTEM OVERVIEW

provides a general overview of the foundation upon which Meridian 1 SL-1 is built

Chapter 3: PRODUCT EVOLUTION

chronicles the timetable of events that have evolved for over a decade to the

introduction of Meridian 1

Chapter 4: SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

details the various elements that make up the system architecture

Chapter 5: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

describes the

capabilities of

the Meridian

System Options

21 A, 5 1,

and

and various members of the Meridian product family

Chapter 6: MERIDIAN DATA SERVICES

outlines the data products and services that are currently available on Meridian 1

Chapter 7: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

provides configuration and compatibility parameters for both hardware and

software, along with capacity guidelines

Chapter 8: ORDERING INFORMATION

details ordering and packaging information of Meridian 1

Chapter 9: TRAFFIC

discusses various aspects of traffic engineering for consideration in system

configuration

Chapter 10: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

consolidates the technical specifications that support Meridian 1 SL-1

Chapter 11: LIST OF TERMS

provides a glossary of terms widely used in the digital communications environment

The Meridian 1 Engineering Handbook was developed to provide useful and usable information. Your

suggestions are solicited so that the most effective use can be derived from this handbook. Please direct

all correspondence to:

Northern Telecom Inc.

2305 Mission College Blvd.

Santa Clara, CA 95054-1591

Attn: Meridian 1 Engineering Handbook

Engineering Handbook

telemanuals.com

2-1

Chapter 2: System overview .

Contents

Modular packaging

System enhancements

System organization

Common Equipment

Network

Peripheral Equipment

System options

System option 21

System option 51

System option 61

System option 71

Features and services

Meridian software

Desktop products

Meridian 1 SL-1 digital set

Meridian attendant console

System administration

Meridian 1 data services

Meridian networking solutions

Meridian Networked ACD

Meridian Mail

Meridian LANSTAR

2-2

2-3

2-4

2-6

2-7

2-8

2-9

2-10

2-11

2-l 1

2-12

Meridian 1 Communication Systems consolidate the functionality of the Meridian

SL-1, Meridian SL-100, and Meridian PBX portfolios into a single

product line.

The design approach to the Meridian 1 architecture, combined with modular

components, has produced extremely flexible system options that are adaptable to

many applications in the business environment.

The Meridian 1 system options 2 and 7 1, based on the Meridian SL- 1

architecture, provide advanced voice features, data connectivity and local area

network communications, and sophisticated information services for PBX

applications ranging in size from 30 to 10,000 users,

Engineering Handbook

telemanuals.com

2-2 System Overview

The foundation for each Meridian 1 system option is a voice and data

switched digital sub-system under software control. It is comprised of a Central

Processing Unit (CPU), memory store, and a digital switching network that uses

time division multiplexing and pulse code modulation techniques. Peripheral

interfaces are used to connect a wide array of telephones, trunks, and terminals.

Modular packaging

System hardware provisioning is based upon a highly modular packaging scheme

that uses an advanced aluminum die-casting process. The basic unit of packaging is

called the Universal Equipment Module, or UEM. Each module contains all

hardware required (such as backplane, card cage, power supply, cabling) to support

a specific system function, such as CPU, Network, or Peripheral Equipment

The UEM has removeable front and rear covers with locking latches for easy access

to its contents. In addition, the UEM is designed to provide universal support for a

wide variety of card cages and structures to allow the integration of special

applications and features, such as Meridian Mail, into the system. The Universal

Equipment Modules are both mechanically superior and aesthetically attractive, and

provide an advanced packaging platform for the future.

The are stacked one on top of another to form a column. Each column may

contain up to four An expansion kit is provided to interconnect the columns

in a multi-column system to ensure compliance to FCC regulations. At

the base of each column of is the pedestal. The pedestal houses cooling fans,

air filters, a power distribution assembly (including the circuit breakers and power

switches) and a System Monitor circuit. At the top of each column is a top cap

assembly which consists of two air exhaust grills and a thermal sensor assembly.

System expansion simply requires adding one or more The modular

packaging scheme also provides for low cost, easy expansion from one system type

to another. For example, the card cage assembly of a UEM containing common

equipment for a small system may be removed and replaced with the card cage

assembly designed for larger systems. In addition, Peripheral Equipment, which is

the bulk of the system investment, is common to all systems and may be retained

when expanding from one system option to another.

The power distribution arrangement follows the modular design concept of the

UEM packaging. Each module is truly universal in terms of power and cooling, and

contains its own multi-output power converter to supply all necessary voltages. The

system is designed so that there are no restrictions as a result of power or thermal

constraints. Any circuit card can go in any slot, and all modules can be filled to

capacity with any (logically) valid combination of cards, with virtually no

engineering requirements. Both AC-powered and traditional DC-powered system

options are available, providing flexibility to meet a wide variety of customer needs.

Part of the power architecture includes a System Monitor designed to provide

enhanced power, cooling, and general system monitoring capabilities. The System

Monitor interfaces to the CPU through a Serial Data Interface (SDI), for intelligent

error and status reporting.

Engineering Handbook

telemanuals.com

System Overview 2-3

System enhancements

The comprehensive open architecture ensures continual growth in capacity and

capability to address ongoing demands imposed by business communication and

information management needs. Building on the strength of the original SL-1

architecture, this approach has enabled a smooth evolution to occur that takes full

advantage of new technology as it becomes available, allowing customers to protect

their installed investment while at the same time benefiting from these new

technologies and features.

The development of Meridian 1 introduces major enhancements to the network and

peripheral areas of the system. The implementation of microprocessor technology

to the peripheral circuit cards and their associated support interfaces creates a new

set of Intelligent Peripheral Equipment. The on-board microprocessors off-load

processing functions previously performed by the CPU, resulting in an increase in

system real time capacity. In addition, they provide increased system diagnostic

capabilities for an improvement in maintainability. Where possible, hardware

switch selection is replaced with software-controlled selection of circuit card

options. The on-board microprocessors also allow for circuit card parameters to be

changed without requiring hardware revisions. Parameters are stored on the system

disk drive unit, and are downloaded to the circuit card at system reload or upon user

command. The new cards also make use of on-board intelligence by reporting their

product code, serial number, release number, and manufacture location, assisting

maintenance and inventory control.

The Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) provides an increase in density on

associated peripheral circuit cards. For example, the digital line card provides 16

voice and 16 data ports , for a total of 32 ports, and the analog line card provides 16

ports. Since the IPE Module holds 16 cards, the maximum number of peripheral

ports (or terminal numbers) per module is 12. The overall impact is a 300 percent

increase in peripheral density.

Network capacity is enhanced through the introduction of the Superloop Network

card, which interfaces to four regular network loops to extend 120 timeslots per

superloop to the IPE. This increased bandwidth and larger pool of timeslots

improves the network traffic capacity by 25 percent for each 120 bundle.

For high traffic or non-blocking applications, up to four superloops may be

assigned to each IPE Module. Alternatively, since the PE address range has been

increased such that up to 1024 may be assigned to each superloop, low traffic

applications may have one superloop serving up to two IPE Modules.

Other enhancements include a migration to the DS-30 signaling method used by

other Northern Telecom switching products, providing a commonality of signaling

schemes throughout the Meridian 1 Communication Systems family so that growth

beyond 10,000 ports is possible without a change in PE type. Together, the new

signaling scheme, the additional processing capabilities, and the increased

addressing and termination capacity, provide a ready platform for the integration of

ISDN Basic Rate Access (BRA).

telemanuals.com

2-4 System Overview

System organization

Each system option is organized around three functional partitions: Common

Equipment (which includes the system software), circuit-switched Network, and

Peripheral Equipment.

Common Equipment

The Common Equipment is comprised of the following components:

Central Processing Unit (CPU) which, under software control, provides the

computing power for system operation.

Read/Write (R/W) random access memory stores all operating software

programs and data unique to the particular SL- 1 system option including

switching sequences, features, class-of-service information, and quantity and

type of peripheral devices.

Serial Data Interface (SDI) provides an communications link for

administration and maintenance on either a local or remote basis.

Mass Storage Unit (MSU) provides for high speed loading of the system

operating software and data into the R/W memory.

Network

The Network consists of:

digital switching matrix for circuit-switched connections to associated

peripheral devices

two types of Network cards:

Existing Meridian SL-1 Network cards, each supporting a dual-loop

configuration where each network loop consists of thirty-two 64 Kbps

timeslots (30 traffic, 1 signaling, and 1 spare).

Meridian 1 Superloop Network cards, providing 120 timeslots of 64 Kbps

each, supporting from one to eight segments over one or two IPE modules.

Digital service circuits which provide functions such as tones and cadences and

conferencing capabilities.

Arrangement whereby the network loops are provisioned to suit the following

configurations:

half network group (up to 16 network loops)

full network group (up to 32 network loops)

multi-network groups (up to 160 network loops)

Peripheral Equipment

Peripheral Equipment (PE) performs the interface function for the telephones,

terminals, and trunks that utilize the 64Kbps clear channel bandwidth capability of

the circuit-switched network. Where necessary, analog to digital conversion (and

vice versa) is accomplished on a per port basis by means of a single channel

(coder-decoder) located on the appropriate interface cards. An exception to this is

the Meridian family of digital telephones, which reside on the PE, but include

individual built into the set for cost-effective data capabilities.

telemanuals.com

Overview 2-5

The Peripheral Equipment falls into two categories:

Existing Meridian SL-1 Peripheral Equipment

Meridian 1 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment

There are two types of Network-to-PE arrangements:

Existing Meridian SL-1 Network cards interface to a peripheral buffer

associated with existing Meridian SL-1 PE cards.

Meridian 1 Superloop Network cards interface to a controller associated with

Meridian 1 IPE cards.

Both types of network cards can be housed in the same Network Module. However,

IPE cards and existing PE cards reside in their own respective modules and cannot

be intermixed.

Figure 2-1

System organization

Network Equipment

Peripheral Equipment --

Engineering Handbook

telemanuals.com

2-6 System Overview

System options

Four Meridian 1 system options, based on the Meridian SL-1 architecture, may be

selected to meet various applications.

System option 21

System option 21 consists of a single CPU with error correcting memory and up to

28 loops (service circuits reduce this to a maximum of 24 voice/data loops). Also

contained within the module are ten IPE slots and an interface, the

Receiver (DTR) card, which provides 120 timeslots to those

cards and eight DTR circuits. up to 800 ports is achieved through the

addition of Superloop Network cards and IPE Modules/cards. Existing dual loop

network cards continue to be supported and a module designed to support Meridian

SL- 1 Peripheral Equipment connects to these cards.

Another version, system option using AC power and supporting 160 ports in a

single-module-only configuration, is also available to address small system

applications. A field upgrade kit can be utilized should growth beyond the single

module be required.

System option 51

System Option 51 consists of a module containing CPU and half network group

functions, as well as the number of or PE Modules required to support up to

1000 ports. CPU functions are supported using the Omega processor and the eight

network slots which are configurable with either dual loop network cards or

Superloop Network cards, to support a maximum of 16 loops (service circuits

reduce this to 14 voice/data loops).

System option 61

System option 61 adds a CPU/Network Module to the system option 51

configuration to produce a fully redundant configuration, capable of supporting up

to 2000 ports. This system option provides a full network group with up to 28 loops

(assuming duplicated service circuits) to support voice/data requirements and the

ability to process up to 32,000 busy-hour call completions.

System option 71

System option 7 1 is a fully redundant CPU/memory configuration capable of

supporting up to 10,000 ports connected to (up to) five network groups. Again,

both Meridian SL-1 dual loop networks and associated peripherals are supported

along with the Superloop Network card.

Assuming duplicated service circuits on

each network group, 140 of the available 160 loops may be equipped to support

voice/data requirements.

With the exception of system option all system options listed above are

available either AC or DC power arrangement.

Engineering Handbook

telemanuals.com

System Overview 2-7

Features and services

Meridian 1 capabilities range from voice and data communications for a single site,

to sophisticated multi-site networking, to high capacity tandem switching

applications. The Meridian 1 portfolio offers a complete family of desktop

products, a full complement of voice and data communications options, easy to use

system administration capabilities, and an extensive array of call processing

features. Networking capabilities range from simple off-premise extensions to local

area networks, to sophisticated corporate networks deploying ISDN Primary Rate

Access (PRA), Call management applications range from simple call distribution to

sophisticated call center management and reporting tools.

Meridian 1 Communication Systems extend the high performance and reliability of

fully digital communications across the business spectrum, to manufacturers, the

financial community, educational institutions, government, hospitals, emergency

services, the entertainment and hospitality industries, and any other organization

that relies on fast, efficient communications.

The versatility and flexibility of the Meridian 1 provide optional configurations to

meet the application requirements of various business organizations. Application

driven technology helps reduce, control, and forecast operating costs, enhance and

increase service levels to customers, increase new business opportunities, introduce

new products, and help streamline business processes to run more efficiently.

Meridian software

Meridian software offers the same features and functions on all SL- 1 system options

ranging from small 30 port systems to systems accommodating 10,000 ports.

A comprehensive selection of features addresses the needs of all business

organizations. Virtually every industry application (such as lodging, hospitals,

finance, education, manufacturing, multi-tenant) benefits from the many time- and

money-saving specialized features of the Meridian 1 Communication Systems.

Some of these features are:

Basic Automatic Route Selection (BARS) lowers long distance charges by

automatically placing calls over the most economical route available.

Call Detail Recording (CDR) provides cost accounting information for

billing back to departments or individuals. Call records are available for both

internal and external calls. In addition, CDR provides information that can

assist in the management of network efficiencies.

Call Party Name Display (CPND) provides users equipped with display

telephones with the source of a call, the reason for its redirection (such as

answer, busy), and even the identification of the party who forwarded the call.

Multi-Tenant allows the resale of Meridian services and features to tenants

at the same facility, with either shared or dedicated access to facilities.

Flexible Dialing Plans allow selection of up to 7-digit extensions and permit

enormous flexibility in designing network dialing plans for multiple sites.

Engineering Handbook

telemanuals.com

2-8 System Overview

Many other time and money saving applications can be deployed with auxiliary

processors for sophisticated system management and administration, for inbound

call center management and reporting, for conference bridges and specialized

network functions.

Northern Telecom’s commitment to ongoing software feature development keeps

system capabilities current with state of the art functionality to address ongoing

market requirements. A single software development stream ensures that all

features are exercised on all installations, small or large, single site or multi-site:

Desktop products

Today’s advanced Meridian 1 line of products includes a telephone or terminal for

every business communications need. The Meridian Digital Telephone portfolio

brings the powerful value-added features and services of Meridian 1 to every

desktop. Simple access to voice messaging, data communications, least cost

routing, and other call processing features ensures a full return on the

communications investment .

The modular design of the telephone portfolio delivers the ultimate flexibility to

configure a set for every user in the business organization. The modular units can

be factory or field installed to meet initial or later needs. Optional 2 x 24 LCD

displays deliver enhanced functionality such as identification of incoming call

information.

Key expansion modules enable the portfolio to cover user applications

from a single line to 60 lines. In addition, all Meridian Digital Telephones support

asynchronous data adapters. The Meridian product portfolio enables feature key

configurations to suit specific application requirements. The software commands

(such as add, move, and change) are simplified because all sets use identical line

cards, whether they are equipped for voice only or voice and data.

Data can be added to the Meridian Digital Telephone simply by installing the

data option into the base of the set. Voice and data signals are transmitted

over a single twisted pair to a single voice/data port on the digital telephone line

card.

Meridian 1 SL-1 digital sets

The Meridian 1 digital set portfolio includes:

The single line telephone which has one line key and five

programmable feature keys.

The standard business telephone which has eight

line/feature keys and can connect with the optional data module.

The M26 16 performance-plus telephone which has 16 programmable keys as

well as fixed feature keys. The M2616 can be software-assigned with

free communications. Optional key expansion modules can extend this set to

provide 38 to 60 line/feature keys.

The M2216 ACD telephone which comes with dual headset jacks that enable

high-volume call handling capability of telemarketing group needs. Model 1

Engineering Handbook

telemanuals.com

System Overview 2-9

has two RJ-32 ports for modular headsets; Model 2 has one RJ-32 port

for an supervisor headset and one PJ-327 port for a carbon agent

headset.

secure telephone which prevents the telephone from being used as a

passive listening device in any environment in which confidential information is

discussed.

M2317 intelligent telephone which has a built-in liquid crystal display, 11

programmable line/feature keys, and five soft keys to provide easy access to

numerous features, including step-by-step prompts for optional Meridian Mail

voice messaging.

The touchphone which has a unique touch-sensitive liquid crystal

display that provides access to many features, including a customized directory

of more than 250 dial-by-name entries.

Meridian attendant console

One of the key benefits of Meridian 1 is the efficiency and speed of call processing

combined with ease of use at the central answering position(s). The Meridian

attendant console is the optimum attendant interface for efficient high volume call

processing. Large, easy-to-read indicators and a 4 x 40 liquid crystal display

provide essential information required for processing calls and personalizing call

answering.

The alphanumeric display provides for immediate viewing of call

source and destination information. Loop keys and Incoming Call Indicator keys

allow the attendant the option to handle calls in sequence or to prioritize answering

for specific trunk groups. An optional Busy Lamp Field provides the attendant with

user status at a glance.

The Meridian attendant console also supports attendant Message Center options.

The attendant console can be connected to an IBM PC or PS2) or

compatible to provide electronic Directory, Dial by Name, and Text Messaging

functions to further enhance communications efficiency. All call processing

features can be accessed using the computer keyboard. Multiple PC adjuncts can be

networked in a multiple-console environment along with the ability to print

messages and directories locally or at departmental printers. The central answering

position can become a streamlined and efficient message center with all the tools

needed to provide a consistently accurate and timely exchange of information.

System administration

System Management is a vital link in ensuring the continuing effectiveness of the

Meridian 1 Communication Systems. Meridian Manager-provides a user-friendly,

PC-based management system to address operations and administrative functions.

Meridian Manager includes three optional modules:

Station Administration allows easy implementation of all telephone set software

commands (such as add, move, and change).

Traffic Reporting provides easy to understand reports on Meridian 1 system

performance. Specific analysis of processor, operator, loop, and trunk traffic

Engineering Handbook

telemanuals.com

2-10

System Overview

are automated, assuring the ability to easily and efficiently optimize Meridian 1

resources.

Work Order System provides planning management and control of telephones

inventory, as well as related financial statements, and a master telephone

directory.

Meridian 1 data services

The Meridian 1 data product line is the most comprehensive one available with any

communications system today. It allows terminals, workstations, and personal.

computers to easily communicate with a wide range of hosts, local area networks

printers, modems and other devices via cost-effective standard telephone

wiring. Meridian data services provide broad connectivity which allows users to

access multiple networks, applications, and computers from a single terminal.

Data switching on the Meridian 1 platform is and cost effective. Host

computer resources can be shared and therefore more efficiently utilized, with fewer

requirements for expensive and inflexible nailed up connections. Existing data

terminals and intelligent workstations, regardless of type, connect via industry

standard interfaces such as RS232, RS422, and V.35. Meridian 1 supports both

asynchronous and synchronous data switching. Most models of terminals and PCs

can be directly connected to the Meridian 1 without a requirement for data modules.

Where the user application also calls for voice communications, these terminals can

interface through a Meridian Digital Telephone Data Adapter.

Meridian networking solutions

Network solutions can be simple off-premise extensions, or very sophisticated to

accommodate complex networking requirements for a large corporation. Meridian

1 networking solutions can be implemented for initial requirements and upgraded

later to accommodate future growth.

Northern Telecom’s Electronic Switched Network is a comprehensive private

networking solution that ties separate corporate communications systems into one

unified private network with features such as consistent dialing plans and advanced

call routing to reduce communication costs and optimize network performance.

With the implementation of ISDN on the Meridian 1, corporations have even more

powerful tools to substantially improve networking with even more flexibility to

integrate voice and data communications that best fit their organizational needs.

ISDN introduces powerful new features and services to further enhance network

performance to achieve even greater system flexibility.

Meridian Customer Defined Networking further extends Northern

Telecom’s network solutions portfolio by offering customers greater control and

flexibility in hybrid networks.

An unprecedented level of network service

interworking is provided with MCDN, allowing corporations to customize network

design to ensure the best application of advanced technology and service options for

complex networking applications.

Engineering Handbook

telemanuals.com

System Overview

The link that connects corporate users to the many ISDN network services is ISDN

Primary Rate Access Meridian 1 and ISDN PRA provide access to local

exchange carriers through Northern Telecom DMS-100 switch and AT&T ESS.

It provides access to inter-exchange carriers and U.S. Sprint using

Northern Telecom DMS-250 switch and to-AT&T on the ESS switch, and to

private network nodes such as Meridian 1 systems.

Meridian 1 offers multi-national customers the ability to access other public

exchanges internationally. International PRA provides connectivity to public

exchanges, such as ITT System 12, Alcatel and Siemens

EWSD.

ISDN Signaling Link (ISL) is a highly versatile 64 Kbps link between Meridian 1

systems to cost-effectively integrate small remote locations more closely with

headquarters so any Meridian 1 can enjoy advanced ISDN services.

Meridian Link allows the Meridian 1 and the host computer to communicate with

each other in order to provide integration of voice and data communications to

support sophisticated applications. For example, users can pop-up a screen of

customer history simultaneously upon presentation of that incoming call to the

customer service agent. Meridian Link supports defacto industry standards, such as

X.25,3270 SNA and LAPB for connectivity to IBM, Digital Equipment

Corporation, and Hewlett-Packard computers.

Meridian Networked ACD

Businesses with just two locations, or multi-national organizations with multiple

sites can reap the benefits and advantages of Meridian Networked ACD. The

system manages the call traffic as specified by the guidelines, allowing the

maximization of all resources and control of operating expenses. Automatic load

balancing optimizes and prioritizes calls across the network so that callers who have

been waiting the longest will get answered first. If business requirements demand

24-hour operation, advantage can be taken of resources in different time zones, thus

improving customer service and increasing productivity.

The powerful Meridian features and benefits can be applied to the entire Meridian

ACD network. Network Ovefflow Routing provides peak period service across the

network, and network-wide information becomes available to agents and

supervisors.

Meridian Mail

The unique integration of Meridian Mail to the Meridian 1 Communication Systems

gives it powerful voice messaging and voice processing capabilities.

Meridian Mail delivers numerous functions with flexibility and integration between

them to provide a powerful office automation and marketing tool. Voice messaging

allows for non-simultaneous verbal communication. The telephone-answering

function forwards incoming calls to the messaging system under no-answer

telemanuals.com

2-12 System Overview

situations. Callers still receive personal attention by hearing a personalized greeting

whereupon they can simply leave a message with the Voice Mail function, or at the

press of a button, be transferred to an attendant, or another designated answering

position. Optionally, callers can route themselves to any another person by inputing

the proper extension.

Message Waiting notification advises users to collect their messages. The

automated attendant answers calls with a recorded announcement. Call routing

enables the callers to route themselves to an extension number or an information

mailbox to listen to prerecorded information Interactive voice response allows

callers to retrieve or leave information on a host computer via the telephone keypad.

The Meridian Mail networking option supports from 2 to 500 Meridian Mail

systems in remote locations. It enables users at remote sites to reply to voice

messages and utilize distribution lists that contain users on other systems across the

network. All features are presented and operate transparently to the user.

The Meridian Mail system is installed within the Meridian 1 Communication

Systems module. Its multi-module design can expand to meet growth requirements.

Meridian Mail can expand from 4 ports, 5 hours, to 48 ports, 240 hours of storage

and can support up to 3,700 users, depending upon the application Integration to

the Meridian 1 system is through the Meridian Link for superior integration and

digital connectivity for voice quality. Connectivity to a network loop on a network

card eliminates the need for additional hardware such as line cards. Meridian Mail

can share the battery back-up and power supply of the Meridian 1 for cost

efficiency.

Meridian LANSTAR

Meridian LANSTAR provides a most effective data network transport and topology

for creating an establishment-wide local network. It connects large numbers of

users that

may

be spread over long distances to create a manageable and

effective LAN. With LANSTAR bridged via the Meridian

customers can

implement LAN to WAN networking (local area networking to wide area

networking).

Based on a star topology, LANSTAR uses inexpensive standard unshielded

pair telephone wiring to provide a high speed 2.5 Megabit communications link

between the transport hub and network users.

The modular design allows even small networks to take advantage of

LANSTAR

superior distance and capabilities.

LANSTAR 40 Megabit data transport supports up to 1,344 users connected to the

hub in a true physical and logical star topology. Users can be widely dispersed up

to 609.6 m (2,000 ft) away from the LANSTAR hub for a network span of 1219.2 m

System Overview 2-13

With the newly announced fiber optic interface, multiple LANSTAR hubs can be

interconnected to provide even greater distance capabilities for very large,

geographically dispersed networks. The LANSTAR FDDI Interface allows access

to a fiber backbone, providing very high-speed communications

between each LANSTAR hub.

Users have dedicated access between the workstation and the hub, and there is no

connection for network access as there is with Ethernet or Token Ring. The star

topology minimizes wiring problems and complexities. Fault isolation is easy, and

a problem at one connection cannot affect anything else on the network; therefore,

network reliability is very high.

Engineering Handbook

2-14 System Overview

Engineering Handbook

3-l

Chapter 3: Product evolution

Contents

The Digital World

The Intelligent Universe

OPEN World

Meridian

Meridian 1

System evolution

Common Equipment enhancements

Network enhancement

Peripheral Equipment enhancements

Software evolution

Software Generic 101

Software Generic

Software Generic Xl4

Software Generic

Software Generic X09

Software Generic Xl 1

Generic Xl 1 Release 2

Generic Xl 1 Release 4

Generic Xl 1 Release 5

Generic Xl 1 Release 7

Generic Xl 1 Release 8

Generic Xl 1 Release 10

Generic Xl 1 Release 11

Generic Xl 1 Release 12

Generic Xl 1 Release 13

Generic 1 Release 14

Generic Xl 1 Release 15

3-3

3-4

3-5

3-7

3-8

3-l 1

3-l

3-l 1

3-l 2

3-l 3

3-l 4

3-l 5

3-15

3-l 6

3-l 7

3-18

3-19

3-20

3-21

3-22

Engineering Handbook

3-2 Product evolution

In the early seventies Northern Telecom recognized the need for a versatile

the-art product that could adapt readily and quickly to changing conditions, a

product that would give it an edge in a very competitive marketplace. The SL-1

PABX (Private Automatic Branch Exchange) emerged, featuring a digital switching

matrix under computer control.

The foresight of the original development team continues to pay dividends. The

challenge was to design a system that would meet current needs while retaining the

ability to evolve without obsolescence. The key aspect of the system design is a

modular, highly flexible architecture in which the primary system elements can be

independently changed in whole or in part to address changing market requirements.

The system met an immediate demand for a full range of voice and data processing

features in a cost-effective package. Besides functioning as a Private Branch

Exchange it also included key telephone and custom calling features. These

advances were achieved by incorporating several notable industry firsts. A high

level software language (HLL) provided significant advantages over assembler

language in terms of simplicity and implementation. It also permitted improved,

simpler ways for users to communicate system.

To complement the advanced PBX features, a custom LSI chip was incorporated

into a proprietary electronic telephone and its associated peripheral interface. From

a human factors point of view, replacing the conventional telephone with a new

electronic set was a prerequisite for more effective business communications

services. The SL-1 electronic telephone provided simple, direct selection of

features, and unambiguous system responses to indicate the progress of calls.

The main objective to reduce the size of interconnecting cable as compared to those

used for existing key telephone sets, was achieved by using a form of distributed

control in the SL-1 set. The six-conductor line cord in the latter permitted systems

to be pre-cabled irrespective of the eventual use of either SL-1 or conventional

type single line telephones at a terminal location.

Another industry first was the utilization of the on a per port basis to take full

advantage of digital technology. Ongoing silicon enhancements could be

introduced without affecting more centralized equipment in the system. Peripheral

equipment was packaged in increments of four line circuits and two circuits

on associated individual cards.

The first system shipment was in 1975, and the product has continued to evolve,

incorporating new technologies as they became available. As a result, a continuous

stream of enhancements has introduced a series of system models, each building

upon its predecessor with improvements in performance and capabilities.

All models in the product family share similar technology and hardware, as well as

software. They differ only in hardware packaging and the number of peripheral

terminations that they support. The wide variety of available models ensures that

users can select the system and features best suited to meet their specific needs.

Engineering Handbook

Product evolution

The Digital World

In 1976, Northern Telecom became the first corporation to commit publicly, with

the Digital World announcement, to producing a complete line of digital switching,

business communications and transmission systems. Every major

telecommunications manufacturer has since followed this lead. Today, Northern

Telecom is the principal supplier of fully digital systems in the world. Its family of

digital business communications systems is among the world’s most advanced

multi- function integrated voice and data switching systems.

The Intelligent Universe

In 1979, Northern Telecom unfolded the Intelligent Universe to announce the

threshold of a new era for its product capabilities. Envisioned were new

applications of digital technology to create efficient, harmonious global networks of

simultaneous voice and data transmission that allow major office communication

functions to be undertaken in a single integrated system. In addition, the formation

of sophisticated networks would evolve to provide comprehensive communications

through intelligent terminals in which information can be organized, stored,

accessed, and received from any source in the world.

OPEN World

In 1982, Northern Telecom announced the OPEN World for information

management systems, The OPEN (Open Protocol Enhanced Networks) World was

an extension of Northern Telecom’s proven expertise in the key areas of digital

technology, semiconductors, software, and integrated communications capability. It

presented a commitment to providing a planning framework, new products, features

and services for the OPEN World.

Northern Telecom’s announcement of OPEN World promised to create integrated

communication networks that open the technological barriers to user-controlled

systems. The SL-1 would act as the hub for such systems, giving the user the

opportunity to install whatever equipment is most cost-effective for the application.

The OPEN World concept encompasses the following five key criteria: continuity,

compatibility, congeniality, control, and cost-effectiveness.

Meridian

On February 14, 1985, Northern Telecom, in keeping with the OPEN World

promise, announced major enhancement capabilities to family of digital

switching systems. Under the banner of Meridian SL-1 Integrated Services

Network, a new range of sophisticated information management services would

evolve including:

a local area network (LAN) capability called LANSTAR

a unique, high speed 2.56 Mbps pipeline to the desktop using conventional

twisted pair wiring distribution

a range of fully digital telephones to increase the existing terminal portfolio

using a new 512 Kbps digital distribution scheme

Engineering Handbook

3-4 Product evolution

The foregoing enhancements were accomplished through architectural extensions

that built upon the existing system foundation. As such, they reemphasized

Northern Telecom’s commitment to a continuity program that guards against

product obsolescence.

Meridian 1

On January Northern Telecom unveiled Meridian 1, a modular

communication system encompassing the industry’s first truly global private branch

exchange product line.

Meridian 1 represents a merger of the functionality of Meridian SL-1 and Meridian

SL-100, and Meridian Northern Telecom’s current PBX products, into a

single, modular communications product portfolio. Meridian 1 capabilities extend

from voice and data features for very small organizations to high capacity advanced

tandem networking, very large Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) centers, (up to

4,000 agents), multi-function military agency support, campus communication

systems, intelligent network node capabilities, and the bridge to the of

the future.

The new Meridian 1 provides common hardware and adaptive software for existing

systems. This means that can upgrade to the latest voice features, data

connectivity, and sophisticated information services for PBX applications ranging in

size from 30 to 60,000 ports, the widest range in the industry, while retaining 80 to

90 percent of their equipment.

Noteworthy for multi-national corporations, Meridian 1 uses globally adaptive

technology that enables it to be sold and used in virtually any country without major

hardware modifications. Meridian 1 software is compatible with recognized

international communications transmission standards. Additionally, Meridian 1

digital telephone sets can be programmed to give instructions in six languages.

Meridian 1 provides a platform for future growth and will be compatible with

communications networks of the next century. Underscoring Northern Telecom’s

leadership in ISDN, Meridian 1 delivers ISDN primary rate access now. It

supports Basic Rate Access (BRA) on large systems and will deliver BRA across

the entire product line by the end of 1991.

In the future, the new system will use

fiber optic technology to provide broadband capability, bandwidth on demand and

services such as high speed data and full motion video.

Northern Telecom Meridian 1 introduces a product design consisting of new

stackable modules that contain the various system elements. Peripheral Equipment

Modules contain line and cards that connect a wide variety of telephone and

central office interface circuits.

The new modular design offers the ability to grow from a single module through a

column of up to four modules into an array of columns that connect with existing

equipment to extend and serve applications with up to 60,000 ports. The modular

Engineering Handbook

Product evolution

packaging takes up to 50 percent less floor space than existing systems in cabinets

and lets customers add lines and features in a simpler, more cost effective manner

than ever before.

The core of the product line is an Peripheral Equipment Module that

works with both the Meridian SL-1 and SL-100 and has distributed processing, high

density line cards, universal trunks, improved self-diagnostics, and an enhanced

network architecture. System options provide the ability to select the configuration

best suited to

meet

required business communication application within the 30

to 60,000 port range. For applications up to 10,000 ports, system options 1,

6 1, and 7 1, based on the Meridian SL- 1 architecture, are available for use.

System evolution

In 1975, Northern Telecom introduced the SL-IL as its first member. The

system was configured in a single network group arrangement with a choice of one

or two Central Processing Units Memory was packaged in modules of 4K

words and structured in an N + 1 concept such that a spare module was available in

the event of a memory failure.

The was introduced in 1976 to address requirements beyond the

capacity of the SL-IL. It consisted of a multi-group arrangement for up to

network groups, each group capable of accommodating the 16 multiplexed loops

provided by the A similar design philosophy and many of the same

components were used, the major differences between the two systems being in the

area of common equipment. The SL- system utilized a more powerful and

duplicated CPU, a repackaged memory in modules of words, and a centralized

powering concept. It was supported by Software Generic 202 which added a

number of feature enhancements over the initial system capability.

The software

was also adapted to the as Generic 102.

and

In 1978, common equipment enhancements capitalized on

technological advances to effect cost reductions and increased system reliability.

The result was the introduction of two new systems:

SL- for single network group applications

for multi-network group applications

An increased density memory module storing 64K words of data or program

information was introduced, drastically reducing the number of circuit cards

required by each system. The enhancement also the memory addressing

capability to accommodate ongoing feature incorporation. A redundant

memory bank was introduced to complement the duplicate processor capability

already available. Each processor was able to access both memory banks, with the

flow of information to the active processor controlled by an arbitrator, a significant

improvement over the conventional use of a single memory bank with duplicate

spares. In addition, the concept of segmented busses was incorporated to allow

Engineering Handbook

3-6 Product evolution

recovery of call processing functions by reconfiguring the system hardware to

isolate faults.

A significant breakthrough in equipment packaging was made in 1978.

Although expandable to some 400 lines, the emerged to address the 100 line

and below market. Spare mounting space in the equipment cabinet was utilized to

accommodate a mini-network shelf and a magnetic tape transport. Shelf positions

were thereby freed for peripheral equipment, enabling a single CPU to service 200

PE terminations in a single cabinet configuration.

Out of the SL- 1 technology, the SL- 10 packet switching system emerged.

Of significance is that the powerful processor utilized for data transmission in the

SL-10 was adapted to the SL-1 to form a new family member, The latter

was introduced in 1980, expanding the call processing capability through an

increase in CPU real time capacity. The SL- also provided more memory

storage to allow further penetration into the 2000-5000 line range.

This system was introduced in 1982 and with it the concept of front and

rear cabinet access to take advantage of hardware repackaging and a subsequent

reduction in footprint. A single cabinet supports a typical configuration 250

lines/40 trunks with expansion to a 400 line marketing limit by means of an

additional peripheral cabinet.

and

Major changes to the SL-1 product line

also occurred in 1984 with the introduction of these four new family members.

Model

Configuration

SL-1s 32

120 lines Single CPU-single

memory sub-system

SL-1 MS 80 to 400 lines Single CPU-single

memory sub-system

SL-1 N 100 to 1500 lines Single or dual CPU,

single network group,

duplicated memory

sub-system

SL-1 XN up to 5000 lines Dual CPU,

network group,

duplicated memory

sub-system

The systems were the result of an extensive development program that enhanced the

major elements of the architecture.

Engineering Handbook

Product evolution 3-7

Common Equipment enhancements

The Common Equipment (CE) enhancements consisted of redesigning the Central

Processing Unit (CPU) and Memory sub-systems.

A new type of central processor, based upon the microprocessor

technology but with a much simpler architecture, was introduced for single network

group applications.

Elimination of much of the discrete logic previously employed

in separate Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU) and Sequencer (SEQ) cards plus

utilization of 64K EPROMS to store the firmware resulted in the housed

on a single card. Thus the benefits of fewer components, less power requirements,

along with a reduction in footprint were achieved without sacrificing performance.

Indeed the reverse since the new microprocessor increased processing speed by as

much as 55 percent over the equivalent earlier CPU models.

The introduction of 64 Random Access Memory (RAM) chips permitted

memory packaging in 192K modules as opposed to the previously available 64K

modules. Additionally, the functions of the Memory Controller, formerly a separate

card, were incorporated in the new memory module design. Two design types were

developed, one incorporating automatic error correction and detection capability for

systems using single memory subsystems (S and MS), and the other using

conventional 17 bit per word formatting (16 data plus 1 parity) for the duplicated

memory subsystems (N and Further, two versions of each type in and

192K modules were made available to facilitate memory addressing through

efficient hardware provisioning for each SL-1 family member.

Network enhancement

Enhancements to the switching network were made primarily to address the

requirements imposed by data communications on the SL-1 system. The existing

network architecture was designed for applications in what was then a

predominantly analog world. As such, to simplify the path search algorithm,

available time slots or channels through the network were selected on a

pair basis. Thus a call originating on 4, for example, always terminated on

5 to complete the connection. This arrangement is certainly adequate for

voice switching requirements. However, the recognition of the PBX as a viable hub

to control the switching of integrated voice and data demanded improvements over

the original design.

Network enhancement achieved the following:

Removed the time slot matching pair constraint by selecting available channels

on an individual basis. Thus the varying traffic requirements imposed by

switching voice and data can be readily addressed by allocating network

resources accordingly to meet the specific needs of each.

Doubled the number of links on the network backplane so that the associated

equipment shelf could accommodate twice as many network loops. This was

accomplished by the design of a new network card containing two loops as

opposed to the single loop per card employed previously. Thus the number of

network loops was doubled (16 to 32) within a

network

group. To complement

Engineering Handbook

3-8 Product evolution

this increase in traffic handling capability, the junctures, which are merely

extensions of the originating and terminating loops between network groups,

were also doubled (from 4 to 8 one-way junctures from one network group to

each other).

Peripheral Equipment enhancements

Introduction of Very Large Scale Integration (VLSI) components was instrumental

in providing significant benefits from the PE enhancement program.

In particular, a

new custom filter chip, allocated on a per port basis, enabled peripheral card

density to be doubled.

Initial application of the chip, designated to the most

widely used PE cards, the SL-1 and line types, resulted in footprint

savings and a reduction in per line power consumption. The next phase of the

program introduced the to the CO Trunk, DID Trunk and Message Waiting

Line Cards respectively again doubling the number of ports per card compared to

their previous counterparts. The met the transmission standards for digital

PBX mat are recommended by the U. S. Electronics Industries Association

These standards cover return loss, longitudinal balance, gain variation, idle channel

noise, and other transmission characteristics.

Compliance to U.S. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Part 15

regulations was mandatory for the continued marketing of the SL- 1, which is

classified as a Class A computing device. These regulations cover Electromagnetic

Interference and Radio Frequency Interference requirements and were

addressed at both the circuit card and system levels under the PE enhancement

program.

At the circuit card level, and were minimized through design

practices that tackled the problem at the source. Use of CMOS (Complementary

Metal Oxide Semiconductor) components, isolated circuit traces, and multilayer

backplanes were contributing factors. From the system point of view, a new

equipment cabinet was designed utilizing elaborate shielding techniques to prevent

and RFI being emitted from the SL- 1 equipment contained therein.

Not all facets of the enhancements were applicable to all systems. Instead, portions

of the program were adapted as appropriate to benefit product application, a further

indication of the modularity and flexibility of the SL- 1 design.

Meridian Meridian

Major system enhancements were

incorporated in 1986 as signified by the introduction of Meridian and

Meridian A Common Equipment enhancement program, supported by

Software Generic X 11 Release 8, provided new key operating elements which

resulted in significant improvements to system operating parameters. The following

new components were identical for use NT and XT systems:

Central Processing Unit

a new CPU, contained on two printed circuit cards, provided in excess of fifty

percent more real time capacity compared to that previously available on

Meridian

Random Access Memory

A new memory design increased significantly the software address range and

eliminated the 64 K word page address partitions incorporated on earlier models

Engineering Handbook

Product evolution

of SL-1. The memory utilized 256K dynamic random access memory chips to

permit as much as 768K words of storage on a single circuit card.

Mass storage sub-system

A new mass storage system, designed to replace the previous magnetic tape

transport, provided 75 percent more storage capability through the provision of

a pair of floppy disks as a standard product offering. An optional 10 Mbyte

Winchester hard disk was also made available to further expand storage

capacity. Since the mass storage subsystem design was independent of the new

CPU design, it could be incorporated on other system models supported by Xl 1

Release 8 software. Besides additional storage capability, implementation

significantly reduced the time associated with administration and maintenance

routines.

Figure 3-1

Components common to systems

New CPU

768K Memory Cards

Dual Floppy Drives

Optional Hard Disk

Generic 1 Release 8

Meridian

In 1987, Meridian was introduced to address the

requirements of the small PBX market. Packaged in a small, attractive, modular

cabinet, the system provides the functionality and feature capability of the much

larger members of the Meridian SL-1 portfolio. In addition to a tiered arrangement

of equipment shelves for flexible expansion, Meridian SL-1 ST also introduced

peripheral enhancements that were later adapted to the larger systems.

enhancements included the introduction of a line card and a split

PE shelf accommodating a dual-loop buffer which in turn housed a dual-port

receiver.

Expansion beyond the capabilities of the initial cabinet was accomplished by

means of an ST expansion cabinet utilizing similar packaging techniques. These

same packaging concepts were also adapted for Remote Peripheral Equipment

applications through the introduction of a new RPE cabinet that provides

existing feature capabilities in a much smaller hardware configuration.

Meridian

The Meridian was introduced in 1988 to address the

needs of smaller sized organizations requiring the added reliability of control

redundancy. Packaged in a small modular cabinet similar to the Meridian

Engineering Handbook

3-10 Product evolution

redundancy. Packaged in a small modular cabinet similar to the Meridian SL-

the RT utilized the dual CPU and memory duplicate configuration of the NT

system. The Meridian could be expanded by adding the same tiers

designed for Meridian expansions.

Meridian 1 Communication Systems system options and 71

Unveiled at global launch events on January 30, 1990, these systems combine the

functionality of the Meridian Meridian SL-100, and Meridian into

a single, modular product line to address system applications ranging 30 to.

60,000 ports. Based upon the Meridian SL-1 architecture for applications up to

10,000 ports, Meridian 1 system options and 71 introduce the following

enhancements and features:

Modular equipment packaging

Superloop

Intelligent Peripheral Equipment

300 percent increase in peripheral display

25 percent increase in network traffic capacity

Seamless growth from 30 to 10,000 ports

ISDN-ready for Basic Rate Access, in addition to present Primary Rate

capabilities

Increased self-diagnostic capabilities

Extensive system and power monitoring, with intelligent reporting

Reduction of system engineering rules and constraints

Simplified installation and maintenance

Flexible power system architecture

Effective total platform for continued growth and evolution, in keeping with

Northern Telecom Evergreen philosophy

System evolution since product introduction is shown in Figure 3-2.

Engineering Handbook

Product evolution 3-11

Figure 3-2

System evolution

MERIDIAN 1

system option 51

COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

Software evolution

Several software generics were introduced throughout the years to support the

various features.

Software Generic 101

From a software point of view, Generic 101 was introduced to support the

systems. In addition to many standard features and services inherent in the system,

optional software packages provided multi-customer and advanced SL-1 set

features. Multi-customer was unique in that it allowed a single SL-1 system to

serve up to 32 different customers, each with independent feature complements,

numbering plans, and peripheral equipment. The advanced feature package

provided Auto Dial, Call Forward, Override, Ring Again, Speed Call, and Voice

Call capability to the SL-1 telephone user. The typical application of the

system was in the 100 1000 line range.

Software Generic

Generic 202 was introduced in 1976 to form the base for the SL-1 VL system. The

software added a number of feature enhancements over the initial system capability

and was adapted to SL- 1 L as Generic 102.

Engineering Handbook

3-12 Product evolution

Software Generic

Significant changes were made to the software in 1977. The following major

feature complements were made available under Generic

Call Detail Recording (CDR)

Allows the recording, on a per call basis, of details related to incoming and outgoing

calls such as the calling and called parties, time, and duration. The information is

assembled by the software and stored as call records on either a g-track magnetic

tape mounted in a CDR cabinet, hard-copy device such as a teletypewriter, or

external unit conforming to RS-232-C interface. Downstream processing of the

collected data permits usage reports to be generated.

Recorded Announcement (RAN)

Provides an interface to a Recorded Announcement machine and the capability of

flexibly defining the intercept treatment for various call situations.

Time and Date

Provides the capability of displaying and modifying the system time and date from

the attendant console.

Do-Not-Disturb

Provides the capability for the attendant to make any individual directory number

appear busy to incoming calls while maintaining it free for originating calls.

End-to-End Signaling

Allows the use of the SL- 1 electronic telephone on an established outgoing

connection to utilize the pushbutton dial pad to effect end-to-end

signaling.

Software Generic

Generic was also introduced in 1978 with the addition of further optional

feature groups.

Automatic Number Identification

Provides the facility to automatically identify a station originating an outgoing toll

call and to send this information by Multi-Frequency signaling to a central

toll-ticketing system. The feature is implemented by a combination of

software and hardware, the latter consisting of an MF sender, on the

switching network bus, interfacing to an associated trunk group.

Route Selection

Works in conjunction with the feature to route toll calls automatically over

predetermined trunks.

Engineering Handbook

Product evolution 3-l 3

Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Provides automatic selection of least expensive and efficient trunk routes under

software control for outgoing calls. The ARS mechanism is accessed by dialing a

special access code and arranged to route advance a call over up to eight trunk

routes under two time schedules.

Remote Peripheral Equipment (RPE)

Increases the range of the multiplex loop between the CE and PE by using type

carrier facilities. The 2.048 Mbps local network loop is converted to a’ 1 Mbps

format for transmission to a remote location and then reconverted back to 2.048

Mbps to interface to the RPE.

Do-Not-Disturb: Group

Allows the attendant to place a group of directory numbers into a Do-Not-Disturb

mode so that they appear busy to all incoming calls, but to originate calls.

Make Set Busy

(MSB)

Allows an SL-1 telephone user to busy out the set for incoming calls to all DN

appearances but free to originate calls.

The demand for additional system features was so great that in 1979, a split in the

Software Generic occurred to address specific market segments. Business Generic

formed the foundation for the separate generic streams to evolve.

Software Generic Xl 4

Generic Xl4 was introduced for SL-1 interface to the Autovon (Automatic Voice

Network) to present Northern Telecom with a key marketing strength in supplying

the military and government market with a proven cost-effective system. The SL-1

Autovon system provides full-featured PABX capabilities combined with

requirements of the Defense Communications Agency (DCA) Circular

specifications, such as precedence and pre-emption of calls.

Software Generic

Generic was aimed specifically at the Hotel/Motel communications

management market. The full business features of were incorporated with new

features designed to provide additional hotel administration and management

functions such as:

Room Number Correlation

Single Digit Access to Special Services

Message Waiting

Vacant Room Restriction

Supervisory Attendant Console

Toll Terminal Access

Engineering Handbook

3-14 Product evolution

Music-On-Hold

System Call Park

Room Status

Control Class-of-Service

Recorded Overflow Announcement

Software Generic

Additionally, Generic was introduced as the premium Business Generic,

adding the following major capabilities.

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Provides a means of sharing service among a group of answering positions such that

calls are served in the order of their arrival.

A number of administration capabilities

are available for effective agent/supervisor communication. The flexibility of

providing stand-alone ACD, combined PABX service, or a split among the two can

be configured utilizing a single SL- 1 system.

ARS Priority Queuing

Provides an improvement to the ARS feature by introducing a flexible

service assignment of one of four priority levels for the access of least cost routes

by each user.

Authorization Code

Allows selected users to temporarily override the access restriction assigned to any

station or trunk by entering an authorization code.

CDR Charge Account Code

Allows a charge account code to be entered before dialing or during an established

call to allow billing of calls to other than station directory numbers.

Centralized Attendant Service (CAS)

Allows customers with multiple locations to centralize their attendant services at a

single facility. Operation is compatible with AT&T Technical Advisory Manual 10

with the SL-1 system serving as either a main or remote CAS installation.

Digit Display

Provides for the display of information relative to normal call processing and

feature activation on any SL- 1 telephone equipped with a digit display.

Dial Intercom

Allows stations to be accessed by abbreviated dialing and be arranged into separate

intercom groups within the SL-1 network.

Engineering Handbook

Product evolution 3-15

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Allows selected users to access the SL-1 from the external public network by

dialing a special directory number from type telephone.

Message Center

Allows an incoming call to be automatically routed to a message center if not

answered at the original destination. A message waiting indication alerts the station

user, who can then access the center for message retrieval.

2500 Set Features

Provides a subset of features, formerly available only to SL-1 telephones, to be

utilized on single line sets. A Special Prefix Code (SPRE) is used in

conjunction with the to activate the following features:

Call Forward (All Calls)

Speed Call (User and/or Controller)

Permanent Hold

Software

Generic X09

Software Generic was introduced in 1980 to support the and

additionally provide enhancements to the ACD feature by adding load management

administration and report capabilities.

Software Generic

A new business Generic stream Xl 1 was utilized to support under 711,

Release 1, which provided all the feature capabilities of its predecessors and added

new capabilities aimed towards the small system user. These new capabilities were:

Attendant Overflow Position

Mini-CDR

History File

System Memory Automatic Recovery (SMART)

Attendant Administration

Automatic Set Relocation

These feature with the exception of mini-CDR and SMART, were

later made available to the LE, VLE, and XL systems.

Generic

X11 Release 2

Xl 1 Release 2 was in early 1983 to add the following feature

enhancements to the M, LE, VLE and XL systems.

Engineering Handbook

3-16 Product evolution

Call Park

Provides the capability for attendant or station user to place a call in a held state

(park) where it can be retrieved by dial access from any console or telephone set in

the system.

System Speed Call

Allows the creation of a System Speed Call list (or lists) for access by any assigned

station set irrespective of any class-of-service restrictions.

Recorded Overflow Announcement

Allows incoming calls that are delayed in answering by the attendant to be routed to

a recorded message notifying the caller accordingly.

Flexible Code Restriction

Allows the customer to specify whether stations with toll-denied class of service

will be allowed or denied access to outgoing trunk routes based on specific number

patterns and/or the number of digits dialed.

Extensions to the ACD capabilities were announced in 1983 with the formation of

an additional feature group Package D. The latter is utilized for large ACD

operations that require sophisticated management reports and flexible dynamic

resource allocation capabilities. ACD-D uses an auxiliary data system (Digital

Equipment Corporation PDP-11 minicomputer) attached to the SL- 1 to provide a

comprehensive administration capability that includes status displays, reports, and

load management functions.

Generic 1 Release 4

In 1984, Xl 1 Release 4 became the business software standard and incorporated

the Autovon capability previously only available on X14. The following additional

option groups became available.

Flexible Hotline

Provides the capability to assign any single pre-determined destination to be

automatically rung from an associated telephone when the latter goes

off-hook.

Deluxe Hold

Adds two capabilities for calls placed on hold in multiple (single call

arrangement) directory number environments:

Individual Hold held condition is indicated at the normal 120 ipm on the

SL- 1 telephone that placed the call on hold only. All other appearances of the

DN receive a slow flicker (50 ms off every 2 seconds).

Exclusive Hold allowed users with multiple appearance to place calls

on hold under the control only of their particular telephone.

All other

appearances of the DN do not indicate the held call and are excluded from

entering it.

Engineering Handbook

Product evolution 7

Automatic Line Selection

Allows the SL-1 telephone to automatically select a line in a prioritized order when

the handset is lifted.

500 Set Features

Provides rotary dial access to the Speed Call, Call Forward, and Permanent Hold

features.

Distinctive Ring

Allows calls over specified trunk routes to distinctively ring stations as opposed to

the standard audible signaling arrangement.

Integrated Voice Messaging System (IVMS)

Expanded previous SL-1 capabilities to. include voice store and forward (VSF)

messaging.

Generic Release 5

Xl 1 Release 5 was introduced during the second quarter of 1985. It consists of all

the capabilities of Release 4 plus the following feature enhancements.

Business features

Interface to EPSCS (Enhanced Private Switched Communications Service) a

Private Network of AT&T which uses the No. 1 ESS as a switching host

Departmental LDN feature allows up to four different departments to be

identified by their own spccilic listed directory number

Data Port Hunting allows up to 128 data access modules to be assigned in a

trunk group

Privacy Override allows multiple-appearance, single-call-arrangement

directory numbers assigned to SL- 1 telephones to have class-of-service control

of privacy

Enhanced End-to-End Signaling allows this capability to be invoked on all

calls to and from the SL-1 telephone

Call Register Enhancement

allows a separate logical memory page to be

assigned to both call registers and trunk timing blocks, thereby increasing the

number of call registers from 1200 to approximately 1500

Double Density Trunks (CO and DID) and Message Waiting Line Cards

allows twice as many circuits to be packaged card compared to their

single density counterparts

Memory Enhancement increases the amount of memory available on the

in the areas of Program Store and Protected Data Store

Engineering Handbook

3-18 Product evolution

ESN features

Number Recognition for feature removes the need to

use two additional CO trunks to terminate a call at a company owned location

Incoming Trunk Group Exclusion associated with the feature,

provides the capability to deny the routing of incoming trunk calls to specific

prefix codes

Multiple DID Office Code Screening for NARS supports on-net to off-net

conversion for sites having varying numbering schemes

Generic 1 Release 7

Xl 1 Release 7 was introduced to support the following feature capabilities:

Controlled Class of Service (CCOS), formally introduced for the Hotel/Motel

industry, was applied to the business environment to allow a station’s level of

access to the external network to be changed. to a predetermined system level

using a controlling SL-1 telephone.

Multi-Tenant Service allows each of the 32 customer groups within the

Meridian SL-1 to be partitioned into 5 12 tenants to facilitate resale of services.

Automatic Trunk Maintenance provides a means of periodically testing network

resources by measuring facility loss and noise parameters to prevent under-

utilization due to poor performance or service outage. Associated hardware to

provide tone detection capabilities was also introduced.

Station Category Indication (SCI) allows the attendant to selectively answer

internal calls in accordance with a predetermined priority status.

Generic 1 Release 8

Xl 1 Release 8 provided additional system capabilities as follows:

Digital Trunk Interface (DTI), formerly introduced on Meridian and XN,

was extended to include the smaller sized MS system and also NT and XT

models.

Last Number Redial allows users to simply redial the last number dialed

without having to key in the digits again.

Pretranslation provides a means of utilizing Speed Call lists to implement a

flexible dialing plan.

Supervisory Console allows one attendant in each customer group to function in

a supervisory capacity when the associated console is placed in a position-busy

mode.

Eleven-Digit Translation extends the previous three- or four-digit translation

mechanism to eliminate potential routing conflicts when utilizing the

feature.

Sixty-three Attendant Consoles are allowed for each customer group compared

to the previous fifteen.

Station-to-Station Call Waiting allows internal calls to enter the call waiting

state via a new station class of service.

Engineering Handbook

Product evolution 3-19

Generic Xl 1 Release

Another major announcement was the availability of Xl 1 Release 10 for the first

quarter of 1988. This software release introduced new business opportunities in key

vertical markets such as lodging, health care, telemarketing, and the federal

government. In addition, Generic Xl 1 Release 10 culminated the development

program, embarked upon in 1984, to recombine the Hotel/Motel Generic (X37) into

a single stream business offering. Thus users in the lodging environment utilized

features formerly only available to the business segment, and vice versa. Generic

Xl 1 Release 10 introduced a total of 16 new feature options, partitioned typically

for vertical markets, but additionally available to all users of this software base.

Hospitality/health care

Automatic Wakeup

Room Status

Message Registration

Property Management System Interface

Background Terminal

Federal systems telemarketing

Station Loop Pre-emption- ACD Enhancements

Line Load Control Call Overflow by Time in Queue

Dialed Number Identification Service

General business

Call Party Name Display

Call Forward No Answer/Hunt by Call Type

Second Level Call Forward No Answer

Six Party 2500 Set Conference

Enhanced Hotline

Station-to-Station Call Detail Recording

Malicious Call Trace

Generic X11 Release 11

The introduction of ISDN Primary Rate Access capability was made

available in 1988 with the revision of Xl 11 as the supporting software.

Another enhancement to the system features was the ability to perform digit

manipulation on incoming direct-in dial calls.

Engineering Handbook

3-20 Product evolution

Generic Xl 1 Release 12

Generic Xl 1 Release 12 was introduced in November, 1988, to offer another subset

of powerful features to Meridian SL-1. The delivery ISDN services, console and

ACD enhancements, further data networking flexibility, specific features for Health

Care and Hotel markets, additional business feature offerings and memory

expansion for the Meridian SL-1 ST all combined to bring new services. The

following features were provided with this release:

Automatic Call Distribution Auxiliary Security (ACD-D)

Automatic Call Distribution Priority Agent

Enhanced Music (EMUS)

Directed Call Pick-up (DCP)

Call-by-Call Service (CBC)

ISDN Signaling Link (ISL)

ISDN Advanced Features

ISDN Core Signaling (ICS)

Generic 1 Release 13

The availability of Xl 1 Release 13 in March, 1989, added numerous additional

business features and system enhancements. The existing four-digit numbering

scheme was expanded to accommodate up to a seven-digit dialing plan to alleviate

potential conflicts with directory number assignments. The expanded numbering

plan also met the needs of large single system applications which may otherwise

exhaust their numbering capacity.

Expanded software parameters addressed the requirements for additional

networking routing capabilities with the BARS, NARS, Autovon, and Coordinated

Plan features. Other feature paramaters expanded included additional Call Pickup

Groups, Speed Call lists, Group Call members, and Multiple Appearance Directory

Numbers.

In addition, other enhancements to existing features included Distinctive Ring for

Dial Intercom, Speed Call/Auto Dial with Authorization Code using one key stroke,

and an enhancement to the Call Party Name Display.

ISDN features supported by X 11 Release 13 include:

Network Call Party Name Display (NCPND) which providesnetwork-wide

visual display of name and number over PRA facilities.

Display of Non-PRA Calls which uses the trunk route access code and member

number instead of CLID on the terminating telephone set display when network

calls are routed over non-ISDN facilities.

Call Redirection/Call Forward All Calls enhancements which provide

information updates for both the calling and called telephones display for CLID

and NCPND under those calling conditions.

Engineering Handbook

Product evolution 3-21

Back-up D-Channel provides redundancy for the D-Channel Handler Interface

(DCHI) circuit card automatic switchover, if necessary, to the back-up unit

in the event of failure.

ISDN Applications Protocol interworking with DEC VAX and to

facilitate message exchange between Meridian SL-1 and the DEC computer to

support applications such as telemarketing, message desk, and support center

operations.

Generic Release 14

Announced in December, 1989, 1 Release 14 provides base software

necessary to support further members of the Meridian Digital Telephone portfolio,

which are:

single-line digital set

multi-line set with eight programmable feature keys and optional

display

M2616 with 16 programmable keys, software controlled hands-free capability,

and the flexibility to add on a display and two 22-button key modules

M2016 Secure telephone for government applications

In addition, software capacity expansion, introduced with Release 13, is

extended to change the upper limit parameters on the following features:

Private Line Routes

Dial Intercom Group

Trunk Routes

Customer Groups

Network Authorization Codes

Pretranslation Groups

New features added to the system include:

Switchhook Flash facilitates the emulation of the SL-1 as a key system

behind a switching office to permit call transfer.

No-Hold Conference allows a station user to set up a conference call without

losing voice contact with the original party such as in an emergency call.

Telemarketing enhancements in ACD environment namely Audible Tone

for Agent Observe and Data Agent Log-in features.

Flexible Incoming Tones to be applied under varying call conditions.

Audible Reminder of Held Calls extends to proprietary telephones. The

Permanent Hold capability on telephones of alerting users

periodically of the held call situation.

Night Key for DID Digital Manipulation permits different call treatments to be

implemented either after hours or during specific times during normal business

hours.

Engineering Handbook

3-22 Product evolution

ISDN enhancements provide additional capabilities including Network Call

Redirection, Network Ring Again for sets, and the ability to maintain

trunk service in the event of a signaling channel failure using the ISL.

Generic

Release 15

Introduced in January, 1990, to support Meridian 1 system options and

71, Xl 1 Release 15 additionally provides the following new features and

enhancements.

Business features

Busy Lamp Field enhancement for the M2250 attendant console displays, in

addition to the busy/idle status of system users, the reason for user absence and

an alternate extension number to utilize.

CDP Routing enhancement provides more flexibility to network dialing plans

and alternate routings by allowing incoming DID calls to be routed over CO,

WATS, and Tie trunks when a distant steering code is used.

Flexible Feature Codes provide customers the ability to define their own access

codes for system features.

Remote Call Forward allows all incoming calls to a station to be automatically

forwarded to a preselected number that may be remotely defined.

Time Forced Disconnect permits a customer to specify the maximum duration

of a call permitted on a trunk route basis.

Two-step Call Forward No Answer allows the dialed extension to have a

Message Waiting class of service assigned for forwarding the call to a Message

Center.

Recorded Announcement enhancements provide compatibility with associated

RAN equipment that permit message lengths of 512 seconds.

Console Presentation Groups provides greater flexibility to the Multi-Tenant

feature by allowing attendant consoles to be defined at the tenant level rather

than the customer level.

Attendant Alemative Answering allows any call presented to a console loop key

to be forwarded to a customer-defined directory number when the attendant is

not available to answer.

Hotel feature enhancements include additional levels of restriction to be applied

to the Controlled Class-of-Service feature and an extension of the number of

Automatic Wake-up calls from to 500 in a five-minute period.

Telemarketing enhancements

Network ACD uses ISDN PRA or ISL hardware to quickly and

efficiently route calls to available agents within a network of SL-1 systems.

Enhanced Overflow allows customers to optimize resources and service level

by adding more flexibility in defining call overflow patterns within the system.

ACD Screen enhancements provide new display messages on associated M22 16

ACD digital telephones that give agents and supervisors clear and simple

instructions for feature activation.

Engineering Handbook

Product evolution 3-23

enhancements

Network Message Center capabilities are enhanced by the ability to serve multiple

remote locations with centralized messaging facilities over associated or ISL

paths.

Software evolution since product introduction is shown in Figure 3-3. A summary

of product evolution is depicted in Table 1.

Figure 3-3

Software evolution

Business

Generic

1975

x01 (L)

1977

1978

Split Split

Government

Generic

1979 x14

A, LE, VLE

Hotel/Motel

Generic

x37

RLS

1980 Xl 1 R LS

(M)

1982

X37 RLS 4

1985

1986

1987

1988

1989

1990

RLS7

Xl 1 RLS 8 X37 RLS 5, (6)

Xl 1

RLS (ST)

Xl 1 RLS 10

Merge

Xl 1 RLS 11 (ISDN)

X11

X11 RLS 13

RLS 14

RLS 15

(System options

Engineering Handbook

3-24 Product evolution

Table

Product evolution summary

Year Model/Event Hardware Software

1975

SL-1 L

Front access cabinet Generic X01

Single density PE Multi-customer

line

trunk Call Forward

4K Memory card Override Again

Speed Call, Voice Call

1976

1977

SL-1

Digital World

Centralized power cabinet

Digit display console

8K Memory card

CDR cabinet

RAN trunk

Generic

Feature enhancements

Generic

Call Detail Recording

Recorded Announcement

Do Not Disturb (individual)

End-to-End Signaling

Time and Date

1978 SL-1 LE 64K Memory card Generic

Local/remote RPE Interface Remote Peripheral Equipment

MF sender Automatic Number

Identification

Do Not Disturb (group)

Make Set Busy

Automatic Route Selection

1979

Intelligent

Universe

Generic

Dial Intercom

2500 Set Features

Digit Display

Direct Inward System Access

(DISA)

CDR Charge Account

Authorization Code

Message Center

Automatic Call Distribution

ARS Cueing

Generic --

- Hotel/Motel

Generic Xl4

Autovon

Engineering Handbook

Product evolution

3-25

Table 3-1 continued

Product evolution summary

Year

1980

Model/Event Hardware Software

SL-1 XL SL-10 Processor

Generic X09

Add-on Data Module (ADM) ACD Package B, Cl, C2

Data Line Card Generic 610

Electronic Switched Network

1981

SL-1

CPU

Hospital/Clinic .

Automatic Wake-up

Room Status

1982 SL-1 M

Open World

Displayphone Generic Xl 1 Release 1

Front & rear access cabinet

Attendant Administration

Automatic Set Relocation

History File

Xl 1 Release 2

Call Park

System Speed Call

Recorded Overflow

Announcement

Flexible Code Restriction

ESN enhancements

1983 Multi-Channel Data (MCDS) Xl 1 Release 3

SL-1 displayphone ACD-D

PC Interface card Stored Number Redial

I/F Module (AIM) Network Call Transfer

ACD Auxiliary Processor Integrated Messaging System

ESN enhancements

1984 SL-1s

SL-1 MS

SL-1 N

SL-1 XN

Double density PE

line card

4-port trunk card

Coax Elimination SWG

3270 protocol converter

Module

(ASIM)

Memory card

-continued-

Xl 1 Release 4

Autovon enhancements

Integrated Voice Messaging

System

Flexible Hot Line

500 Set Features

Distinctive Ring

Hold enhancements

Auto Line Select

,’

Engineering Handbook

3-26 Product evolution

Table 3-1 continued

Product evolution summary

Year

Model/Event Hardware Software

1985 Meridian System 36 gateway Xl 1 Release 5

Computer to PBX interface EPSCS interface

ESN enhancements

Digital Trunk lnte (DTI) Department LDN

Packet Transport Equipment Privacy Override

Digital telephones Enhanced EES

X.25 gateway pad

Integrated Services Digital Xl 1 Release 7

Line Card (ISDLC) Multi-Tenant Service

Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Controlled COS

Station Category Indication

1986 Meridian SL-1 NT CE enhancements Xl 1 Release 8

new processor Last Number Redial

Meridian SL-1 XT 768K Memory card Supervisory Console

disk storage Pretranslation

Line Unit (AILU) 11 -Digit Translation

BALUNS 63-console capability

Fast TDS Station-to-Station Call Waiting

1987 Meridian SL-1 ST PE enhancements Xl 1 Release 9

card ACD enhancements

Meridian Mail Dual Loop Buffer Trunk verification from STN

Split PE shelf

Meridian Daughterboard DTR Xl 1 Release 10

LANSTAR New 50A Rectifier Call Party Name Display

Interface (RILC) Dialed No. ID Service (DNIS)

PTE cabinet Call Forward by Call Type

ST expansion cabinet Line Load Control

M2317 digital telephone Malicious Call Trace

Macintosh II interface Optional Delay

RPE cabinet Internal CDR

PRA interface card Conference 6

Hotel/Motel features

Engineering Handbook

Product evolution 3-27

Table 3-1 continued

Product evolution summary

Year Model/Event Hardware Software

Meridian SL-1 CE enhancements Xl 1 Release 11

RT Message Incoming Digit Conversion

Waiting card ACD-D security

New dual processor Directed Call Pick-up

766K Memory card

Secure Telephone Xl 1 Release

Meridian Mail M P,SP option ACD Priority Agent

M3000 Plus Touchphone enhancement

I/F Line Unit (AILU) Enhanced Music option

Meridian Mail option CDR Calling Line ID

SDI card Night Service by Time of Day

ST memory expansion Meridian Mail

SL-1 console line card Voice menus

High Speed Data Module ACD MAX

(HSDM) Release 1

1989

Ml 250 attendant console Xl 1 Release 13

Meridian Mail option S Capacity Expansion (phase 1)

cabinet Applications Protocol

Meridian Mail option X

cabinet Xl 1 Release 14

Meridian modular terminals Capacity Expansion (phase 2)

Audible Reminder of Held Call

Switchhook Flash

Flexible Incoming Tones

Night Key for DID

No Hold Conference

Telemarketing features

Network Ring Again

ACD MAX

Release 2

Meridian Mail PC

1990 Meridian 1 System options Xl 1 Release 15

Communication 61, 71 Flexible Feature Codes

Systems M2250 attendant console Network ACD

Universal equipment enhancements

packaging Shared Tenant Services

Hospitality features

Engineering Handbook

4-1

Chapter 4: System architecture

Contents

Meridian modular architecture

Control

Switching

Peripherals

Software architecture

Firmware

Software

Office data

Resident programs

Non-resident programs

Service change and print routines

Maintenance diagnostics

Traffic

Equipment data dump

Software audit

Hardware architecture

Common equipment

Central Processing Unit (CPU)

Mass Storage Unit

Input Output (l/O) interfaces

Memory

Unprotected Data Store (UDS)

Protected Data Store (PDS)

Program Store (PS)

Network equipment

Loops and Superloops

Network organization

Peripheral equipment

PCM

Remote Peripheral Equipment (RPE)

Network/peripheral configuration

Enhanced network configurations

Superloop network configurations

One segment per superloop

4-2

4-3

4-4

4-5

4-6

4-7

4-8

4-9

4-10

4-11

4-13

4-15

4-17

Engineering Handbook

4-2 System Architecture

Two segments per superloop

4-18

Four segments per superloop 4-19

Eight segments per superloop

4-20

One segment per segments per superloop

4-22

Two segments per per superloop

4-23

Power equipment

4-25

Meridian 1 modular architecture

An important characteristic of Meridian 1 systems is a modular system architecture.

It utilizes an efficient and flexible approach, employing modular construction in all

areas of hardware and software, and state-of-the-art commercial and custom

components. The result is a system which is highly flexible in terms of operational,

maintenance, and administrative characteristics. As demands dictate, any module

may be enhanced, singularly or in combination with other modules. Each system is

organized around three functional areas: Control, Switching, and Peripherals.

Control

The Control complex provides the sequences required by the system to process

voice and data call connections, monitor call activity, and perform system

administration, maintenance, and testing. It is composed of two elements: the

Central Processing Unit (CPU) which directs lower level subsystems in the

hierarchy, and the system memory which stores the operating programs.

Switching

The switching function is performed by the network equipment, which

interconnects terminal devices for communication with each other. The network

architecture is based on the concept of a digital multiplexed loop. A loop is a

bidirectional path between Network and terminal device which transmits voice, data

and information.

Peripherals

Peripheral equipment provides the analog and digital interfaces for all peripheral

devices, and performs analog to digital conversion of all input signals before

switching is performed by the Network. Additionally, peripheral equipment circuits

provide the supervisory and transmission functions needed for trunks connected to

the external telecommunications network.

Meridian 1 systems use a star topology for connecting peripheral devices to the

switching equipment, an approach which permits uniform distributed wiring

methods. This approach provides significant benefits in the area of administration,

installation, maintenance, and reliability.

Engineering Handbook

telemanuals.com

System Architecture 4-3

Figure 4-1

Meridian 1 modular architecture

Control

CPU

Firmware

Software

Peripherals

Software architecture

The adaptability of software control provides a complete array of services and

features tailored to meet changing requirements.

Call processing, maintenance, and administration of Meridian 1 systems are

controlled by software programs stored either as firmware programs, as software

programs resident in system memory, or as non-resident programs on disk. The

information which describes system configuration and associated peripheral

equipment is termed office data. This data resides in the system memory and on

disk.

Firmware

These are fundamental programs consisting of hard-wired logic instructions stored

in Programmable Read Only Memory (PROM) which manipulate data in the central

processor and control input/output operations, error diagnostic and recovery

routines.

Software

Software programs consist of instruction sequences that control call processing,

peripheral equipment, administration and maintenance functions. These sequences

are interpreted by the firmware programs into machine instructions. Several generic

software programs with optional feature packages are to satisfy varying

requirements.

Office data

The office data describes the characteristics of the system in terms of configuration

and call dependent information such as features and services. Office data is

arranged into blocks defining peripheral equipment, system configuration and

transient data. These data blocks permit configuration of Meridian 1 systems to

specific customer needs.

Engineering Handbook

telemanuals.com

4-4 System Architecture

Resident programs

Resident programs are programs always available in memory during system

operation. Firmware programs control other resident programs and provide all CPU

arithmetic operations. The other resident programs are those which are

automatically loaded into the system memory from the disk drive at system

up. Once loaded, these programs remain in memory.

Non-resident programs

Non-resident programs are the overlay programs stored on disk which are loaded

into the “overlay area” of system memory when required to perform specific tasks.

Only one overlay program may be loaded at a time and is removed from the overlay

area when no longer required. Overlay programs can be loaded automatically,

under program control, or manually, via an administrative terminal.

Once the user has logged into the system, commands for specific overlay programs

are processed by the overlay loader program. When loaded, the overlay program

assumes control. Only one administrative terminal can input into the overlay area at

a time. More than one device, however, can receive output simultaneously. A

terminal may be configured as an input only or output only device.

Overlay programs provide the system interface for maintenance, service change,

and traffic measurement. Each overlay program is independent and has its own

specific set of commands and formats. Overlay programs may be concurrently

with normal call processing without interfering with system There are five

main categories of overlay programs:

Service change and print routines

Maintenance diagnostics

Traffic

Equipment data dump

Software audit

Service change and print routines

Service changes do not generally require hardware intervention. Instead, the service

administration programs are used to create or modify all aspects of the system from

individual feature key assignments to complete system configurations. There are

also programs and print routines for retrieving the data from the system to check the

status of data assignments.

Maintenance diagnostics

These programs are the primary instruments for maintenance purposes. Individual

programs are used for automatically or manually testing the Common Equipment

(CE) and Peripheral Equipment The programs may be loaded into the overlay

area at the request of maintenance personnel, or as part of a daily maintenance

routine automatically initiated by the system at a specified time. In addition,

Engineering Handbook

telemanuals.com

System Architecture 4-5

background and signaling diagnostic routines can occupy the overlay area when it is

not in use.

Traffic

All systems are equipped with traffic data accumulation programs. There is also a

resident traffic print program which examines the schedules, transfers data from

accumulating to holding registers in accordance with schedules, and prints the

traffic data. In addition, there is a traffic overlay program which is used to query

and modify schedules, options, and thresholds.

Equipment data dump

After making service changes, the changes must be transferred to disk in order to

save them. When the equipment data dump program is invoked, all the office data

in the read/write memory is written to the system disk. The data dump program is

also used to install a new generic version or issue and capture protected data store

information which may be changed by the user, such as speed call lists. The

program may be invoked automatically during a midnight routine or on a

conditional basis (i.e., data dump only occurs if a software service change has been

made). It may also be invoked manually via the input/output (I/O) interface to the

system.

Software audit

program monitors system operation and gives an indication of

the

general

state

of the system operation. The program is concerned mainly with the system

software. When a software problem is encountered, the program attempts to clear

the problem automatically.

Engineering Handbook

4-6 System Architecture

Hardware architecture

Each Meridian 1 system is composed of the following hardware subsystems:

Common equipment (CE) provides device control, software execution,

and memory functions of the system

Network equipment (NET) performs the switching function under CPU

control

Peripheral equipment provides the interface for line and trunk circuits

Terminal equipment telephone sets and attendant consoles

Power equipment provides electrical voltages required to operate

equipment

Common equipment

Common Equipment (CE) consists of one or Central Processing Units

memory circuits, and mass storage devices which control the operation of

the system. The CE communicates over a common control bus which carries a

constant flow of program instructions and data under direct control of the CPU. The

digitized speech signals follow a separate path on a network switching bus which

allows communications links to be established between any of the peripheral

devices.

The Central Processing Unit (CPU) provides the computing power essential for the

entire system operation. The system memory stores all operating software programs

and data unique to a particular Meridian 1 system, including switching sequences,

features, class of service information, and quantity and types of terminals. The

Mass Storage Unit provides high speed loading of the operating programs and data

into memory. The digital service circuits provide functions such as dial and ringing

tones, and call conferencing capabilities. The Serial Data Interface (SDI) provides

an communications link for administration and maintenance on either a

local or remote basis. The network circuit cards provide a digital matrix for

switched connections to associated peripheral devices.

Central Processing Unit (CPU)

The CPU performs the control and switching sequences required by the system. The

software that directs these functions is loaded into the system memory from the

mass storage unit by the CPU. Information flows between the CPU, I/O devices,

and the system memory over the CPU bus.

The data required by the CPU to perform its control and switching functions is held

during system operation in Random Access Memory (RAM) and fed to the CPU via

the CPU bus. The operating data is loaded into the RAM from floppy diskettes on

system power-up.

The CPU function is performed by circuit cards which include Read-Only-Memory

firmware that contains fault clearing programs and instructions to control the

loading of system memory from the mass storage unit.

Engineering Handbook

System Architecture 4-7

Meridian 1 system options 5 1, and 71 incorporate the following CPU design:

24-bit data words plus l-bit parity

24-bit linear addressing that permits memory allocation to be assigned on a

contiguous basis

16M words subdivided for up to 12M words of physical memory space and a

remainder of 4M words for I/O spaces

asynchronous (handshake) bus operation

16 file registers used to hold address and data for all operations

a sense (interrupt) input line to indicate that a particular device (tape, PE,

etc.) requires action by the CPU

a trap facility which, when activated by an external signal, causes the CPU to

immediately begin executing instructions starting at a particular address; this

facility is used to enter a recovery routine when a fault is detected.

Meridian 1 system option 21 uses a 16-bit processor for small sized business

applications.

Mass Storage Unit

A Floppy Disk Unit equipped with two disks and a Multi-Disk Unit

(MDU) with additional hard disk is used for high speed loading of the resident

operating programs and data into system memory. The loading process is

controlled by instructions held in the Read-Only-Memory (ROM) firmware. When

loading is complete, the diskettes remain in the mass storage unit to provide a non-

volatile store for automatic loading purposes in the event of software being erased

from memory during a power failure. Non-resident software is loaded from the disk

automatically or by manual request when required.

The Mass Storage Interface (MSI) card is designed to interface with external

devices that are compatible with the Small Computer System Interface (SCSI). This

storage capability is provided by the following hardware configurations:

Floppy Disk Unit two 3.5” 1.2 Mbyte floppy disk drives

(providing 2.4 Mbytes of formatted capacity) as a standard system offering

AA Multi Disk Unit a hard disk drive with 20 Mbytes of formatted

capacity. When this option is equipped, the floppy disks are used for backup

and system loading.

Input Output (l/O) interfaces

There are various methods of communicating with Meridian 1 systems. A family of

Serial Data Interface (SDI) circuit cards provides from one to four communication

channels which conform to EIA Data Interchange Standard RS-232-C. I/O

addressing is under switch control of the card and allows up to 16 RS-232-C

compatible devices, such as terminals, to communicate with the system. The

devices are used to input commands and/or receive responses from the system

during administration and maintenance procedures.

Engineering Handbook

4-8 System Architecture

Memory

Firmware, software, and data stored in a read/write Random Access Memory

(RAM). The memory is a critical part of the stored program control system. It

contains the memory stores of all of the basic operating instructions for the system,

plus data on the configuration of the particular application being served. Memory

utilization is dependent upon what features are programmed into the system and the

number of peripheral terminations being served. The memory is split into four

segments to facilitate processor address purposes and permit a functional separation

of programs .

Unprotected Data Store (UDS)

These pages hold the transient or unprotected data that is required during call

processing. Included are the timing queues and call registers.

Protected Data Store (PDS)

This protected data store holds the office data blocks that are particular to specific

installations.

Program Store (PS)

Allocations within the Program Store are as follows:

Firmware This portion of the memory is a non-volatile Read Only Memory

(ROM) used for storage of all system firmware. The ROM is programmed during

manufacture and the instructions are permanent and indestructible. It stores the

basic rules of operation necessary to initialize system and bring it into a working

state. A recovery or “trap sequence” is included in firmware which is automatically

invoked in response to power-on, system reset, or when certain faults are detected.

Overlay -This portion of the memory may be loaded with various non-resident

programs as required during automatic diagnostics, service order change, traffic

measurement, or maintenance.

Software The remainder of this memory page is reserved for all of the system

software such as the call processing and optional programs. Additional software

storage capability is provided by the incremental addition of more memory pages

within this category.

Input Output addresses There are no RAM modules utilized for this page.

Instead the address range is reserved for Input/Output (I/O) device addresses. These

devices include signaling for peripheral equipment along with magnetic tape and

terminal assignments.

Engineering Handbook

System Architecture 4-9

Network equipment

Network equipment consists of network circuit cards which perform the digital

switching of voice and data signals, peripheral signalling cards which perform

scanning and signal distribution, and service circuit cards, such as tone and digit

switches, which provide call progress tones and outpulsing as instructed by the

CPU. Network circuits employ Pulse Code Modulation and Time Division

Multiplexing to perform switching function.

Loops and Superloops

Network equipment interfaces with peripheral equipment via digital multiplexed

loops. A loop is a bidirectional path between Network equipment (NET) and

Peripheral equipment for voice, data and signalling information. Upon

commands from the CE, the network establishes a path, linking a specific input to a

specific output.

Meridian 1 systems provide two network circuit cards, QPC414 Network card

which provides 2 loops per card, and the Super-loop Network card

which provides 4 loops per card, grouped together in an entity called a

permits all 120 timeslots provided by the network card to be shared

among the peripheral devices served by the superloop, providing higher traffic

capacity and simplified traffic engineering.

The flexibility of network loop plays an important role in the Meridian 1

architecture. Besides ability to increase circuit-switched bandwidth on an

incremental card basis for cost-effective growth, application may be varied for value

added services. The network structure allows for the full connectivity of all devices

irrespective of how they connect to the system.

The network loop is a key element in the implementation of Primary Rate Access

and Digital Trunk Interface (DTI). The PRA offers twenty-three 64-Kbps

B channels and one D channel; it connects to nodes (such as

interexchange carriers, local exchange carriers) or private network facilities (such as

or host computers). The DTI provides a digital link of 24 channels each of

which may be flexibly allocated for both voice and data communications. The DTI

uses the North American T- 1 standard (DS- 1 format); each equipped link is

assigned an associated network loop.

Network organization

Network loops are organized into groups. Systems are configured as half, full, or

multiple group machines. A half network group machine provides up to 16 loops, a

full group system provides up to 32 loops, while a multiple group system provides

up to 160 loops.

Engineering Handbook

4-10 System Architecture

For applications beyond the traffic handling capability of the single network group,

additional switching stages are introduced to form a multi-group arrangement.

These connecting paths, provided by the Module, are merely an

extension of the originating and terminating network loop involved in a call. There

are eight one way junctors from each group to all others. Since each path provides

thirty connecting channels, a total of 480 connection paths exist from one group to

another, 240 in each direction. Five network groups may be interconnected to

constitute a fully configured digital switching matrix.

Peripheral equipment

Peripheral Equipment (PE) consists of peripheral controller cards which provide the

timing and control sequences for peripheral circuits, analog and digital line and

trunk cards, which provide the interfaces for terminal devices, and circuit cards

which provide Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) and Primary Rate Access (PRA)

services.

The peripheral controller performs the first stage of multiplexing signals from the

terminals, which are then passed on to the network for digital switching. The

peripheral controller also transmits timing signals, and carries out other functions

associated with the control of the peripheral circuits.

The analog line card converts incoming analog signals into digital signals which are

then passed on to the peripheral controller. This conversion is accomplished by an

integrated encoder/decoder (codec) chip. There is a codec for each port on the line

card. Conversion from digital back to analog is also performed by the codec for

outgoing signals. For digital telephones, the codec is located within the telephone

set itself.

PCM

Pulse Code Modulation is used to convert analog signals to digital signals.

The PCM method converts the analog signal to digital by sampling the amplitude of

the analog signal at a rate of twice the highest signal frequency and converting the

amplitude of each sample into a series of coded pulses. The PCM sampling

frequency standard for telecommunications is 8 KHz.

Companding (compressing expanding) PCM is a standard technique for using

words to efficiently represent the wide dynamic range of voice and data

signals. Two standards for am internationally recognized:

Mu-255 law for North American applications

A-law for international service

Meridian 1 codecs conform to both standards and are software selectable (in

Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Modules) for use in North America and

internationally. The codecs are also designed to pass signals up to 3.4 KHz with

minimum time delay and low phase distortion, a requirement for the proper

transmission of data signals.

Engineering Handbook

System Architecture

Remote Peripheral Equipment (RPE)

In a local operating environment, the peripheral equipment may be housed up to

15.2 m ft) from the common equipment. The RPE feature extends this range

approximately 112.6 km (70 miles) between local and remote facilities. This

extension is made possible by converting the multiplexed loop signals to a form

compatible with the commonly used T-l type digital transmission system.

Any medium conforming to DS- 1 format (1.544 Mbps) may be used to link local

and remote sites, including digital microwave radio and fiber optic transmission

systems.

Allocation of circuit-switched bandwidth may also be made on a network loop basis

to Primary Rate Access or Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) circuits. These

optional services are based on the standard T-l format (DS-1 24 channel) used in

digital transmission networks.

The PRA offers twenty-three 64-Kbps B channels and one D channel; it connects

to ISDN nodes (such as interexchange carriers, local exchange carriers) or

private network facilities (such as or host computers)

The DTI allows for the replacement of 24 conventional analog trunks by a single

1 digital link. Each of 24 channels provides up to 56 Kbps for voice and

synchronous data transmission, or up to 19.2 Kbps for asynchronous data.

Network/peripheral configuration

The allocation of peripheral equipment to the network loop determines the traffic

handling capability of the switching network. The lower the number of

terminations, the higher the loop traffic capacity. The quantity and type of terminal

assignments are allocated to optimize the traffic handling capabilities of the

switching network.

A universal PE bus structure permits any mix of PE card types to be located in a PE

module. Provisioning of PE cards and their associated density (number of ports)

determines the network loop to PE module configuration. Complete modularity

permits voice and data modules to be segregated so that the specific traffic patterns

of one may be met without impeding the other.

Figure 4-2 shows the arrangement between the network peripheral equipment.

Engineering Handbook

Existing Meridian SL-1 Hardware

QPC574

Meridian 1 Hardware

120 IS

16 DS-30X 2.56 Trk

card I

120 TS

2.56 10

21A and 21 Only)

system

Trk Card

Digital Line Card

System Architecture 4-13

Enhanced

network

configurations

For peripheral equipment housed in modules, network capacity may

allocated in single loop mode and dual loop mode. In single loop mode, one

peripheral equipment module is connected to one network loop, yielding a

maximum concentration of 160 terminations to 30 time slots. In dual loop mode,

half of the PE cards in a module use one loop, and the other half use another loop,

yielding two maximum concentrations of 80 terminations to 30 time slots.

Engineering Handbook

4-14 System Architecture

Figure 4-3

Single and dual loop configurations

PE OR SHELF

Two Network Loops

Connected To One

PE Shelf Containing

Single, Double, or

Quad Density PE

Circuit Packs

PE OR SHELF

QPC659 BFR

Operation

PE OR SHELF

QPC659 BFR

Circuit Pack

Set For Single

Operation

One Network Loop

Connected To Two

Shelves Containing

Single, Double, or Quad

Density PE Circuit Packs

QPC414

ENET

Circuit

Pack

OR SHELF

Network Loop

Operation

PE OR SHELF

QPC659 BFR

-- Lpy Circuit Pack

Set For Dual

Loop Circuits

Operation

PE OR SHELF

Combined

Single And Dual

Loop Connections

To Three PE Shelves

Containing Single Or

Double Density PE

Circuit Packs

Engineering Handbook

System Architecture

Superloop network configurations

The Superloop Network card combines four regular network loops to make 120

timeslots available to PE cards housed in Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Modules.

This increased bandwidth and larger pool of timeslots increases the network traffic

capacity by 25% for each 120 bundle. The Intelligent PE Module

is divided into segments of 4 card slots. These segments are numbered O-3.

Segment 0 consists of PE slots O-3, segment 1 consists of card slots 4-7, segment 2

consists of card slots 8-11, and segment 3 consists of card slots 12-15.

A superloop may be assigned from one to eight Intelligent PE segments. A number

of different superloop to segment configurations are possible. The configuration

chosen depends upon system traffic requirements and the specific PE cards used.

Figures 4-4 through 4-9 illustrate different superloop-to-segment configurations.

Note that the TN-to-timeslot concentration figures provided are nominal, and may

vary from segment to segment (see Figure 4-4).

Engineering Handbook

4-16 System Architecture

Figure 4-4

Intelligent Peripheral Module segmentation

Segment 0 Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3

Line Cards: Trunk Cards:

Digital Line Card 16 to 32 Universal Trunk Card 8

Analog Line Card 16 E&M Trunk Card 4

Message Waiting Line Card 16

TN density:

Per se ment 16 to 128

Per

module 64 to 512

Maximum TN density assumes all slots equipped with Digital Line Cards with 16 voice and 16 data

provisioned. Typical mix of line and trunk cards yields a nominal density of 64 per segment, 256 per IPE module.

Engineering Handbook

System Architecture

One segment per superloop

In this configuration, 1 segment is assigned

one superloop (see Figure 4-5). In

instances where the segment is populated with Digital Line Cards with

all 16 voice and all 16 data provisioned, the one segment per superloop

configuration provides a virtual non-blocking (120 to 128

environment (see Figure 4-4). Four Superloop Network cards and one

Controller-4 card are used to implement a one segment per superloop

configuration.

Figure

4-5

One segment per superloop configuration

Segment

Segment 2 Segment

0 Slot 3 Slot 6controller 12 14

Network Network Card

Network Card Network Card

Engineering Handbook

4-18 System Architecture

Two segments per superloop

In this configuration, 2 segments are assigned to one superloop (see Figure 4-6). In

instances where the segment is populated with Digital Line Cards with

no data enabled, Analog Line Cards, Waiting

Line Cards, or or Trunk cards, the two segment per

superloop configuration will provide a virtual non-blocking (120 timeslots to 32-

128 environment (see Figure 4-4). For instances where half of the data

on Digital Line Cards are enabled, this configuration still provides a

low concentration of to timeslots (120 timeslots to 196 and a very low

probability of blocking. Two Superloop Network cards and one

Controller-2 card are used to implement a two segment per superloop

configuration.

Figure 4-6

Two segments per superloop configuration

Segment 0 Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3

Engineering Handbook

System Architecture 4-19

Four segments per superloop

In this configuration, 4 segments are assigned to one superloop (see Figure 4-7). In

instances where the segment is populated with Line Cards,

Analog Line Cards, Message Waiting Line Cards, or

or Trunk cards, the 4 segment per superloop configuration

will provide a medium concentration (120 timeslots to 64-256 environment

(see Figure 4-4).

In instances where half of the data on Digital

Line Cards are enabled, this configuration provides a concehtration of 120 timeslots

to 384 One Superloop Network card and one

Controller-2 card are used to implement a four segment per superloop configuration.

Figure 4-7

our segments per superloop configuration

Segment 1

Segment 2 Segment 3

Segment 0

Card

Engineering Handbook

System Architecture

Eight segments per superloop

In this configuration, 8 segments are assigned to one superloop (see Figure 4-8). In

instances where the segment is populated with Digital Line Cards,

Analog Line Cards, Message Waiting Line Cards, or

or Trunk cards, the 8 segment per superloop configuration

will provide a high concentration (120 timeslots to 128-512 environment (see

Figure 4-4).

In instances where half of the data on Digital Line

Cards are enabled, this configuration provides a concentration of 120 timeslots to

768 One Superloop Network card and two

Controller-2 cards are used to implement an eight segment per superloop

configuration.

Engineering Handbook

System Architecture 4-21

Figure 4-8

Eight segments per superloop configuration

Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3

Segment 0

Segment

Segment 0

Segment 2

Engineering Handbook

4-22 System Architecture

One segment per segments per superloop

In this configuration, one segment is assigned to one superloop and an additional

three segments are assigned to another superloop (see Figure 4-9). This

configuration provides a virtual non blocking environment for the single segment

served by the first superloop and a medium concentration of to timeslots for the

three segments assigned to the additional superloop, as described in the preceding

examples. Two Superloop Network cards and one

Controller-2 card are used to implement a one and three segment per superloop

configuration.

Figure 4-9

One segment per segments per superloop configuration

Serves segment 0 Serves segments l-3

Engineering Handbook

System Architecture 4-23

Two segments per segments per superloop

In this configuration, 2 segments are assigned to one superloop and an additional 6

segments are assigned to another Figure 4-10). This configuration

provides a virtual non blocking environment for the two segments served by the

first superloop (or a very low concentration of to timeslots when some data

are enabled) and a medium concentration of to timeslots for the three

segments assigned to the additional superloop, as described in the preceding

examples. Two Superloop Network cards and two

Controller-2 cards are used to implement a one and three segment per superloop

configuration.

Engineering Handbook

4-24 System Architecture

Figure 4-10

Two segments per segments per superloop configuration

Segment 0 Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3

, I‘

Engineering Handbook

System Architecture 4-25

Power equipment

Meridian systems feature a modular power distribution architecture which

parallels the modular design concept of the Universal Equipment Module. Meridian

1 power systems provide the following features:

AC-powered and DC-powered System Options, providing flexibility to meet a

wide range of customer requirements

A distributed, modular power architecture, with power supplies located in each

Module, rather than in separate, centralized power shelves

All DC systems are available as complete systems, with rectifiers provided by

Northern Telecom, or can be equipped for’customer-provided external power

A new System Monitor has been designed to provide enhanced power, cooling,

and general system monitoring capabilities. This new System Monitor

interfaces to the CPU via a Serial Data Interface card, for intelligent error and

status reporting

Maintenance messages that indicate the location of power faults and status

down to the specific column and module

Equipment modules that are truly universal, in terms of power and cooling.

Meridian 1 systems are designed to eliminate power and thermal limitations;

any card can go in any slot, and all modules can be filled to capacity with any

logically valid combination of cards, with virtually

engineering rules

A universal quick-connect power wiring harness is used to distribute input

voltages and monitor signals to power supplies located in each Module

An advanced cooling system which employs forced air impellers. The velocity

of the impellers is automatically adjusted to meet the cooling requirements of

the system

Fuses are eliminated, as the system exclusively uses circuit breakers for input

power protection

Modular backup capabilities

Though the AC and DC systems have, within the modules, different internal power

components, the internal architecture and distribution methods are very similar.

AC and DC systems differ primarily in the power components external to the UEM.

See Figures 4-10 and 4-l 1 for block diagrams of the AC and DC powering schemes.

As shown in Figure 4-11, AC-powered systems require absolutely no external

power components or rectifiers at all, and can plug directly into the commercial AC

(utility) power. If reserve power is required with an AC system, an Uninterruptible

Power Supply (UPS), along with its associated batteries (either internal or external

to the unit), is installed in series with the main commercial feed.

Thus while AC systems especially well-suited for applications that do not

require reserve power, they are also recommended for small to medium sized

systems (Option 21 through 61) that do require reserve power, with backup times

ranging from 15 minutes up to 8 hours. In addition even AC systems long-term

backup requirements can benefit from a UPS with short-term backup, as the UPS

4-26 System Architecture

typically provides power conditioning during normal operation, as well as reserve

power during short outages or blowouts.

As shown in figure 4-12, AC-powered systems always require external rectifiers to

convert the commercial AC power into the standard DC for distribution within

the system. Batteries are generally present-in DC systems, as the traditional

telecommunications powering method is for the rectifiers to continuously charge a

bank of batteries, while the system power rails “float” in parallel on the battery

voltage. However, batteries are only required if reserve power is needed.

Also shown in Figure 12 is a junction box, which is sometimes used if the

distance from the rectifiers to the system is greater than approximately 50’. See

NTP Power Engineering, for detailed guidelines.

summary, all System Options, in all sizes, are available in both AC-powered and

DC-powered choice of which powering scheme to use is determined

primarily by reserve power requirements and preferences, and by existing power

equipment at the installation site.

Figure 1

AC Power external components

Inverter

input

AC POWERED SYSTEM

(with reserve power Required

Optional

System Architecture 4-27

Figure 4-12

DC Power external components

inp

DC POWERED SYSTEM

(with reserve power) Required

optional

Product description

Chapter 5: Product description

Contents

Introduction

Universal Equipment Modules

Meridian 1 System Options

Module Descriptions

CPU module

CPU/Network module

Network module

Common/Peripheral Equipment module

Intelligent Peripheral Equipment module

Peripheral Equipment Module

Intergroup Module

Meridian Mail Module

Miscellaneous Equipment

Circuit Cards

Cabling Description

Terminal equipment

Power Equipment

5-l

5-3

5-5

5-14

5-16

5-18

5-21

5-24

5-26

5-30

5-31

5-33

5-38

5-49

5-50

5-53

5-60

Introduction

The purpose of this section is to provide

description of the Meridian 1 product

line. This information does not replace the Northern Telecom Publications

For a list of the available please refer to the index

Figure

lent modules

Product description 5-3

Universal Equipment Modules

The Meridian 1 System is comprised of Universal Equipment Modules

each containing everything needed (card cage assembly, power supply, I/O cabling,

etc) to support a specific system function. These are assembled up to four

high on a pedestal, to form a column. The pedestal contains a central Power

Distribution Unit cooling fans, air filters, and a System Monitor circuit. At

the top of each column is a Top Cap, which consists of two air exhaust grilles and a

thermal sensor assembly that works in conjunction with the System Monitor.

Systems are comprised of one or more columns.

Each module is available in both AC and DC versions, to support the AC- and

powered System Options. All functional cards and cardcages are identical,

however; the only difference in the modules is the power distribution and the type

of power supply or converter used.

The different modules and their base product codes are listed below:

CPU module

CPU/Network module

Network Equipment module

Common/Peripheral Equipment module

Intelligent Peripheral Equipment module

Peripheral Equipment module

Remote Peripheral Equipment Carrier module

module

Meridian Mail module

The Universal Equipment Modules are constructed of die cast aluminum, providing

strength and durability. For ease of access these new modules feature removable

front and rear panels . All cable routing between the module and the Main

Distribution Frame is handled through the rear of the module. Cable exit

can occur at the top, to access overhead cable racks, or at the bottom to take

advantage of raised floors.

Universal Equipment Modules are assembled on a pedestal, that provides a central

Power Distribution Unit, cooling units and system monitoring functions. The

pedestal can be equipped with either leveling feet or casters. Modules are shipped

three high on a pedestal. Modules are assembled in columns to maximize floor

space; Adjacent modules require Kits to maintain EM1

integrity.

Each of these Universal Equipment Modules is available in AC or DC power

versions, except for the module which does not require a power card.

Having two power options gives customersthe flexibility to choose the optimal

configuration to meet their business needs.

5-4 Product description

Figure

Meridian 1 Packaging Elements

Universal Equipment

-Pedestal 2 Column

Universal Equipment

Module

Product description

Meridian 1 System Options

The Meridian 1 is available in several options. The use of the Universal Equipment

Modules allows for seamless growth from one option to another option by adding or

replacing Universal Equipment Modules or card cages. The options are selected

depending upon the application, line size, customer requirements. The

options are listed below with a brief description of each:

Meridian 1 System Option 21A (Single CPU-l module only)

Meridian 1 System Option 21 (Single CPU)

Meridian 1 System Option 51 (Single CPU, Half Network Group)

Meridian 1 System Option 61 (Dual CPU, Full Network Group)

Meridian 1 System Option 71 (Dual CPU, Multiple Network Groups)

Meridian 1 System Option

The Meridian 1 System Option 21A is a special version of the Sysytem Option 21,

with its power distribution, monitoring and cooling optimized for single-module

operation. the option 21A utilizes the standard Common/Peripheral Equipment

Module, but with a different System Monitor, Pedestal, and Top Cap.

Figure 5-3 shows a typical system configuration.

Figure 5-3

System

Option 21A

Module

5-6 Product description

The following specifications apply to System Option 21A:

Power AC only

Typical Number of Ports 160

Maximum Number of Ports 32 0

Maximum Number of Modules

AC Input Voltage 208 V ac

Number of

Number of Network Loops * 6 or 10 Loops plus

two service loops

Number of Eight DTMF channels

Cooling Fan in Top Cap

Memory 768K

Data Storage Floppy Disk Unit

Software Generic 1011

Hardware Features No Power Distribution Unit Contains

System Monitor

Note:

expand Option 21A to Option 21, it is necessary to replace

several of the power

distribution and cooling elements in the pedestal and top cap, as well as upgrading the

system monitor.

Meridian 1 System Option 21

The Meridian 1 System Option 21 is a single CPU system, with error

memory, based on the Common/Peripheral Equipment Module. This

module contains: 3 CPU-type slots for CPU, Memory/Peripheral and

Floppy Disk Interface Cards; 6 Superloop Network slots plus a combination

Superloop card serving the resident Intelligent Peripheral Equipment

slots; and 10 resident IPE card slots.

A card is generally equipped in one of the Superloop Network

slots, using 2 of the 4 loops available, so the total network capacity for voice/data

traffic is 1 Superloop for the 10 resident IPE slots plus additional standard ENET

loops for PE expansion (or any suitable combination of superloops).

The System Option 21 can use the standard Pedestal, with power distribution and

cooling for up to 4 modules per column, or a 2-module pedestal with cooling fans

optimized for 1 or 2 module system operation.

Figure 5-4 shows a typical system configuration.

Product description 5-7

Figure 5-4

System Option 21

5-8 Product description

The following specifications apply to System Option 21:

Power

Maximum Number of Ports

Input Voltage

Number of

Number of Network Loops

Cooling

Memory

Storage Media

Software Generic

Hardware Features

AC or DC

800

208 V ac or -48 V

6 Superloops or 10 ENET Loops plus

two service loops

Fan Impellers in pedestal

768K

Floppy Disk Unit

1011

Standard Power Distribution Unit

Contains System Monitor

Product description 5-9

Meridian 1 System Option 51

The Meridian 1 System Option 5 1 is a single CPU system with parity-protected

memory, plus a half network group of switching capacity, and is based on a single

CPU/Network Module.

Figure shows a typical system configuration.

Figure

System Option 51

Product description

The following specifications apply to System Option 5 1:

Power AC or DC

Maximum Number of Ports 1000.

Input Voltage V ac or -48 V dc

Number of

Number of Network Loops 1 6

Cooling Fan Impellers in pedestal

Memory 768K

Storage Media Floppy Disk Unit or Multi Disk Unit

Software Generic 1111

Hardware Features One Half Network Group, Standard

Power Distribution Unit Contains

System Monitor

Meridian 1 System Option 61

The Meridian 1 System Option 61 is a dual CPU system with “hot standby”

processing capability and fully redundant memory, plus a full network group of

switching capacity. The System Option 61 uses two CPU/Network Modules as its

common equipment base.

Figure 5-6 shows a typical configuration.

Product description 5-I 1

Figure 5-6

System Option 61

CPU/NET

Module

Optional

Module

CPU/NET Optional

Module Module

5-12 Product description

Specifications for System Option 61:

Power

Maximum Number of Ports

Input Voltage

Number of

Number of Network Loops

Cooling

Memory

Storage Media

Software Generic

Hardware Features

AC or DC

2000

208 V ac or -48 V dc

Fan Impellers in pedestal

768K

Floppy Disk Unit or Multi Disk Unit

1111 RIs.15

One Network Group, Standard Power

Distribution Unit and Contains System

Monitor

Product description 5-13

Meridian 1 System Option 71

The Meridian 1 System Option 71 is a dual CPU system with “hot standby”

processing capabilities and fully redundant memory, plus up to 5 full network

groups of switching capacity. The System Option 71 uses for its common

equipment base two CPU Modules (in columns), two or more Network

Modules, and an Intergroup Module for space switching between network groups.

Figure 5-7 shows a typical system configuration.

Figure 5-7

System Option 71

5-14 Product description

Specifications for System Option 71:

Power

Maximum Number of Ports

Input Voltage

Number of

Number of Network Loops

Cooling

Memory

Storage Media

Software Generic

Hardware Features

AC or DC

10,000

208 V ac or -48 V dc

160

Fan Impellers in pedestal

1.5 Mbyte

Floppy Disk Unit or Multi Disk Unit

1211

Up to five Network Groups, Standard

Power Distribution Unit and Contains

System Monitor

Module descriptions

CPU module

The CPU module uses the CPU and Memory cards currently housed in the

Meridian SL-1 XT shelf to provide system control and storage of data

and programs for the Meridian 1 System Option 71. Each CPU module

houses one CPU; two are required for the Meridian 1 System Option 71.

For configuration flexibility the CPU module is available with an AC

power supply option or a DC power supply option. These power supplies provide

the voltages to operate the circuit cards located in the Modules.

The module

designed to accommodate AC power supplies. One

Common Equipment Power Supply AC is required for the

module.

The module is designed to accommodate DC power supplies. One

Common Equipment Power Supply DC is required for the

module.

Configuration guidelines:

CPU Modules are located side by side on the level of adjacent

columns.

Product description 5-15

Figure 5-8

CPU module with circuit cards

CPU Module

The CPU module contains 17 card slots which support the following:

slots l-2 : Memory

slot 3: CMA

slot 4: CPU Interface

slot 5: CPU Function

slot 6:

slot 7: or FDI

slots 8-12: Segmented Bus Extender (SBE)

slot 14: Clock Controller

slot 15-17: or Digital Trunk Interface Rate

Interface (PRI)

Product description

CPU/Network module

The CPU/Network module uses the CPU and Memory circuit cards

housed in the Meridian SL-1 NT and RT shelves to provide system

control and storage of data and programs for Meridian 1 System Option 5 1 and 61.

Each module houses one CPU and up to 16 network loops, with one

CPU/Net module used in System Options 51 and two used in System

Option 6

For configuration flexibility the CPU/Network module is available with an

AC power supply option or a DC power supply option. These-power supplies

provide the voltages to operate the circuit cards located in the Modules.

The module is designed to accommodate one Common Equipment

Power Supply AC

The module is designed to accommodate one Common Equipment

Power Supply DC 1 AB).

guidelines:

For a half group, single CPU system, one module is required

(Meridian 1 System Option 51).

For a full group, dual CPU system, two Modules are required

(Meridian 1 System Option 61).

These Modules must be located on top of each other in the same

column.

Product

Figure 5-9

CPU/Network module with circuit cards

CPU/Network Module

Module

CE Sup

Slots 1 8

Superloop Network

Network QPC414 or

or, SDI,

or PRI, or DTI

The contains 17 card slots which support the following:

slots 1 8: network cards*

slot 9 : Clock Controller or Serial Data Interface (SDI)

slot 10: Peripheral Signaling

slot 11: 3-Port Extender (3PE)

slot 12: Mass Storage Interface Disk Interface

slot 13:

slot 14: CPU Function

slot 15: CPU Interface

slot 16: Changeover Memory Arbitrator (CMA)

slot 17: Memory

slot 18:

Network-type include the Superloop Network Card, the QPC 414 Network Card, and

SDI, cards.

5-18 Product description

Network module

The Network module contains the network shelf backplane from the

Meridian SL-1 Network Enhanced systems but is housed in a module configuration.

This module will support the current Meridian SL- 1 network circuit cards along

with two new network circuit cards:

Network card

Conference/Tone and Digit Switch card

The new Network card will interface to four network loops

(120 time slots) and may also be used in the existing Meridian SL-1 Enhanced

Network shelves.

The Conference (QPC444) and the Tone and Digit Switch circuit cards

may be replaced by the card which will require two

loops (one card slot), instead of the four loops (two card slots) currently required

with the Meridian SL- 1 systems.

For configuration flexibility the Network module is available with an AC

power option or a DC power option. These power supplies provide the voltages to

operate the circuit cards located in the modules.

The Network module is designed to accommodate the one Common

Equipment Power Supply AC

The module is designed to accommodate one Common Equipment

Power Supply DC

The Network module will permit eight QPC414 cards or four

Network cards, or any combination for a total of 16

network loops per module. Usually 14 voice/data loops are available

when one Conference/Tone and Digit Switch card is configured in the

module.

Card slots 5 12 are used for the network cards. The Network card will

always use four loops (120 time slots) and will always begin with an even numbered

loop that is a multiple of four (Example 12, etc...). See

configuration guidelines for Network and ENET card placement rules.

Product description 5-19

Each module will provide 16 ENET loops or four Superloops, one half a

network group. Two modules are required for a complete network group

of 32 loops.

The Network modules are designated as:

*Group 0 module

Group 0

module

*Group

module

Group

module

(continued)

*Group 2 module

Group

module

*Group

module

Group

module

*Group 4 module

Group 4 module

The Group and module numbers are determined by the switch settings on the Three

Port Extender (3PE) card.

The module may be utilized to support Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)

and/or a Primary Rate Interface card.

In this configuration one common

equipment power supply is required to power up to six cards.

Configuration guidelines:

The Modules do not have a left and right hand version as with the

Meridian SL-1 network shelves. In a full network group configuration, the

Modules must always be one on top of the other.

The terminal number O-O-O-O is software reserved and may not be used for any

PE terminal numbers. To avoid using this TN it is recommended you assign

loop 0 as a Conference loop and loop 1 for a TDS loop (card slot 5).

A maximum of 10 Modules (5 network groups) (System Option 71

A maximum of 6 cards per

When the Superloop Network card is used, the card slot to the left or right may

not be used for other network cards or Superloop Network). The empty

card slots may house cards, if two card slots are adjacent to each other,

or other type cards that do not require network addressing etc...).

All cabling will exit the module from the rear, via I/O panels.

All faceplate cables must go to the every module and terminate on I/O

panels, when exiting module.

The contains 15 card slots which support the following:

slots 1: 3PE

slots 2-3: Switch (IGS) 1, or

slot 4: Peripheral Signaling

slots 5-12: Network Cards

slot 13: or

5-20 Product description

(continued)

slot 14:

slot 15: not used

The module I/O Panels have functions:

24 pin J slot connectors are for Network to Peripheral Equipment

connections when the Network and PE are not in a contiguous row.

D25 connector J slots are connections.

connector J slots are for connections.

Figure 5-l 0

Network module with circuit cards

Network Module

Net

Product description 5-21

Common/Peripheral Equipment module

The module is utilized to house common, network and peripheral

equipment circuit cards for the Meridian 1 System Options 21A and 21.

The module is available in-two versions, AC or DC power. These

power supplies provide the voltages to operate the circuit cards located in the

modules.

The module requires one

Common Equipment Power Supply AC

The module requires one

Common Equipment Power Supply DC

This module is divided into two sections:

Common Equipment (CE)

Peripheral Equipment (PE)

There are 10 Common Equipment (CE) and 10 Peripheral Equipment card

slots. The CPU functions are provided by card slots l-3. The Network Equipment

functions are provided by card slots 3-10.

The CPU circuit card used in the Meridian system, is installed

in CE card slot 2.

The module uses two specially designed circuit cards for Meridian

System Options 21A and 2 1 only.

Memory/Signaling card

card

The circuit card installed in CE card slot 3 provides the

peripheral signaling functions in addition to providing the memory and

miscellaneous CPU equipment functions.

The circuit card will provide the Controller card functions

for the Intelligent PE cards installed in the module, along with a Superloop

Network and Receiver functions, for Meridian 1 System Options

The card is installed in CE card slot 10. This card also provides a

Superloop for all ten Intelligent PE cards, and eight DTR circuits. Superloop

networks and/or (QPC414) are used whenexpansion is required

by adding more PE Modules.

For uniformity, it is recommended that Disk Interface circuit card be

installed in CE card slot 1. This card provides the CPU interface to the Mass

Storage Device. A Floppy Disk Unit may replace the and Mass storage device

in some systems. This FDU may be installed in CE card slots 7-9 or in PE card

slots 10.

5-22 Product description

CE card slots 4-9 provide an interface to twelve loops when ENET circuit cards are

used, and 24 loops if Superloop Network circuit cards are used.

A new Conference/Tone and Digit Switch circuit card is used to provide

conference/tone and digit switch functions. The Conference/Tone and Digit Switch

circuit card may be installed in CE card slots 4-9 (preferably, use slot 4 for XCT).

This circuit card interfaces to two ENET loops on the backplane.

The module uses the new Intelligent Peripheral Equipment cards only, to

provide trunk and station interface in Meridian 1 System and 21.

Meridian 1 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment circuit cards may be installed in

card slots O-9.

Configuration guidelines:

The Receiver card is always assigned as virtual card slot 10.

Product description 5-23

Figure 1

module with circuit cards

Equipment Module

Digital Line, or Analog

Line, or Universal

Trunk, Trunk, or

Receiver

5-24 Product description

Intelligent Peripheral Equipment module

The Intelligent Peripheral Equipment module uses the new Meridian 1 Intelligent

Peripheral Equipment cards only and may be used with Meridian 1 System Options

With an upgrade assembly the Intelligent Peripheral Equipment

modules may be used with all existing Meridian SL-1 systems.

The Intelligent PE module is available in two versions, AC or DC power.

These power supplies provide the voltages to operate the circuit cards located in the

modules.

The module is designed to accommodate AC power supplies. One

Peripheral Equipment Power Supply AC is required for the

module along with one Ringing Generator AC AA) when

500 or 2500 sets are to be supported by the module.

The module is designed to accommodate DC power supplies. One

Peripheral Equipment Power Supply DC is required for the

module along with one Ringing Generator DC when

500 or 2500 sets are to be supported by the module.

The module may only be connected to a Superloop Network

circuit card. It houses one Controller card and up to 16

Intelligent Peripheral Equipment circuit cards. The card slots are numbered from 0

to 15, for a total of 16 PE card slots. The Intelligent PE module supports

16 PE circuit cards, giving a capacity of 256 Integrated Voice/Data (IVD) lines (512

although a typical configuration includes a mixture of Digital lines, Analog

lines, Trunks and Receiver (DTR) circuit cards.

All cable connections to the MDF are made in the rear of the module through an I/O

panel. To serve all 16 PE card slots, 12 PE cables are required to the MDF (three

per segment).

Configuration guidelines:

Only Intelligent Peripheral Equipment cards may be installed in the

Intelligent PE module.

The card slots are universal card slots.

The Intelligent PE module does not have any limitations or restrictions

on card placement.

Product description 5-25

Figure 5-l 2

Intelligent PE module with circuit cards

Slots 0 15 may be

Digital Line Cards

Line Cards.

Trunks,

Receiver

5-26 Product description

Peripheral Equipment module

The Peripheral Equipment module uses the PE circuit cards currently housed in PE

shelves for the Meridian SL-1 systems. It provides the interface to the system for

trunks and stations. The module-may only be connected to an ENET

(QPC414) circuit card and may be used 1 System Options

and the Meridian NT, RT, ST, N, and XN systems. It houses one

Peripheral Buffer circuit card (QPC659) and up to ten existing peripheral equipment

circuit cards.

For configuration flexibility the Peripheral Equipment module is available

with an AC power supply option or a DC power supply option. These power

supplies provide the voltages to operate the circuit cards located in the Modules.

The module is designed to accommodate AC power supplies. One

Peripheral Equipment Power Supply AC is required for the

module along with one Ringing Generator AC when

500 or 2500 sets are to be supported by the module.

The module is designed to accommodate DC power supplies. One

Peripheral Equipment Power Supply DC is required for the

module along with one Ringing Generator DC when

500 or 2500 sets are to be supported by the module.

All cable connections to the MDF are made in the rear of the module through an

I/O

panel. Seven PE cables are required to the MDF for all 10 card slots.

Configuration guidelines:

For cabling restraints and ease of expansion the PE module should

always be located as the top module in a column.

Only QPC414 Enhanced Network circuit cards may be connected to the

PE module.

The PE module is the only module that may be used to house PE cards

when used with the RPE Carrier module at the remote location.

When the Meridian Data Service ADM, ASIM RILC, or AILC are required,

the PE module must be used.

System Option 21A must be upgraded to Option 21 if an module is

added.

Product description

Figure 5-13

PE module with circuit cards

5-28 Product description

Remote Peripheral Equipment Carrier module

The RPE Carrier module is used to extend the Network to PE

interconnection distance between local and remote sites. It accommodates two

network loops.

For configuration flexibility the Remote Peripheral Equipment Carrier module is

available with an AC power option or a DC power option. These power supplies

provide the voltages to operate the circuit cards located in the modules

The RPE Carrier module is designed to accommodate AC power

supplies. One Common Equipment Power Supply AC is required for

the module.

The RPE Carrier module is designed to accommodate DC power

supplies. One Common Equipment DC is required for

the module.

Configuration guidelines:

Since each RPE Carrier module serves two network loops, the number of

modules required per system depends on the number of peripheral devices and

traffic requirements at the remote site.

The RPE backplane contains 12 card slots which support the following:

slot 1: DTI

slot 2: 1.5 Mb Converter

slot 3: 2 Mb Converter

slot 4: Carrier Interface

slot 5: Remote Peripheral

slot 6: Local Carrier Buffer

slot 7: Carrier Interface

slot 8: 2 Mb Converter

slot 9: 1.5 Mb Converter

slot 10: Carrier Maintenance

slots 11-12: DTI

Product description 5-29

Figure 5-l 4

RPE Carrier module with circuit cards

5-30 Product description

module

The module provides a path for of traffic between the

network groups in Meridian 1 System Option 7 1. Faceplate cables from Segmented

Bus Extender (SBE), System Clock and Inter-Group Switch circuit

cards are connected to the module. These faceplate cables are accessed

from the front of the module, not the rear.

The module does not require any power card for operation. Therefore it

module

Figure 5

module

IGS 1 IGS 1

IGSO

SCGO

J14 3

Configuration guidelines:

The module is always located as the top module of the column

containing CPU 1 for the Meridian 1 System Option

The Terminating Plug should be installed in the unused J slot

connectors.

Product description 5-31

Meridian Mail module

The Meridian Mail module uses the circuit cards housed in the Meridian

Mail Option for the Meridian SL- 1 systems. The Meridian Mail module

may only be connected to an ENET circuit card. and may be used in

Meridian 1 System Options and the Meridian NT, RT, ST,

N, and XN systems.

For configuration flexibility the Meridian Mail module

available with an

AC power supply option or a DC power supply option. These power supplies

provide the voltages to operate the circuit cards located in the Modules.

The Meridian Mail module is designed to accommodate AC power

supplies. Two Common Equipment Power Supplies AC are required

for the Meridian Mail module.

The Meridian Mail module is designed to accommodate DC power

supplies. Two Common Equipment Power Supplies AC are required

for the Meridian Mail module.

Configuration guidelines:

Meridian 1 System Option 21A must be upgraded to Meridian 1 System Option

21 when the Meridian Mail module is equipped.

5-32 Product description

MERIDIAN MAIL MODULE

CKT

BRKR

HARD DISK

MODULE

Figure 6

Meridian Mail module with circuit cards

Circuit breakers

TAPE DRIVE

HARD DISK

MODULE

Availability

Equipment

Hard Disk Modules: (multiple

Processor

RS-232

(Meridian 1

Enhanced Single Signal

Memory Computer Board

(single (Meridian

or DMS-100)

Product description 5-33

Miscellaneous equipment

Pedestal

The pedestal is a base unit made of die-cast construction and houses

the power distribution unit, system monitor, blower unit, and fan unit connector.

The pedestal is approximately 3 1.5 inches wide by 25.50 inches deep by 10 inches

high and weighs 30 lbs empty. Leveling feet are provided for up to four tiers, while

a caster option is provided for up to two tiers. Input power for the system is brought

into and distributed by the pedestal. A Power Distribution Unit located in the

pedestal contains an filter and one 30 amp circuit breaker.

One pedestal distributes the input power for one column. Also located in the

pedestal are two forced air impellers and a reusable dust filter. The impellers are

protected by two 1 amp circuit breakers.

Configuration guidelines:

One pedestal required per column.

System Monitor

The System Monitor card controls and monitors the status of all

power-related hardware and functions, such as column thermal status, power supply

operation, blower operation, power fail transfer, circuit breakers, external rectifiers,

batteries, and Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) systems. The same system

monitor is used in both AC and DC systems.

One System Monitor is installed in the pedestal of each column. The System

Monitor located in the column containing the Module, acts as the master

system monitor while the monitors located in other columns act as slaves.

master will poll the slaves and report their status to the CPU. The master System

Monitor is connected to the CPU by means of an port located on an

card. The slave System Monitors are connected in a daisy chain fashion to the

master by means of an 8-conductor RI type connector and are numbered O-63.

Any power message reported to the CPU by the System Monitor is output to the

maintenance TTY. All power messages include the following information: status

or fault indication, hardware type, column number, Module number, and Power

Supply unit number.

5-34 Product description

Figure 5-17

System Monitor location

UNIVERSAL

MODULE

POWER

DISTRIBUTION

UNIT

EXTENDED

SYSTEM

MONITOR 206061

telemanuals.com

Product description 5-35

Blank faceplates

Blank faceplates may be inserted into any unoccupied shelf slot position, though,

except for power slots, they are not required for cooling. Three different sizes are

available:

0.875 in. for card slots.

1 in. for common equipment card slots.

2 in. for dual common equipment card slots, and for the Ringing

Generator slot in the and PE modules if the Ringing Generator is not

equipped.

Top cap

The top cap is mounted on the top module of each column. It provides additional

EM1 shielding, air exits, and I/O cable exits.

The top cap is approximately 31.5 inches wide by 22 inches deep by 3 inches high

and weighs 8 lbs. It consists of a front and a rear air exhaust grills, each secured by

two clips underneath the edge of the grill.

Three versions of the top cap are available:

AC systems

DC systems

Meridian 1 System Option 21A only

telemanuals.com

5-36 Product description

Expansion kit

The Expansion kit bolts modules together for side-by-side expansion when in a

contiguous row. The Expansion kits maintain shielding against as

well

as provide additional cable routing space in.multi-column systems. See Figures

and 5-19 below.

Figure 5-l 8

Expansion kit

Expansion Kits

telemanuals.com

Product description 5-37

Figure 5-l 9

Expansion kit internal view

Expansion Kit

telemanuals.com

5-38 Product description

Circuit cards

System functions in the Meridian 1 are performed by components mounted on

circuit cards. These circuit cards are specific as to their function but do share some

common features. Circuit cards are 12.5 inches by 10 inches and are marked with

the part number on each faceplate. Some circuit cards have optional switches

located on the card itself, and if this is the case, the faceplate will be marked with a

graphic symbol to indicate their presence. Other faceplate features may include

status Enable/Disable switches and cable connectors. All circuit cards

include two locking devices, one at the top and one at the bottom to hold the circuit

card in the module.

Meridian 1 includes the addition of several new circuit cards which may be installed

in the Universal Equipment Modules. These circuit cards are able to transmit their

status, identity, and vintage to the CPU. This greatly improves remote maintenance

capabilities and inventory control. The Meridian 1 also supports several existing

circuit cards.

The following is a list of some of the most commonly used existing

circuit cards and the new circuitcards supported by Meridian 1:

Table

Meridian 1 circuit cards

PEC code Description PEC code Description

Segmented Bus Remote Peripheral

Extender Switch

Primary Rate Interface

2M Baud Converter

Fbppy Disk interface

Carrier Maintenance

D-Channel Handler QPC71 F DX Signaling

Baud Converter

Carrier Interface

Memory OPX Line Card

B Changeover and Release Link Trunk Card

Memory Arbitrator

Enhanced Network Console Monitor

(supervisory)

QPC471 C Controller Tone Detector

CPU Function Asynchronous Interface

QPC841 A 4 Port Serial Data

4 Data Line Card

lnt

Mass Storage Interface Loop Signaling Trunk

Card

telemanuals.com

Product description 5-39

Table 5-l

Meridian 1 circuit cards (continued)

PEC code Description PEC code Description

AC Controller-4

AD Controller-2

Digital Line Card

Superloop Network Card

Analog Message Waiting

Line Card

Universal Trunk Card E&M Trunk Card

Receiver Card

Conference/Tone and

Digit Switch

Memory/Signaling

System Monitor AA SDI Paddle Board

Mini System Monitor

Fbppy Disk Unit Multi Disk

CPU Interface Trunk

Card

Peripheral Signaling Bus Terminating Unit

Switch Integrated Services

Digital Line Card

Enhanced Serial Data 16 Port Line

Interface Card

CPU with

Dual Loop Buffer

QPC441 C 3 Port Extender RS-232 4 Port Interface

Line Card

Local Carrier Buffer 16 Port

Message Waking Line

Card

5-40 Product description

Meridian 1 new common equipment circuit cards

Floppy

Disk Unit

The Floppy Disk Unit is used to load the programs and office data into the

system memory. The FDU contains two floppy drives is controlled by

the QPC742 Floppy Disk Interface Each floppy d&e has a formatted

capacity of 1.44 MB.

The FDU occupies two adjacent card slots in the CPU, Network, or PE Module. It

is powered through the cable connecting it to the Floppy Disk Interface

Configuration guidelines:

One per system.

The FDU can be connected to a maximum of two

Multi Disk Unit

The Multi Disk Unit (MDU) is used to load the programs and office data into the

system memory. The MDU contains the following:

Two 3.5inch floppy drives which are connected to the SCSI interface through

the SCSI/floppy controller; each drive has a formatted capacity of 1.44 MB

A 3.5inch hard disk drive which has a built-in SCSI interface and requires a

minimum capacity of 20 MB

An SCSI/Floppy Controller

The MDU occupies three adjacent card slots in the CPU or Network Module and

requires and 12V from the module. The MDU is controlled by the QPC584

Mass Storage Interface. The MDU can be connected to a maximum of two

Configuration guidelines:

One per system.

Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Z-Port

The card is a paddle board that may be installed in the rear of a

and Module. The card is approximately 12 inches by 4.5 inches

and is similar in appearance to a BTU card. It provides an interface to the CPU for

up to two I/O devices.

The addressing, (0 15) is backwards compatible with the QPC841 card. The

addressing is set by address switches and the data rates are; 300,600,

4800 or 9600 bps. The data is transmitted and received as 8-bit serial data with no

parity.

Product description 5-41

The number of Serial Data Interface ports required in a system depends on the

software options selected by the customer. The following software options require

or QPC841 ports:

ACD package D (ACD-D)

Auxiliary Processor Link (APL)

Call Detail Recording (CDR) List

Call Detail Recording (CDR) Tape

Property Management System Interface

System Monitor

Configuration guidelines:

The card does not support the TELETYPE (20 ma current loop)

interface, or 110 baud rate.

It may only be installed in the rear of a or module.

The address of the cannot conflict with existing addresses.

The valid or QPC841 ports are; 0 15.

Two maximum per module.

Three maximum per module. If more than seven ports are required

use the QPC841 card.

Superloop Network card

The Superloop Network card employees a new DS30 interface which reduces the

number of wires required to interface to the Intelligent PE Modules. This

new interface is a proprietary DS-30 based format known as DS-30Y and allows the

connection of four 2.56 Mbps loops. The Superloop Network card is connected by

a cable to the new Controller card located in the Intelligent PE

Modules, and may be connected to one or two Controller cards over

separate cables.

Provided on the card is a Motorola 68010 microprocessor which is used to control

the card, and in addition provides new maintenance available on the

ENET card. It receives signaling messages directly from the CPU but will send

signaling messages to the CPU by means of the Peripheral Signaling card.

The Superloop Network card may be used in conjunction with the ENET card to

provide equivalent network switching functions in existing Meridian SL-1 ST, NT,

XT, or RT systems. It provides an interface to four loops on the network bus

instead of the two loop interface provided by the ENET card. The number of loops

served by a network shelf or Module remains the same however the Superloop

Network frees up additional network card slots which may be used for circuit cards

5-42 Product description

(continued)

that do not require access to the network bus (for example, Serial Data Interface

[SDI] or Digital Trunk Interface [DTI] cards). For example: When upgrading a

Meridian SL-1 to the new Intelligent Peripheral Equipment a Serial Data Interface

(SDI) card may occupy the card slot to the left or the right of the Superloop

Network card installed in a Meridian SL-1 enhanced network shelf.

A new overlay program (97) is added to allow the definition configuration of

the Superloop. New commands are added to existing maintenance diagnostics to

allow access to and control of the new maintenance functions provided by the

Superloop Network card.

Configuration guidelines:

Superloop Network cards may be used in existing Meridian SL-1 ST, RT, NT

and XT systems.

16 networks per enhanced network shelf or module.

When installed in an Network Module, the loop number will always

be an even number (for example and it does not matter if it is the

left or right hand card slot.

In the Network Module, the odd-numbered network card slots are

considered left hand and the even-numbered network card slots are right hand.

Conference/Tone and Digit Switch

The new card provides the functionality of the Tone and Digit

Switch and QPC444 Conference cards on one circuit card and occupies one

card slot on the network shelf backplane or module. One loop is assigned to the

conference function and one is assigned to the Tone and Digit and Switch functions.

This circuit card interfaces to two ENET loops on the backplane.

The card contains PROM

that provide 256 tones thus eliminating the

need for special international cards. These new tones may be defined by means of a

new overlay program (56) if the software package is equipped. The tone

choices are downloaded to the card upon initialization. If the FTC software package

is not equipped, then the system will automatically assign normal defaults.

Configuration guidelines:

The card may be installed in the following existing systems:

Meridian SL-1 ST, RT, NT, XT and Meridian 1 System Options

61 and 71.

Product description 5-43

Memory/Signaling card

The Memory/Signaling card may only be used in the Meridian 1 System Option

21A and 21. This card combines the functions of the memory, miscellaneous, and

peripheral signaling cards. These cards that were separate functions for the Meridian

SL-1 have been combined to reduce the footprint of the Meridian 1 System Option

21A and 21.

The memory features include 768K of RAM with error detection and correction.

The miscellaneous portion of the card provides the CPU interrupt function and fault

monitoring. The peripheral signaling features include: the signaling interface

between the CPU and the peripheral equipment, generation and distribution of

timing signals used by the networks for speech path switching.

Configuration guidelines:

Used only with the Module.

One Memory/Signaling card is required per Module and it

occupies card slot 3.

card

The card may only be used in the Meridian 1 System Option 21A

and 21. This card combines the functions of the Superloop Network, Controller

card and the Receiver cards to reduce the footprint of the Meridian 1

System Option 21A and 21.

The function of this card is the same as the Controller card,

Receiver card, and Superloop network card which were

described previously. The maintenance display function of the Controller

card is not provided.

Configuration guidelines:

The card is always assigned as 28.

One card is required per Module.

Use only with the Module in card slot 10.

8 DTR circuits assigned to virtual card slot 10 of IPE.

5-44 Product description

System Monitor

The System Monitor monitors the status of power-related hardware such as column

thermal status, power supplies, fan operation, power fail transfer, circuit breakers,

and One System Monitor is installed in the pedestal of each column. The

System Monitor, located in the column containing the Module, acts as the

master system monitor while the system monitors located in other columns act as

slaves. The master System Monitor will poll the slave System and report

their status to the CPU. The master System Monitor is connected to the CPU by

means of an RS-232C port located on an card. The slave System Monitors are

connected in a daisy chain fashion to the master System Monitor by means of an

conductor RJ type connector and are numbered O-63.

Any power message reported to the CPU by the System Monitor is output to the

maintenance TTY, and power messages include the following information:

hardware type, System Monitor number, Module number and Power Supply

number. A system alarm LED is located in the Top Cap of the column

affected.

Configuration guidelines:

The System Monitor is used in all systems except for the Meridian

1 System Option 21A.

System Monitor Option 21 A

The System Monitor Option 21A provides an interface to

communicate and monitor the Power Supply, the CPU, and the thermal

switches. In the event of failure, the System Monitor Option 21A is notified and

the appropriate alarm is set. A system alarm LED located below the top cap lights

to indicate CPU failure.

Configuration Guidelines:

The is used only in the Meridian 1 System Option 21A.

Product description 5-45

Intelligent Peripheral Equipment circuit cards

The Meridian 1 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment circuit cards have been reduced in

width to only inch. These new PE cards have the capability to send specific

card information to the CPU. When asked through a maintenance program, the

information may contain the PE card (PEC) code and the vintage of that card. This

will greatly aid in the inventory and maintenance of a Meridian 1 system.

The Meridian 1 Peripheral Equipment is connected to the Network equipment

through the Controller card for Intelligent Peripheral Equipment

Modules or the Peripheral Buffer for the Peripheral Equipment

Modules Controller circuit cards are used with Superloop

Network circuit cards, while Peripheral Buffer cards are used with ENET circuit

cards. The two circuit cards serve basically the same function, that is the

connection point for shelf/module to network communications. The

however does have some additional maintenance capabilities that the Peripheral

Buffer does not have, such as a maintenance status display on the faceplate.

Controller Card

The Controller card provides the primary interface and control functions between

the Network and up to 16 Meridian 1 Intelligent PE cards. It will switch

PCM voice and data from the DS-30X loops of the Network to the

30Y loops of the PE cards.

The card is installed in the IPE Module and interfaces to the

network card by means of a cable. The circuit card consists of a

mother/daughter assembly which is installed in a dedicated card slot marked

in the center of the IPE Module.

Located on the card is a Motorola 68010 microprocessor which is used for

control functions, message format conversions (DS-30X loop to DS-30Y loop), and

to perform new maintenance functions. A maintenance display located on the

faceplate of the card will indicate the status of the card. One

card is required per IPE Module. The may only be connected to

a Network card and cannot be installed in the IPE Module.

The is available in two configurations: Controller-2 (Cont-2) and

Controller-4 (Cont-4).

The Cont-2 allows the connection of up to two Network cards to a

single module, while the Cont-4 allows the connection of up to four Superloop

Network cards to a single module.

5-46 Product description

(Continued)

Once connected to the the Intelligent PE Module is divided into logical

segments. Each segment consists of four PE circuit card slots. These segments are

numbered O-3. Segment 0 consists of PE slots O-3, segment 1 consists of card slots

4-7, segment 2 consists of card slots 8-l 1, and segment 3 consists of card slots 12-

15.

One Superloop Network card maybe assigned from one to eight segments on one or

two Intelligent PE Modules. Several different to segment

arrangements are possible. The following figure shows possible Superloop

Network to Controller card configurations. The Superloop Network to Controller

card configuration chosen will depend upon system traffic requirements and

hardware usage.

Controller card configuration information in Overlay 97. This program

allows for the assignment of Controller card numbers (l-95) and the Controller card

location codes. Both of these parameters are used to identify the location of the

Controller card.

Configuration guidelines:

The Controller-4 card is used when you assign more than two Superloops per

module. high traffic conditions or Non-blocking requirements).

The Controller-2 card is used in all other configurations.

Digital Line Card

The Digital Line card may be installed in an IPE or

module only and interface up to 16 M2000 series or M3000 digital telephones.

provides 16 voice and 16 data ports which allows any set connected to transmit

voice and data simultaneously over one pair of wires.

Configuration guidelines:

One per 16 digital terminals.

Used only with the Intelligent PE Module or

Module.

Product description 5-47

Analog Line Cards

Analog Line

Analog Message Waiting Line Cards

The Analog Line Card and the Analog Message Waiting Line Cards may be

installed in and Modules only. Both the Analog Line Card and

the Analog Message Waiting Line Card interfaces up to sixteen 500 or 2500 type

sets and performs analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog conversion.

The Analog Message Waiting Line Card will additionally provide the interface to

the -150 V supply to light Message Waiting lamps located on the sets connected to

the card.

Configuration guidelines:

Used only with the Intelligent PE Module or Module.

Universal Trunk Card

The Universal Trunk card may be installed in a or Module only

and provides the interface to the following types of trunk circuits:

Central Office (CO, FAX, WATS, Japan CO) loop or ground start

2-way TIE trunk loop dial repeating or automatic incoming dial

Direct Inward Dial (DID)

Paging Equipment

Recorded Announcement equipment

. Music Equipment

The card interfaces up to eight of the previously mentioned trunk

circuits. It will also support A- law and operations as defined in the system’s

configuration record. New prompts have been added to Overlay Programs 14 and

16 to allow the configuration of the Universal Trunk card.

5-48 Product description

(Continued)

Configuration guidelines:

One required for every eight of the above listed trunk types.

Used only with the Intelligent PE Module or Module.

E&M Trunk Card

The E&M Trunk card interfaces up to four trunk circuits. It will also support A-law

and p-law operations as defined in the system’s configuration record. New prompts

are added to Overlay Programs 14 and 16 which will allow the configuration of the

Universal Trunk card.

The E&M Trunk card may only be installed in the Intelligent Peripheral

Equipment Module or the Common/Peripheral Equipment Module and

provides the interface to the following types of circuits:

4-wire DX

Paging Equipment

Dictation Equipment

Configuration guidelines:

Used only with the Intelligent PE Module or Module.

Receiver

The Receiver card provides a total of eight channels of Dual Tone Multi

Frequency (DTMF) or Multi Frequency detection and it may be installed in

any card slot in an or Module. An overlay program is used to

determine the function of the card.

Configuration guidelines:

Required when 2500 sets, DID trunks, Digitone-Tie trunks or DISA

used.

Used only with the Intelligent PE Module or Module.

Product description 5-49

Cabling

The cables are differentiated by the cabling method used. Two types of cables are

available Intra-module and Inter-module.

Intra-module cables are cables that connect to different cards within a module, or

cables that go to the I/O connector panels at the rear of the module. Intra-module

cables are not shielded. These cables are typically round and use bail locks or

screws to prevent accidental removal.

Table 5-2

PEC codes for cables

Inter-module cables are cables that are routed internally between modules. These

cables are used primarily for interconnecting the following subsystems together:

CPU to CPU

CPU to Network

Network to Network

Network to Peripheral Equipment

See Table 5-2 for a list of some of the most commonly-used cables and their

associated PEC codes. Product codes shown the 2 digit alpha suffix have

several lengths available.

Product description

Software description

The Meridian 1 Superloop and Intelligent Peripheral Equipment is supported on

X11 release 15 and future Xl 1 Releases. The Meridian 1 System Option 21A and

21 is supported by software generic 1011”; System Options 1 6 1 by software

generic “1111” and System Option 71 by software generic “1211”. In addition,

three new software options are introduced to provide the extended configuration

capabilities required by the new hardware.

These options are:

Software Option 203 (see Note

Allows the configuration of Superloops and Intelligent Peripheral Equipment.

This option is applicable to all System Options and to Meridian SL-1 systems

extended to use Superloops and Intelligent Peripheral Equipment.

Software Option 204 (See Note 2)

Allows the configuration of the combined Conference/Tone and Digit card,

Applies to all System Options and Meridian SL-1 systems using

Software Option 205 (See Notes 1 and 2)

Provides the configuration overlay LD97. Required for Software Options 203

and

Any system using Superloops and Intelligent Peripheral Equipment

requires Software Options 203 and 205.

2: Any system using the new Conference/Tone Digit card

requires Software Options 204 and 205.

Software download

The new circuit cards introduced with the Meridian 1 System Options take

advantage of the benefits offered by distributed processing, enabling significant

savings in CPU real time to be realized while maintaining compatibility with

existing Meridian SL-1 Systems (the real time savings do not apply to existing

Meridian SL-1 Systems unless Superloops and Intelligent Peripheral Equipment are

used).

The new Superloop network card, the Controller-2 and Controller-4 cards, and

Intelligent Peripheral cards contain microprocessors to provide the off-loading of

work that was previously done by the CPU and the flexibility to change parameters

without hardware revisions. The opportunity has also been taken to significantly

increase the self diagnostic and system diagnostic capabilities through use of the

board microprocessors, resulting in improvements in maintainability.

Product description

(Continued)

This flexibility is achieved through software downloading. The program store for

the processors contained on the new cards is stored on the new 3.5inch floppy

diskettes or on the hard disk drive and is downloaded to the pack (in broadcast

mode) following a system reload (sysload) or optionally by means of an overlay

program command. Thus, downloadable software upgrades are possible without the

need to reload the system and, in the event that similar Intelligent Peripherals have

different requirements, selective upgrades are possible.

Typical CPU functions relieved by this capability are the handling of telephone set

ringing, which takes place on the Controller card and Dial pulse digit collection,

handled by the Intelligent Peripheral cards. The Peripheral Signaling Card is

bypassed, since all CPU output signaling messages are handled directly by the

Superloop network card, avoiding a potential bottleneck, significantly enhancing

message handling. Whenever possible, hardware switch selection on these cards

has been removed and the on-board microprocessors allow the soft selection of

options.

These new cards make further use of this intelligence by being capable of reporting,

following a command from Overlay 32, their pack Product Code, serial number,

release number, and manufacture location, greatly assisting inventory control and

maintenance. Another capability, that of reporting the presence of a card and

function following insertion in the Module, is achieved through the Controller-2 and

Controller-4 card continually scanning the module for such events (also applies if

card is removed; its absence is reported).

Configuration extensions

Since the new Intelligent Peripheral Equipment extends the number of Peripheral

circuit cards per shelf from 10 to 16 (card slots O-15) and the number of per

card has increased from 16 to 32, all overlay programs relating to the provisioning

of peripheral equipment have been modified to allow for these expanded parameters

(within the constraints of currently available circuit card densities).

In addition, a new overlay (LD97) is introduced which provides for the definition of

Intelligent Peripheral Equipment system parameters (such as law for

maintenance threshold levels, peripheral software download options or

switchhook flash timers), and the configuration of the new Superloop network

cards, Intelligent Peripheral Equipment controller cards, the

and Digit Switch card and the combined Superloop and

receiver card.

5-52 Product description

Maintenance enhancements

Maintenance diagnostic Overlays and 45 have undergone significant

revision and extension to exploit the capabilities’of the Superloop network card,

Controller card and Intelligent Peripheral Equipment cards. In addition to

greatly enhanced self diagnostic abilities (due to the on-board microprocessors),

expanded commands within these overlays provide improved, easy to use manual

testing and trouble shooting tools to the craftsman, enabling rapid identification of

trouble areas and faulty hardware.

Test capabilities include:

Testing the timeswitch memory on the Superloop network card

Generation of test patterns to test different segments of the system:

Superloop Network to Controller

Superloop Network to Superloop Network

Controller to Superloop Network

Controller to Controller

Superloop Network to self through backplane, Controller or

Controller and terminal

Controller to self through terminal

Controller or Superloop Network to self through special test channel

Interrogation of cards to reveal function, release, serial number and manufacture

location code

Interrogation of digital telephone sets to reveal type, code, color and release

Overlay 45 (The background signalling diagnostic program) now provides

improved test progress information to the craftsperson and is able to identify and

report the card requiring replacement following the detection of a fault.

Also, if the

program is interrupted, it will restart where it was interrupted.

Conversion

Automatic in-line conversion allows upgrading to release 15 from release 12 and

beyond. Reconfiguration of the data structures occurs during the SYSLOAD

sequence to take account of changes made to accommodate new features. To assist

with the reconfiguration of terminal equipment to the new overlay 25

has been modified to allow on single, double, and quad density peripheral

equipment to be moved to Superloops.

Product description 5-53

Terminal equipment

the user, the telephone is the most visible part of the business communications

system. Meridian1 systems support a wide range of telephones, including multiline

and single line telephones, as well as digital sets with key and display functions and

data transmission capabilities. A range of options for attendant call processing and

message center applications is also available. In addition, a number of other add-on

devices are available to extend and enhance the features of telephones and consoles.

Add-on devices include key/lamp modules, lamp field arrays, handsets, and

handsfree units.

Digital Telephones

Analog-to-digital conversion takes place in the set itself rather than in the associated

peripheral line card. This eliminates attenuation, distortion, and noise generated

over telephone lines, and results in a voice quality that is exceptionally clear and

crisp. Signaling and control functions are also handled digitally. An eight-bit

microprocessor in the telephone set monitors all keypad and hookswitch operations

and sends messages to communicate to the system any change in status. Lamp

indications, ringing, and handsfree operation are controlled by messages sent from

the system to the telephone set.

Time Compression Multiplexing (TCM) is used to integrate the voice, data, and

signaling information over a single pair of telephone wires. TCM compresses the

continuous bit stream between the system and digital set into bursts and leaves

sufficient space between bursts for data to be received without interference from the

far end: the system sends one burst of 20 data bits to the digital set; the set processes

the bits and sends a similar burst back to the system. This cycle is repeated 8000

times per second. Every transmitted burst is compressed into two 64 Kbps traffic

channels plus two 16 Kbps signalling channels. This technique, often referred to as

transmission, provides a total bandwidth of 5 12 Kbps.

For applications where data communications is required, Meridian 1 digital

telephones offer an integrated data option that can be field installed to provide

simultaneous voice and data communications over single pair wiring to a port on a

digital line card. The Asynchronous Data Option provides data communications at

speeds up to 19,200 bits per second from an ASCII terminal or desktop computer.

Data calls are performed entirely from the data terminal keyboard. Other features

such as Speed Calling and King Again (which notifies the user when a busy

computer port is free) are selected from a menu displayed terminal screen.

The data option hardware is placed inside the telephone and uses the same pair of

wires used for voice calls.

5-54 Product description

. .

Meridian Digital Telephones

M2006 Single Line Telephone

The Meridian 1 M2006 digital provides six programmable keys.

Key zero (‘0’) functions as the directory number key, and the five remaining

keys are programmable for software feature access. The comes

standard with on-hook dialing, message waiting LED, Hold/Release Keys, and

independent volume/tone controls. The set also accepts the new Programmable

Data Adapter and External Alerter Interface options. Both of these options

require an external power source.

M2008 Multi-line Telephone

The Meridian M2008 digital set is equipped with eight keys which can be

programmed for any combination of directory numbers or software features.

The set comes standard with on-hook dialing, Message waiting LED,

Hold/Release keys, and independent volume/tone control. The can also

be equipped with an optional 2x24 alphanumeric LCD display, and it accepts

the new Programmable Data Adapter and External Alerter Interface options.

All add-on options require an external power source.

M2616 Multi-Line Telephone

The M2616 digital set has 16 programmable keys for any combination of

directory number and software feature assignments. It also comes standard with

on-hook dialing, message waiting LED, Hold/Release keys, independent

volume control, and two-way handsfree capability. (Note that the handsfree

function on the M2616 is unique in that it is software assignable.) Also, the

M2616 accepts the new 2x24 alphanumeric LCD display module,

accommodates up to two 22-key Meridian Key Expansion Modules, and can be

configured with Programmable Data Adapter and External Alerter Interface.

Secure Telephone

The is a secure digital telephone, meeting the security requirement for

Class-2 as described by TSG (Telephone Security Group) standards. The set

has 16 keys which can be programmed for any combination of directory

numbers or software features. It comes standard with on-hook dialing, message

status LED, Hold/Release keys, and independent volume/tone

control. The can also be equipped with an optional 2x24 alphanumeric

LCD display, key expansion module, and it accepts the Programmable Data

Adapter option. This set requires an external power source.

Telephones

There are two versions of the M22 set: M22 and

2. Optimized for ACD environments, these 16-key programmable multi-line

sets come standard with a 2x24 alphanumeric display, dialing, message

waiting LED, Hold/Release keys, independent volume control, and dual headset

jacks, one of which can be user at the set level for ‘talk/listen’ only

supervisor monitoring. and one PJ-327 jack to accommodate standard carbon

headsets. For those applications requiring handset operation, the

jacks on Model -1 have an interface option which provides the electrical

properties required to use a DKS handset. The PJ-327 jack on Model-2 can

accommodate a carbon handset.

Product description 5-55

(continued)

The sets also accommodate up to two, 22-key Meridian Key

expansion Modules, and can be equipped with the Programmable Data Adapter

and External Interface options. The Model-l set is loop powered for

the Display option only. The Model-2 set requires an. external power source for

all options.

M2317

provides 11 programmable keys for any combination of features and

directory numbers, 5 context sensitive softkeys, handsfree conversation

capability and a 2 alphanumeric display. Release and Hold

keys are color coded as are changeable key caps to distinguish lines from

features. Large for each key provide a distinctive indication of call status

and feature activation. A built-in speaker permits the user to leave the handset

in place until the called party is on the line.

Meridian M3000 Touchphone

The M3000 Touchphone is a digital telephone which provides complete

communications control by means of a unique touch-sensitive liquid crystal

display. It provides access to the full complement of calling features to meet

the demanding requirements of business decision-makers. The LCD screen

indicates which features can be used at any given time and a feature

“Explain”

provides access to a built-in user guide.

The Meridian Touchphone is equipped with a full list of standard features. Six

lines can be configured as directory numbers, private lines, and intercoms.

Handsfree with automatic answerback is built-in. A private Directory of over

100 names and numbers permits the dialing of voice, data, and intercom calls by

simply touching a name on the LCD screen.

Display Module

The Display Module available as an option with the M2008, M2616 and

is a 2 line by 24 character liquid crystal display by which can display

the name and extension of callers from within the system or network. It

simplifies feature use with interactive prompts and messages in either English

or French.

A second version of the 2x24 LCD display presents ACD screen information.

The ACD Display Module can be added to the M2008, M2616, or sets

for use in an ACD environment. (Note that this display comes standard on the

Also, the ACD Display Module is available in six languages:

English, French-European, French-Canadian, Dutch, Spanish, and German.

5-56 Product description

Meridian Key Expansion Module

The Meridian Key Expansion Module is a modular 22-key unit which connects

to the M2216, and sets, providing access to 22 additional

key/lamp pairs for access to directory numbers and/or software features. Each

key has an associated LCD indicator for call status and feature activation

information.

A maximum of two Key Expansion Modules can be added per set.

The module is connected electrically to the set via a ribbon connector, and

mounts physically on the set’s footstand base. The footstand must be ordered

separately and is available in two versions:

Footstand-one accommodates a configuration (16 button set

plus one key module)

Footstand-two accommodates a 60-key configuration (16 button

set plus two key modules)

Programmable Data Adapter

The Meridian Programmable Data Adapter (MPDA) is a new asynchronous

data card which fits into a slot in the base of the M2616,

and sets. Any ASCII terminal, PC, or Macintosh can

then be directly connected to the telephone via the built-in RS232 interface.

Data capability is provided by the MPDA, working in conjunction with the

digital interface chip residing in the telephone.

Data calls can be placed from the telephone keypad, via keyboard dialing, or

using the ‘AT command’ dialing feature. Two primary enhancements of the

new data adapter are the addition of Script file capability and enhanced

‘AT command’ support.

Additional data features supported are:

asynchronous transmission at 19,200 bps

data call origination and termination via keyboard dialing,

dialing, and keypad dialing.

. Speed call capability

Modem Pool calling

External Alerter Interface

The External Alerter Interface module provides a connection interface to

standard remote alerting devices.

Power Supply Board

The Power Supply Board is a printed circuit board mounts inside

the telephone and receives its power from either a 1 volt wall-mount

transformer or closet power supply.

the plug-in transformer is single winding,

and is equipped with a 10 foot cord of 22AWG two-conductor stranded and

twisted wire with a modular duplex adapter.

Product description

Other Digital Telephones

M2009

provides the benefits of multiple lines and feature flexibility with

nine programmable keys.

has a built-in handsfree capability and provides eleven feature keys

which can be assigned in any combination of lines and features. The 12th key

is the key.

offers 18 keys for the additional lines and features required typical

secretarial environments.

Attendant Consoles

The Ml250 and M2250 attendant consoles incorporate design improvements based

on the Attendant Console, and are functionally compatible with the

QCW4. The Ml250 is driven and powered by SL-1 line cards and is compatible

with QCW4 console cabling schemes. The a digital version of the Ml250

with additional features and display options, is driven and powered by a digital line

card and has a modified cabling scheme.

5-58 Product description

Figure

M2008 Modular Telephone

Speaker

ssage Waiting

Function

keys

control key LCD indicators

Main

extension

Product description 5-59

Figure 5-21

M2616 Modular Telephone

Speaker

lease key

Message Waiting

Function

keys

Microphone

Volume'

control key LCD indicators \

Main

extension

Figure 5-22

Modular Telephone

Product description

Power equipment

AC power distribution

The internal AC power system consists of the following main elements:

Pedestal Power Distribution Unit

Module to Module Power Harness

Module Power Distribution Unit (MPDU)

AC Power Supplies

The AC line cord enters the Pedestal and connects to a terminal block located in the

PDU. From the terminal block, the AC voltage passes through a line filter and a

main Column circuit breaker, which provides power to the four modules and the

Blower Unit. The System Monitor runs off a small AC power supply in the PDU.

The module to module harnesses distribute AC power to each module by means of

the which contain circuit breakers for safe operation and easy

maintenance.

There are three different AC power supplies that provide power to the common

equipment, peripheral equipment, and combined common/peripheral equipment

modules. In addition, there is a ringing generator that provides AC ringing (and

message waiting lamp voltages) when required for the peripheral equipment

modules.

There are no additional external power components required for AC-powered

systems. Reserve power, if needed, is accomplished through the use of an external

Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS).

DC power distribution

The internal DC power system consists of the following main elements:

Pedestal Power Distribution Unit

Module to Module Power Harness

DC Power Converters

The power cables enter the Pedestal and connect to an internal terminal block

located beneath the PDU. From there, the DC voltage enters the PDU, which has

five circuit breakers one for each module and one for the Blower Unit. The

System Monitor runs off a small DC-DC converter in the PDU. The module to

module harnesses distribute DC power directly to the converters in each

module, which contain on/off switches for easy maintenance. Circuit breaker

protection is provided in the Pedestal.

Product description 5-61

(Continued)

There are three different DC power converters that provide power to all of the

common equipment, peripheral equipment, and combined common/peripheral

equipment modules, as well as a ringing generator that provides AC ringing (and

message waiting lamp voltages) when required for the peripheral equipment

modules.

AC Rectifiers

The external portion of DC-powered systems is generally referred to as the “power

plant”, and consists of the rectifiers and distribution equipment, as well as reserve

batteries if required.

For Meridian 1 System Options 2 1, and 6 1, Northern Telecom offers a power

plant based on the Rectifier, with an output capacity of 30A per

rectifier. For systems with power requirements of up to up to 3 rectifiers are

contained in a 4’6” open relay rack and are joined together with a wall-mount

rectifier/battery connection and distribution box This configuration is

generally adequate to power 2 full columns of 8 modules. For expansion, a second

may be added, with up to 3 additional rectifiers in a 2nd rack.

For System Option 71, as well as larger System Option 61 configurations, Northern

offers the QCA 13 power plant based on the J Rectifier, with an output

capacity of 50A per rectifier. Up to 4 are contained in the prime cabinet

for a total of 200A. A supplemental power cabinet holds 4 additional rectifiers, and

a 2nd supplemental cabinet holds 2 rectifiers, for a total of 10 rectifiers and a total

QCA13 system capacity 500 A.

Customer-provided power is an option for all Meridian 1 systems. The QBL12

Battery Distribution Box is connect a wide variety of power equipment to the

system. In addition to serving as an interface point between the NT-supplied

Meridian 1 and the customer-supplied power equipment, the wall-mounted QBL12

provides positive and negative for input rectifier connections and up to 24

fused 30A outputs to feed up to 12 columns of equipment, as well as monitoring

and reporting capabilities.

For more detailed information on the Meridian 1 power equipment and

provisioning, see NTP 553-3001-152, Power Engineering.

5-62 Product description

6-1

Chapter 6: Meridian Data Services

Contents

Applications and connectivity

Components and benefits

Data Se

-terminal connectivity

Meridian Programmable Data Adapter (MPDA)

Asynchronous Data Option for Meridian Digital Telephones (ADO)

Enhanced Asynchronous Interface Line Unit (EAILU)

Asynchronous/Synchronous Interface Module (ASIM)

High-Speed Data Module (HSDM)

High-Speed Data Card/High Speed Data System

Add-on Data Module (ADM)

with Meridian Extension (A0345240)

Data Services

-host connectivity

Add-on Data Module (ADM)

Asynchronous/Synchronous Interface Module (ASIM)

High-Speed Data Module (HSDM)

Enhanced Asynchronous Interface Line Unit (EAILU)

High-Speed Data Card (HSDC) or High-Speed Data System

Multi-Channel Data System (MCDS)

Integrated Services Digital Network-Applications Protocol

IBM connectivity

Personal Computer Interface Card (PCI)

Coax Elimination and Switching System (CESS)

Baluns

Macintosh Connectivity

Direct RS-422 connection

Meridian SL laser printer software package

Hayes Interbridge

R-Server

Data Services Wide Area Networking

High-Speed Data Module (HSDM)

Modem pooling

Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) QPC472

Primary Rate Access (PRA)

Remote Peripheral Equipment (RPE)

Strategic Alliances Program

Apple Computer, Inc.

Data General

6-2

6-4

6-5

6-7

6-9

6-l

6-14

6-15

6-17

6-19

6-21

6-22

6-23

6-25

6-27

6-29

6-30

6-32

6-35

6-37

6-38

6-40

6-41

6-42

6-43

6-46

6-48

6-51

6-52

6-55

Engineering Handbook

6-2 Meridian Data Services

Digital Equipment Corporation

Hewlett-Packard Company

NCR

Prime Computer, Inc.

Unisys (Sperry)

Wang Laboratories Inc.

Data Services applications

Banking industry application Regional Bank Network

University application Eastern College Network

Aerospace industry application defense contractor

Computer industry application -workstation manufacturer

Third party compatibility testing program

Data products and product codes

6-57

6-59

6-61

6-63

6-65

6-67

6-69

6-71

6-73

6-75

6-76

6-78

Applications and connectivity

The architecture of the Meridian 1 Private Branch Exchange was

specifically developed to accommodate the rapidly expanding requirements for data

as well as voice communications. Since its introduction, the SL-1 product line has

evolved and improved to include a wide portfolio of data communications

capabilities.

Northern Telecom is serving today’s demands for data connectivity without causing

its huge installed base of PBX systems to become obsolete. Old and new, all

systems are able to take advantage of the full family of data product offerings.

Flexibility

Northern Telecom’s commitment to OPEN World (Open Protocol Enhanced

Networks) ensures that customers will always be able to achieve maximum

functionality and compatibility in data processing and data communications,

especially in multi-vendor environments. A single terminal can access multiple

hosts, networks, and applications.

Meridian Data Services is a family of hardware and software products that attach

personal computers, terminals, host computers, and other data communications

devices to Northern Telecom’s Meridian Data Services products

enable a PC or terminal device to communicate, through the Meridian 1, to

computers, Local Area Networks printers, host computers and other

resources via standard telephone wiring.

Included in this Chapter are all of the products from Services

products that can help efficiently manage resources and allow for easier, faster and

more convenient access to information.

Components and benefits

Meridian Data Services provides a comprehensive group of products that connect

your data devices to the same telephone wiring you have installed for your Meridian

Digital Telephones. In this manner, Data Services provides you with

Engineering Handbook

Meridian Data Services 6-3

multiple host access, direct connectivity, efficient resource management, port

contention, increased distance, easier moves and changes, and improved data call

handling. Meridian Data Services provide the following advantages.

Multiple host access

Meridian Data Services provides broad connectivity which allows users to access

multiple networks, applications, and hosts from a single terminal. This eliminates

the need for multiple terminals on a desk and redundant networks.

Direct connectivity

Meridian Data Services has the unique advantage of providing direct connections

without the use of data modules for ASCII terminals, PCs, Macintosh computers,

protocol converters, modems, X.25 and many different computers. The result

is reduced costs.

Efficient resource management

There are tremendous advantages in using a single unified system for both voice

and data communications.

Perhaps the most obvious benefit is the inherent efficiency of managing resources as

part of one system. Resources such as cabling, transmission lines, host computer

ports, terminals, personal computers, and peripherals may be administered more

intelligently within a single network and a single cabling arrangement. Meridian 1

call accounting functions can be used to optimize system performance and network

management.

Port contention

Port contention means that many users may share scarce computer resources on an

as-needed basis. This is especially important where many users do not need a

dedicated computer connection.

Port contention can be successfully implemented due to Meridian 1 convenience

features such as port hunting, auto dial, and ring again. A single number can

provide access to a hunt group of host ports.

Traffic management functions of the

Meridian 1 allow a precise allocation of resources, so that users can have the level

of service they need, without having ports and connections which are idle most of

the day.

Increased distance

Terminal and PC users can be located almost 2438.4 m (8000 (2.4 km (1

miles) end-to-end) from a host computer, eliminating RS-232 distance restrictions.

Easier moves and changes

As all Meridian 1 SL-1 data devices use standard telephone wiring, which is often

already in place, installation and on-going moves and changes are less costly and

are quickly accomplished.

Engineering Handbook

6-4 Meridian Data Services

Improved data call handling

Many Meridian 1 voice calling features are applicable to data. For instance, port

hunting, call forwarding, ring again and traffic statistics provide easier data calling

and measurement.

Data Services terminal connectivity

Meridian 1 Data Services provides a comprehensive set of data connectivity options

for terminal users. The customer may achieve the complete integration of voice and

data communications with Meridian Digital Telephones. The

options available are:

Meridian Programmable Data Adapter (MPDA)

Asynchronous Data Option (ADO)

Enhanced Asynchronous Interface Line Unit (EAILU)

Asynchronous/Synchronous Interface Module (ASIM)

High-Speed Data Module (HSDM)

with Meridian Extension (A0345240)

Each of these products provides a simple, economical connection to the Meridian

the standard RJ-11 jack. Installing a data interface can be as simple as plugging in a

telephone.

Features

For the terminal user, establishing a data connection through the Meridian 1 is

analogous to making a voice call. Data calling allows many convenience features

normally associated with voice calling, as well as other features which are unique to

the Meridian 1.

Keyboard dialing may be used to make data calls from asynchronous terminals,

where the user enters the destination number from the terminal keyboard instead of

using a telephone keypad. The Meridian 1 provides prompts and menu choices to

simplify the call setup.

Auto Dial allows one-step data calling to a frequently called destination. The user

hits a single key and the predetermined number is automatically dialed.

Speed Call provides abbreviated dialing (l-3 digits) to any of several destinations.

Hot Line is similar to auto dial, except that the terminal connects to the host

computer automatically when the terminal is turned on.

This feature is especially useful for synchronous terminal users who desire a

up connection. Hot Line may be configured with the High-Speed Data Module and

the Asynchronous/Synchronous Interface Module.

Engineering Handbook

Meridian Data Services 6-5

is automatic speed adjustment between the terminal or host port and the

Meridian 1. The carriage return sent by a user to the system to request access to

Meridian Data Services is used by the Meridian. 1 to determine speed and parity of

the terminal.

Important data call processing features are also provided by the Meridian 1

software.

Ring Again allows the user to queue for a busy port or service. As soon as a port is

available, the user is alerted and the data call completed after a-one-key

confirmation by the user.

Data Port Hunting allows a Directory Number to be assigned to a group of data

ports, so a data call will hunt to the first available port.

Meridian Programmable Data Adapter (MPDA)

The Meridian Modular Telephones provide a simple solution for voice and data

communications. The MPDA is installed inside the digital telephone (at the factory

or as a field upgrade). Digitized voice and asynchronous data are multiplexed at the

telephone set and transmitted over a single twisted pair of wires to the Meridian 1.

Asynchronous RS-232

The MPDA supports asynchronous terminals and all types of personal computers.

It supports transmission speeds up to 19.2 Kbps; transmission speeds are

automatically matched in the Meridian 1 by the feature.

Integral to the digital set

Residing in the base of the Meridian Modular Telephones, the MPDA takes up no

additional space on the desktop. The MPDA may be installed into the digital set in

the field, with no changes to wiring or to the line card. Supports M2006, M2008,

M2616, and

Operation

The user may place data calls directly from the terminal keyboard. The Meridian 1

provides prompts and menu choices to simplify data calling, as well as the features

of autodialing, speed calling and ring again.

Personal computer users with the appropriate communications software can

simplify data calling by creating automatic log-on script In its Hayes

compatible the MPDA obeys the AT commands for dialing.

Wiring

The Meridian Modular Telephone requires only one twisted pair of wires to connect

to the SL-1 (for both voice and data support). The Meridian Modular Telephone

may be located up to 1066.8 m (3,500 from the Peripheral Equipment

module of the Meridian 1.

6-6 Meridian Data Services

An RS-232 cable is required to connect the asynchronous terminal or MS-DOS PC

to the MPDA; in order to connect a Macintosh, an RS-232 to DIN8 or cable is

required depending on the type of Macintosh computer. (See “Macintosh

Connectivity” in this Chapter).

Interface cards

The Meridian Modular Telephone interfaces to the Integrated Services Digital Line

Card The ISDLC supports 8 digital sets and resides in a PE

Module of the Meridian 1. The Meridian Modular Telephone also the

Digital Line Card which resides in the Intelligent Peripheral

Equipment Module.

Power

Power is provided by a wall mount power supply.

Figure 6-1

Meridian Programmable Data Adapter (MPDA)

Macintosh

QPC723

Terminal

15.2 m (50

Converter Synchronous Host

MUX

Meridian Data Services 6-7

Asynchronous Data Option

for Meridian Digital Telephones (ADO)

The Meridian M3000 Touchphone and Meridian M2000 Digital Telephones provide

a simple solution for voice and data communications. The Asynchronous Data

Option (ADO) is installed inside the digital telephone (at the factory or as a field

upgrade). Digitized voice and asynchronous data are multiplexed at the telephone

set and transmitted over a single twisted pair of wires to the Meridian 1. The ADO

Supports the M2317, and telephones.

Asynchronous RS-232

The Asynchronous Data Option supports asynchronous terminals and all types of

personal computers. It supports transmission speeds up to 19.2 Kbps; transmission

speeds are automatically matched in the Meridian 1 by the feature.

Integral to the digital set

Residing in the base of the M2000 or M3000 Series Digital Telephone Sets, the

ADO takes up no additional space on the desktop. The Data Option may be

installed into the digital set in the field, with no changes to wiring or to the line

card.

Operation

The user may place data calls directly from the terminal keyboard. The Meridian 1

provides prompts and menu choices to simplify data calling, as well as the features

of autodialing, speed calling and ring again. The M3000 Touchphone additionally

has a touch sensitive LCD display, with a built-in directory which may be used to

place data calls.

Personal computer users with the appropriate communications software can

simplify data calling by creating automatic log-on script files. In its Hayes

compatible mode, the Asynchronous Data Option obeys the AT commands for

dialing.

Wiring

The Digital Telephone requires only one twisted pair of wires to connect to the

Meridian 1 (for both voice and data support). The Digital Telephone may be

located up 1066.8 m (3,500 from the Peripheral Equipment module of the

Meridian 1.

An RS-232 cable is required to connect the asynchronous terminal or MS-DOS PC

to the ADO; in order to connect a Macintosh, an RS-232 to DIN8 or DB9 cable is

required depending on the type of Macintosh computer. (See “Macintosh

Connectivity” in this Chapter).

Interface cards

The Digital Telephone Set interfaces to the Integrated Services Digital Line Card

The ISDLC supports 8 digital sets and resides in a PE module.

6-8 Meridian Data Services

Power

Power is provided by a wall mount power supply (the M3000 already has the

required power supply).

Figure 6-2

Asynchronous Data Option (ADO)

Terminal J-lost Connectivity

Meridian 1

ASCII

Terminal

Host

Synchronous

Host

Multiplexor Remote

MUX

Meridian Data Services 6-9

Enhanced Asynchronous Interface Line Unit (EAILU)

The Enhanced Asynchronous Interface Line Unit (EAILU) is a simple, low-cost

means of connecting ASCII data terminals, teleprinters, word processors, or

personal computers to the Meridian 1.

The EAILU is available in two versions:

Male version (A0344336)

Female version (A0344337)

A single cable connects your asynchronous ASCII data terminal directly to a

telephone jack. The EAILU provides a fully digital connection with no boxes, no

bulky cables, and no electrical plugs since the EAILU obtains the necessary power

from the terminal unit on pin 4 or 20. Simply plug one end of the EAILU into the

standard RS-232 connector of an asynchronous terminal or MS-DOS PC. Then

plug the other end into your telephone jack.

Operation

With your data terminal connected to the Meridian 1, your data calls now have

convenience features like speed calling,. auto dialing, even the option of queueing on

busy facilities such as computer ports and modem pools. All are accessed directly

from your terminal keyboard by responding to simple menus and prompts.

In addition to data terminals, the EAILU also provides an inexpensive means of

bringing teleprinters, word processors, and personal computers into a Meridian 1

network.

Asynchronous host connectivity

The EAILU can also be used to achieve direct connections to host computers

located up to 1219.2 m (4000 ft) from the switch. (Otherwise the RILC (QPC723)

can be used for a direct RS-232 connection to asynchronous ports). When used for

asynchronous host computer connections, the EAILU must be the enhanced version

and must interface to E vintage (or higher) of the Asynchronous Interface Line Card

(AILC, QPC430).

Wiring

The EAILU is a compact EIA RS-232 to RS-422 cable line driver. Since the

EAILU communicates with the Meridian 1 through an RS-422 interface, your data

can be located up to 1219.2 m (4,000 ft) away switch. The

EAILU allows communication at speeds up to 19.2 Kbps.

Direct connectivity

The EAILU connects directly to the DTE RS-232 connector (DB-25) without the

need for an extra data module. The are interconnected with two-pair

wires (4 wires), and reside in the EPE Module. There is no need to use an RS-232

cable for the interconnection.

6-10 Meridian Data Services

Interface cards

The EAILU connects to the Asynchronous Interface Line Card

on the Meridian 1. Four ports reside on The EAILU enables users of

RS-232 Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) to operate in a full duplex mode through

the AILC. The EAILU resides in (only) the EPE module of the Meridian 1.

Power and connections

The EAILU requires no local power supply.

Connections:

EAILU (A0344336 male version, A0344337 female version) for terminal

and host connectivity up to 1219.2 m (4000 ft) from the Peripheral Equipment

module

RILC for direct RS-232 asynchronous host connectivity

Multi Channel Data System (MCDS) for high density asynchronous host

connectivity

Figure 6-3

Enhanced Asynchronous Interface Line Unit

Meridian 1

ASCII Terminal

Meridian Data Services 6-11

Asynchronous/Synchronous Interface Module (ASIM) 1

The Asynchronous/Synchronous Interface Module is a stand-alone data module for

RS-232 terminals which operate in either the asynchronous and synchronous modes.

The ASIM may also be used to interface with a host computer which has RS-232

ports.

Asynchronous or synchronous

ASIM supports asynchronous speeds up to 19.2 Kbps and synchronous speeds

up to 56 Kbps.

Asynchronous /synchronous switch

The unit has an easily accessible switch which allows the user to choose either

asynchronous or synchronous operation.

Physical

The ASIM is a desk top unit with a dial keypad and feature keys.

Operation

Meridian 1 data call processing features such as Auto Dial, Speed Call, Ring

Again are supported by keyboard dialing in asynchronous mode and by feature keys

on the ASIM in synchronous mode. The ASIM may only interface to Data

Terminal Equipment; it may not be used to interface to Data Communications

Equipment (e.g. modems).

Wiring

The ASIM requires one twisted pair of wires and may be located up to 1219.2 m

(4000 ft) from the Peripheral Equipment cabinet of the Meridian 1. A

type telephone may also be attached to the voice jack.

232 cable is required to connect the ASIM to the terminal.

Virtual leased line capability

The ASIM works with the Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) to provide Virtual leased

line capability. Virtual leased line uses existing T-l facilities to provide the

availability of leased data lines at a lower overall cost.

When configured for virtual

leased line mode (via two switches on the unit), the ASIM will, on detection of a

drop in the connection, hotline continuously to re-establish the connection. For

virtual leased line capability, use ASIM 1) vintage D or greater and DTI

(QPC472) vintage C or later.

Asynchronous host mode capability

The ASIM has been enhanced to provide asynchronous host mode capability. This

feature suppresses the sending of prompts and responses to an asynchronous host

computer which is accessing the ASIM to place a data call. In effect, asynchronous

host mode permits blind dialing by suppressing the prompts and responses normally

2 Meridian Data Services

associated

with keyboard dialing. This setting can be used when the host computer

dialing is not any response until the far end answers.

This feature is not applicable to dialing by synchronous host computers, since these

computers require the use of the hotline feature or keypad dialing to place data calls.

For asynchronous host mode capability, use ASIM vintage D or greater.

Interface cards

The ASIM interfaces to the Data Line Card which resides

in a PE module.

Power

The ASIM is equipped with a AC input power supply. 220V AC and

AC power supplies also available .

Meridian Data Services 6-13

Figure 6-4

asynchronous applications

Meridian 1

4PDLC

1219.2 m

RS-232

Host

QPC732

Sync Host

Terminal

Line Card

QPC452

Network

QPC723

---

with

2500

set

Figure 6-5

synchronous virtual leased line applications

Meridian 1

Meridian

472

RS-232

1 D

QPC

Sync Host

End Computer

Processor

3270 Terminals

Engineering Handbook

6-14 Meridian Data Services

High-Speed Data Module (HSDM) (QMT21)

The High-Speed Data Module (HSDM) is a data module to be used with data

terminal equipment in a Northern Telecom High Speed (up to 56 Kbps) or

ISDN (up to 64 Kbps) environment. The HSDM provides connectivity to the

Meridian 1 for local communications, as well as for wide-area~communications over

Primary Rate Interface or T-l links to other NT switches. The HSDM is

capable of operating with other data modules using the Data Module to Data Module

(DM-DM) protocol as well as with data units for the using the T-Link

Version 2 protocol.

High-speed transmission

The High-Speed Data Module will support speeds up to 64 Kbps clear channel data

transmission, giving a customer access to ISDN services. Since an ASIM can only

communicate at speeds up to 56 Kbps using a customer needing ASIM

functionality today but wanting V.35 capability or easy migration to an ISDN

environment in the future would be interested in the High-Speed Data Module.

and virtual leased line capability

The High-Speed Data Module supports both RS-232 and V.35 interfaces. The

virtual leased line capability allows customers to gain the benefits of private line

service (dedicated access and high availability) while avoiding private line charges.

For more information on virtual leased line capability, see HSDM Host Access in

this Chapter.

setting

The HSDM includes a switch to indicate connection to a Meridian 1 Data Module

or to a Meridian 1 SL-lOO/DMS-100 Data Unit. This switch is used to insure

interworking in applications involving synchronous, half-duplex data transmission

at speeds less than 56 Kbps.

Physical

The High-Speed Data Module is a desk top unit with a dial keypad and feature keys.

The appearance of the HSDM to the 1 is similar to the Asynchronous/Synchronous

Interface Module.

Wiring

A single twisted pair wire is needed for data applications. Additionally, an extra

jack is provided for connection to a 2500 set.

Interface cards

The High-Speed Data Module connects to a port on the 4-Port Data Line Card

which resides in a Peripheral Equipment module.

Engineering Handbook

Meridian Data Services 6-15

Power

The HSDM is equipped with a AC input power supply. 220V AC and

AC power supplies are also available .

High-Speed Data Card/High Speed System

The High Speed Data Card (HSDC) is the circuit board equivalent of two (2) High

Speed Data Modules conveniently mounted together in a compact rack (the existing

MCDS cabinet) with a common power supply which is referred to as a High Speed

Data System (HSDS). This will save space and energy compared to individual

enclosures.

The High Speed Data System (HSDS) is aimed at providing high density

connectivity to synchronous hosts but can also be used for asynchronous host

connections. The HSDS consists of the following components:

MCDS Shelf

QSD27

MCDS Power

QPC918

4portlinecard QPC432

MCDS Desk Cab QCA77 (optional)

MCDS Rack Cab QCA76 (optional)

Features

The High Speed Data Card will provide identical features/functions as the High

Speed Data Module. The essentials include:

synchronous connectivity up to 64 Kbps

asynchronous connectivity up to 19.2 Kbps

RS232 or V.35 interface

virtual leased line capability, which allows the HSDC to emulate lease-line

operation

Interface cards

The High Speed Data System connects to a 4 port data line card (QPC432) which

resides in the Peripheral Equipment.

For technical specifications on the MCDS Multi Channel Data System, refer to

the “Host Connectivity in this Chapter.

Engineering Handbook

6-16 Meridian Data Services

Figure 6-6

High-Speed Data Module applications

SL-1 SL-1

Connections per

Shelf One or Two

Shelves per Rack

Engineering Handbook

Meridian Data Services

6-17

Add-on Data Module (ADM)

The QMT12 (V.35 interface) Add-on Data Module (ADM) may be co-located with

the SL- 1 set to provide integrated voice and data communications for synchronous

or asynchronous terminals. It can also used as a stand-alone interface to host

computers, printers and modems.

The QMT12 provides the V.35 interface and supports speeds up to 56 Kbps in the

synchronous mode only.

DTE or DCE

The ADM is flexible in that it can interface to data terminal equipment (DTE) such

as computers or terminals, and data communications equipment (DCE) such as

modems and some host computer ports. A switch setting determines the

functionality of the ADM. (The ASIM is recommended for DTE-only

requirements).

The ADM is recommended as the primary choice where a customer requires a

synchronous Kbps, DCE link.

Physical

The Add-on Data Module is a desktop unit similar in style to the SL-1 set and other

add-on units (such as the handsfree unit). The ADM includes a Data Speed

Selector, a Data Option Switch (for choosing other parameters), and several

indicator lamps.

Operation

The ADM can be set to the desired transmission rate by the user. In the ADM

asynchronous mode, the terminal keyboard may be used for placing data calls, with

the features of Auto Dialing, Speed Calling, and Ring Again. In the co-located or

synchronous mode, the SL-1 telephone keypad is used to place data calls.

Wiring

In the co-located mode, the ADM requires only the existing two pair wiring of the

SL-1 set to provide simultaneous voice and data communications. In the stand-

alone mode, the ADM requires one pair. A V.35 cable is used to connect to the

terminal, printer, host port, or modem (a switch must be set for use with a modem).

The ADM may be located up to 1219.2 m (4000 ft) from the PE Module of the

Meridian 1.

Power

The ADM has an internal power supply, which monitors the local AC power input

derived through the 24 volt transformer (PO593922 or PO610756 ordered

separately) from commercial 110 volts AC.

Engineering Handbook

6-18 Meridian Data Services

Interface cards

A stand-alone ADM interfaces to the Data Line Card (4PDLC) which is

located in a PE module.

Figure 6-7

Add-on Data Module (ADM)

Sync

.I.

SL-1 Set

Plus ADM

Meridian 1

QPC723

Host

Engineering Handbook

Meridian Data Services 6-19

EasyLAN with Meridian Extension (A0345240)

EasyLAN with Meridian Extension is a low-cost local area network product for

MS-DOS PCs in the office. EasyLAN with Meridian Extension allows users to

share expensive peripherals such as laser printers, plotters, high-capacity hard disks

and tape backup units by using twisted pair wiring and the Meridian 1. EasyLAN

with Meridian Extension is a cost-effective solution for companies of any size

wishing to share printers distributed among work groups or wishing to support file

sharing within a work group.

Set-up

Any MS-DOS PC connected to the Meridian 1 can access the benefits of EasyLAN

with Meridian Extension.

Once the data connection is in place and EasyLAN with Meridian Extension

software is installed, the end-user needs only to configure the software with the data

extension numbers of the other PC users in the group and the port number of the

remote PC’s physically attached printer.

Key benefits

A pop-up dialing menu works with most third-party application software packages

to make remote file access and printing transparent to the user.

Mnemonic dialing from the user’s directory simplifies access to computer resources.

Users can assign names to computer resources (e.g., “bill”) so that they can more

easily remember those resources. Users can then simply place a call to the named

resource (“bill” for the PC with a laser printer attached) without knowing the data

extension of that resource.

EasyLAN with Meridian Extension requires only 20 Kbytes of Random Access

Memory (RAM) per configured communications port. Since the program runs in

background mode, EasyLAN with Meridian Extension can be running while the PC

user is working with another application (e.g., spreadsheet).

One or more print/disk servers can be configured and shared. These servers need

not be dedicated; that is, they can be used for normal PC applications while acting

as print/disk servers.

Key points

Each PC in the network needs its own numbered copy of EasyLAN with Meridian

Extension software. The software is not copy-protected, so backup disks can be

made, but a code-checking routine in the software prevents duplicate use of the

same software diskettes on a network.

An EasyLAN with Meridian Extension network can practically include up to 32

users, as that many names and associated data extensions can be configured.

Theoretically, an EasyLAN with Meridian Extension network is limited only by the

Engineering Handbook

6-20 Meridian Data Services

number of data ports available on the Meridian 1.

If the practical limit of 32 users

seems small, bear in mind that the average number of users on a local area network

in 1988 was six to ten.

EasyLAN with Meridian Extension supports communications at speeds up to 19.2

Kbps to each PC.

Figure 6-8

EasyLAN with Meridian Extension

MS-DOS PC

Meridian 1

MS-DOS PC

ADM

Server Resources

Printer

Hard

Engineering Handbook

6-22 Meridian Data Services

The ASIM may be conveniently switched between asynchronous and synchronous

operation. The ASIM also supports Hotline and Auto-answer features using the

telephone keypad.

The Asynchronous/Synchronous Interface Module may only interface to a Data

Terminal Equipment (DTE) port. If connection to Data Communication Equipment

(DCE) (e.g. synchronous modem) is required, the stand-alone ADM should be used.

For more information, see also “Data Services Terminal Connectivity” in this

Chapter.

Using an ASIM as well as the Digital Trunk Interface (DTI), customers can now set

up virtual leased lines between Meridian 1 locations. This arrangement allows

customers to gain the benefits of private line service (dedicated access and high

availability) while avoiding private line charges.

High-Speed Data Module (HSDM) QMT21

The High-Speed Data Module (HSDM) is used for both RS-232 and V.35 interface.

It provides all of the functionality of the ASIM but adds the ability to run at speeds

of 64 Kbps and to interface to V.35 ports. For more information, see also “Data

Services Terminal Connectivity” in this Chapter.

The High-Speed Data Module operates in a Northern Telecom ISDN environment

at speeds up to 64 Kbps. Combined with the Primary Rate Interface the

HSDM provides access to wide-area communications over T- 1 links to other

Northern Telecom switches. The HSDM is compatible with units used

within 100 and DMS-100, DMS-250, and DPN-100 environments.

Along with the ASIM, the HSDM also provides virtual leased line capability. With

the Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) or Primary Rate Interface the High-Speed

Data Module automatically recovers when the line goes down by hotlining until the

connection is re-established. Virtual leased line capability provides dedicated

access and high data availability at line charges lower than private lines.

Enhanced Asynchronous Interface Line Unit (EAILU)

The Enhanced Asynchronous Interface Line Unit (EAILU) is a simple, low-cost

means of connecting ASCII data terminals or PCs to the Meridian 1. The EAILU is

available in two versions:

Male version (A0344336)

Female version (A0344337)

A single cable connects your asynchronous terminal directly to a modular phone

jack. There are no boxes, bulky cables and no electrical plugs since the EAILU

obtains its power from the terminal unit’s EIA pin 4 or 20. The EAILU allows

speeds up to 19.2 Kbps.

Engineering Handbook

Meridian Data Services 6-23

The EAILU can also be used to provide direct asynchronous host connectivity up to

1219.2 m (4000 from the Meridian 1 Peripheral Equipment Module,

without the use of data modules.

The EAILU connects to the Asynchronous Interface Line Card on the Meridian 1.

The AILC accommodates up to 4 ports. For more information, see also “Data

Services Terminal Connectivity” in this Chapter.

High-Speed Data Card (HSDC) (QPC918) or High-Speed Data System

The High Speed Data Card (HSDC) provides RS232 V.35 Interface for high port

density. It is the circuit board equivalent of two (2) High Speed Data Modules

conveniently mounted together in a compact rack (the existing MCDS cabinet) with

a common power supply which is referred to as a High Speed Data System (HSDS).

This saves space and energy compared to individual enclosures.

The High Speed Data System (HSDS) is aimed at providing high density

connectivity to synchronous hosts but can also be used for asynchronous host

connections.

The HSDS consists of the following components:

MCDS Shelf QSD27

MCDS Power

4 Port line card

QPC432

MCDS Desk Cab

MCDS Rack Cab

Features

The High Speed Data Card provides identical features/functions as the High Speed

Data Module. The essentials include:

synchronous connectivity up to 64

asynchronous connectivity up to 19.2 Kbps

RS232 or V.35 interface

virtual leased line capability which allows the HSDC to emulate lease-line

operation

Engineering Handbook

6-24 Meridian Data Services

Interface cards

The

High Speed

Data

System

connects to a 4

Port

Data

Line Card (QPC432) or the

Data

Line Card (QPC397). Both cards reside in the.Peripheral Equipment Module

of the Meridian 1.

For technical specifications on the MCDS Multi Channel Data System, refer to

“Data Services Host Connectivity” in this Chapter.

Figure 6-9

ADM, EAILU, HSDM, HSDS

Terminal Connectivity

Connectivity

Meridian 1

RS-422

QPC430

Controller

56 Kbps

HSDM

4PDLC

QPC432

Front Sync

End Host

Processor

High Speed Data System

327X Terminal IBM Cluster DTE

Controller

Engineering Handbook

Meridian Data Services 6-25

Multi-Channel Data System (MCDS)

The MCDS provides high density asynchronous host connections. It is an

asynchronous rack mounted Add-on Data Module system that allows the efficient

connection of multiple computer ports.- The MCDS consists of multiple Add-on

Data Module equivalent circuit cards which are mounted together in a compact rack

with a common power supply. This arrangement provides space savings, and a

lower power requirement than with individual

Asynchronous, Answer-Only

The MCDS provides an asynchronous answer-only interface between multiport

computers and the Data Line Cards. The host port cannot originate a data

connection using the MCDS .

Physical Configuration

The MCDS consists of:

Desk mount cabinet (QCA77)

Rack mount cabinet (QCA76)

Shelf (QSD27)

MCDS Asynchronous Card (QPC397)

Power supply (QSY27)

Acting as an Add-on Data Module, each MCDS Asynchronous Card (MCDS-AC)

is capable of connecting to 4 computer ports. Each MCDS shelf can accommodate

up to 8 MCDS Asynchronous Cards, for a total of 32 ports.

Each shelf requires one power supply. An MCDS in a rack-mount cabinet consists

of a maximum of two shelves offering a total of 64 ports. The rack has additional

room for optional diagnostic equipment.

An MCDS in a desktop cabinet comprises one shelf with associated power supply; a

total of 32 ports can be configured.

Operation

The MCDS is designed to operate without operator intervention. Each of its ports

can operate independently of the other ports. Each of the sixty-four (64) ports can

interface to different host computers operating at different speeds and with different

data formats. If desired, all the ports can serve a computer.

Wiring

Each port of the MCDS is connected using one twisted pair, and the MCDS

equipment can be located up to 12 19.2 m (4000 ft) from the PE Module of the

Meridian 1. Industry standard 25-pair telephone cables with connectors

are used to connect the MCDS to the Main Distribution Frame. RS-232 cables are

used to connect the host ports to the MCDS.

Engineering Handbook

6-26 Meridian Data Services

Interface cards

The MCDS interfaces to the 4-Port Data Line Card (4PDLC) which resides in a

Peripheral Equipment Module of the Meridian 1.

Note: If the customer does not require distances up to 1219.2 m (4000 ft)

between the Peripheral Equipment (PE) Module and to the host ports (i.e. the

PBX is in the same room as the host computer), the RILC may be a more cost

effective alternative for asynchronous host connectivity.

Figure 0

Multi-Channel Data System

Terminal Connectivity

Macintosh

MS-DOS PC

Meridian 1

QPC578

QPC430

4PDLC

QPC432

4PDLC

QPC432

4PDLC

QPC432

4PDLC

QPC432

1219.2 m

(4000

. .

Up to 32 Port

Connections

per MCDS Shelf

One or Two

Shelves per Rack

Engineering Handbook

Meridian Data Services 6-27

Integrated Services Digital Network-Applications Protocol

In today’s competitive business environment, success is dependent upon the

intelligent application of voice and data communication services to meet strategic

business objectives.

ISDN Applications Protocol provides integrated host computer and

PBX functionality. It is designed to give networks the capability to provide

comprehensive solutions to complex business communications problems.

ISDN Applications Protocol is a powerful link that brings together the call

processing capability of the versatile Meridian 1 with the host computer ability to

process vast amounts of information. Together, they combine to create highly

efficient corporate communications networks.

The intelligent link

allows the Meridian 1 to receive messages from a host computer

requesting various call processing functions and allows the Meridian 1 to return

status messages to the computer that provide real-time information about the

progress and status of requested actions. Consequently, now allows

users, via their application program, to tie previously separate PBX and computer

functions into a single, integrated process.

Function

is an RS-232 or RS-422 synchronous link, presently based on a Northern

Telecom proprietary protocol. It operates at speeds up to 64 Kbps. The functions

provided by include the following:

Call processing

Call status

Incoming call notification,

Directory number update

Integrated messaging

System maintenance and administration.

ISDN-AP initial applications

The following are initial applications being developed by Digital Equipment

Corporation:

Telephone Support Center

allows an incoming or outgoing call to be

associated with a database resident on the VAX such as a customer history file

or a telemarketing script. This service allows voice and data calls to be

simultaneously and repeatedly transferred. Applications include telemarketing,

operations and services, repair and dispatch centers.

Directory Look-up and Automated Directory Dialing allows a user to scroll

through a corporate or personal directory in a VAX database and place a call to

anyone via a single keyboard entry.

Engineering Handbook

6-28 Meridian Data Services

Automatically Formatted E-Mail Message on Busy or No Answer

automatically formats an Electronic-Mail message (To, From, Brief Message)

when a voice call placed through the above application is not completed.

Message Center allows users to forward personalized itinerary and message

instructions to a centralized Message Center.

Figure 6-11

Integrated Services Digital Network/Applications Protocol

Meridian 1

Signalling Link Sending Command

and Status Messages

-Call Processing-Call Processing

-Applications Messages-Applications Messages

-Terminal Status Indicators-Terminal Status Indicators

-Systems Maintenance Messages-Systems Maintenance Messages

Engineering Handbook

Meridian Data Services 6-29

IBM connectivity

Northern Telecom continues to lead the way in providing switched and dedicated

connectivity in IBM environments. Products available for connecting to IBM

devices include the following:

PC Interface Card for MS-DOS Personal Computer direct connection to

the Meridian 1

Coax Elimination and Switching System (CESS) for VT-100 emulation, 3270

host access, and reduction of coaxial cable needs for 3270 terminals

EasyLAN with Meridian Extension for cost effective printer and resource

sharing among IBM PCs and clones

for coax, and dual coax wiring reduction

High-Speed Data Module for networking of cluster controllers and front end

processors (See “Data Services Terminal Connectivity” and “Data Services Host

Connectivity” in this Chapter)

RS-232 Interface Line Card direct connection to third-party protocol

converters for PC or asynchronous terminal access to IBM computers. (See

“Data Line Cards” in this Chapter)

Meridian Data Services provides flexible and cost-effective solutions to enhance

IBM PC, 3270 terminal, and IBM host data communications.

IBM personal computers may be connected to the Meridian 1 by three main

methods:

the Asynchronous Data Option (ADO) in a Northern Telecom M2000 or M3000

digital telephone

the Enhanced Asynchronous Interface Line Unit (EAILU) if an RS-232 port is

provided

the PC Interface Card that plugs into an expansion slot on the PC

motherboard

One may also use an ASIM which, like the EAILU, connects to the PC via the

232 serial port. The ADO, EAILU, and ASIM are discussed in “Data Services

After the IBM PC is connected to the Meridian 1, the user can take advantage of the

numerous circuit switched applications that the Meridian Data Network provides.

For low-cost local area networking, Northern Telecom provides EasyLAN with

Meridian Extension that gives MS-DOS PCs connected to the Meridian 1 the ability

to share files and printers the two most prevalent uses of

Engineering Handbook

6-30 Meridian Data Services

In addition to being able to connect IBM PCs to the Meridian 1, a number of ways

exist to connect different IBM terminals (see also “Data Services Terminal

Connectivity” in this Chapter). This section focuses on coaxial cable reduction and

replacement via twisted pair wiring. Twisted pair wiring is cost-effective and allows

for easier moves and changes compared with coaxial cable.

Host computers can be connected to the Meridian 1 in a number of ways including

the new High-Speed Data Module that provides 64 Kbps clear channel synchronous

transmission (see “Data Services Host Connectivity” section).

Personal Computer Interface Card (PCI)

The Personal Computer Interface Card (PCI) is a PC expansion card which installs

directly inside an MS-DOS compatible personal computer, using any available

expansion slot. The card is used to provide an RS-422 connection to the

Meridian 1.

If the PC has no slots available but is equipped with an RS-232 serial port, the

EAILU can be used; alternately, the ASIM or ADO may also be used (see also “Data

Services Terminal Connectivity” in this Chapter).

Speeds

The Card supports asynchronous speeds up to 19.2 Kbps. The card may be

used to access asynchronous host computers, printers and other personal computers.

The personal computer user may access an IBM host by making a data call through a

Meridian l-compatible 3270 Protocol Converter or 3270 Emulator. Northern

Telecom has found the Perle and Local Data protocol converters to be compatible

with the and AILC. The RILC can also be connected to several other IBM

protocol converters. (See “Third Party Compatibility Testing Program” in this

Chapter).

Communications software

The requires a communications software package (such as Crosstalk XVI or

Smartcom III). Such software allows the personal computer to emulate an ASCII

terminal, so that the user can dial from the keyboard to make data calls. This

software may also be used to transfer files between personal computers, or between a

personal computer and a host computer.

File transfer

File transfer from PC to PC and from PC to Macintosh can be performed with either

ASCII file transfer (using X-on/X-off flow control) or binary’transfer (using the

protocol). Transmission speeds up to 19.2 Kbps are supported by the

card (although the PC itself may be limited to 9600 bps).

Operation

Data calls are placed directly from the personal computer keyboard, allowing access

to such features as Auto Dialing, Speed Calling, Ring Again, and Modem Pool

Calling.

Engineering Handbook

Meridian Data Services 6-31

Communications software can simplify data calling by allowing the user to create

automatic log-on script files.

Wiring

The PCI requires two twisted pairs, and may be located up to 1219.2 m (4000 ft)

from the Meridian 1. One additional pair may be used to connect a Unity series

telephone or other type set. The card provides an extra telephone jack

for connecting the telephone set.

Interface cards

The interfaces directly to a port on the Asynchronous Interface Line Card

(AILC). The AILC resides in a PE module of the Meridian 1. The telephone set

connected via the card also requires a port on the appropriate line card.

Table 6-1

IBM connectivity to Meridian 1

(Note 2)

IBM Models 25 use listed dataconnection if the has

communications port installed. The EAILU is recommended for best price-performance.

Models and80 come with a serial (W-232) port installed as standard

equipment the PCI is not necessary. Either the EAILU or ADO is recommended instead.

Note 3: PC Interface Card is incompatible with the Model due to a change-in the

UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter) used by this particular

For more information, Sales and Marketing Bulletin 331-G, March 1988.

Engineering Handbook

6-32 Meridian Data Services

Coax Elimination and System

The Coax Elimination and Switching System access IBM and hosts from a

single 3270 terminal. It substantially eliminates the need for coaxial cable between

IBM 3270 display terminals and IBM cluster controllers, replacing the coax with

standard twisted pair wiring. IBM terminal users can have switched access to

asynchronous and IBM hosts and to multiple controllers. The, controller ports can be

shared by many additional users through port contention.

VT1 00

terminal emulation

By using the Coax Elimination and Switching System (CESS), one gains access to

the ASCII world from a 3270 terminal. Screen menus assist in the selection of

ASCII or IBM mode and any desired call set up parameters. In ASCII mode, the

IBM 3270 emulates a DEC VT 100 or VT52 terminal.

Reduction of coaxial cabling

The Coax Elimination and Switching System enhances the value of an IBM 3270

display terminal and minimizes installation and relocation expenses.

By using Coax Interface Modules coaxial cabling can be replaced with

standard twisted pair wiring. Standard twisted pair wiring provides flexibility and

growth for your data network moves and changes are easier and less expensive to

administer.

Meridian 1 advantages

The Meridian 1 switching capability enhances any data network. Port contention

eliminates the requirement to have a dedicated controller port per terminal.

In situations where terminals do not need dedicated access, multiple terminals may

use the concentration functions of the Meridian 1 to share a smaller number of

controller ports. The reduction in the number of ports required results in cost

savings.

Multiple controllers with different protocols

The Multi-Channel Coax System (MCCS) can be connected to multiple cluster

controllers using the same or different protocols (e.g., BSC).

Operation

The Coax Interface Module provides the Hotline feature, as well as keyboard dialing

and Auto Dial directly from the terminal keyboard.

System configuration

The Coax Elimination and Switching System consists of individual Coax Interface

Modules for connection of terminals to the Meridian 1, and a Multi Channel

Coax System (MCCS) for connection of cluster controllers to the Meridian 1. The

MCCS consists of up to sixteen (16) Coax Interface Cards (CIC). Each CIC has two

(2) ports, which means that the MCCS can accommodate a maximum of 32 ports.

Engineering Handbook

Meridian Data Services 6-33

Wiring (switched connection)

The IBM 3270 terminal is connected to the CIM via coaxial cable. The CIM is

connected to the Meridian 1 via one twisted pair of wires.

Additional wire pairs may be used to support an SL-1 set or a standard

telephone.

The MCCS is connected to the cluster controller via coaxial cable. On the Meridian

1 side, the MCCS connects to the 4PDLC card via twisted pair telephone wiring.

Non-switched connection

The CIM can be directly connected to a cluster controller port to provide a

switched connection between an IBM 3270 terminal and associated cluster

controller. This configuration can be employed where there is a need to eliminate a

substantial amount of coaxial cable used by terminals with no requirement for

switched access to other computers.

Inactivity timer

The CIM includes an inactivity timer which will drop a terminal user’s connection

through the SL-1 after a user-defined period of inactivity. This timer can be used to

provide improved access to computer ports by disabling connections which are not

being actively used.

112.6 km (70 miles) via RPE

Using Remote Peripheral Equipment the IBM cluster controller may be

located up to 12.6 km (70 miles) from its terminals. Refer to “Data Services

Area Networking” section for more information on RPE.

Interface cards

The CIM and CIC connect to the 4-Port Data Line Card or to spare data ports on the

Data Line Card. These cards reside on a Peripheral Equipment shelf of the Meridian

1. Note that the AC vintage or later of the Coax Interface Card is required for

connection to Model 3174 cluster controllers.

Terminals supported

CESS supports the following IBM terminals and personal computers:

3191 (in 3278 emulation mode)

3178

3278 (Models 2 through 5)

3279 (Without Program Symbols and Color Convergence),

3 179 (in 3279 emulation mode)

3 180 (in 3278 emulation mode)

(in CUT mode, without file transfer or program symbols)

IBM PC with IBM coax cards or with IRMA boards (operating in 3278

emulation mode, without file transfer or program symbols)

Engineering Handbook

6-34 Meridian Data Services

Figure 6-12

Coax Elimination and Switching System (CESS)

Twisted Pair

IBM Display CIM

Terminal +VTl 00

Emulation

Multi-Channel

QPC723

DEC Host

FEP

Engineering Handbook

Meridian Data Services 6-35

Baluns

Baluns (which stands for balanced to unbalanced impedance matching devices)

provide a connection via standard twisted pair wiring for many different terminals

that otherwise need special cable. The Balun.products are a non-switched data

offering. Baluns let you reduce cable requirements and provide easy terminal

installation.

Baluns free you from the burden and expense of installing and maintaining coax,

dual coax, or cable throughout your facilities. You can use ordinary

telephone wiring in your building to connect terminals directly to computers. The

three different types of Baluns available are listed below.

CTP-1 for IBM 3270 devices MVC02031

The CTP-1 Balun is used to connect any IBM 3270 Coax A Device, or any other

manufacturers device that supports the same signal characteristics as the Coax A

signal, to 24 AWG twisted pair wire.

The Baluns are used in pairs. One of the pairs is connected to the terminal and the

other is connected to the cluster controller.

CTP-2 for IBM System Terminals (MVC02032)

The Balun matches the impedance from twinaxial cable to twisted pair cable.

This allows signals from any of IBM 536X or 538X System unit and connectable

terminals and controllers to be transmitted over one pair of twisted pair cable instead

of twinaxial cable.

CTP-3 for Wang Office Products (MVC02033)

The CTP-3 Balun for Wang systems provide a cost-effective alternative to standard

dual coaxial cabling systems.

Engineering Handbook

6-36 Meridian Data Services

Figure 3

Baluns

CTP-1 COAX BALUN

TELEX

HARRIS, LEE DATA,

& MOHAWK DATA)

CTP-2 BALUN

5251, OR 5291 TWISTED PAIR MEDIA 22 AWG 1280.1 m

IBM OR

24 AWG 1097.3 m 26 AWG 762 m (25003

CTP-3 DUAL COAX BALUN

CTP-3

PAIR MEDIA 22 AWG 335.3 m (1 24 AWGz4.3 m (900’)

Engineering Handbook

Meridian Data Services 6-37

Macintosh Connectivity

Northern Telecom, a leader in Macintosh Connectivity, provides a number of

solutions for integrating Apple Macintosh products into the circuit-switched data

environment of the Meridian 1. With connected to the Meridian

users can gain access to multiple host computers and to a wide area network of

services provided via connected X.25 and modem pools.

A number of ways exist to connect Macintoshes to the Meridian 1.

Using a

Meridian Modular Telephone equipped with an Asynchronous Data Option

(ADO),or MPDA, a Macintosh can be connected to a Meridian network via an

232 to or DIN8 cable (See also “Data Services Terminal Connectivity” in this

Chapter). In the absence of Northern Telecom digital telephones, a direct RS-422

cable can be used. The cable connects directly to the Meridian Asynchronous

Interface Line Card and allows the Macintosh to be 1219.2 m (4000 ft) from the

switch.

Figure 6-14

Macintosh connectivity

S-422 Direct Connect

Macintosh

Meridian

LocalTalk Network

R-Server

Multiplex

MUX

Meridian SL Laser

Printer Software

(Asynchronous LaserWriter)

LocalTalk Network LocalTalk Network

Engineering Handbook

6-38 Meridian Data

Services

Direct RS-422 connection

Direct Macintosh connectivity:

(A0326760)

(A0326761)

1 (A0326762)

(A0326763)

The Macintosh (and asynchronous terminals which provide the RS-422 interface)

can be connected directly to the Meridian 1 without the need for a data module.

Both the Macintosh and LaserWriter printer may be connected directly to a port on

the Asynchronous Interface Line Card providing a simple and inexpensive

connection to the Meridian 1

Asynchronous transmission up to 19.2 Kbps is supported. The Macintosh may be

used to access asynchronous hosts, IBM hosts (through third-party protocol

converters), packet switching networks (through an X.25 PAD), modem pools and

other personal computers.

Communication software

ASCII terminal emulation software such as MacTerminal must be used. The

software used should provide the “long break” function (1.6 seconds) for

disconnecting data calls.

File transfer

File transfer from Mac to Mac and from Macintosh to PC can be performed at

speeds up to 19.2 Kbps, with either ASCII transfer (using X-on/X-off flow control)

or binary transfer (using a protocol common to both computers, such as Xmodem).

Operation

The Macintosh user can take advantage of Meridian 1 data call processing features

such as Auto Dial, Speed Calling and Ring Again. Data calls are placed using the

Mac keyboard.

Wiring

Direct RS-422 connections require two twisted pair of wires, the

Macintosh computer to be located up to 1219.2 m (4000 the Meridian 1 .

The Macintosh Plus, SE and II have a DIN8 connector. Macintoshes older than the

Macintosh Plus (including the Macintosh 512K) use a DB9 connector.

Simple cable connection

Meridian Data Services offers cables with DIN8 and DB9 connectors and which

terminate in 1 connectors (for direct RS-422 connection) and DB25 connectors

Engineering Handbook

Meridian Data Services 6-39

(for connection to ADO or EAILU). Simply plug the appropriate cable into the

Macintosh modem port, and plug the other end of the cable to an ADO or a wall

jack to complete the data connection to the Meridian 1 .

Interface card

The Macintosh interfaces directly to the Asynchronous Interface Line Card (AILC).

This card resides on a Peripheral Equipment module of the Meridian 1.

Engineering Handbook

6-40 Meridian Data Services

Meridian

SL laser printer software package

Macintoshes not connected to an AppleTalk network now have the ability to share a

laser printer by using the Meridian SL laser printer software package. This software

package provides laser printer sharing without-the need for a LAN. Using standard

phone wire and the Meridian the installation is simple

Features and benefits

The Meridian SL laser printer software package provides the following advantages:

Dial-up access from any Macintosh

Standard queueing just like AppleTalk for the LaserWriter via Camp-On

Distances up to 2438.4 m (8000 ft)

At 19.2 Kbps printing times are nearly equal to AppleTalk. Printing time

slows

when a modem connection is employed

Uses existing Meridian 1 phone wires

Readily adapted for other families of modems and other communications

equipment by using the included Asynchronous Connection Language

facility

Set-up

Any number of Macintoshes connected to the Meridian 1 via Data Services

equipment such as the Direct RS-422 cable can access a Meridian 1 -connected

LaserWriter. The LaserWriter is connected to an Asynchronous Interface Line Card

(AILC) on the SL-1 by an RS-422 Direct Connect cable. Once the software is set-

up, there is no appreciable difference between the usual way of printing and the

Meridian SL Laser Printer software method, with the exception that the Macintosh

does not need to be connected to an Apple talk network. The Macintosh can be

located up to 2438.4 m (8000 ft) from the LaserWriter.

Requirements

One or more Apple Macintosh personal computers with a minimum of 5 12K

memory

Apple LaserWriter, LaserWriter Plus, LaserWriter II

Meridian SL laser printer software package

Macintosh Data Services connection

RS-422 direct connect or

Asynchronous data option/Meridian Programmable Data Adapter

LaserWriter connection

1 cable

Engineering Handbook

Meridian Data Services 6-41

Hayes Interbridge

AppleTalk is a superb local area network for small centralized groups (up to 32

users and 304.8 m (1000 ft)). To serve the needs of the entire organization, Hayes

Interbridge, in conjunction with a Meridian 1, allows for the addition of users to the

network at distances up to 2438.4 m (8000 ft), in different buildings, and on

different floors.

An integrated network

Networks that can be reached by a Meridian 1 can be linked-together. Macintosh

applications such as InBox (an electronic mail package) will be available to all

users. File servers such as AppleShare and laser printers such as the LaserWriter

can be accessed by all users across the bridge and through the Meridian 1. Each

Interbridge can support the connection of two AppleTalk networks via software

supplied with the Interbridge, working in conjunction with a connection to the

Meridian 1 provided by an Asynchronous/ Synchronous Interface Module (ASIM)

and associated line card port.

With AppleTalk local area networks connected to the Meridian 1, each user will

have access to multiple host computers and to a wide network of services via X.25

and modem pools also connected to the Meridian 1.

R-Server

Macintosh users can use the Meridian 1 to join an AppleTalk network on a dial-up

basis, using the R-Server terminal server product from Electronics.

software provided with the R-Server allows Macintosh users to dial

(manually or automatically) through the Meridian 1 to connect to a local R-Server.

Remote access (e.g. dial-up access from Mac at home) is also available via inbound

modem pooling.

The R-Server can connect to the Meridian 1 via the RILC or via the EAILU

connected to the AILC.

One limitation of R-Server access with the Meridian 1 is that queuing is not

supported. For instance, if the R-Server being called is busy, the Mac user would

have to re-try the connection at a later time.

Despite this limitation, the R-Server is

a powerful device for extending the benefits of AppleTalk to local and

remote Mac users.

Engineering Handbook

6-42 Meridian Data Services

Data Services Wide Area Networking

With the Meridian 1, you have access to a wide range of services from X.25 public

and private networks to remote host computers and’terminals.

The following are the various advantages of Data Services Wide Area Networking,

High-Speed Data Module (HSDM) with virtual leased line capability offers cost

effective data networking

Modem pools provide access to a wide variety of services over analog

telephone lines

Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) extends the capabilities of the Meridian 1 to allow

digital wide area voice and data services over T-l carrier communication links

Primary Rate Access gives Meridian 1 users ISDN wide area networking

features and benefits

Remote Peripheral Equipment (RPE) provides the capability to connect a

peripheral equipment shelf up to 12.6 km (70 miles) away from the Meridian 1

via T- 1 carrier facilities

High-Speed Data Module (HSDM) QMT21

The High-Speed-Data Module (HSDM) provides all the functionality of the ASIM

but adds the ability to support 64 Kbps data transmission for ISDN applications.

Upgrading an HSDM from 56Kbps to 64 Kbps requires no change to the module or

associated line card; a simple speed selector change is all that is required. The

HSDM provides versatile functionality for present and future applications.

Within a wide area network, the High-Speed Data Module can provide virtual

leased line capability. The virtual leased line capability allows customers to gain

the benefits of private line service (dedicated access and high availability) while

avoiding private line charges.

With the Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) or Primary Rate Interface the

Speed Data Module automatically recovers the line when the line goes down by

hotlining until the connection is re-established.

For connection to V.35 DTE, the HSDM provides a more cost-effective solution

than V.35 ADM (QMT12).

For more information on HSDM, see also “Data Services Terminal Connectivity”

and “Data Services Host Connectivity” in this Chapter.

Engineering Handbook

Meridian Data Services 6-43

Figure 6-15

High-Speed Data Module (HSDM)

Meridian 1 Meridian 1

Location A

Location B

DTI

or PRA

I Leased Line

I I

Terminals

or64

64 Kbps

Kbps

for FEP HOST

for

Modem pooling

Modems are required for data communication between remote devices over analog

telephone lines. In the Meridian 1, a modem may be used as either a stand-alone

modem or as part of a modem pool. Modem Pooling refers to dial-up modems

configured in a group for data calling over analog trunks to remote computers (also

equipped with modems).

Modem pooling allows modems to be shared across all dial-up trunks (analog) as

well as among all users. Since many users do not need a dedicated modem for

time use, Modem pooling can provide considerable cost savings, while making

modem communications available to many more users.

The call accounting functions of the Meridian 1 can be used to monitor data calling

activity and to better manage system facilities. Users can also take advantage of

Meridian 1 features such as hunting and ring again. Substantial cost savings may be

achieved by using Automatic Route Selection for outbound modem calls.

Modem pools organized by modem type

The Modem pools are organized according to modem type, modems of the same

speed and transmission mode are placed together in the same pool. Several modem

pools may be configured according to the customer’s requirements.

Engineering Handbook

6-44 Meridian Data Services

Outbound/inbound modem pooling

Outbound modem pools provide shared access to remote data environments for

terminal and personal computer users. Inbound modem pools provide shared access

to Meridian 1 data services for remote and workstation users. Modem

pools can be configured in a variety of ways depending on the individual

requirements. If “smart” modems are utilized with the RILC, inbound and outbound

modem pools can be configured using the same modems, significantly reducing

hardware requirements. Modem pools can also be configured separately.

Placing a modem pool call

The user places a remote data call by keyboard dialing to the modem pool DN

(Directory Number) through the use of a communications software package. The

Meridian 1 reserves a modem for the call, prompts the user for the telephone

number of the far-end modem, and instructs the reserved modem to place the call.

Modem pooling hardware, wiring and interface cards

A number of different configurations exist for connecting a modem pool to the

Meridian 1. A standard configuration is to set the smart modems up in both an

inbound and outbound mode reducing the need for additional hardware. In this

configuration, The RILC must be configured as an SL-1 set only. When the RILC

is programmed as an SL-1 set, the 1 station hunting for the outbound modem access

should be in the opposite direction to the station hunting for the inbound

modem access.

A standard way to connect modems to the Meridian -1 would be to connect the PBX

to a Main Distribution Frame from which a patch panel or octopus cable can

These wiring schemes provide the high density cabling required for

the modem pool configuration. (See diagrams).

Engineering Handbook

telemanuals.com

6-46 Meridian Data Services

Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) QPC471, QPC472

Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) extends the capabilities of the Meridian 1 to allow

digital wide area voice and data service. The user with multiple locations can create

a single all-digital network, by utilizing Digital Trunk Interface with T-l carrier

communications links.

Reduced costs with cleaner, faster transmission

The primary benefit of DTI is to substantially reduce costs, but DTI also provides

cleaner and much higher speed data transmission than is possible using analog

trlmks.

North American T-l

In keeping with Northern Telecom commitment to OPEN WORLD, DTI uses the

North American industry standard T-l interface, with the DS-1 signaling format.

North American T-l carrier uses a 1.544 Mbps circuit, subdivided into 24 individual

channels which can be used for either digital voice or data communications.

24 channels of 56 Kbps

Each of these 24 channels can support synchronous transmission up to 56 Kbps or

asynchronous transmission up to 19.2 Kbps.

Voice or data transmission

Each DTI link can be configured to carry all voice, all data, or a mixture of voice

and data. Each channel may also be programmed independently for various digital

trunk configurations (CO trunks, FX trunks, etc.).

Systems supported

DTI can be used to communicate voice and data between Meridian 1 systems . DTI

can also be used to connect the Meridian 1 to any PBX or Central Office with a

suitable T- 1 interface.

System requirements

The software associated with DTI must be Generic Xl 1 Release 5 or later and must

include software option 75 Interface).

Hardware configuration

DTI consists of two circuit packs:

-- Clock Controller (maximum 2 per system)

Digital Trunk or Primary Rate Interface

Interface

The DTI circuit pack uses 2 card slots and is typically located on a Network Shelf.

The clock controller is located on the network module of the Meridian 1 System

option 5 1 and on the CPU module of the Meridian 1 System option 7 1. The

Engineering Handbook

telemanuals.com

Meridian Data Services 6-47

standard configuration with a full network group contains two clock controllers for

redundancy. The Meridian 1 System option 5 1 (half network group) requires only

one clock controller.

Wiring

Voice and data transmission through DTI circuit pack leaves the Meridian 1 via two

twisted pairs of wires. These wires may be directly connected to all available T-l

facilities, including cable, microwave, fiber optics, infrared, or satellite links. If

DTI is to be connected to a cable T-l facility provided by the local telephone

company, a Channel Service Unit may be required.

Figure 6-18

Digital Trunk Interface

SET

Macintosh

I I II

PC with PCI

CHANNEL BANKS

OR T-l INTERFACE

ASCII

Engineering Handbook

telemanuals.com

6-48 Meridian Data Services

Primary Rate Access (PRA)

Meridian ISDN Primary Rate Access stimulates development of new

applications that fully utilize ISDN networking services. With added capabilities

such as integrated voice and data, network-wide feature transparency, and

interworking with host computer databases, ISDN PRA provides a platform for

innovative networking services.

The following feature rich enhancements enable advanced applications that provide

the opportunity to substantially improve worker productivity:

conducting simultaneous voice and data teleconferencing

activating Ring Again or Call Forwarding across a network

notification of a calling party’s identity

improving telemarketing and order entry by automatically linking the calling

party’s number to a file in a host computer database

centralizing message services or call detail recording for many locations

ISDN can be added to your Meridian 1 with the simple addition of two circuit packs

and selected software options.

Primary Rate Interface (PRI) (QPC720)

The Primary Rate Interface circuit pack is a new line card that provides a

1 Mbps 24 channel digital link from the Meridian 1 to public and private

networks. The PRI allows twenty-four 64 Kbps clear channels, including a 64 Kbps

out-of-band signaling channel

It can also be configured to support T- 1

facility access, including Extended Super Frame.

D-Channel Handler Interface (DCHI) (QPC757)

The D-Channel Handler Interface (DCHI) is a new line card that processes ISDN

signaling information on the out-of-band signaling channel for basic call connection

services such as call set-up, tear down, and feature activation. It implements the

defined ISDN LAP-D link layer protocols. The DCHI also provides a single

asynchronous Serial Data Interface (SDI) port.

Xl 1 Release 13 software

Xl 1 Release 13 software (and later versions) contains the instructions for

interpreting Q.931 signaling on the D-channel. 4.931 is the signaling protocol

recommended by the CCITT for ISDN Primary Rate Access. It-acts in unison with

the DCHI card to switch and route data between devices.

Meridian 1 software features

Meridian 1 software options 117, 118, 145149 are the feature packages which

provide user access to enhanced ISDN services (basic call connection features,

network calling services, enhanced trunking, and integrated voice and data).

Engineering Handbook

telemanuals.com

Meridian Data Services 6-49

Enhanced data networking

One of the best inherent benefits that ISDN brings to our customers is an all-digital

end to end network. Hence, the Meridian network provides customers with

completely digital transmission, high speed private data line replacement, less

complex and lower-cost data connectivity, and enhanced wide area networking.

Customers will also be able to take advantage of the high speed all digital network

for their other data communications requirements, such as coax elimination, 3270

access, X.25 network access, PC to PC networking, and PC to host communication.

Figure 6-19

Primary Rate Access (PRA)

Meridian 1

Meridian

128

Location A

Kbps

Location

HSDM II

Facsimr

Clear

on each

channel

Leased Line Replacement

Cluster

CCD

3x78

I I

Controller

Terminals

Engineering Handbook

6-50 Meridian Data Services

Figure 6-20

Adding to Meridian 1

Meridian 1

Exchange

Legend:

Primary Rate Interface (QPC720)

X.1 1 Release 13 software or later version

feature options

Q.931 software implementation

D-Channel Handler Interface (QPC757)

Engineering Handbook

Meridian Data Services

6-51

Remote Peripheral Equipment (RPE)

Remote Peripheral Equipment provides the capability to connect a module (or

modules) up to 12.6 km (70 miles) away from the Meridian 1 via T-l carrier

facilities. To the Meridian 1, the Remote Peripheral Equipment appears as any

other PE Module. The data terminals, data modules and telephones connected via

the RPE shelf appear to be

locally to the Meridian 1.

Two T-l carrier links

Two T-l carrier links are required to connect each RPE to the assigned network

loop of the Meridian 1.

712.6 km (70 miles) maximum

RPE may be located up to 12.6 km (70 miles) from the Meridian 1.

RPE carrier shelves at both ends

Both a local RPE

carrier

shelf (at the main Meridian 1 location) and a remote RPE

carrier shelf (at the remote facility) are required to accomplish RPE connectivity.

Figure 6-21

Remote Peripheral Equipment (RPE)

Terminal Connectivity Host Connectivity

Remote

PE Cabinet

Meridian

. . .

Local

Carrier

Shelf 15.2 m

Converter

QPC723

Leased-Line

Multiplexor MUX

Engineering Handbook

6-52 Meridian Data Services

Strategic Alliances Program

Customers demand that the information industry connect equipment from various

suppliers to provide applications in a multi-vendor;multi-media environment.

Customers want to have the ability to handle any form of information voice, data,

text, graphics and image.

Northern Telecom initiated the Strategic Alliances Program in 1982 to encourage

close working relationships with leading computer vendors. Northern has developed

and maintained these partnerships to jointly deliver benefits to customers by serving

their needs for innovative integrated information systems involving many types of

equipment, from multiple vendors.

As a part of its efforts, Northern Telecom Strategic Alliances Program conducts

ongoing connectivity testing with its partners. Northern Telecom connectivity

testing program is designed to provide with a wide range of tested,

effective connections for a variety of applications.

By providing compatibility with multiple computer and connectivity products, the

Meridian 1 can accommodate new requirements in a cost-effective manner.

Apple Computer, Inc.

Apple Computer is one of the largest manufacturers of personal computer

workstations. Featuring a broad range of configurations and applications, and great

ease of use, Apple Macintosh family of 32-bit computers has been embraced by

business and education. Through a cooperative working agreement, Northern

Telecom and Apple Computer are committed to the testing and integration of

Macintosh technology with the Meridian 1.

The Macintosh has access to MS-DOS or other Macintosh personal computers (both

standalone and networked) for data exchange and file transfer. In addition, the

Macintosh connects to asynchronous host computers, modem pools, IBM hosts via

protocol converters and to X.25 gateways, all through the Meridian 1. In an

asynchronous environment, speeds up to 19.2 Kbps are supported; in a synchronous

environment, speeds up to 64 Kbps may be attained.

Northern Telecom Memory Systems Division offers Memorybank, a hard disk

subsystem with SCSI interface to Macintosh. With storage capacity up to five

Gigabytes, Memorybank is ideal for Local Area Networks. interconnected

via the Meridian 1 (see “Macintosh Connectivity” in this Chapter) can use the

Memorybank system as a file or disk server.

Meridian 1 SL- 100 and DMS- 100 switches also support Macintosh connectivity via

the and Meridian Data Services product lines respectively.

Supported configurations

Macintosh Macintosh Plus, Macintosh SE, Macintosh II and any other

models which have built-in RS-422 connections are supported.

Engineering Handbook

Meridian Data Services 6-53

Apple LaserWriter and Apple LaserWriter II printers may also be connected.

Meridian SL Laser Printer Software provides for an unlimited number of Macintosh

users connected to the Meridian 1 to dial and print to Apple LaserWriter printers

attached to the switch locally, via RPE, or cross-country without the need to use an

AppleTalk connection or bridge. The LaserWriter connected to the Meridian 1 is

selected via the Macintosh Chooser and is used by executing the standard

Macintosh PRINT command from any application program.

Data modules

Macintosh Computers (RS-422) may be connected directly to the AILC card;

through Digital Telephones with an ADO, or Modular Telephones with an MPDA.

AppleTalk may be bridged via the Hayes Interbridge and the ASIM or

HSDM. Macintoshes can dial into an AppleTalk network via a R-Server

connected to the RILC.

Apple are connected via the EAILU or a direct RS-422 connection.

Engineering Handbook

6-54 Meridian Data Services

Figure 6-22

Apple Computer, Inc.

QPC430

QPC578

LaserWriter II

Haves

QPC432

I ììììII

RS-232

Leased-Line

MUX

Meridian SL Laser Trunks

Printer Software

(Asynchronous LaserWriter)

Engineering Handbook

Meridian Data Services

Data General

Northern Telecom and Data General Corporation have completed a program of

connectivity and compatibility testing. This program covers Data General major

terminal families connected through the. Meridian 1 to Data General MV family of

processors.

Data General has developed an interface to Northern Telecom Computer to PBX

interface (CPI). The 24 channels of CPI each support up to 19.2 Kbps

asynchronous communications between Data General Dasher terminalsand DG

hosts. The eliminates 24 individual port connections, 6 MCDS Cards (or 24

as well as the individual cabling that would be required to connect to the

Meridian 1.

A direct connection from the DG RS-422 terminal to the Meridian 1 is available,

but this configuration requires expensive shielded wire. With or

unshielded twisted pair may be used to provide more cost-effective

connections.

Supported configurations

Data General host models ECLIPSE Models 8, and

and 40000 are supported.

Data General Dasher terminal models D220, D410,

D4 11, D46 1 and are supported. Data General RS-232 terminals

D210 and D214 are also supported.

All applications on Data General MV series products including CEO (Data General

Comprehensive Electronic Office software) are supported.

Data General product model number is 4398. Model 4398 is supported

under Revision 6.0 or later of Data General’s Advanced Operating System/Virtual

Storage

Note: The and do not support CPI.

Data modules

Data General Dasher terminals can be connected to the Meridian 1 via the ADO,

ASIM, HSDM, or EAILU.

If the customer has too few data connections to require CPI, then the host can also

be connected to the Meridian 1 via the EAILU, ASIM, HSDM, or MCDS.

Engineering Handbook

6-56 Meridian Data Services

Figure 6-23

Data General

Meridian 1

4PDLC

QPC 432

Terminal

Dasher

QPC 723

Et--

4PDLC

QPC 432

MCDS DG MV Host

QPC 723

QPC452.

DTI

QPC 472

Modem DG Host

MV Host

4000

8000

-10000

Engineering Handbook

Meridian Data Services

6-57

Digital Equipment Corporation

Northern Telecom and Digital Equipment Corporation have completed a significant

amount of product integration and testing. The result is a cost-effective and

simplified terminal to host connectivity through the Meridian 1.

To connect the Meridian 1 to the VAX, Northern Telecom recommends using the

RS-232 Interface Line Card The RILC allows cost-effective connectivity

to the VAX by eliminating the need for the ASIM, HSDM and MCDS. The RILC

may be connected directly to the VAX Host or may be connected through DEC

Ethernet Terminal Servers 200 or 500).

Although the RILC eliminates the need for the ASIM, HSDM and MCDS, these

modules may still be used for Meridian l/VAX connectivity. The ASIM and

HSDM may be required if asynchronous host mode capability is required (see “Data

Services Terminal Connectivity” in this Chapter).

Supported configurations

VAX hosts supported: VAX Series VAX Series 1

and

1 1

2000

Digital terminals, PCs and terminal servers supported: VT220, VT 340

Series, II and III, Rainbow 100, Professional 300 and

DECServer 200 and 500

Data modules

DEC terminals may be connected to the Meridian 1 using ASIM, HSDM, EAILU,

or ADO.

The DEC hosts may be connected via the RILC, EAILU, ASIM, HSDM, or MCDS.

Engineering Handbook

6-58 Meridian Data Services

Figure 6-24

Digital Equipment Corporation

VT 100,220 with

ADO

Meridian 1

or 340

VT 100,220

or 340

QPC432

MCDS

QPC723

RS-232

4PDLC

QPC432

DEC Server

200 or 500

Engineering Handbook

Meridian Data Services 6-59

Hewlett-Packard Company

As a part of Northern Telecom Strategic Alliance with Hewlett-Packard (HP), a

series of new connectivity tests between the Meridian 1 and HP Series 925 and 950

computers has been successfully conducted. The HP 3000 Series 900 is the latest

addition to HP broad family of compatible business computing systems. The HP

Series 925 and 950 are based on HP Precision Architecture and are compatible with

the entire HP 3000 family. Tested connections between the Meridian 1 and HP

Series 925 and 950 computers involve Northern Telecom RS-232 Interface Line

Card and Enhanced Asynchronous Interface Line Unit (EAILU) and HP

new Distributed Terminal Controller (DTC).

The RILC provides direct interface to HP DTC, thereby eliminating the need for

additional data modules. This interface reduces connection costs while improving

resource sharing, The DTC connects asynchronous terminals and serial printers to

the 900 Series systems.

For a direct, low cost connection of an HP 3000 computer to the Meridian 1, HP has

developed the Advanced Terminal Processor (ATP) for the Meridian 1. When used

with a breakout box, the ATP for the Meridian 1 will allow the HP 3000 to be

connected directly to the AILC. HP standard ATP or Asynchronous Data

Communications Controller (ADCC) may be used to interface the HP 3000 to the

Meridian 1 via the EAILU or MCDS. These connections expand options for joint

users of Meridian 1 Systems and HP 3000 systems who wish to lower costs,

improve resource sharing and protect their investments in communication systems.

Supported configurations

Host:

With DTC, HP Series 925 and 950 with operating system 1.1 or higher

With ATP, HP 3000 Series 39,4X, 58,6X or 70

Series 37 is not supported

With ADCC, HP 3000, Series and 44

PCs: HP 150 A, HP 150 HP 150 II, Vectra, Vectra

CS, Vectra ES, Vectra Portable Plus, Vectra Portable CS

Terminals: 239x Series, Series

Printers: 256x, 293x

Data modules

HP PCs and terminals may be connected to the Meridian 1 by using the EAILU,

ADO, ASIM, or HSDM.

The HP printers may be connected to the Meridian 1 by using the ASIM or HSDM

for HP host printing. The HP Laser Jet must be able to recognize Forced Data

Terminal Ready

Engineering Handbook

6-60 Meridian Data Services

The HP host may be connected to the Meridian 1 by using the RILC, EAILU,

ASIM, HSDM, or MCDS.

Figure 6-25

Hewlett Packard Company

Meridian 1

EAILU

Printer

Digital Set

ADO

AIL

QPC430

QPC578

HSDM

MCDS

Breakout

Box

HP 3000

925 and 95

3000

Series 39,

MCDS

ADCC: HP

3000

Series

40, 44

ATP: HP3000

4X,58, 6X, 70

Engineering Handbook

Meridian Data Services

NCR

Northern Telecom and NCR have completed joint connectivity testing of the

NCR

Tower XP and NCR PC with the Meridian 1.

An NCR PC or an IBM PC may be connected to the Meridian 1 via the card.

VT102 terminals may also be connected via an ADO or EAILU. The NCR Tower

XP may be connected to the Meridian 1 via an ASIM, HSDM, or an EAILU.

These connections support access to modem pools, host computers, terminals, and

X.25 PAD

. File transfer from IBM PC to NCR Tower and file access to NCR

Tower (both via PC based communication software) are also supported.

Supported configurations

Host: NCR Tower XP

PCs and Terminals: NCR PC, VT102, IBM PC

Data modules

NCR PC and IBM PC may be connected via the card, EAILU, or ADO. VT102

Terminals connect via an EAILU.

The NCR Tower may be connected to an RILC, EAILU, ASIM, or HSDM.

Engineering Handbook

6-62 Meridian Data Services

Figure 6-26

NCR

Meridian 1

VT1 02

QPC 512

IBM PC

QPC430

RS232

NCR Tower XP

HOST

NCR PC NCR Tower XP

Engineering Handbook

Meridian Data Services 6-63

Prime Computer, Inc.

Northern Telecom and Prime have completed connectivity and compatibility testing

to further expand the data connectivity options available to Meridian 1 customers.

Northern Telecom RILC may be used to connect the Meridian 1 to Prime Series 50

host computers equipped with an appropriate controller without any additional data

modules. An MCDS or ASIM (Vintage C or later) may also be used.

Prime terminals may be connected to the Meridian via an EAILU, or

ASIM. Although speeds of up to 19.2 Kbps may be achieved, 9.6 Kbps is

recommended by Prime for error-free transmission. An IBM PC/AT may be

connected via the card with software. Speeds up to 19.2 Kbps are

supported in this configuration. 3278 terminals with VT-100 emulation may be

connected via the CIM to carry data at 9.6 Kbps. Prime LQP3185 Printer may be

connected to the Meridian 1 via an ASIM at speeds up to 9.6 Kbps.

Supported configurations

Host: Prime 50 Series, Models

6550 with PRIMOS Operating System 20.2.2 or later. Prime Controllers: 1 CS3,

PCs and terminals: IBM PC/AT, 3278 with VT-100 Emulation

Printers: LQP3 185

Software: PRIMOS, ED, EMACS

Data modules

Prime 50 Series host computers may be connected to the Meridian 1 using the

RILC, ASIM, HSDM, or MCDS.

Prime computer may be interfaced to the Meridian 1 via the EAILU, ASIM,

or the HSDM. PCs may be connected via the card with software.

3278 terminal access (via VT-100 emulation) requires the CIM.

Prime LQP3185 printer may be connected using an ASIM.

Engineering Handbook

6-64 Meridian Data Services

Figure 6-27

Prime Computer, Inc.

Meridian 1

4PDLC

QPC 432

HSDM

IBM PC/AT

4PDLC

3270 Terminal CIM

Series

I’

Engineering Handbook

Meridian Data Services 6-65

Unisys (Sperry)

Northern Telecom and Unisys have completed connectivity testing which

demonstrates the Meridian 1 capability to interconnect Sperry UTS 4000 terminals.

This configuration will provide low cost, switched access to Sperry 1100 Series

mainframes.

The UTS 4000 product line consists of five terminals: the UTS 10 (asynchronous),

UTS and 60 (all synchronous). UTS 10 terminals may be interfaced to

the SL- 1 via an EAILU while UTS and 60 may be interfaced, using an

ASIM. In addition, a Sperry PC, UTS 30 or Model 30 Desk Station equipped with

the Line Interface Circuit chip may be connected directly to the Meridian

Sperry PCs may also be connected with a card attached directly to the AILC.

Sperry terminals access 1100 Series mainframes by contending for branch ports on

the Sperry terminal multiplexer (T-MUX) which is connected to a Distributed

Communications Processor (DCP).

Supported configurations

Host: Sperry 1100 Mainframe

Terminals: Sperry UTS series, Sperry PC

File Servers: DOPS 10 and DOPS 20

Data modules

The Mainframe may be connected to the Meridian 1 via an ASIM.

The UTS Terminals may be connected to the Meridian 1 by using an ASIM. Sperry

PCs may be interfaced with the Meridian 1 using an RILC, PCI, or an

EAILU.

Engineering Handbook

6-66 Meridian Data Services

Figure 6-28

Unisys

Meridian 1

Series 1100

or Sperry

H&l

512

Sperry PC

DCP

QPC

430

QPC

723

Asynchronous

4PDLC

432

QPC 432

DOPS

Sperry PC,

UTS 30 or Model 30

with LIC interface

Engineering Handbook

Meridian Data Services 6-67

Wang Laboratories Inc.

Northern Telecom and Wang Laboratories Inc. have completed joint connectivity

testing of Wang equipment with the Meridian 1.

Connections between the Meridian 1 and the Wang VS have been improved by the

use of Northern Telecom RILC and Wang Asynchronous Controller products. The

Asynchronous Controllers allow Wang and non-Wang asynchronous terminals and

printers to use integrated Information Processing, Professional Application

Environment (PACE) and Wang OFFICE applications, at speeds of up to 19,200

bits per second. The RILC provides direct connections to these controllers,

eliminating the need for additional data modules and reducing connection costs

while improving resource sharing.

Wang Asynchronous Communications Sub-system (WACS) was developed by

Wang and comes with 16 or 32 ports. A WACS model exists for any VS family.

Wang also has an 8 port Enhanced Asynchronous Device Controller which

provides the same connectivity and speeds to workstations and printers as the

WACS units. The EADC is available for the VS 6, 15, 65 and 75E

systems. There is also a single port version of the EADC which may be used when

only a few terminals need a shared connection to the Wang VS. The single port

EADC may be directly connected to the RILC; it is connected to the VS via a Wang

dual coaxial cable.

Supported configurations

Hosts: VS family including VS 6, and 7000

Terminals: Wang Asynchronous VS terminal, Wang PC or IBM PC with

Wang 2110A or VT-100 emulation, DEC VT-100, VT- 102 and VT-220 terminals

and most ANSI X3.64 compatible asynchronous terminals

Printers: PM015 40 cps Daisy Printers, PM019 Color Matrix Printers, PM017

400 cps Printers

Applications supported: VS DP, OFFICE, PACE, VS Word Processing, Word

Processing Plus (WP PLUS)

Data modules

Terminals may be connected to the Meridian 1 via the ASIM or EAILU. PCs may

be connected via terminal products such as an EAILU or. (if no serial port is

available) the card.

Host computers may be connected to the Meridian 1 (via appropriate Wang

Controllers) by using an ASIM, HSDM, or the RILC.

Engineering Handbook

6-68 Meridian Data Services

Figure 6-29

Wang Laboratories, Inc.

with

587

4PDLC

QPC432

Meridian 1

HSDM

QPC

723 D-

QPC

723

WACS u

(16

or 32 ports)

Local Terminal

VS-EADC-1 Port

Engineering Handbook

Meridian Data Services 6-69

Data Services applications

Meridian Data Services provides connectivity solutions for many industries, from

banking to the education market. Using Meridian Data Services, Northern Telecom

customers gain direct connectivity, multiple host access, and port contention

features that can assist in efficient use and management of a data network. The

following examples demonstrate just some of the innovative data applications that

are possible using the Meridian 1 and Meridian Data Services.

Banking industry application Regional Bank Network

One Northern Telecom customer, a regional bank holding company, is installing an

advanced private voice and data network that will use more than 100 Meridian 1

system to interconnect branch offices with the banks data center.

The data network will connect IBM PCs, teller terminals, alarm devices, and

Automated Teller Machines at branch locations to an RS-232 bridge.

The bridge will connect to the High-Speed Data Module, which will in turn be

connected to a Meridian 1 System option 21. Small branches will be connected to a

main branch facility in the area using T-l.

In turn, these larger branches will be

connected to the headquarters location through the use of a T-l Multiplexor.

The High-Speed Data Module is connected to a line card on a Meridian 1 which is

connected to other Meridian via Digital Interface (DTI) and T-l

links. The High-Speed Data Module and the line card will operate at 56 Kbps and

accommodate IBM System Network Architecture (SNA) protocols.

The High-Speed Data Module is also capable of operating at 64 Kbps and when

combined with the ISDN Primary Rate Interface line card will permit 64Kbps

data transmission across the network. The HSDM allows for advanced functionality

today with the added capability for upward migration to an ISDN platform in the

future.

Engineering Handbook

6-70 Meridian Data Services

Figure 6-30

Regional Bank Network

Meridian 1 Option 71

Head

IBM 3725

HOST FEP

PC)

Meridian 1 Option 21

LOCAL

1 21

Terminals

eridian 1 Option 21

Devices

ATM Machines

Voice

Applications

eridian 1

Option 71

Engineering Handbook

Meridian Data Services

6-71

University application Eastern College Network

At a leading Northeastern college progressive philosophy in preparing young people

for contemporary life is evident from the extensive use of a variety of data

processing equipment throughout the college.

Voice and data communications are provided by a Northern Telecom SL- 1.

Computing power for the college is provided by Digital VAX computers, an IBM

3090, and about 1000 Macintosh and MS-DOS personal computers. Using

Meridian Data Services, all of these systems have been tied together in a broad and

varied data network allowing almost every course at the college to involve a

computer in some way. The SL-1 provides switched access to a variety of

computing resources; some examples are provided below.

Business learning lab Many Macintosh systems are used to access business

simulations located on a host computer.. Macintoshes are connected to the host

through the SL- 1, eliminating the need for modems and point-to-point dedicated

connections through existing wiring and direct RS-422 connections.

Faculty and administrative staff both need to access student records, student work,

and business information on computers in several locations. The SL- 1 provides

switched access to specific hosts located on campus. Computer workstations

anywhere on campus can reach the hosts by simply entering the appropriate phone

number.

Meridian Data Services reduces the number of DEC VAX host ports and dedicated

terminals that are needed through use of the MCDS and port contention and features

such as Hotline and Ring Again. For the same reason, a smaller number of protocol

converters are needed for access to IBM mainframes.

Meridian SL Laser Printer Software automatically connects a Macintosh to any

local or remote LaserWriter selected from the Macintosh Chooser, while using any

Macintosh application. Each LaserWriter is connected to the switch, via RS-422

directly or through an EAILU.

This college represents advanced collegiate teaching techniques using the following

advanced tools and Northern Telecom communications equipment.

Host interface applications

File transfers

HyperCard simulations

Engineering Handbook

6-72 Meridian Data Services

Figure 6-31

Eastern College

with PCI Card

100+ Macintoshes

Main Cam

Series 1

Terminals

On-Line Catalog

Astronomical

Engineering Handbook

Meridian Data Services 6-73

Aerospace industry application -defense contractor

Another Northern Telecom customer, a leader in aerospace and advanced

government systems including the Space Shuttle and the Strategic Defense Initial

(SDI), needed a reliable data network that would connect a variety of users to a

variety of computers. This company chose a Meridian 1 and Meridian Data

Services to provide for their diverse data networking needs.

The Meridian 1 connects over two hundred users from different project groups

within me Software Center of Excellence (SCOE) Lab to different computers such

as DEC Data Generals, Sequents, Symbolics, and MS-DOS and Macintosh

personal computers. The Northern Telecom Meridian network provides reduced

moving and changing costs and improved implementation time of moves. With the

Meridian 1 port contention capability, both casual and heavy user can be

accommodated efficiently and cost effectively.

An Ethernet LAN using Bridge Communications servers is connected to the

Meridian 1 with 32 direct RS-232 port connections per server. The Meridian 1

connection enables terminals and PCs not directly connected to the Ethernet LAN to

gain switched access to the network, a much more cost-effective connection for

users not requiring dedicated access. The Ethernet LAN provides PCs (both IBM

and Macintosh computers) high speed access to scientific systems, including SUN,

Sequent and Symbolics computers.

Data access modules designed to support varying transmission requirements for

terminal and host connectivity are used at this company.

Asynchronous/Synchronous Interface Modules are used to connect

terminals within the engineering group to the Meridian 1. Those with MS-DOS

personal computers use the Personal Computer Interface Card to connect.

Macintosh users gain access to the Meridian 1 through the use of an RS-422 direct

connection. The direct connection further reduces communication costs and

simplifies hardware requirements.

The contractor uses an ADM connected to a 3270 protocol converter to provide

access to a remote host computer which houses an electronic mail system for

executives.

This defense contractor, with the flexibility, the reliability, and the cost savings of

advanced technology provided by the Northern Telecom Meridian stands at the

threshold of exciting technological innovations. ,

Engineering Handbook

6-74 Meridian Data Services

Figure 6-32

Defense contractor

RS-422 Direct

Meridian 1

ASCII

DG MV8000

3270 Protocol Communications

Server

Sequent Host

Host

Engineering Handbook

Meridian Data Services 6-75

Computer industry application -workstation manufacturer

A major workstation manufacturer has installed Meridian 1 Systems in most of their

sales offices, in the US and around the world; to deliver both voice and data

communication services to the desktop.

Workstation software automatically places outgoing data calls for access to internal

electronic mail, file transfer and on-line product and program information on this

company’s data network. These calls go through a modem pool on the Meridian 1 to

the public switched network or through an X.25 PAD to a packet switching

network. The Meridian 1 automatically selects the least costly route for long

distance calls.

Users also exchange files using standard communications software at speeds of up

to 19.2 Kbps by simply dialing the extension of the receiving workstation and

executing appropriate send file/receive commands at each workstation.

Figure 6-33

Workstation manufacturer

Engineering Handbook

6-76 Meridian Data Services

Third party compatibility testing program

Northern Telecom Third Party Compatibility Testing Program provides vendors

with an opportunity to test their equipment in Northern Telecom Meridian

environment. This program provides ever widening solutions for customer data

applications with assured compatibility. The following tables list third party

products that have been found compatible with the Meridian 1 at the time of this

publication.

Table 6-2

T-l multiplexors

Table 6-3

Protocol converters

Engineering Handbook

Meridian Data Services 6-77

Table 6-4

Modems

Table 6-5

Other products

Vendor Model Tested With Notes

Raycom 5100 Fiber Optic 1988

Multiplexor

Electronics R-Server

In preparation

Engineering Handbook

6-78 Meridian Data Services

Data products and product codes

The following tables list all Northern Telecom data products and their product

codes. Also, Table 6-10 provides the interface matrix between various products and

line cards.

Table 6-6

Terminal/host connection

Product description Code

Add-on Data Module (RS232) QMT8

Add-on Data Module (V.35)

High-Speed Data Module

Interface Module

Macintosh Cable

QMT21

A0326760

A0326761

A0326762

A0326763

PC Interface Card

Enhanced Interface Line Unit (Male)

Enhanced Interface Line Unit (Female)

QPC512

A0344336

A0344337

Coax Interface Module

Coax Interface Card

Data Option (M2000 Series) NT1

Data Option (M3000 Series)

Meridian Programmable Data Option

High Speed Data Card

NT1

QPC918

Engineering Handbook

Meridian Data Services 6-79

Table 6-7

Data Line Cards

Engineering Handbook

6-80 Meridian Data Services

Table 6-8

Shelves/cabinets/cables

Product description

Code

Coax Balun

Balun

MVC02032

Dual Coax Balun

Multi-Channel Coax System

MVC02033

Multi-Channel Coax System Faceplate

Multi-Channel Coax System Optional Power

BNC Coax Cable 8FT

BNC Coax Cable 16FT

Multi-Channel Data System Shelf

Multi-Channel Data System 11 Ov Power

QSD27

QSY27

Multi-Channel Data System Power

Multi-Channel Data System Rack Cabinet

QSY32

QCA76

Multi-Channel Data System Desk Cabinet QCA77

Octopus Cable Female QCAD318

Octopus Cable Male QCAD319

Patch Panel A0336982

Table 6-9

Software

Product description

Meridian SL Laser Printer Software

with Meridian Extension

Code

A0345240

Engineering Handbook

Meridian Data Services

Table

Product/interface card matrix

ADM

w/V.35

Mac Direct

Connect

Modem Pool

(Smart)

Dumb Modem

in, or

Sync in/out)

3270 Protocol

Converters

sys

Protocol Converter

HSDC

Engineering Handbook

7-1

Chapter

System

Contents

Introduction

Autoquote

Configuration guidelines

Meridian 1 system options hardware provisioning

Universal Equipment Modules

Power and cooling equipment

Common Equipment cards

Peripheral Equipment cards

Station equipment

Software provisioning

Introduction

System configuration of the Meridian 1 SL-1 system options involves determining

the hardware and software necessary to meet the specific requirements of the

installation. This determination is based upon parameters related to quantity and

type of terminals, telephones, traffic, features, and services. An assessment of these

requirements indicates which particular member of the Meridian 1 system family is

best suited to address those particular needs.

Autoquote

The Autoquote mechanism readily provides a system configuration based upon

specific input data pertaining to the required parameters. In addition to providing a

listing of hardware and software and their associated ordering codes, reports may

also be generated to denote traffic, memory, and real time estimations. Engineering

rules determine equipment provisioning and the capability exists to specify

requirements on an “equipped” and “wired for” basis to address future growth

projections. Other services available include the capability to:

quote all available software generics and associated optional feature groups

quote all standard hardware items

indicate which hardware and software items are on a controlled release basis

configure systems to support non-blocking and RPE applications

generate configurations for different options using the same input data

requirements

save and later retrieve input data from one run and modify it for a subsequent

run

specify the spare capacity available in terms of memory, real time, traffic, and

hardware.

7-2 System configuration

Configuration guidelines

The following reference tables provide information which relates to provisioning

and compatibility guidelines are provided to assist in the configuration aspects of

Meridian

system options and 71.

Table 7-1

Meridian 1 system comparison A,

Network

Traffic

Loops 24 24

14 28 140

TDS

210

10 --

Storage disk disk disk disk disk

System configuration 7-3

Table 7-2

Meridian 1 hardware compatibility Common Equipment

CODE DESCRIPTION 21A 21 51 61 71

Modules

CPU/Network Module

AC, Common/Peripheral Equipment Module x

CPU Module

Network Module x* x

Inter Group Module

-continued

* Network Module can be used in these System Options for cards

only, not for network-type cards.

7-4 System configuration

Table 7-2

Meridian 1 hardware compatibility Common Equipment (continued)

CODE

DESCRIPTION

21A 21 51 61 71

Cards

Superloop Network

XXX

Conference/Tone and Digit Switch

XXX

Receiver

Memory/Peripheral Signaling

Serial Data Interface paddle board (dual

XXX

Floppy Disk Unit

X XXXX

Multi Disk Unit

XXX

QMM42 Security Data Cartridge

X XXXX

QPC43 Peripheral Signaling

XXX

Segmented Bus Extender

Intergroup Switch

QPC414 Network

XXXXX

-continued

System configuration 7-5

Table 7-2

Meridian 1 hardware compatibility Common Equipment (continued)

CODE DESCRIPTION

21A 21 51 61 71

QPC417 Ju Board

QPC441 Three-Port Extender

XXX

Clock Controller

X XXXX

QPC477 Bus Terminating Unit

XXX

Enhanced Serial Data Interface

X XXXX

QPC579 CPU Function

XXX

QPC580 CPU Interface

XXX

QPC581 Changeover and Memory Arbitrator

XXX

PC583 Memory

XXX

QPC584 Mass Storage Interface

XXX

QPC687

CPU with

QPC720 Primary Rate Interface

X XXXX

QPC742 Floppy Disk Interface

XXX

-continued

7-6 System configuration

Table 7-2

Meridian 1 hardware compatibility Common Equipment (continued)

DESCRIPTION

21 51 61 71

QPC757 D-Channel Handler Interface

QPC841 Four-Port Serial Data Interface

XXX

Q PC939 Read-Only Memory

XXX

Q PC940 Read-Only Memory

System configuration 7-7

Table 7-3

Meridian 1 hardware compatibility Peripheral Equipment

CODE DESCRIPTION 21A 21 51 61 71

Modules

Peripheral Equipment Module

XXXX

Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module

XXXX

Remote Peripheral Equipment Module

XXXX

Cards

AD Controller-2

Controller-4

XXXX

XXX

continued

7-8 Svstem

Table 7-3

Meridian 1 hardware compatibility Peripheral Equipment (continued)

DESCRIPTION

21A 21 51 61 71

Digital Line card

XX-XX

Analog Line card

XXXXX

Analog Message Waiting Line card

XXX

Universal Trunk

XXXXX

E&M Trunk

XXXXX

Receiver

XXXXX

QPC62 1.5 Baud Converter

XXXX

QPC63 Local Carrier Buffer

XXXX

QPC65 Remote Peripheral Switch

XX XX

2M Baud Converter

XXXX

QPC67 Carrier Maintenance

XXXX

Carrier Interface

XXXX

E&M/DX Signaling and Paging Trunk

XXX X

QPC192 Off-Premises Extension Line

XXXX

-continued

System configuration 7-9

Table 7-3

Meridian 1 hardware compatibility Peripheral Equipment (continued)

CODE DESCRIPTION

51 61

QPC237 4-wire E&M/DX signaling trunk

QPC250 Release Trunk

QPC297 Attendant Console Monitor

QPC422 Tone Detector

PC430 Asynchronous Interface Line

QPC432 4-Port Data Line

QPC449 Loop Signaling Trunk

QPC450 Trunk

QPC578 Integrated Services Digital tine

QPC594 Line

QPC659 Dual Loop Peripheral Buffer

QPC723 RS-232 4-Port Interface Line

QPC789

QPC918

Line (Message

Waiting)

High Speed Data Card

: All of above, from QPC71 to QPC918 are only supported via PE

7-10 System configuration

Table 7-4

Meridian 1 hardware compatibility power equipment

CODE DESCRIPTION

21A 21 51 61 71

Switched Mode Rectifier

Peripheral Equipment Power Supply DC

XXXX

AA Common Equipment Power Supply DC

XXXX

Switched Mode Rectifier

XXX

Junction Box

XXXX

Logic Return Equalizer

Fan and Sensor Panel

Ringing Generator DC

XXXX

Common/Peripheral Equipment Power x

XXXX

Supply DC (also used on DC RPE)

OAA Power Distribution Unit DC

XXXX

Rectifier Rack

XXX

Common/Peripheral Equipment Power x

XXXX

Supply AC (also used on AC RPE)

System Monitor System Option

continued

System configuration 7-11

Table 7-4

Meridian hardware compatibility power equipment (continued)

CODE DESCRIPTION

61 71

Fan Unit x

Rectifier Baffle/Mounting Kit

Peripheral Equipment Power Supply AC

AA Ringing Generator AC

System Monitor

Common Equipment Power Supply AC

Power Failure Transfer Unit

Blower Unit

XXXX

XXX

XXXX

Power Distribution Unit AC

XXXX

Power Distribution Unit System Option

Module Power Distribution Unit

XXXX

Module Power Distribution Unit

XXXX

continued

7-12 System configuration

Table 7-4

Meridian 1 hardware compatibility power equipment (continued)

CODE DESCRIPTION

21A 21 51 61 71

Module Power Distribution Unit

Temperature Sensor Panel

XXXX

Battery Distribution Box

XX XX

QBL15 Power/Battery Distribution Box

XXX

DC Power Plant

QPC188 Battery Monitor (Part of QBL 15)

XXXX

System configuration 7-13

Meridian 1 system options hardware provisioning

Following is a description of all hardware equipment of the Meridian 1 system

options 2 that can be ordered individually. The items are described in

terms of purpose, quantity required, and system hardware (system option), as

appropriate.

Universal Equipment Modules

CPU/Network Module

System hardware-System

option

CPU/Network Module (hereafter referred to as

CPU/NET) houses a Central Processor Unit (CPU) and network cards.

This module is available in two versions:

for AC systems

for DC systems

The CPU/NET card cage contains 18 card slots which support the

following cards and functions:

network cards

Clock Controller

Serial Data Interface Serial Data Interface (ESDI)

Peripheral Signaling

3-Port Extender (3PE)

mass storage unit

CPU Function

CPU Interface

Changeover Memory Arbitrator (CMA)

Memory

D-Channel Handler

Interface

(DCHI)

Primary Rate Interface Trunk Interface (DTI)

The CPU/NET Module is powered by a Common Equipment Power

Quantity-One

per system option 5 1 two per system option 6 1

7-14 System configuration

Meridian Mail Module

System

hardware--System option

Purpose-The

Meridian Mail Module is a self-contained unit, complete

with power converters and cooling units. It is designed to integrate with 1

Communication Systems but is also available as a stand-alone system.

This module is available in two versions:

for AC systems

for DC systems

The Meridian Mail Module is powered by two Common Equipment Power

Supplies.

Refer to the Meridian Mail suite of documents for detailed

information.

Quantity-Maximum

of five per system

AC, DC Common/Peripheral Equipment Module

System

option 21 and 21A

Purpose-The

Common/Peripheral Equipment Module (hereafter referred

to as supports CPU, network, and Intelligent Peripheral

Equipment cards in a single module.

This module is available in two versions:

for AC systems

for DC systems

The card cage contains 20 card slots which support the

followingcards and functions:

Floppy Disk Interface Disk Unit

CPU

Memory

network

Receiver (DTR)

DCHI

System configuration

The Module is powered by a Common/Peripheral Equipment

Power Supply.

Quantity-One

per system

Peripheral Equipment Module

System

option

Peripheral Equipment Module referred to as

PE) supports the Dual Loop Buffer (DLB), and 10 card PE

Buffer is situated near the center of the module, with five cards to the left and five

cards to the right.

This module is available in two versions:

for AC systems

for DC systems

The PE Module is powered by a Peripheral Equipment Power Supply, and

a Ringing when sets are supported by the module.

Quantity-As

required; refer to engineering

CPU Module

System hardware-System

option 71

CPU Module (hereafter referred to as CPU)

houses the CPU, memory cards, and the mass storage.

This module is available in two versions:

for AC systems

for DC systems

The CPU card cage contains 15 card slots which support the following

cards and functions:

Memory

CMA

CPU Interface

CPU Function

Segmented Bus Extender (SBE)

DCHI

Clock Controller

Mass Storage Unit (MSU) or Floppy Disk Unit

7-16 System

The CPU Module is powered by a Common Equipment Power Supply.

Quantity-Two per system

Network Module

System

option 71

Network Module (hereafter referred to as

NET)provides signal interface between the Common Equipment (CE) cards

located in the module.

This module is available in two versions:

for AC systems

for DC systems

The NET card cage contains 15 card slots which support the following

cards and functions:

3PE

Intergroup Switch (IGS) (for system option 71 only)

peripheral signaling

network cards

The NET Module is powered by a Common Equipment Power Supply.

Quantity-A

maximum of 10 per system (five network groups), excluding

additional requirements for

Inter Group Module

System

option 71

Inter Group Module provides a path for the switching

of traffic between the network groups in the system. Faceplate cables from

Clock Controller (CC) and Intergroup Switch (IGS) circuit cards are connected to

the Inter Group Module. This module uses a QPC417 Junctor Board.

This module is used in both AC and DC systems.

Quantity-One

per system

Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module

System option 1

Purpose-The Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module (hereafter

referred to as IPE) supports a Controller card and 16 IPE cards. The

Controller card situated near the center of the module, between slot 7 and slot 8.

This module is available in two versions:

System configuration

7-17

for AC systems

for DC systems

The card slots in the IPE card cage support the following cards:

Universal Trunk

Receiver (DTR)

Analog Line card (ALC)

Digital Line card (DLC)

Analog Message Waiting Line card (MLC)

The IPE Module is powered by a Peripheral Equipment Power Supply,

and a Ringing Generator when sets are supported by the module.

Quantity-As

required; refer to

System

engineering (553-3001-151)

Remote Peripheral Equipment Module

System

option

Purpose--The

Remote Peripheral Equipment Module (hereafter referred

to as RPE) is an interface module used to extend the interconnection

distance between local and remote sites.

The same module is used for local and remote applications. On the local side,

it interfaces to the QPC414 Network card for up to two network loops; on the

remote side, it supports the PE Module.

This module is available in two versions:

for AC systems

for DC systems

The RPE card cage contains 12 card slots which support the following

cards and functions:

1.5 Mb converter

Mb converter

carrier interface

remote peripheral

local carrier buffer

carrier interface

Mb converter

1.5 Mb converter

carrier maintenance

(optional)

7-18 System configuration

The RPE Module is powered by a Common Equipment/Peripheral

Equipment Power Supply.

Quantity-Since each RPE Module serves two network loops, the

number of modules required per system depends on the number of stations in the

remote site.

Packaging

Spacer Kit

System Hardware-All

modules together for side-by-side expansion. The Spacer

includes:

expansion spacer

RF gasketing

eight bushings

Universal Equipment Module cover

System Hardware-All

Purpose--This is the front or rear cover that is part of the UEM. Two covers are

required for each UEM.

Universal Equipment Module side panel

System Hardware-All

is the side panel (PO699724) that is part of the UEM.

A maximum

of eight panels are required for multi-column systems.

Card cage assemblies

A card cage assembly consists of a sheet metal case and an associated backplane.

The card cage provides the physical framework that houses the circuitry and power

supplies within the UEM.

The following is a list of all the card cage assemblies available and their

corresponding

CPU/Network Module

11 AC/DC Common/Peripheral Equipment

Module

Peripheral Equipment-Module

CPU Module

Network Module

Intelligent Peripheral Equipment

Module

Remote Peripheral Equipment

Module

System 7-19

Top Cap

System Hardware-AU

top cap is mounted on the highest module of each column. The top

cap is approximately 80 cm (31.5 in.) wide by 55.9 cm (22 in.) deep by 7.6 cm (3

in.) high and weighs 3.6 kg (8 lbs). It consists of a front and a rear air exhaust grill

and thermal sensors. System option 21A contains a small fan to cool the power

Three versions of the top cap are available:

AC systems

DC systems

system option 21A only

Pedestal

System Hardware-All

Purpose-The

Pedestal is a base unit made of die-cast construction. It is

approximately 80 cm (3 1.5 in.) wide by 64.8 cm (25.5 in.) deep by 25.4 cm (10 in.)

high and weighs 13.6 kg (30 lbs) empty. Leveling feet are provided for up to four

tiers, while a caster option is provided for up to two tiers.

The pedestal is available in three versions:

for AC systems

for system option 21A only

for DC systems

The pedestal for AC and DC systems (except system option 21A) can house any of

the following field replaceable assemblies:

Power Distribution Unit or

Blower Unit or

Fan Unit

Leveling foot

A0318207

Air grill (molded)

PO699797

Air filter

PO699798

The pedestal for system option 21A is basically the same as the one used for other

system options except it can only house the following field-replaceable assemblies:

Power Distribution Unit

Leveling foot

A03 18207

Air grill (molded)

PO699797

7-20 System configuration

Power and cooling equipment

System Hardware-System

option 2 1 A

A0367754 Top Cap Fan is located in the Fan and Sensor Panel. It

provides cooling for the power Supply AC. There is no speed

or temperature control provided with it. Power to the Top Cap Fan is controlled by

the circuit breaker located on the back panel of the pedestal.

Quantity-One per

system

Switched Mode Rectifier

System Hardware-System

option 7 1 (DC version)

Purpose-Solid state, switched-mode rectifier. Converts VAC (nominal)

to -48 VDC (nominal), with a 50A output. Used in the QCA13 power plant, with

up to ten rectifiers in parallel.

Quantity-As

required by system power consumption

Peripheral Equipment Power Supply DC

System Hardware-All

Peripheral Equipment Power Supply DC is used to provide power to

all peripheral equipment modules in DC systems. It converts -48V DC to

and -48V DC voltages used to power peripheral equipment

logic cards and to supply talk battery to lines and trunks. This power supply is

located in the far left hand card slot labeled “PE Pwr Sup”.

Quantity-One

Peripheral Equipment Power Supply DC is used in each of the

following DC modules:

Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module

Peripheral Equipment Module

AA Common Equipment Power Supply DC

System Hardware-All

Purpose-The

Common Equipment Power Supply DC is used in the common

equipment modules in DC systems.

It is located in the first slot on the left in the

module labeled “CE Pwr Sup”. It converts -48V DC to and V DC to

provide all required voltages for CE and network circuit cards

Quantity-One

Common Equipment Power Supply DC is used in each of the

following DC modules:

CPU Module

Network Module

CPU/Network Module

System configuration 7-21

Two Common Equipment Power Supply DC units are used in the Meridian Mail

Module

Switched Mode Rectifier

System Hardware-System option (DC versions)

Switched-Mode Rectifier is based on the QRF12 rectifier, with

shielding to limit electromagnetic interference. It converts VAC (nominal)

to -48 VDC (nominal), with a 30A output. It connects to the through the

Battery Distribution Box.

Quantity-Generally one rectifier per every three modules. Exact quantity

depends on system configuration and power requirements.

Junction Box

System Hardware-All (DC version)

Purpose-The

Junction Box is required when the distance from the rectifier to the

pedestal is over 0.74 m (8 ft), which requires wire larger than 10 AWG. It provides

a set of connection terminals for the 4-AWG wire that comes from the rectifier, and

a set of connection terminals for the wire that goes into the pedestal.

Refer to Power engineering (553-3001-152) for more information.

Quantity-One

per DC pedestal

Logic Return Equalizer

System

Hardware-System option 7 1 (DC version)

Purpose--The

Logic Return Equalizer mounts on top of the QCA13 cabinet.

It is used as the single point ground for system option 71.

Quantity-One

per system

Fan and Sensor Panel

System

Hardware-System option 2 1 A

Fan and Sensor Panel contains a 230 VAC tubeaxial

fan (A0367754) and a thermal sensor for a high temperature/shutdown alarm to the

Option 21A System Monitor. The fan provides cooling for the

Common/Peripheral Equipment Power Supply. It is on and receives

power directly from the Power distribution Unit via the power harness.

The Fan and Sensor Panel consists of the following:

a perforated top shield

a Top Cap Fan (A0367754)

a fan power harness

a thermostat harness

7-22 System configuration

Quantity-One per system

Ringing Generator DC

System Hardware-All

DC system options

Purpose-The

Ringing Generator DC operates from a nominal -48V DC input and

provides selectable AC ringing voltage outputs superimposed on -48 VDC. The

frequency and voltage options are and VAC. It also supplies

-15OV DC Message Waiting lamp set applications. The Ringing

Generator DC mounts in the PE modules to the right of the Peripheral Equipment

Power Supply DC.

Quantity-One

Ringing Generator DC is used in each of the following, when these

DC modules support or analog sets:

Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module

Peripheral Equipment Module

Common/Peripheral Equipment Power Supply DC

System Hardware-All (DC

options)

Purpose---The

Common/Peripheral Equipment Power Supply DC converts -48V

DC to and -150V DC voltages used to power

peripheral and common equipment, supply talk battery, and light Message Waiting

lamps on sets. It provides selectable AC ringing voltage outputs

superimposed on -48 VDC. The frequency and voltage options are Hz and

VAC. It is located to the left of the module, in the slot labeled

Pwr Sup”.

Quantity-One

Common/Peripheral Equipment Power Supply DC is used in each

of the following DC Modules:

Common/Peripheral Equipment Module

Remote Peripheral Equipment Module

Power Distribution Unit DC

System Hardware-All

except system option 2 1 A

Purpose--The

Power Distribution Unit DC distributes power to the

entire column. It is located in the rear of the pedestal. It houses five circuit

breakers (one for each Module and one for the Blower Unit) and the System

Monitor.

Quantity-One

per pedestal/column in DC systems

Rectifier Rack

System (DC

versions)

Purpose--This is a open relay rack which is approximately 1.5 m

(5 ft) high. It supports up to three Rectifiers in a single column.

System configuration 7-23

Quantity-One rack per every three Rectifiers, up to a maximum of

three racks per system

Common/Peripheral Equipment Power Supply AC

System Hardware-System Options And all RPE

Purpose-The Common/Peripheral Equipment Power Supply AC converts

AC to and voltages used to

power peripheral and common equipment, supply talk battery, and light Message

Waiting lamps on sets. It provides selectable AC ringing voltage outputs

superimposed on -48 VDC. The frequency and voltage options are Hz and

VAC. It is located in the left of the module, in the slot labeled

Pwr Sup”.

Quantity-One Common/Peripheral Equipment Power Supply AC is used in each

of the following AC modules:

Common/Peripheral Equipment Module

Remote Peripheral Equipment Module

System Monitor System Option 21 A

System Hardware-System option 21A

Purpose-The

System Monitor System Option 21A provides an

interface to communicate and monitor the Power Supply AC,

the CPU, and the thermal switches. In the event of failure, the System

System Option 21A is notified and the appropriate alarm is set. A system alarm

LED located below the top cap lights to indicate CPU failure.

Quantity-One per system

Fan Unit AC

System

Hardware-System option 21 with up to two tiers

Purpose-The

Fan Unit AC is housed within the pedestal and

provides cooling for the entire column. It consists of three fans and a circuit breaker

located in the front.

Quantity-One

per pedestal

Fan Unit DC

System

Hardware--System option 21 with up to two tiers

Fan Unit DC is the same as the Fan Unit

AC except that it is used for DC systems. It has an on/off switch in the front and its

own separate circuit breaker located on the Power Distribution Unit.

Quantity-One

per pedestal

Rectifier Baffle/Mounting Kit

System option (DC versions)

7-24 System configuration

Rectifier Baffle/Mounting Kit consists of a set of support brackets

for mounting the Rectifier to an Rack, and a heat baffle

plate. The baffle directs exhaust air from the lower rectifier away from the inlet to

the upper rectifier, thereby allowing cooling by natural convection .

Quantity-One

per Rectifier

Peripheral Equipment Supply AC

System Hardware-All

except system option 21A

Peripheral Equipment Power Supply AC is used to provide power to

all peripheral equipment modules in AC systems. It converts AC to

and -48V DC voltages used to power peripheral equipment

logic cards and to supply talk battery to lines and trunks. This power supply is

located in the far left-hand card slot labeled “PE Pwr Sup”.

Quantity-One

Peripheral Equipment Power Supply AC is used in each of the

following AC modules:

Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module

Peripheral Equipment Module

AA Ringing Generator AC

System Hardware-All

except system option 21A

Purpose-The

Ringing Generator AC operates from a nominal VAC input

and provides selectable AC ringing voltage outputs superimposed on -48 VDC. The

frequency and voltage options are Hz and VAC. It also supplies

-150V DC Message Waiting lamp set applications. The Ringing

Generator AC mounts in the PE modules to the right of the Peripheral Equipment

Power Supply.

Quantity-One

Ringing Generator AC is used in each of the following, when these

AC Modules support or analog sets:

Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module

Peripheral Equipment Module

System Monitor

System Hardware-All

except system option 2 1 A

System Monitor monitors the status of all internal

power and cooling related components, as well as external DC rectifiers, batteries,

and Uninterruptable Power Supplies (UPS). The System Monitor is mounted in the

Power Distribution Unit, within the Pedestal.

The System Monitor that handles the communication with the system CPU (via

port) is the master; all others function as slaves. There is a serial communication

link between the master and the slave System Monitors. In addition to CPU status

reporting, the System Monitor also controls all external visual status indications.

System configuration 7-25

Quantity-One

master and up to 63 slave System Monitors are allowed per system.

Common Equipment Power Supply AC

System Hardware-System option 5

Common Equipment Power Supply AC is used in the common

equipment modules in AC systems.

It is located in the first slot on the left in the

module labeled “CE Pwr Sup”. It converts AC to and V DC to

provide all required voltages for CE and network circuit cards.

Quantity-One

Common Equipment Power Supply AC is used in each of the

following AC Modules:

CPU Module

Network Module

CPU/Network Module

Two Common Equipment Power Supply AC is used in the Meridian Mail Module

A0355200 Power Failure Transfer Unit

System Hardware-All

except system option 21A

an interface between CO lines, PBX, and phones

(rotary dial and pushbutton). The Power Failure Transfer Unit allows eight phones

to be connected to the CO lines in the event of a PBX power failure or malfunction.

The Power Fail Transfer Unit is transparent to the switch and CO lines during

normal PBX operations.

The Power Failure Transfer Unit is approximately 22.8 cm (9 in) long by 22.8 cm (9

in) wide by 8.8 cm (3.5 in) deep. It is screw-mounted to the Distribution Frame and

connects to the Main Distribution Frame and switch by two 25-pair cables.

Quantity-As required

Blower Unit

System Hardware-All

except system option

Purpose-The

Blower Unit is part of the system cooling assembly and provides

forced-convection cooling. Housed within the pedestal, it contains two

curved impellers (rotor blades) which are cylindrically shaped, approximately 22.8

cm in diameter, and 6.9 cm (2.75 in) thick. A circuit is located on the

front of the blower chassis to turn the unit on and off. Each unit weighs about 1.5

kg (3.5 lbs).

The unit communicates with the power distribution section by engaging a connector

in the rear of the pedestal.

Quantity-One

per pedestal in AC systems

7-26 System configuration

Blower Unit

System Hardware-AU except system option 21 A

Blower Unit is the same as the Blower Unit except that

it is used for DC systems. It has its own separate circuit breaker located on the

Power Distribution Unit.

Also, for maintainability in the field, a switch is located

on the front of the blower chassis to turn the unit on and off.

Quantity-One per pedestal in DC systems

Power Distribution Unit AC

System Hardware-All except system option 21A

Power Distribution Unit AC distributes power to the entire column.

It is located in the rear of the pedestal. It houses a main circuit breaker and the

System Monitor.

Quantity-One per pedestal/column in AC systems

Power Distribution Unit System Option 21A

System option 21A

Power Distribution Unit System Option 21A is a panel located in

the pedestal. It contains a circuit breaker, a terminal block, and an filter. The

power cable enters the pedestal and connects to the circuit breaker. From the circuit

breaker, the AC voltage goes to the terminal block through the EM1 filter and back

to the terminal block where it is distributed to the Power

Supply AC and the fan located in the top cap.

Quantity-One per system

Module Power Distribution Unit

System Hardware-All except system option 21A

Module Power Distribution Unit protects the power

supply and distributes power within a module. It houses a single breaker and is

used in conjunction with the CE Power Supply AC.

Quantity-One per NET, CPU/NET, or

CPU Module

Module Power Distribution Unit

System Hardware-All except system option 21A

Purpose-The Module Power Distribution Unit protects the power

supply and distributes power within a module. It houses a single breaker and is

used in conjunction with the Power Supply AC.

Quantity-One per RPE Module

System configuration 7-27

Module Power Distribution Unit

System Hardware--All

except system option 21A

Purpose--The

Module Power Distribution Unit protects the power

supply and distributes power within a module. It houses a dual breaker and is used

in conjunction with the PE Power AC and the

Ringing Generator AC.

Quantity-One

per PE or IPE Module

Temperature Sensor Panel

System

except system option 2

Purpose-The

Temperature Sensor Panel communicates with the System

Monitor in the event of overheating. It contains two temperature sensors which

protect against thermal damage by detecting extreme temperature.

The Temperature Sensor Panel is available in two versions:

for AC systems

for DC systems

The Temperature Sensor Panel consists of the following:

a perforated shield panel

an LED bracket

a thermostat harness

an air probe harness or

an air probe connector bracket (PO703064 or PO708 186)

Quantity-One

per top cap

Battery Distribution Box

System Hardware--All (DC versions)

Purpose-Connects

customer-provided power supplies to the system. Allows

connection of up to 24 modules. Provides connection points, fused outputs, and

monitoring of rectifiers and batteries.

Quantity-One per

system

Power/Battery Distribution Box --

System Hardware---System

option (DC versions)

Purpose-Allows the parallel connection of up to three Rectifiers, for

connection to the system and to reserve batteries. Includes main fuses, diode

blocking, test points, QPC188 battery monitor card, and sense lead fusing on

connections from each rectifier.

7-28 System configuration

Quantity-One per every three Rectifiers, up to a maximum of two

per system

QCA13 DC Power Plant

System Hardware--System

option 71 (DC version)

of a primary power cabinet with fusing and distribution

hardware, monitoring and control, and up to four Rectifiers. Up to

two supplemental cabinets can be added, with up to four rectifiers in the first

supplemental cabinet and up to two rectifiers in the second cabinet, for a total of 10

rectifiers and a total system capacity of 500A. (This power system is also referred

to as the 52412 power plant;

more commonly used name.) QCA13 is actually the cabinet designation, but is the

Quantity-As required by system power consumption

QPC188 Battery Monitor

System Hardware-All (DC

versions)

in each Battery Distribution Box to monitor rectifier and battery

voltages. Generates low float alarm, low voltage trip alarm and sense lead fuse

conditions.

Quantity-One

circuit card in QBL12 or

QRF12 -52 V Rectifier

System Hardware-System

option (DC version)

115 V AC and 220 V AC to -52 V DC (nominal).

voltage conversions from 90V to and 190V to 250V. Connects to the

columns through the Power/Battery Distribution Box.

Quantity-One

for every two, or three modules, depending on load and

redundancy requirements.

Common Equipment cards

Superloop Network

System Hardware-All

Purpose-

Provides 120 time slots (one superloop) interface between Network and

Intelligent Peripheral Equipment.

Utilizes the equivalence of four network loops.

May be connected to one or two Controller card(s).

The Superloop Network card is equipped with a Motorola

microprocessor which performs network diagnostics and signaling control, and

communicates with the Intelligent Peripheral Controller.

Quantity-Up to four per Network Module as required. Refer to

System

engineering

(553-3001-151) for engineering details.

System configuration 7-29

Conference/Tone and Digit Switch (TDS)

System Hardware-All

Purpose--Provides

both Conference and TDS functions. This card accesses two

network loops, one for each function.

The Conference circuitry has a warning tone and supports broadcast mode.

Up to 15 simultaneous conferences can be controlled with the restriction that the

total number of conferees in all conferences is not greater than 30.

The TDS circuitry provides tones for different countries (up to 256 tones and

cadences).

Quantity-As required.

Refer to system engineering (553-3001-151) for

engineering details.

Receiver

System Hardware-System option 2 1

and 2 1 A

the functionality of the Network Controller and

Receiver cards in a mother/daughterboard assembly. The mother board plugs into a

dedicated slot on the backplane. The daughter board attaches to the mother board

through an connector and does not connect to the backplane.

Quantity-One

per Module

Memory/Peripheral Signaling

System Hardware-System option 2 1 and 2 1 A

the functionality of the Memory and Peripheral Signaling

cards, as well as miscellaneous CPU functions.

The CPU functions include interrupt and fault monitoring.

The Peripheral Signaling function provides:

signaling interface between CPU and Peripheral Equipment for up to 32

network loops

clock and timing signals for real-time transmission functions

Quantity-One

per Module

AA Serial Data Interface paddle board (dual-port)

System Hardware-System

option 2 1 A/2 1

Purpose--Provides two serial ports between the SL-1 processor and an external

device. Each port supports

RS-232-C interface

8-bit ASCII data with parity and stop bit

asynchronous, start-stop operation

7-30 System configuration

data rates of and 9600 baud

Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) mode

Data Communication Equipment (DCE) mode

Quantity-Three

maximum per Module; two maximum per

CPU/NET Module

Floppy Disk Unit

System hardware-All

Purpose-The

Floppy Disk Unit is used to load the programs and office

data into the system memory. The FDU contains two 3.5inch floppy drives and is

controlled by the QPC742 Floppy Disk Interface Each floppy drive has a

formatted capacity of 1.44 MB.

The FDU occupies two adjacent card slots in the CPU, Network, or PE Module. It

is powered through the cable connecting it to the FDI. The FDU can be connected

to one or two as required by the system.

Quantity-One

per system

Multi Disk Unit

System hardware-System option

Multi Disk Unit (MDU) is used to load the programs and office data

into the system memory. The MDU contains the following:

two 3.5inch floppy1 drives which are connected to the SCSI interface through

the SCSI/floppy controller; each drive has a formatted capacity of 1.44 MB

a 3.5inch hard disk drive which has a built-in SCSI interface and a capacity of

20 MB

an SCSI/floppy controller

The MDU occupies three adjacent card slots in the CPU, CPU/NET, or Network

Module and requires and 12V from the module. The MDU is controlled by the

QPC584 Mass Storage Interface (MSI). The MDU can be connected to one or two

as needed.

Quantity-One

per system

QMM42 Security Data Cartridge

System Hardware-AU

Purpose--This is a security measure that allows a customer access only to software

packages purchased for his system. This security data cartridge is mounted on

either the QPC584 Mass Storage Interface or QPC742 Floppy Disk Interface card.

Quantity-One per card

System configuration

7-31

QPC43 Peripheral Signaling

System Hardware-System option 5

a signaling interface between the CPU and PE via the Network

cards. Provides basic bit rate 2.048 MHz clock and timing signals for real-time

functions.

Quantity-One per NET or Module

QPC215 Segmented Bus Extender

System Hardware-System option 71

Purpose--The Segmented Bus Extender (SBE) extends CPU bus signals (address,

data, and control) to the Network Module. It also allows recovery of calls by

isolating bus faults to a single network group.

or later vintage is required.

Quantity-One circuit card in each CPU per network group, with a maximum of

five per CPU

QPC412 Intergroup Switch

System Hardware-System option 71

Purpose+-Provides space switching between network groups in multigroup

systems.

Quantity-Two Network Module (use vintage C when two or more groups are

installed)

QPC414 Network

System Hardware-All

30 time slots interface per each of two network loops. Provides

speech path switching, signaling and control circuits for two network loops.

Interfaces between network and PE, RPE, and Meridian Mail

Modules, and cards.

Quantity-As required; refer to

System engineering

(553-3001-151)

QPC417 Junctor Board

System Hardware---System option 71

space switching paths between network groups in multigroup

systems for up to five groups.

Quantity-One per system

QPC441 Three-Port Extender

System Hardware-System option

System configuration

Purpose-Extends CPU data, address and control signals between one

NET Module and a QPC215 Segmented Bus Extender on a CPU Module in Option

71. In Option 61, interfaces between two CPU/NET Modules. (Also

required in Option 5 1.)

Quantity-One

per

NET

Module

Clock Controller

System Hardware-All

Purpose-The

Clock Controller (CC) is used in system option 71 to synchronize

the Meridian 1 network to an external source clock and to generate and distribute

clock to the Meridian 1 system. It is also used with in all system options.

Note: QPC47 1 C or later vintage is required.

Quantity-Two

for system option 71, and one per CPU when DTI or PRA is

required in other options.

QPC477 Bus Terminating Unit

System

Hardware--System option 5

Terminating Units are installed in the CE Modules. They

provide a logical termination to the CPU and network buses. They are paddle

boards installed in dedicated slots, between circuit cards from the front of the

module.

Quantity-The

following vintages are required for the modules listed:

One required for each

CPU/NET

and each NET

One required for each CPU/NET and each NET

One required for each CPU

One required for each CPU/NET

Enhanced Serial Data Interface

System Hardware--All

two serial data interface circuits that can be configured for

either synchronous or asynchronous data communications at rates of up to 64 kbps

(synchronous) or 19.2 kbps (asynchronous).

Note: Use 13D with Meridian Mail option and other applications

requiring Integrated Services Digital Network Application Protocol,

Quantity-As

required per application

System configuration 7-33

QPC579 CPU Function

System Hardware-System option 5 1

CPU Function card works in conjunction with the CPU Interface

card (QPC580). It contains the main CPU logic circuitry. The CPU provides a

bit data bus. The CPU Function card contains a system ROM.

Quantity-One

per

CPU Module

QPC580 CPU Interface

System Hardware--System option 5 1

Purpose-Contains the logic required to interface the CPU with the external

address bus and detects, identifies and isolates bus faults. Works in conjunction

with QPC579 CPU Function card.

Quantity-One

per CPU Module

QPC581 Changeover and Memory Arbitrator

System

Hardware-System option 5 1

Purpose-The

Changeover and Memory Arbitrator (CMA) card controls CPU

access to the duplicated memory in dual CPU systems, automatically disables faulty

memory cards and controls CPU changeover. The CMA switches from one CPU to

the other in the event of a CPU fault.

Quantity-Two

CMA cards are required per system (one per CPU/Memory

configuration).

QPC583 Memory

System

Hardware--System option 5 1

Purpose-Provides 768K of Random Access Memory (RAM).

Quantity-One

per CPU for system option two maximum per system option

QPC584 Mass Storage Interface

System Hardware-System option

between the Multi Disk Unit (MDU) and CPU(s). Provides

address matching, disk drive control, data buffering and interrupt control circuits.

The is used with the MDU and contains:

-two high capacity floppy disk drives or

-one Winchester disk drive with two high capacity floppy drives as backup

Note: or later vintage is required.

Quantity-One

circuit card for each

7-34 System configuration

QPC687 CPU with

System Hardware-System option 21 and

Purpose-This is a stand-alone CPU card with error correction, real-time clock,

and one port.

Note:

or later vintage is required.

Quantity-One per system

QPC720 Primary Rate Interface

System Hardware--All

ISDN Primary Rate Interface card allows twenty three 64

Kbps clear channel operation with a single 64 Kbps common signaling channel. It

is used in conjunction with DCHI to provide PRA. The PRI circuit card provides

the physical DS- 1 interface and is also used for DTI applications.

Quantity-One per Primary Rate Access (PRA) or DTI link

QPC742 Floppy Disk Interface

System Hardware-All

between the Floppy Disk Unit and one CPU. Provides

address matching, disk drive control, data buffering and interrupt control circuits.

Quantity-One per CPU

D-Channel Handler Interface

System Hardware-All

D-Channel Handler Interface (DCHI) card processes the LAPD

protocol for ISDN primary rate signaling channel and ISDN Signaling Link (ISL).

It also provides a single asynchronous Serial Data Interface (SDI) port.

Quantity-One per 16 PRI links to the same location (eight maximum per system)

QPC841 Four-Port Serial Data Interface

System Hardware-All

four serial ports between the system processor and an external

device. Each port supports

RS-232-C interface

8-bit ASCII data with parity and stop

bit

asynchronous, start-stop operation

rates of 300,600, and 9600 baud

Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) mode

Data Communication Equipment (DCE) mode

System configuration 7-35

Quantity-Up to four per system

QPC939 Read-Only Memory

System Hardware-System option

Memory (ROM) daughterboard on the QPC579 CPU

Function card.

Quantity-One per CPU

QPC940 Read-Only Memory

System option 21

Purpose--ROM daughterboard on the QPC687 CPU with card.

Quantity-One per CPU

Peripheral Equipment cards

AD Controller-2

System Hardware-All except system option 21A

Purpose-Provides a primary interface and control function between the Superloop

Network card and the IPE Module over up to two superloops. Each

Controller-2 card serves up to 16 IPE cards.

The Controller-2 card interfaces with up to two Superloop Network

cards. It is equipped with a Motorola microprocessor which performs

some local call processing and maintenance diagnostics, thus off-loading the system

CPU.

Quantity-One per IPE Module

AC Controller-4

System Hardware--All except system option 21A

Purpose-Provides a primary interface and control function between the Superloop

Network card and the IPE Module over up to four superloops. Each

Controller-4 card serves up to 16 IPE cards.

The Controller-4 card interfaces with up to four Superloop Network

cards. It is equipped with a Motorola microprocessor which performs

some local call processing and maintenance diagnostics, thus-off-loading the system

CPU.

Quantity-One per IPE Module

Digital Line card

System Hardware-All

7-36 System configuration

Purpose-Provides interface to up to 16 digital integrated voice and data sets for a

total of 32 ports. It is equipped with an Intel microprocessor which

performs several functions, some of which are as follows:

control of card operation

card identification

self-test

status reporting to the Controller

maintenance diagnostics

Quantity-Up

to sixteen cards per IPE Module

Analog Line card

System Hardware-All

interface to up to 16 analog sets It is equipped

with an Intel 805 1 -type microprocessor which performs several functions, some of

which are as follows:

control of card operation

card identification

self-test

status reporting to the Controller

maintenance diagnostics

Quantity-Up

sixteen

cards per

IPE

Module

Analog Message Waiting Line card

System Hardware-All

interface to up to 16 analog sets with Message

Waiting lamp feature. It is equipped with an Intel 805 1 -type microprocessor which

performs several functions, some of which are as follows:

control of card operation

card identification

self-test

status reporting to the Controller

maintenance diagnostics

Quantity-Up

to sixteen cards per IPE Module

Universal Trunk

System Hardware-All

Purpose---Provides

interface connecting the trunk facility to the IPE

Module. It is equipped with an Intel microprocessor which performs

several functions, some of which are as follows:

System configuration

7-37

control of card operation

card identification

self-test

status reporting to the Controller

maintenance diagnostics

This card interfaces eight 600 or 900 trunks with the system in A-Law or

application. Each of these eight ports can be to operate as:

Central Office (CO)

Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunk

2-way Tie, Dial Repeating (2DR)

2-way Tie, Outgoing Automatic Incoming Dial (OAID) trunk

Outgoing Automatic Number Identification trunk

Recorded Announcement (RAN) trunk

Music

Paging trunk

The Universal Trunk card is software selectable and complies with CSA Standard

C82.2 No. 0.7 Ml985 and EIA Standard 464A.

Quantity-Up

to sixteen cards per IPE Module

E&M Trunk

System Hardware--All

in both A-Law

and applications. Provides interface

connecting the trunk facility to the Module. It is equipped with an

Intel microprocessor which performs several functions, some of which

are as follows:

control of card operation

card identification

self-test

status reporting to the Controller

maintenance diagnostics

The E&M Trunk provides four analog trunks, each of which can be individually

configured to operate as:

E&M signaling

two-wire Tie trunk

four-wire Tie trunk

Paging trunk

The E&M Trunk card is software selectable and complies with CSA Standard C82.2

No. 0.7 Ml985 and EIA Standard 464A.

7-38 System configuration

Quantity-Up to sixteen cards per IPE Module

Receiver

System Hardware-All

Purpose-Provides a total of eight channels of Dual Tone Multi Frequency

(DTMF) detection. These channels are assigned on the loop. There is one

8 Kbps signaling channel provided for maintenance messaging tone reporting.

The Receiver allows access to the filters for parameter

alterations in order to service different environments (e.g. international

applications).

Quantity-Refer to System engineering for engineering details.

QPC62 1.5 Baud Converter

System Hardware-System option

Purpose-Used for Remote Peripheral Equipment applications. Converts an

Sl-1 loop into two carrier loops. Used with 1.5 Mb/s Remote Peripheral Equipment

Contains switch-selectable line equalizers.

Note: or later vintage is required.

Quantity-Two for each network loop, one in the local module and one in the

remote module

QPC63 Local Carrier Buffer

System Hardware-System option 2 1

Purpose--Used for RPE applications. Performs the following functions:

Generates from the 2.048 MHz clock a 1.544 MHz clock

Decodes and provides enables for outgoing and incoming data

Delays the data incoming from the carrier so that its frame relative to the

outgoing data frame is equivalent to that returning from a peripheral buffer

Relays line status information to the processor

Decodes line control information from the processor

Note: or later vintage is required.

Quantity-One for each network loop connected to the at the local

equipment location

QPC65 Remote Peripheral Switch

System Hardware-System option 2 1

Purpose--Used for RPE applications. Performs the following functions:

Module, card, and line enables plus the bypass bit. to the modules it serves at the

remote site

System configuration 7-39

Cyclic scanning of the terminals it serves for incoming signaling messages

Monitoring of time slot 0 for outgoing messages

Assembling incoming messages

or later vintage is required.

Quantity-One

per network loop at the remote location

QPC66 2M Baud Converter

System Hardware--System

option 2 1

for RPE applications. Converts two carrier loops in to an Meridian

1 loop.

or later vintage is required.

Quantity-Two

required for each network loop, one in the local module and one in

the remote module.

QPC67 Carrier Maintenance

System Hardware-System

option 2 1

for RPE applications. Contains an M-type (3017 Hz) fault-locate

filter. Provides DC detection circuitry for the fault-locate pair, and carrier

relays to facilitate software maintenance testing. Terminates and gives access to the

order wire pair via a jack and binding posts on the faceplate.

or later vintage is required.

Quantity-One

per

Module

QPC71

Signaling and Paging Trunk

System Hardware-All

except system option 21A

Purpose-Used

in applications in one of the following ways to interface

with appropriate types of trunk facilities

-E&M signaling, 2-way dial repeating trunk

2-wire DX signaling, 2-way dial repeating trunk

4-wire DX signaling, 2-way dial repeating trunk (a repeater, externally

mounted, converts the trunk from to 4-wire)

paging trunk or externally mounted loudspeaker

Refer to

signaling and paging trunk Circuit description

187) for more details.

Each card contains two separate, identical trunk circuits. Trunk usage option is

selected by switches on the circuit card.

Note:

or later vintage is required.

7-40 System configuration

Quantity-One

per two trunk circuits

Carrier Interface

System

Hardware--System option 2

for RPE applications. Contains two carrier line receivers with 7.5

pads built-in. Converts bipolar line signals into level signals. Provides

facilities for carrier looping. Monitors system and invokes emergency transfer if

carrier fails.

or later vintage is required.

Quantity-Two

per network loop

QPC192 Off-Premises Extension Line

System Hardware-All

except system option 21A

Off-Premises Extension (OPX) line circuit interfaces with

sets in applications. ‘The loop range from the PE Module to

station apparatus is 1400 excluding the set. This trunk may also be used when

the line-to-line loss required is less than 5 Refer to

line packs

Description and operation

(553-2201-183) for more information.

Quantity-One

per two

OPX lines

QPC237 E&M/DX signaling trunk

System Hardware-All

except system option 21A

Purpose---Used

in applications in one of the following modes to interface

with appropriate types of trunk facilities:

E&M Signaling, 2-way dial repeating trunk

4-wire DX signaling, 2-way dial repeating trunk only)

Each trunk card has two separate, identical trunk circuits with a balanced

terminating impedance of 600 Trunk usage options are selected by option

switches on the pack. Refer to

Four-wire trunk circuit description

(553-2001-190).

Note:

or later vintage is required.

Quantity-Maximum

of 10 cards per PE Module; maximum of 16 cards

per IPE Module

QPC250 Release Link Trunk

System Hardware-All

except system option 21A

Purpose--Used

to interface a remote system, arranged for the Centralized

Attendant Service (CAS) option, with the main system where CAS attendant is

located. Refer to

Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) -Feature description and

System configuration 7-41

engineering

(553-2681-100) and

Release Link Trunk- Description, operation, and

installation

(553-2681-180) for more information.

The card contains two separate, identical trunk circuits, with balanced terminating

impedance of 900

Note: or later vintage is required.

Quantity-One per Release Link Trunks

QPC297 Attendant Console Monitor

System except system option 21A

attendant consoles (including add-on modules) when the

supervisory console feature is used. Allows the supervisory attendant to monitor

calls being handled by attendants within the customer group.

Quantity-One per console in systems using Supervisory Console

feature

QPC422 Tone Detector

System Hardware-All except system option 21A

Purpose-Identifies tones and reports to CPU appropriately. Each card contains

two tone detector circuits controlled by two microprocessors. Refer to

Tone

Detector Circuit description

19 1) for more information.

Quantity-One per system

QPC430 Asynchronous Interface Line

System Hardware-All except system option 21 A

four asynchronous line ports. Used in the SL-1 Data Feature to

interface to data equipment conforming to the EIA RS-422 standard. Refer to

SL-I

Data Feature General description and provisioning (553-273

1- 100) for more

information.

Note: or later vintage is required.

Quantity-One per four data lines

QPC432 Data Line

System Hardware-All except system option 21A --

Purpose-Provides four data-only ports for the SL- 1 Data Feature. Refer to

Data Feature General description and provisioning (553-273

100) for more

information.

Note:

or later vintage is required.

Quantity-One per four data ports

7-42 System configuration

QPC449 Loop Signaling Trunk

System Hardware-All

except system option

the following 600 or 900 trunks in applications:

Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

2-way Tie, Dial Repeating (2DR)

2-way Tie, Outgoing Automatic Incoming Dial (OAID)

Outgoing Automatic Number Identification (OANI)

The card contains four separate identical trunk circuits. Trunk usage option is

selected by switches on the circuit card. Refer to

Circuitpack option settings

3001-211) for more information.

Quantity-One

per four loop signaling trunks

QPC450 Trunk

System Hardware-All

except system option 2

Purpose-Interfaces

four 600 or 900 S2 CO, FX or WATS trunks with the system

in applications. The card can also detect ringing on either the tip or ring

leads and has provision to extend the normal loop range from 1200 to 2600

using balanced battery boost from the Central Office. Refer to

trunk

engineering description

( 553-2201-185) for more information.

The card contains four separate identical trunk circuits. Trunk usage option is

selected by switches on the circuit card.

Note:

or later vintage is required.

Quantity-One

per four trunks

QPC578 Integrated Services Digital Line

System Hardware-All

except system option 21A

the Digital telephone sets and the associated ASCII terminals

on Time Compression Multiplexing (TCM) loops to the system. Each card contains

16 separate line circuits, 8 Data circuits and 8 Voice circuits.

Quantity-One

per 16 digital lines

QPC594 Line

System Hardware-All

except system option 21A

Purpose--Allows for 16 circuits per card (quad density) using p-law.

Quantity-One

per 16 lines

QPC659 Dual Loop Peripheral Buffer

System Hardware-All

except system option 2 1 A

System configuration 7-43

Purpose-Interfaces one or two network loops. Also, a daughterboard

can be used to convert multifrequency dialing signals from a station to

dc pulses suitable for processing in the system control.

Quantity-One per PE

Module

QPC723 FE-232 Interface Line

System Hardware-All

except system option

Purpose--This

card provides four direct interfaces to RS-232 asynchronous ASCII

computer equipment, such as asynchronous hosts, modems, standard off-the-shelf

X.25 Packet Assembler/Disassembler (PAD), data and multiplexers.

Quantity-One

per PE Module

QPC789 1 Line (Message Waiting)

System Hardware-AI

except system option 21A

interface to up to 16 analog sets with Message

Waiting lamp feature.

Quantity-One

per 16 Message Waiting lines

QPC918 High-Speed Data Card

System Hardware---All

except system option 21A

Purpose-Supports

two data ports that operate independently of each other in

mode. Interfaces with any port on the QPC432 4-Port

Data Line Card.

The High-Speed Data Card (HSDC) provides an interface to high speed

synchronous devices, such as front end processors or video conferencing ports,

through the Multi-Channel System (MCDS) and the PBX. In synchronous mode, it

supports data speeds of up to 64 kbps. Refer to High-Speed Data

Curd

Description, and operation

(553-273 l-108) for more information.

Quantity-As

required

Station equipment

Meridian Modular Telephones

The Meridian Modular Telephones are designed to provide cost effective integrated

voice and data communication capability.

The following Meridian Modular Telephones are available:

single line telephone with 6 programmable keys

multi-line set with 8 programmable keys

high performance multi-line set with 16 programmable keys and

integrated Handsfree unit

7-44 System configuration

Telephone Security Group Class II approved telephone designed to

provide on-hook security. It is similar to the M2616, with 16 programmable

keys, but has no handsfree capability.

multi-line set for ACD operations. It has 15 programmable

function keys, a special ACD Display Module and two

RJ-32 jacks for modular headsets

multi-line set for ACD operations. It has 15 programmable

function keys, and a special ACD Display. It is similar to model 1, but with one

PJ-327 jack for a carbon agent headset and one for an

supervisor headset

The following hardware options can be add on to Meridian Modular Telephones:

External Alerter Interface Board

Display Module

Programmable Data Adapter

Key Expansion Module

Refer to

Meridian Modular Telephones Description and specifications (553-

2201 -116) for additional information.

M2000 series digital telephones

The following types of M2000 digital telephones are available for integrated voice

and data communications:

The has 9 keys for features and lines

The has 12 keys which are as follows:

11 keys for features and lines

one key to control the built-in handsfree feature

The M2317 has 17 keys which are as follows:

11 programmable keys

one key to control the built-in handsfree feature

five soft keys which are programmable for software features

An asynchronous data option circuit board and data option power supply

are available for the M2000 series digital telephones to provide

for connecting data terminals to the sets.

For additional information on these telephones, refer to

Digital Telephones

description, installation, operation, and maintenance.

The 1) Touchphone is a digital integrated voice and data telephone

with a touch sensitive Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) screen for feature

implementation. Refer to

Meridian Touchphone -Description,

installation, operation, and maintenance

(553-2201-115) for additional information.

System configuration 7-45

An asynchronous data option circuit board and data option power supply

(TEC 00020) are available to provide for connecting data terminals to the sets.

Ml 250 and M2250 attendant consoles

The Ml250 and M2250 incorporate design improvements based on the previous

Attendant Console and are functionally, compatible with the QCW4. The

Ml250 is driven and powered by analog line cards and is compatible with QCW4

console cabling schemes. The M2250 is driven and powered by a digital line card

and has a modified cabling scheme. The following list describes the applications

for SL- 1 System attendant consoles.

The Ml250 is designed to work in analog mode and functions through an

analog line card when connected to a digital switch.

The is a digital version of the M1250, offering additional features. A

digital link connects the to the switch.

Refer to

and Attendant Consoles description

117) for

additional information.

asynchronous/ synchronous interface module

The Asynchronous/Synchronous Interface Module (ASIM) is similar to the QMT9

but provides added dialing capabilities and six data feature keys and associated

lamps and data control switches. Refer to

SL-I Feature General

description and provisioning (553-273

1- 100) for more information.

QMT12 add-on data module

The synchronous ADM provides a V.35 interface between the Meridian 1

system and customer-supplied data equipment. Refer to

SL-1 Feature

General description and provisioning (553-273

l-100) for more information.

Each ADM requires a local supplementary power supply such as the PO593922 or

PO6 10756 transformer.

high-speed data module

This module is similar to the 1 module. It provides interface

and allows synchronous data transmission of up to 64 kbps. It provides

connectivity to the Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) for intra-switch

communications, as well as wide area communications over links to other

Northern Telecom switches. Refer to

QMT21 High-Speed Module

Description, installation, and operation

(553-2731-107) for more information.

Asynchronous data options

These microprocessor-controlled devices provide the interface (RS-232 compatible)

through which ASCII Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) may be connected to the

Meridian 1 network. Two types of asynchronous data options are available for use

with the following digital telephones:

printed circuit board for use with M2009, and digital

telephones. Refer to

Meridian Digital Telephones -Description,

installation, operation, and maintenance

(553-2201-l 10) for more information.

7-46 System configuration

printed circuit board assembly and housing for’M3000 digital

touchphone. Refer to

Meridian Description,

installation, operation, andmaintenance

(553-2201-l 15) for additional

information.

The following features are available:

Automatic data rate detection at all rates using the ASCII “Carriage Return”

character

Keyboard dialing for originating data calls to local andremote hosts or DTE

from the terminal keyboard

Break detection and generation

Meridian programmable data adapter

This adapter provides the interface (RS-232 compatible) through which ASCII Data

Terminal Equipment (DTE) may be connected to the Meridian 1 network. It is

available with the and M2616 Meridian Modular

Telephones

Some of the features available are as follows:

keyboard dialing for originating data calls to local or remote hosts or DTE

telephone keypad dialing for originating and releasing data calls

parameter setting from telephone keypad

voice call origination from terminal keyboard

script file capabilities to pre-program resource locations via mnemonic address

names

Software provisioning

Call processing, maintenance and administration of the Meridian 1 system are

controlled by computer programs. These programs and the office data (system

characteristics) are stored in the system memory and on disk. A mass storage unit is

used to load the system programs and office data into the memory. Table 7-5 lists

all the data administration overlay programs.

Every system requires the Basic PBX Features as the base software package.

Optional software features may then be added. The basic and optional features are

outlined in Tables 7-6 and 7-7. Note that some software packages require other

packages as an operating base. These dependencies are also provided in the tables.

Table 7-8 lists a majority of the features with its parameters. Some of the

parameters have changed in Releases 13 and 14 due to the introduction of the

System Capacity Expansion feature. For a complete list of all-features and

associated parameters, refer to XII

features and services’ (553-3001-305).

Table 7-9 lists the memory requirements for each feature option. This table

indicates the size of the programs (in K’s, where equals 1024 words).

telemanuals.com

System configuration 7-47

Table 7-5

Data administration overlay programs

LD12

LD13

LD14

LD15

LD16

LD17

LD18

LD20

LD21

LD22

LD23

LD24

LD25

LD26

LD28

LD29

LD49

LD50

LD56

LD57

LD73

LD82

LD83

LD84

LD85

Single-line telephone sets

Multi-line telephone sets

Attendant Console

Receivers and Tone Detectors

Trunks

Customer data

Trunk Routes & Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Configuration Record

Speed Call, Group Call, Pretranslation and Hot Line

Code Restriction

Print Routine 1

Print Routine 2

Print Routine 3

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) and Messaging features

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Move data blocks

Group Do Not Disturb

Route Selection for Automatic Number Identification

Memory Management

New Flexible Code Restriction (NFCR)

Call Park

Flexible Tones and Cadences

Flexible Feature Codes

Digital Trunk/Primary Rate Interface error thresolds

Print features and stations

Print hunt chains & multiple appearance groups

Print designated (DES)

Designators (DES) for single-line telephone sets

Designators (DES) for multi-line telephone sets

-continued

telemanuals.com

7-48 System configuration

Table 7-5

Data administration overlay programs (continued)

LD86

LD87

LD88

Electronic Switched Network (ESN)

ESN data block

Digit manipulation data (DGT)

Incoming Trunk Group Exclusion (ITGE)

Route list (RLB)

Special common carrier (SCC)

Electronic Switched Network (ESN)

Network control (NCTL)

Free calling area screening (FCAS)

Coordinated Dailing Plan (CDP)

Basic and Network Authorization code

ESN Network Translation tables

Multi-Tenant Service and Console Presentation Group

Call Party Name Display

LD97 Configuration Record 2

telemanuals.com

System configuration 7-49

Table 7-6

Feature and software options

Feature

option name Number Mnemonic Release

ACD Activity Code Entry 155 ACNT

ACD CDR Queue Record 83

CDRQ

ACD Load Management (C2) 43 LMAN

ACD Package A 45 ACDA

ACD Package B

ACDB

ACD Package Cl 42 ACDC

ACD Package D 50 ACDD

ACD Package D, Auxiliary Link

LNK

Processor

ACD Priority Agent 116 PAGT R12

ACD Timed Ove

111

TOF

ACD-D Auxiliary Security 114 R12

Advanced Network Services 148 NTWK R13

Route Selection

Attendant Administration 54 AA

Attendant Alternative Answering 174 AAA R15

Attendant Overflow Position 56 AOP

Automatic Answerback 47 AAB

Automatic Line Selection 72 LSEL R4

Automatic Number Identification

Automatic Trunk Maintenance 84 ATM R7

Automatic Wake-Up 102 AWU

AUTOVON Defense Switched 68 ATVN R4

Network (DSN)

AUTOVON Call Detail Recording 69 ACDR R4

Auxiliary Processor Link 109 APL

Background Terminal 99 BGD

Basic Routing 14 BRTE

Basic Alternate Route Selection 5 7 BARS

Basic Authorization Code 25 BAUT ,

Basic Automatic Call Distribution 40 BACD

-continued

System configuration

Table 7-6

Feature and software options (continued)

Feature option name Number Mnemonic Release

Basic Call Processing

BASIC

Basic Queuing 28

Call Detail Recording

CDR

Call Park

Call Detail Recording Expansion

151

CDRE R13

Call Party Name Display 95 CPND

Call-by-Call Service Selection 117 CBC

R13

Calling line ID in CDR 118 CCDR R13

CDR on Data Link

CLNK

CDR on Teletype Machine (TTY)

CTY

Centralized Attendant Services (Main) 26 CASM

Centralized Attendant Services 27 CASR

(Remote)

Switchhook Flash 157 THF R14

Charge Account for CDR 23 CHG

Charge Account/Authorization Code 2 4 CAB

Command Status Link 77

Console Presentation Group Level

172

CPGS

Services

Controlled Class Of Service

Coordinated Dialing Plan 59 CDP

CSL with Alpha Signaling 85 CSLA

Deluxe Hold

DHLD R4

Departmental Listed Directory Number 7 6 DLDN

Dial Intercom

21 DI

Dialed Number Identification Service

Digit Display

DDSP

Digital Sets 88 DSET R7

Direct Inward System Access 22

Directed Call Pickup 115 DCP

Directory Number Expansion 150 DNXP

-continued

System configuration 7-51

Table 7-6

Feature and software options (continued)

Feature option name Number Mnemonic Release

Distinctive Ringing 74 DRNG R4

Distinctive Ringing, New 7 4 DRNG.

Do-Not-Disturb, Group 16 DNDG

Do-Not-Disturb, Individual

End-To-End Signaling

EES

Enhanced Conference, TDS and MFS 204 XCTO

card

Enhanced Controlled Class of Service 173 ECCS

Enhanced Music 119 EMUS R12

Extended PBX Features

OPTF

Extended Peripheral Equipment 203

XPE

R15

(superloop)

Fast Tone and Digit Switch 8 7 FTDS R7

Flexible Call Back Queuing

FCBQ

Flexible Feature Codes

139

FFC

Forced Charge Account 52 FCA

Group Call 48 GRP

File

Line Services 70 HOT

DID Digit Conversion 113 IDC R12

ntegrated Messaging System Link 35 IMS

nter-exchange Carrier 149 IEC R13

Treatment

nternal Call Detail Recording (CDR)

108

SDN Application Protocol Third Party 153

Jendor

.SDN Primary Rate Access 146 PRA

signaling 145

signaling Link 147 R13

Last Number Redial 9 0 LNR

Line Load Control 105

-continued

7-52 System configuration

Table 7-6

Feature and software options (continued)

M2317 Digital Display Set

M3000 Touchphone

Make Set Busy

Malicious Call Trace

Meridian Modular Telephone Sets

Meridian SL-1 ST

Message Center

Message Registration

Multiple-Customer Operation

Multiple-Tenant Service

Music

Network ACD

Network Alternate Route Selection

Network Authorization Code

Network Call Transfer

Network Class Of Service

Network Message Center

Network Queuing Main

Network Signaling

Network Speed Call

Network Traffic Measurements

Yew Flexible Code Restriction

Queuing

Data Administration System

Outpulsing Delay

PBX Interface for

Pretranslation

Priority Queuing

Property Management System

Interface

103

MCBQ

NSC

NTRF

NFCR

OHQ

ODAS

OOD

PXLT

PQUE

-continued

System configuration 7-53

Table 7-6

Feature and software options (continued)

Feature option name Number Mnemonic Release

Recorded Announcement 7 RAN

Recorded Overflow Announcement 36 ROA R2

Remote Peripheral Equipment

RPE

Room Status 100 RMS

Set Relocation 53 SR

Station Category Indication 80

Station Loop Preemption 106

Stored Number Redial 6 4 SNR

Superloop Administration (LD97) 205 R15

Supervisory Attendant Console 9 3

System Speed Call

ssc

Time and Date

TAD

Tone Detector 65 TDET

Trunk Verification from a Station 110 TVS R9.32

2.0 Mbit/s Primary Rate Interface 154 R14

2500 Set Features

SS25

500 Set Features 7 3

ss5

7-54 System configuration

Table 7-7

Feature options and package dependencies

Option Feature option name and Mnemonic Release

number dependencies

Basic Call Processing BASIC

includes the following features:

-Call Transfer

-Conference

-Call Forward No Answer

-Hunt

-Call Pickup

Extended PBX Features OPTF

Includes the following features:

-Call Forward All Calls

Override

Ring Again

-Secretarial Filtering

-Speed Call

-Voice Call

Multiple-Customer Operation CUST

4 Call Detail Recording CDR

Package dependencies:

CTY (5) or CLNK (6)

This is the base package for CDR.

Directory

Asynchronous Data Option (ADO)

Data Communications Capabilities

External Alerter Interface

Key Expansion Modules

Dimensions

Standard

Yes

Via Display Icon

Full Screen, Touch Sensitive

Over 130 Dial-by-Name Entries

Optional

Up to 19.2 Kbps Asynchronous

3,500 ft. (1,057 meters) 24 AWG

Loop, plus Auxiliary (Supplied with Set)

H = Tilt Adj.

W = 12 in. (302 mm)

L = 8.5 in (214 mm)

3.28 Ibs. (1500 grams)

Temperature F C)

Humidity RH

Technical specifications

Table 1 O-l 6

Telephone Set Overview

Line Appearances

l-8

Total Line/Feature

Buttons

Programmable

Fixed

Line/Feature Indicators

Integrated Speakerphone

On-Hook Dialing

Message Waiting

Yes

LED Indicator

2 Plus Volume

Adjustment

6 LCD

2 Plus Volume

Adjustment

8 LCD

Yes

LED Indicator

l-16

2 Plus Volume

Adjustment.

Software Option

Yes

LED Indicator

Display (LCD) Opt. 2 x 24 Opt.

2x24

Directory

Data Option PDA

PDA PDA

Data Corn Capabilities

Up to 19.2 Kbps

Key Expansion Modules No No

Up to 19.2 Kbps

Optional

External Alerter Interface Optional

Multiple Languages N/A

Loop Length 3,500 ft.

Power Loop Voice

Aux. Data, Alerter

Optional

3,500

Loop Voice Data,

Display, Alerter

2 or6

3,500

Loop-Voice,

Display, H/F Aux.

Data, Display,

Alerter

Color Ash, Gray, Black Ash, Gray, Black Ash, Gray, Black

Technical specifications

Table 1 O-1 7

Telephone Set Overview

Line Appearances 1-16

1-16

Total Line/Feature

Buttons

Programmable

16 18

2 Plus Volume

Adjustment 2 Plus Volume

Adjustment.

2 Plus Volume

Adjustment

Fixed

Line/Feature Indicators

Integrated Speakerphone No

No No

N/A

LED Indicator

Std. 2 x 24

Yes

LED Indicator

Opt. 2 x 24

Directory

Data Option

PDA

Data Corn Capabilities

Up to 19.2 Kbps Up to 19.2 Kbps Up to 19.2 Kbps

Key Expansion Modules Optional Optional Optional

External Alerter Interface Optional Optional

Multiple Languages

3,500

2 or 6

3,500

Loop Length

Power Loop Voice, Display

Aux. Data, Alerter, Key

Module

Auxiliary for All

Operations (Power

Board Included)

Auxiliary for All

Operations (Power

Board Included)

Ash, Gray, BlackColor Ash, Gray, Black Ash, Gray, Black

Technical specifications

Table 1 O-1 8

Telephone Set Overview

M2317

Line Appearances

Total Line/Feature

Buttons

Programmable

N/A

2 Plus Volume

Adjustment 2 Plus Volume

Adjustment 3 Plus Volume

Adjustment

5 Feature

ces

Fixed

LCD

Line/Feature Indicators

Integrated Speakerphone

Yes

LED Indicator

Yes

LED Indicator

Yes

LCD Icon

Yes

LCD Icon

On-Hook Dialing

Message Waiting

Display (LCD)

Built in 2 x 40 Built-in

Screen

Directory

Yes

ADO ADO ADO ADO

Up to 19.2 Kbps Up to 19.2 Kbps Up to 19.2 Kbps up to

Data Option

Data Corn Capabilities

19.2

Kbps

No No

Key Expansion Modules

External Alerter Interface

No No

Multiple Languages N/A

3,500 ft.

N/A

3,560

3,500 Loop Length

Power Loop Voice

Aux. Data

Loop, Plus

Auxiliary

(Provided With

Set)

Loop,

Plus

Auxiliary

(Provided

With Set)

Loop, Plus

Auxiliary

(Provided With

Set)

Color Ash, Gray, Black Ash, Gray, Black Ash, Gray, Black Black

Technical specifications IO-25

System Option plan

Figure

System Option 24 equipment room floor plan

(2640 mm)

Approximately

AC Panel

Terminal

Notes to floor plans:

1.) These sample floor plans may vary from your own depending on your system needs and the size/arrangement

of your equipment room.

2.) A template for system placement and floor drilling procedures is available. drawing (part number

is delivered with the system packing instructions.

3.)

If a conflict arises between a code included in this document and a local or national code, follow the local or

national code.

Technical

System Option 51 and plan example

Figure 2

System Option 51 and 61 equipment room floor plan

Battery stand for reserve power (optional)

Notes to floor plans:

1.) These sample floor plans may vary from your own depending on your system the size/arrangement

of your equipment room.

2.) A template for system placement and floor drilling procedures is available. The drawing (part number

is delivered with the system packing instructions.

3.)

If a conflict arises between a code included in this document and a local or national code, follow the local or

national code.

Technical specifications

System Option plan example

Figure 3

System Option 71 equipment room floor plan

(535

25 In.

(650

In.

25 in.

(660

36 in.

(915

24ft

(7365 mm)

‘(915 mm)

15 n (4570 mm)

Battery stand for

TTY

terminal

Note:

Meridian 1 Option 71 may also expand to additional rows of Peripheral

Equipment Modules.

Notes to floor plans:

1.) These sample floor plans may vary your own depending on your system needs and the size/arrangement

of your equipment room.

2.) A template for system placement and floor drilling procedures is available. drawing (part number

is delivered with the system packing instructions.

3.)

If a conflict arises between a code included in this document and a local or national code, follow the local or

national code.

Chapter of terms

Access time

The time required to retrieve information from or store information in a computer’s

memory.

Acoustic coupler

A data set which converts electrical signals into audio signals suitable for

transmission over telephone circuits. The telephone handset is placed into a cradle

device that acoustically couples the transmitter and receiver in order to send or

receive the modulated signal.

Address

A number designating a location in memory.

Adjacent channel

The channel closest to the channel being used for transmission, either in physical

proximity or in electronic characteristics.

A-law

The law used in PCM systems in the European countries is the A-Law,

which is defined as follows:

lnx

where

x is the input signal

y is the compressed output signal

A is a constant, set to 87.6

ln is the natural logrithm

Algorithm

A set of processes in a computer program used to solve a particular problem in a

finite number of steps.

Analog signal

Any voltage or current waveform that varies continuously with time.

11-2 List of

terms

Analog -to-digital (A/D) converter

Circuitry which changes an analog signal into a digital pulse stream.

ANSI (American National Standards Institute)

The principal standards organization in the USA, formed in 1918, and run as a non-

profit, non-government body supported by private industry and professional

organizations. Its role is to coordinate voluntary standards activities.

ASCII Code (American Standard Code for Information Interchange)

A binary code used to exchange information between computers.

Assembly language

A programming language in which each statement corresponds to a machine

language instruction.

Codes are less close to everyday language than those of high

level languages, therefore mnemonic devices are included.

Asynchronous

Characteristic of any operation that is independent of a master clock or timing

signals.

Asynchronous transmission

Data transmission in which the characters may be transmitted at varying intervals or

in blocks, and which uses start and stop elements at the beginning and end of each

character, instead of synchronizing the whole message block.

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

A switching system which automatically distributes incoming calls to a centralized

group without going through a switchboard operator. If no answering positions are

available, the calls will be automatically held until one becomes free. Used in

catalog ordering, airline information, and credit-card authorization centers of larger

businesses.

Automatic Number Identification

The automatic line identification of outward dialed long distance calls which

permits call completion and billing without the telephone company’s operator

intervention.

B channel

The 64-Kbps channel of a digital subscriber link (DSL) (where there are two) or an

extended DSL (where there are 23) that is circuit switched and can carry either

voice or data. Usually considered to stand for “Bearer”

Balancing network

Electronic circuitry used to match two-wire to four-wire toll facilities in order to

maximize power transfer and minimize echo.

List of terms 11-3

BASIC language (Beginner’s Ail-purpose Symbolic instruction Code)

A simplified computer programming language based upon common English

language terms.

Basic

Rate Access

Baud

Bell 103

Bell 113

Bell 201

Bell 202

Bell

Bell 209

Bell 212

Binary

Two 64-Kbps B channels and one D channel over a single digital

subscriber line.

A unit of signaling speed which measures the number of signal changes per second.

If each signal element or state change represents one bit, then the baud rate equals

the bit rate; otherwise, the two differ.

A North American Bell System modem standard which provides asynchronous data

transmission at speeds up to 300 bps.

As Bell 103, but provides either originate or answer capability only.

A North American Bell System modem standard which provides synchronous data

transmission at 2400 bps.

A North American Bell System modem standard which provides asynchronous data

transmission at bps. Requires four-wire line for full duplex operation.

A North American Bell System modem standard which provides synchronous data

transmission at 4800 bps.

A North American Bell System modem standard which provides synchronous data

transmission at 9600 bps.

A North American Bell System modem standard which provides full-duplex

asynchronous or synchronous data transmission at 1200 bps on the dial network.

A system of numbers or codes involving only two states, typically 1 or 0.

Binary coded decimal (BCD)

A coding scheme in which four bits are used to represent numbers and six bits to

represent letters and special symbols.

11-4 List of terms

Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC,

Binary word

Bipolar

Bisync

Bit

Bit interleaved

Bit rate

Bit stream

An IBM byte-controlled protocol using a defined set of control characters and

sequences for synchronous binary coded data transmission.

A group of bits that represent one piece of information. In PCM systems, an eight

bit binary word is used to represent the magnitude of an analog signal at a particular

instant in time.

Refers to two polarities, positive and negative. Digital information is normally

transmitted in alternating bipolar pulses.

Short for “Binary Synchronous Communications,” a half-duplex, character-oriented

protocol developed by IBM.

A contraction of the term “binary digit” which represents a single character in a

group, either 1 or 0.

This refers to the format of the resulting higher rate bit stream in a TDM system

where the higher rate bit stream is generated by taking single bits from each of the

lower rate bit streams in turn.

The speed at which bit positions are transmitted, normally expressed in bits per

second.

A continuous string of bit positions occurring serially in time.

Bit stream format

In some bit streams the bit positions, or groups of bit positions, have specific uses.

The way in which the bit stream is subdivided is the format of the bit stream.

order to locate the position of the format within the bit stream a recurring alignment

signal is required either internal or external to the bit stream.

Black box

A term used to describe a device which handles known input and produces known

output, but whose mechanism is hypothetical or unknown.

Blocking

(1) A switching system condition in which no circuits are available to complete a

call, and a busy signal is returned to the caller. (2) The creation of blocks from

individual records in a computer memory file.

List of terms 1 l-5

Bootstrap routine

A computer technique of inputting data before loading a program and thereby

initiating the loading of the program.

Bubble memory

high capacity RAM memory in which a bit of information is recorded as a bubble

on a thin film of magnetic silicate, and read by an electronic reading head.

Buffer

A temporary storage facility used as an interface between system elements

data rates are different.

Bus

A major electrical path used to transfer information between two or more electrical

circuits.

Busy hour

The peak hour of communications traffic in a carrier facility.

Byte

The smallest number of binary digits which is acted upon as if it were a single

entity.

In most present-day systems, a byte is equivalent to 8 bits.

Byte interleaved

This refers to the format of the resulting higher rate bit stream in a TDM system

where the higher rate bitstream is generated by taking groups of bits (ie bytes) from

each of the lower rate bit streams in turn.

Cable, coaxial

A cable containing a central conductor insulated from a surrounding conductor, or

several such pairs. An efficient carrier of high frequency signals, and capable of

being multiplexed.

Call processing programs

Software that controls the switching network in an electronic switching system.

Carrier system

A means of producing several channels from one communications link by

combining signals at the originating end, transmitting them in a or high

speed signal, and separating them at the receiver.

Carrler wave

A signal of a certain frequency and amplitude which can be modulated with respect

to amplitude, frequency and phase, and transmitted as a data signal.

Comite Consultatif International Telegraphique et Telephonique.

An international

committee that sets telephone, telegraph, and data communications standards.

11-6 List of terms

signaling

The standard for signalling within telecommunications networks being developed

by CCITT. It will eventually replace the CCIS6 network in the U.S. Usually

referred to as SS7.

v.21

v.22

V.23

V.24

CCITT V.25

V.26

CCITT V.27

V.28

CCITT v.29

CCITT X.25

ccs

Standards for modems operating asynchronously at 200-300 bps, full-duplex, on the

dial network (similar to Bell 103).

Standards for synchronous half-duplex modems operating on the dial network at

1200 bps (similar to Bell 212A).

Standards for asynchronous half-duplex modems on the dial network, and full-

duplex on a leased four-wire line, operating at 600 or 1200 bps.

Recommendation for interchange circuits between data communications equipment

and terminals (similar to RS-232C).

Recommendation defining a packet switching network protocol.

Standards for modems operating at bps, half-duplex on the dial network,

and full-duplex on a leased four-wire line (similar to Bell 201).

As V.26, but at 4800 bps on leased telephone-type circuits (similar to Bell 208).

Recommendation for the electrical characteristics for unbalanced double-current

interchange circuits operating at data signaling rates below the limit of 20,000 bps

(Geneva 1972).

Standards for synchronous modems operating at 96000 bps on a leased four-wire

line (similar to Bell 209).

Recommendation defining a packet switching networks protocol.

A communications unit of traffic measurement equivalent to 100 call-seconds, so

that there are 36 CCS in one hour.

List of terms

11-7

Central Processing Unit (CPU)

The portion of a computer which controls its operation and manipulates the data

being processed.

A private exchange service permitting incoming calls to be dialed direct to

extensions, without operator intervention. Usually provided from the telephone

company’s central office facilities.

Channel

A signal pathway in a communications system between two or more points,

furnished by a wire, radio, light fibers, satellite or a combination thereof.

Channel bank

An electronic device used to digitally encode analog signals and time division

multiplex the resultant digital signals and also demultiplex and decode these digital

signals.

Character

An actual or coded representation of a letter, number or symbol.

Chip

A small (1-5 cm) integrated circuit of several elements with external connections to

other electronic circuits.

Circuit

A complete transmission path to and from two points in a communications system.

Circuit switching

A method of communications in which individual circuits are connected to establish

a continuous connection for the use of stations on the circuit until it is disconnected.

Class Of Service (COS)

The type of service in use by a subscriber of a communications system, including

the type of telephone equipment, and the calling privileges or restrictions.

Clear-to-send delay

The time required for a data set to inform a terminal that it is ready to send or reply.

(Also called modem turnaround.)

Clock

A device that generates periodic signals used for system synchronization.

Cluster

A group of terminals connected to a communications facility by a cluster controller

so that they may operate together.

11-8 List of terms

COBOL (Common Business Oriented Language)

A high level programming language used for business data manipulation.

Code

The representation of an alphanumeric character or symbol in machine language

Code conversion

The translation from one code to another (e.g., ASCII to Baudot), so that machines

using different codes may communicate with each other.

CODEC (Coder/Decoder)

A device used to convert analog voltage samples into binary coded digital data and

vice versa. A encodes analog signals into 8 bit, = 255, PCM. It also

performs the reverse function of decoding PCM signals into analog signals.

Common channel signaling

A technique in which signaling information relating to several circuits is conveyed

by addressed messages over a single signaling channel.

Common Channel lnteroff ice Signaling (CCIS)

A method where all signaling data is sent over a dedicated connection between the

processors of two switching systems.

Signaling and transmission are completely

segregated and handled over separate facilities.

Common control

Equipment which receives and stores subscriber-dialed information for subsequent

processing.

Communications terminal

Any device which produces tones or electrical signals which can be transmitted over

a communications facility.

Compandlng

The process of compressing quantized speech samples at low speech amplitudes at

the transmitting end of a system and then expanding these levels at the receiving

end, thus reducing quantizing distortion.

Companding law

Many different algorithms (i.e. companding laws) could be used to obtain

companding effects. Two companding laws in widespread use in PCM systems are

the “MU-Law” and the “A-Law”. The MU-Law is used in North America and the

A-Law is used in European countries.

Compiler

A computer program used to convert symbols meaningful to a human operator to

codes meaningful to a specific computer.

List of terms

Concentrator

A device used in data communications which can subdivide a channel into a

system of data routes to permit the transfer of more data than would otherwise be

possible. Low speed buffered asynchronous channels are fed into a high speed

synchronous channel via a concentrator, which creates several channels of lower

speed.

Conditioning

The improvement of standards of a data transmission line in order to increase the

data rate and decrease the error rate.

Contention

A method of communications line control in which users compete for transmission

time on a first-come, first-served basis, and must wait until a channel is free.

Continuity check

A check made of a communications link to ensure that a proper data connection

exists.

Control character

A character included with a data communications signal to control and facilitate

transmission. Examples are CR (carnage return), EOT (end of text), ACK

(acknowledgment), STX (start of text).

Conversation mode

An on-line dialogue between a terminal and a computer in which each responds to

data presented by the other on a character-by-character basis.

Conversation time

The portion of time used in a call devoted to actual data or speech transmission as

opposed to that used for call connection and coordination.

Converter

A peripheral device which converts data from one medium or mode to another; e.g.,

paper tape to magnetic disc.

CPE-customer premise equipment

The generalized term for any equipment that resides on the end user’s side of the

network interface boundary.

Crosstalk --

Interference on a “disturbed” circuit caused by the transfer of energy from a nearby

“disturbing” circuit.

CRT-cathode ray tube

An electronic display screen similar to a television picture tube.

11-10

List of terms

CSA-Canadian Standard Association

Cursor

Cycle time

D channel

Data

Data base

A Standards Council of Canada body which sets electric and electronic standards

including those applicable to data communications.

An illuminated marker on a visual display unit which shows the position of the next

character to be generated, and which can be moved about the screen to perform text

control operations.

The shortest period of time necessary to complete one computer instruction.

The packet-switched channel on a DSL (where it is 16 Kbps) or an EDSL (where it

is 64 Kbps) that carries signaling messages and packet-switched user data. Usually

considered to stand for “Delta” or Data channel.

Any set of characters which can represent a meaningful message and which can be

transmitted electronically.

(1) Specific information pertaining to a particular office such as subscriber directory

numbers, trunk routes, etc. This information is utilized by the generic program. (2)

A set of data which can be stored for computer access.

Data communications

The transmission of data over electronic communications channels, often involving

two-way data exchange over long distances.

Data compression

The use of special coding devices to reduce the size of data elements in order to

reduce the storage space, increase channel bandwidth, or reduce cost and time

required to transmit data.

Data coupler

A device which allows a subscriber’s data set to interface with the telephone

network by controlling signaling functions and limiting the power applied to the

line.

Data link

The hardware in a data terminal which establishes protocols and a data link with

another data terminal.

DATAPAC network

A common user packet switched commercial network which links TELENET in the

USA with the Trans-Canada Telephone Network in Canada.

List of terms

11-11

Data set

(1) A device which interfaces a data terminal and a data communications facility,

and which may modulate or demodulate the signal (see modem), and perform

control functions.

(2) A collection of related data records stored in a computer.

Data station

The hardware making up a data station, including the data terminal and circuit

terminating equipment.

Data terminal equipment (DTE)

Any equipment defining the beginning or end of a data link, and which usually

comprises the data source and data sink.

DC signaling

Transmission of data over physical wires using

pulses at speeds below 150

baud.

Decibel (db)

A unit of signal strength relative to a standard (usually 1 milliwatt). In acoustics, a

measure of sound intensity: 1 db is the smallest amplitude difference the human ear

can detect.

Decode

To convert received PCM code words into pulse amplitude modulated pulses which

are the same as the quantized samples at the transmitting end.

Dedicated access

A direct connection between a terminal and either a service, network, or a computer.

Dedicated data channel

A communications channel assigned for a subscriber’s exclusive use.

Default option

An assumption which a computer system is programmed to make unless an alternate

instruction is given it by a user.

Degradation

The deterioration of the qualities of a signal or system.

Delay, absolute

The time taken for a signal to travel a certain distance in a communication system,

dependent on the frequency, distance, and physical medium of transmission.

Delay distortion

Distortion of a signal produced by the unequal transmission speeds of different

frequencies of that signal in a communications medium.

11-12

List of terms

Delta modulation

A method of digitally encoding an analog waveform that looks at the difference in

magnitude between successive analog signal samples. Only one quantizing level is

available so only one bit is needed to record whether the signal went up or down.

This system is simple to implement but requires a faster sampling than the Nyquist

Frequency.

Demodulation

The process of retrieving an original signal from a modulated carrier wave.

Diagnostic

Relating to test programs used for error and fault detection in the functioning of

hardware or software.

Digital Multiplex Switching System (DMS)

Switching systems which permit digital switched transmission circuits for voice and

data. They use pulse code modulation and time division multiplexing to allow

direct switching of PCM signals without modulation into an analog form.

Digital pad

A device that introduces loss in an analog signal that is digitally encoded.

Digital signal

A series of pulses or rapidly changing voltage levels that vary in discrete steps or

increments.

Digital-to-analog (D/A) converter

Circuitry which changes digitally encoded data into an analog signal.

Digital transmission system

The transmission of data in digital pulses which can be regenerated along the line,

as opposed to analog transmission, in which waveform signals are transmitted via

amplifiers in the line.

Digitize

The conversion of a continuous analog signal to digital form.

Disk, magnetic

A high capacity circular plate of varying size with a magnetic surface divided into

addressable sectors used for Random Access Memory storage. Read/write heads

enter and access data on each sector, permitting rapid access to data. Disc

technology is rapidly producing discs of different types (including the mini-floppy,

floppy, flippy and hard), with increasing memory capacity.

Display unit

A terminal device which produces a visual display of data. Usually a CRT display,

but may be liquid crystal or other electronic medium (as opposed to hard copy

printouts of data).

List of terms

11-13

Distortion

The undesirable change of signal characteristics during transmission due to distance

effects, noise, or interference.

Down-line load

The loading of software programs into a computer from device or

computer using a communications channel.

Downtime

The time period during which a device or system is not functioning properly.

Drive

A device which accepts a magnetic storage medium and transfers its contents upon

request to the terminal.

Drop

The external wire between a subscriber’s premises and the telephone distribution

cable.

DSO

The common terminology for a single, 64-Kbps voice channel.

The common terminology for a T-carrier that multiplexes 24 channels into a single,

bit stream.

DSL-digital subscriber line

The ISDN DSL combines two B channels and one D channel on a single line. Also

called the basic access rate.

Dumb terminal

A keyboard and display unit with no processing capability of memory storage of its

own, until connected to a computer.

Dump

The process of copying the data contents of an internal storage device into an

external device.

Echo

The of a signal from the terminating end back along the line, causing

interference in voice signals.

It can be suppressed

normally non-distorting of data signals. for voice transmission, but is

EDSL-extended digital subscriber

The ISDN EDSL combines 23 B channels and one D channel on a single line. Also

called the primary access rate.

l-14 List of terms

EIA (Electronic Industries Association)

a US manufacturers’ group which sets electronic equipment standards.

Electronic switching system (ESS)

A digital switching system controlled by computer, able to provide custom services

such as three way calling, speed dialing, and call transfer..

Emulator

Hardware and/or software which allows a system or device to operate as if it had

properties which it does not have, and thus interface with devices having those

properties. For example, an 8-bit microprocessor may emulate the features of a

bit processor, and thus be able to accept 16-bit data from a true 16-bit device.

Encode

To convert quantized samples into PCM words.

Encryption

The security coding of a message to prevent unauthorized interception during

transmission.

EPROM (erasable programmable read-only memory)

ROM which can be programmed, erased, and reprogrammed.

Equalization

An electronic technique used in telecommunications to compensate for distortion

present on a channel, causing uneven frequency response.

Error detection and correction

Methods used in data transmission to allow the receiver to detect errors in data

received, to request retransmission, or, in some cases, to correct it at the receiving

end.

Error rate

The frequency of errors in data transmission. The rate depends on several variables,

including the type of circuit, channel, or switching network the data passes through.

Exclusion

The ability of a user on some telephone systems to exclude all other users from a

line or channel.

Facility

A transmission link between two or more points without-either terminating or

signaling equipment. A link with such equipment would be either a channel, central

office, or trunk.

Facsimile

A representation of an image transmitted over a telecommunications link.

electro-mechanical scanning device converts the image (photo, document, graph)

List of terms 11-15

into an electrical signal which is transmitted over either an analog or digital facility

and reconstituted by the receiving equipment as an image on paper on film.

Failure rate

The number of failures which occur during a given period of time.

Feedback

The return of part of a machine’s output to its input. It is used to control the output

by comparison with the input, or for re-entry into another phase of processing.

FEP-front-end processor

An sits between a host computer and the terminals (or cluster controllers) to

which it is connected.

It performs the multiplexing function that allows many data

communication lines to access a single host computer port.

Fiber transmission system (FOTS)

A transmission system in which light from lasers or is modulated and

transmitted over very thin glass fibers and read by photodiodes in the receiver.

FOTS is capable of data rates a thousand times that of copper wire, with very low

interference effects.

Field effect transistor

A small, low-power, high input impedance semiconductor used to replace vacuum

tubes in most applications, especially small circuitry.

File

Filter

Any organization collection of data, itemized, structured and stored for convenient

access.

An electronic circuit used in telecommunications which blocks frequencies above

and below a specified bandwidth (“band-pass”) but lets other frequencies pass

undisturbed.

Firmware

A program written into a non-erasable computer storage location (ROM) to prevent

accidental loss, and to avoid the necessity of repeated loading of the program into

RAM.

Floppy disk

A thin, flexible, flat circular plate used to store information--

FORTRAN (Formula Translation)

A high level computer programming language used for mathematical and scientific

applications.

1 6

List of terms

Frame

(1) A string of bits running across the width of paper or magnetic tape, representing

one character. (2) In Videotex, a 24-line, 40 character screen of data. (3) In

telecommunications, an information identification structure used by receivers. A

group of digits is framed so as to be treated as one information unit.

Framing bit

A bit which signals the beginning and/or end of a data in data communications,

and allows the terminals to synchronize transmission and reception of data bits.

Framing pattern

A particular arrangement of framing bits.

Frequency divsion multiplexing (FDM)

The division of a channel bandwidth into several smaller bandwidths, each of which

becomes a separate data channel.

Frequency modulation

The modification of a single frequency carrier wave so that changes in its frequency

correspond to variations of an information signal.

Frequency shift keying (FSK)

Front end

Function keys

Gain

Gate

A form of frequency modulation in which frequency values are assigned to

represent a and a and in which the carrier wave shifts frequency between

these values according to the data.

An input device to a computer or other system which is used to enter data and

control codes.

Special keys on a computer keyboard which initiate system or control commands,

rather than text input.

The increase in strength of a signal (in db) when it is amplified.

An electronic switch, basic to computers, which recognizes only two possible states,

and will pass a signal into one of them (“off’ or “on”, or

Gateway

(1) Equipment which allows terminals on one communications network to access

terminals or data on another network. (2) A Videotex software package which

users to access data on external networks.

List of terms 11-17

Global

A term used in computer software to indicate a complete application of a routine to

data available. Thus “global search” indicates that a search routine will go through

all relevant data in storage.

Grade of service

A measure of the circuits available for calls in a communications service at the peak

hour. Calculated in calls blocked or average delay.

Graphic display terminal

A visual computer display capable of presenting graphic material such as charts,

diagrams or line drawings.

Handshaking

Initial signaling between two data sets on a data communications link which sets up

communication between them.

Hard copy

Any system information printed in some permanent form.

Hardware

The mechanical parts of a computer or business machine, including the electronic

wiring and storage components, but excluding the software programs (see

firmware).

HDLC (high-level data link control)

An International Standards Organization bit-oriented communications protocol

which includes frame error checking sequences, start-up and shut-down procedures.

Head

A device which reads and writes data on a storage unit.

Header

The initial string of codes in some data communication systems which informs the

receiver of the type of data to follow and its address.

High-level language

A computer program language whose statements are translated into more than one

machine instruction. Examples include BASIC, FORTRAN, PASCAL, ALGOL,

and SL-1.

High speed

(1) Data communication rates over 9600 bps (the limit of most voice grade

channels).

(2) A printer which runs fast enough to print as data becomes available to the

computer.

11-18 List of terms

High speed multiplex

A transmission circuit between two or a terminal and a multiplexer,

capable of carrying several user signals which can be separated at the receiving end.

Highway

A transmission path capable of carrying multiplexed data.

Host

A large, centralized computer holding a database to which access can be supplied to

users on a subscription basis.

Hybrid circuit

A complex circuit built up on film using integrated circuitry, transistors, resistors

and capacitors.

Impedance

The opposition of a circuit to the flow of electricity. The sum of resistance and

reactance (a resistance effect caused by inductance).

Impulse noise

Short-lived, high-amplitude interference bursts on a communications channel

caused by lightning, sparking machinery or switch contacts.

Information

Data which has been processed according to accepted conventions so that it is

meaningful to a user.

Information bit

A bit which carries text information, generated by the data source, and not used for

transmission control purposes.

In-house system

A data communications network operated by one organization for its own needs,

usually on its own premises, and without the use of common carrier facilities.

Instruction

A written statement, or the equivalent computer-acceptable code, that tells the

computer to execute a specified single operation.

Integrated circuit

A functional circuit whose components and interconnecting “leads” are formed on a

single chip of semiconductor material.

Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)

A network, generally evolving from the existing telephony digital network, that

provides end-to-end digital connectivity to support a wide range of voice and

voice services to which users have access via a set of standard multipurpose user to

network interfaces.

Intelligent terminal

List of terms 11-19

Interactive

Interface

Interference

Interrupt

A terminal containing internal storage and a CPU, capable of performing operations

on data without connection to an external computer.

A system in which input elicits a response-from a computer in real time, and in

which the computer may ask for further input from the user.

The connection between two systems. Usually, the hardware and software

connecting a computer terminal with peripherals such as data sets, printers, etc..

Loss

of clarity of a communications signal caused by unwanted noise signals.

The pause of a computer operation initiated either by commands in the program it is

using, or by conditions which arise in the hardware (“priority interrupt”). Some

specified operation must be performed during the interrupt before the original

operation may be resumed.

buffer (Input/output)

A short-term storage for computer input and output.

device (Input/output)

An interface between a computer or switching system and the outside world.

l-series recommendations

recommendations on standards for ISDN services, ISDN networks,

network interfaces, and internetwork and maintenance principles.

(International Standards Organization)

A body concerned with international computer and communications standards.

Jitter

The phase shift effect on a digital signal caused by transmission facility delays

Key system (telephone)

A multi-key telephone system on subscriber premises permitting several users to

place calls on several lines.

LAN-local area network

A high-volume data transmission facility interconnecting a number of data devices,

generally within a building or campus.

Language

The set of symbols, rules and conventions used to convey information, either at the

human level or the computer level.

1 l-20

List of terms

Large scale integration (LSI)

Large functional circuits made up of hundreds of gate circuits which form a

complete system or instrument. Examples are memories, computers and certain

instruments.

Laser communications

The use of a coherent, single-frequency, high-energy beam of light which can be

modulated to transmit information.

LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)

A form of visual data display using liquid crystals which can be-electronicaily

changed from a transparent to an opaque state.

Leased line

An telecommunications channel linking two or more points inside the

same exchange, leased to subscribers for their exclusive use.

LED (Llght Emitting Diode)

An electrical switching device which emits light when current is applied, and is

used for some visual displays.

Level

(1) The amplitude of a signal. (2) The number of bits required by a code to represent

one character. (3) The number of discrete signal elements in a modulation system.

(4) A procedure set in a communications protocol which enables higher-level

signaling.

Limited Distance Data Set (LDDS)

A data set used for transmission over short distances (30 miles).

Line

A communications channel, circuit, trunk or facility. Usually refers to a

telephone link between the local switching equipment and the network.

Line speed

The rate at which data signals may be passed over a particular channel, measured in

baud or bits per second.

Link

(1) A circuit or path joining two communications channels in a network. (2) A line

connector in a common control telephone switching system. --

Loading, cable

The addition of inductance through load coils along a cable to reduce amplitude

distortion and improve frequency response. The loading restores capacitance

balance to cable conductors, but is not used for high speed data channels.

List of terms 11-21

Logic

circuit

An electronic element which takes a series of inputs and produces outputs according

to the specific function the element is designed to perform.

test

A circuit fault-testing procedure in which is sent from on the line to

a data set and back to the test point.

Low speed

Data communications below

2400

bps.

LSI (Large Scale Integration)

An LSI circuit is a complex electronic circuit (thousands of transistors) reproduced

on a silicon chip.

Machine language

Coded information consisting of binary digits that can be accepted and utilized by

the computer.

Main distributing frame

The cable rack used to terminate all distribution and trunk cables in a central office

or PBX.

Mainframe

A large computer with peripherals, software and database maintained by large

corporations for internal use and subscriber access.

Matrix

An orderly array of elements used to switch calls from one part of the system to

another.

Matrix prlnter

An impact printer for hard copy output which uses an array of steel pins to create

the shape of a character in dots.

Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF)

The average trouble-free working period for a system or device, calculated

statistically over time.

Mean Time to Repair (MTTR)

The average time elapsed between discovery of a fault and its correction.

Medium Scale Integration (MSI)

Functional circuitry consisting of 12 or more gates which form a complete

functional operating unit such as a decoder, counter or multiplexer.

11-22 List of terms

Medium speed

Data communications generally between the rates of 2400 and 9600 bps on a voice

grade channel.

Memory

An organized collection of storage elements into which units of information

consisting of binary digits can be stored and from which this information can be

later retrieved.

Message

A communication prepared for telecommunications consisting of control signals,

header, start and end of text indicators, and text.

Message switching

method of “Store-and-Forward” switching in telecommunications. A message is

received somewhere in the network, stored, and retransmitted down the line when a

suitable channel is free.

Metal Oxide Semiconductor (MOS)

A type of small, field-effect transistor.

Micro

Greek prefix used to mean “very small”, as in microcomputer, or “one-millionth

of a unit” as in microsecond.

Microcomputer

An electronic device consisting of a microprocessor, program memory, data

memory, and input-output circuitry capable of accepting, storing and arithmetically

manipulating data.

Microprocessor

An electronic circuit contained on a single chip of silicon which performs the

arithmetic logic and control operations of a digital microcomputer.

Microwave

A high-capacity, low interference transmission network using high-frequency radio

bandwidths transmitted via relay towers.

Minicomputer

An intermediate-sized computer usually capable of multi-terminal networking.

Mnemonic

An abbreviation or arrangement of symbols which stands for a particular instruction

or process.

List of terms 11-23

Mnemonic coding

Any coding system using parts of the vernacular spoken language to aid

understanding and recall of its codes. E.g., ED for edit, EXT for end of text, DV

for divide, etc.

Modem

A a data set which can convert analog signals to digital

or vice-versa.

Modem pooling

The pooling of modems so that there need not be a one-to-one correspondence with

“casual” terminal users, thereby reducing data service costs.

Modulation

The process by which some characteristic of a high frequency carrier signal, such as

frequency, phase or amplitude, is varied by a low frequency information signal.

Multidrop line

A single communications link connecting several terminals, and which supports

polling and selecting operations.

Multiplexer

A device which enables the passage of several signals along one path, either through

time or frequency division of the signals.

Narrowband

A communications bandwidth less than that of a voice grade circuit (normally less

than 300 Hz) used for communication at 300 bps or less.

Network Channel Terminating Equipment (NCTE)

Generic name for equipment that provides line transmission termination from a

network to the customer’s premises.

Network

A set of communications points interconnected by communications channels.

Network termination 1

The name for ISDN Provides the functions of line transmission

termination and layer- 1 maintenance and multiplexing, terminating a two-wire U

interface.

Network termination (NT12)

A single piece of equipment that provides the combined functions of NT1 and NT2.

Network termination 2 (NT2)

Terminates the four-wire T interface. Examples are a PBX, LAN, and terminal

controller.

11-24 List of terms

Node

A convergent point in a communications network where lines from many sources

meet, and may be switched. In Datapac, a node is a packet switch location.

Non-volatile memory

A storage element whose contents are not destroyed if is lost.

Nyquist frequency

In order to adequately reproduce an analog waveform a sampling frequency of at

least twice the maximum analog waveform frequency must be used. The minimum

acceptable sampling frequency (ie. twice highest waveform is termed the

Nyquist Frequency.

Off-line

On-line

Referring to circuitry or devices not under direct control of the operating systems.

Referring to circuitry or devices in direct connection to, or under direct control of,

the operating system.

Open Systems Interconnection reference model

Established by the International Standards Organization the model describes

seven functional layers that define how interconnected telecommunications systems

should interface. The seven layers are: 1) physical, 2) data link, 3) network, 4)

transport, 5) session, 6) presentation, and 7) application.

Operating system (OS)

Computer software which permits the control and use of all particular programs fed

into the computer, coordinates storage and recall functions, and supervises remote

terminal interaction.

Overload level

The highest amplitude of an analog signal for which a code word exists.

Packet

A data block with its own address and control signals transmitted as a unit through a

telecommunications system.

Packet Assembler/Disassembler (PAD)

Devices which provide packet assembly and disassembly capability to

mode terminals.

Packet switched data transmission service

A service which transmits data in packets, including packet assembly and

disassembly, if required.

telemanuals.com

List of terms 11-25

Packet switching

The routing of message packets through a network as channels are available. Each

channel is busy for the duration of only one packet, then becomes free for another

packet. Packets of one message take different routes, determined by the network

itself, and are rejoined and resequenced at the destination.

Packet terminal

A terminal which can communicate with a packet network, such as X.25.

Parallel transmission

The simultaneous transmission of bits of one data character using several links, or

multiplexed channels in one link.

Parity bit

A binary digit 1 added to an information word to make the total number of 1 bits

either always odd or always even. This permits checking the accuracy of

information transfers.

Password

A set of characters which must be input to a system before the security program will

allow access to data and operations.

PCM word

An 8-bit code group representing a specific quantized level.

Port

An access to a

switching system.

Port concentration

A device which permits several terminals to share a single port.

Primary Rate Access

Twenty-three 64-Kbps B channels and one 64-Kbps D channel over an

extended digital subscriber line.

Program

Step-by-step instructions that tell a computer what operations to perform.

Program memory

The data storage area of a computer which contains the instructions that tell the

computer what operations to perform.

PROM (Programmable Read-Only Memory)

A permanent data storage system which holds information which can be repeatedly

read but altered only through a programming operation.

Protocol converter

A device which can convert one communications protocol into another.

telemanuals.com

List of terms

Public data network

A data transmission network operated by a private telecommunications

administration specifically for public subscription and use.

Pulse

A very short-lived electric current. Usually; a DC signal burst used for digital data

transmission.

Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM)

A time division modulation technique in which signal intelligence is represented by

a pulse whose amplitude represents the amplitude of the modulating wave at a

specific instant of time.

Pulse code modulation

The most common technique used to digitize analog voice signals.

Individually

sampled segments of a voice signal are coded into eight-bit digital words for

transmission.

Pulse modulation

The modulation of the amplitude (PAM), duration or position of

pulses to create a digital data signal. Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) samples

analog signals at short intervals and converts this information into a digitized

information signal.

Quantizing

The process of dividing a sampled analog signal into discrete levels. In a PCM

system, a finite number of bits are available for encoding each PAM sample. This

establishes the number of different magnitudes, or levels, that can be encoded. For

example, 8 bit PCM has 256 possible codes, each code representing a specific signal

level. Each PAM sample is assigned the encoded value of the nearest level to it.

This “rounding off’ to the nearest level is termed quantizing.

RAM (Random Access Memory)

A volatile storage system in which any storage location can be read from or written

to, independent of the last storage location accessed.

ROM (Read Only Memory)

A permanent storage system manufactured with predetermined data content, to be

read but not altered during computer operation.

Real time

The actual time in which a process or event takes place. In computer processing,

the running of an input/process/output cycle during the time in which an external

event is occurring, and in time to influence that event.

Repeater

A bi-directional digital signal regenerator.

telemanuals.com

List of terms

11-27

Request to Send

defined signal to a modem indicating that the attached DTE would like to

send.

RF channel

Routing

Sampling

A radio frequency channel nominally and 72 MHz bandwidth through a

satellite.

The path selection made for a given telecommunications signal through the network

to its destination.

Technical specifications established by the Electronic Industries Association

that electrical and mechanical interfaces between terminals, modems,

computers and communications lines.

The taking of measurements or specimens from representative elements of a body

under investigation in order to project truths about the body as a whole from this

data.

SDLC (Synchronous Data Link Control)

An IBM communications protocol using synchronous data transfer techniques.

Semiconductor

An electronic device made of silicon or germanium which will pass a high voltage,

but block a low one. Examples are transistors, diodes and integrated circuits.

Serial transmission

A transmission method in which data bits are sent sequentially along the same

channel (see parallel transmission).

SF (Single Frequency signaling)

The use of single tone frequencies for control functions on a circuit, e.g.,

“disconnect” on Direct Distance Dialing.

Signal (analog)

An electrical signal which has continuous waveform, the amplitude, frequency or

phase of which can be modified to represent data.

Signal (digital)

A discontinuous sequence of pulses representing combinations of binary digits.

Simulation

The fabrication of a mathematical or physical model of a process or event for the

purpose of testing, training or experimentation.

telemanuals.com

11-28

List of terms

Software

instructions, programs and procedures which direct the operation of a computer

system.

Solid state device

An electronic device which does not use vacuum tubes but which duplicates their

function.

Space matrix

An array of crosspoints separated in space. In many modem switching systems

every inlet has access to every outlet by means of separate paths-.

Span lines

Digital transmission media between central offices and between host and remote

Start/stop

A data transmission system in which each character is preceded by a start bit and

followed by a stop bit which set and reset the receiver for data reception. Also

known as synchronizing bits.

Store and forward

A message handling routine used in a message switching system.

Stored program control

A network switching system using programs stored in memory which are used

during the switching operations, and which can be changed as the need arises.

Stored program computer

A computer controlled by an internally stored set of instructions.

Subroutine

A small, self-contained part of a computer program which can be called into

operation when required, with control returned to the main program after its use.

Switching

The temporary, controllable connection of two or more points in a communications

network.

Synchronous

Any operation where a series of events takes place under the-control of a clocking

device; the same operations taking place in different systems, or different parts of

the same system, at exactly the same time.

Synchronous data network

A data network in which components are synchronized by a single timing

control.

List of terms 11-29

Synchronous transmission

A transmission system in which bits are sequenced according to fixed time

intervals, and which may not have start and stop bits framing each character.

System Network Architecture (SNA)

An IBM communications system design which includes structure, formats,

protocols and operating sequences.

T interface

The four-wire, physical interface between an NT1 and either an NT2 or ISDN

terminal. This interface can only be about one kilometer long.

A digital transmission standard that in North America carries traffic at the DS 1 rate

of 1.544 Mbps.

Tandem switching

An intermediate switching office which handles traffic between two switching

offices in the same exchange.

Telecommunications

A general term for the transmission and reception of intelligent signals via physical,

electronic, optical or other means.

Telegraphy

A communications facility for telegraph key generated signals.

Telemetry

The transmission of measurement readings over distance, usually by electronic

means.

Telephony

A communication facility for the transmission of voice and data over voice-grade

circuits.

Teletypewriter

A typewriter-like device connected to a telegraphic circuit for the transmission and

reception of alphanumeric data.

Teleprocessing

Data processing carried out by computers using data communications facilities.

Terminal

A point of data entry or exit in a communications network, or the device which

performs entry and exit functions.

11-30 List of terms

Terminal Adaptors (TA)

ISDN provide protocol conversion from standard non-ISDN interfaces (e.g.

X.25, RS232) to ISDN interfaces.

Terminal Equipment type 1

Refers to devices that support the standard interface. Examples are digital

telephones, IVD terminals, and other digital equipment.

Terminal Equipment type 2 (TE2)

Encompasses the existing non-ISDN equipment that requires a Terminal Adaptor

to connect to an ISDN interface. Examples are RS-232, RS-422, and V.35.

Text messaging

The use of a computer-based network of terminals to store and transmit

alphanumeric messages among users. An electronic mail service.

Throughput

The amount of data input, processed, and output in a given period by a machine or

system.

Tie line, Tie trunk

A private communications link leased from a common carrier connecting two or

more private branch exchanges.

Time Compression Multiplexing (TCM)

A digital transmission technique that permits full-duplex data transmission by

sending compressed bursts of data in a “ping pong” fashion.

Time Division Multiplexing (TDM)

The merging of several bit streams into a composite signal for transmission over a

single communication channel.

Time matrix

A series of memory devices used to rearrange the order of channels in a time

division multiplexed bit stream, thus switching the channels in time.

Time-sharing

Shared access to a central computer by several users, all of whom use it over a

given real-time period, but who do not notice each others’ presence due to the high

processing speed of the computer.

Time slot

A group of one or more bit positions which recurs at a constant interval and can be

uniquely identified.

List of terms 1 l-31

Time slot interchange

The functional element of a digital system which performs the switching of digital

voice data. Provides the path by which information is passed between the calling

line and the called line.

Tracking

A measure of how accurately a reconstructed analog waveform compares to the

original analog signal that was digitally encoded.

Transceiver

A device which has both transmit and receive modes.

Transmission system

Physical transmission medium used to transfer data from one point to another.

Transparent

A transmission procedure in which control signals pass unseen by the transmission

facility so that no control actions are taken.

Trunk

A communications channel between two switching centers, provided with signaling

and terminating equipment.

MU-law

The law used in PCM systems in North America is the MU-Law which

is defined as follows:

-1

where

x is the input signal

y is the compressed output signal

is a constant (set to 255 in Norht America)

is the natural logarithm

U interface

The two-wire, physical interface between the network (i.e., switch) and an

Unipolar

Refers to one polarity. In digital systems, unipolar pulses are generated and used

the equipment, but are seldom transmitted over cables-or other transmission

media.

User prof

The set of needs and specifications provided by a subscriber which define the type

which be supplied by the facility.

11-32 List of terms

Value-added telecommunications

A service which uses a common carrier’s network, but which offers its own services

based on computer’s software and hardware, e.g., message forwarding, data pooling,

etc.

Virtual circuit

A link between two in a network permitting message exchange according to

protocol, but which uses network bandwidth only during actual data exchange.

Voice messaging

An electronic system which uses a telephone, computer, or other devices to ‘send,

store and access voice messages between senders and recipients.

Volatile memory

A storage element whose contents are destroyed when power is removed.

Watchdog timer

A programmed timing circuit which can be set to interrupt a program a set

number of seconds as a safeguard against an endless loop caused by a programming

error, or unanticipated problems due to hardware breakdown.

A channel bandwidth greater than voice grade, capable of data transmission at rates

of 50,000 bps.

x.25

A standard for packet switching communications established by

x.75

The standard for intemetwork gateways between data networks.

Meridian 1

Engineering Handbook

Address comments to:

Northern Telecom

2305 Mission College Boulevard

Santa Clara, California 95054-1591

Attention: Product Marketing

1990 Northern Telecom

Information subject to change without notice.

Release 3.0

February, 1990

Developed in the United States

Mike McLaughlin

PAT

Rd., Ste. 300

Thousand Oaks CA g 136

Meridian

April 24, 1990

Dear Autoguote

Your update to the following Autoquote User guide chapters is enclosed.

Overview

Meridian 1 SL-1

Meridian Mail

ACD-MAX

Meridian MS-1

Meridian Message Center

You may use the updated chapters with your existing User Guide

binder and tabs.

Note that the Meridian 1 SL-1 chapter does cover the T-series models

(ST,RT,NT,XT).

If you still plan to quote these models, please retain

the old Meridian SL-1 Autoquote User Guide chapter.

All other chapters

may

discarded.

Due to proposed product changes,

the Lanstar and Banyan chapters have

not yet been updated.

These chapters will updated and distributed in

the near future.

The Autoquote User Guide distribution list will be audited before the

next update.

To remain on the distribution list, please complete and

the Distribution List Update Form on the next page.

If this

form

is not receive by June 4,

1990, your name will be removed

from

the

list.

Meridian I

AUTOQUOTE USER GUIDE

OVERVIEW

northern

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

INTRODUCTION AND OVERVIEW

AUTOQUOTE USER GUIDE CHAPTER

1. ORGANIZATION OF USER GUIDE ...............................

PRODUCT CHAPTERS ....... ..........................

2.1 PRODUCT CHAPTER FORMAT ..........................

2.2 NUMBERING SCHEME ...............................

...2

OVERVIEW

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1 QUOTING PROCESS .................................

...2

3.1.1

Inputs ...............................................

3.1.2 Processing .........................................

3.1.3 Reports ........................................... ...3

3.2

3.3 SYSTEM ACCESS PROCEDURES .......................

...3

3.3.1 ACCESSING COMPUTER

...............................

3.3.1.1 Telenet ...................................

...4

3.3.1.2 Direct Access

................................

3.3.2 AUTOQUOTE MENUS ................................... ...5

3.3.3 INFORM FILES .........................................

3.3.4 ACCESSING THE AUTOQUOTE APPLICATION

...............

...6

3.4 THE SERVICE MENU ...............................

...8

3.4.1 N

SET UP NEW QUOTE

.................................

3.4.1.1 Inputs phase

.................................

3.4.2 0

LOAD OLD QUOTE

..................................

3.4.3 G

GENERAL INFORMATION

.............................

3.4.4 M

MODEL/SOFTWARE GENERIC

..........................

3.4.5

INPUT

...........................................

3.4.5.1 Input Formats...............................1 2

3.4.6 S

SAVE QUOTE ......................................

3.4.7 x

AUX LOAD

...................................... ..13

3.4.8

REPORT

..........................................

3.4.9 L LIST EXISTING QUOTES

............................

3.4.10 c

COPY OLD QUOTE.................................1 4

3.4.11

DELETE OLD QUOTE...............................1 4

3.4.12 Q QUIT AUTOQUOTE

.................................

3.5 HELP .............................................

3.5.1 Host Access ......................................... 14

3.5.2 COMPUTER RELATED QUESTIONS

..........................

3.5.3 ACCESS OR AUTHORIZATION CODE QUESTIONS..............1 5

3.5.4 AUTOQUOTE OPERATIONAL OR TECHNICAL QUESTIONS........1 5

3.5.5 PRICING QUESTIONS

...................................

CAVEATS ................................................

4.1

4.2 OPERATIONAL SALES CHANNELS.....................1 6

5. Appendix 1 Telenet Access

Autoquote Userguide April 1990

ORGANIZATION OF USER GUIDE

This user guide is organized with one chapter dedicated to each product

supported by the Autoquote System.

In addition,

this is an introductory

chapter pertaining to all products and-the Autoquote System as a whole.

The information provided in each product chapter assumes this chapter

has been read and understood.

PRODUCT CHAPTERS

As each user does not necessarily quote all products supported by the

Autoquote

system,

only the chapters applicable to user may be

included in his user guide.

The following product chapters may be included in an Autoquote User

Guide:

Meridian 1 SL-1

Meridian Mail

ACD-MAX

Meridian MS-1

Meridian Message Center

2.1 PRODUCT CHAPTER FORMAT

Each of the product chapters is organized

similarly

to simplify using

this manual for various products. Each product chapter consists of the

following sections:

Introduction

Inputs

Engineering/Provisioning

Reports

Some chapters may include other sections as well, such as installation

parameters or special applications.

This consistent format will allow an Autoquote user--familiar with one

product chapter to use other product chapters with little difficulty.

Autoquote

Userguide April 20,

2.2 NUMBERING SCHEME

The sections and subsections within each chapter

the User Guide are

numbered hierarchically. This numbering scheme allows for quick

reference to specific topics and

also aids

in highlighting the

organization of each chapter.

For example,

section 2.1.2 indicates

section 2, subsection 1, part 2.

AUTOQUOTE OVERVIEW

The Northern Telecom MBS Autoquote System is an on-line, computerized

sales tool used in'preparing quotations for new

systems as

well as some

peripheral devices that may be added to existing systems. The Autoquote

programs produce pricing and engineering reports that support sales.

The price quoted by the Autoquote System applies to the items

listed in the quote.

The features and functions available on a system

configuration are based solely on the inputs. The actual system price

depends on particular applications and finalized system engineering .

which may require manual adjustments to the quote.

The general process for using the Autoquote System is as follows:

1) Define the requirements of the quote

2) Complete associated Autoquote input Sheets

3) Access the Autoquote

System

by dialing in to the host computer

4) Input the requirements of the quote

5) Run and analyze pricing and engineering reports

6) If necessary,

re-define requirements and repeat the process

3.1 QUOTING PROCESS

The quotation process is divided into three parts: inputs, processing

and output (reports).

3.1.1 Inputs

Inputs comprise the interactive part of the program. All desired

options must be specified via associated inputs. In

some

inputs

will default to predetermined values if no entry is made. define

the configuration.

3.1.2 Processing

The processing of the input data begins when Reports are requested.

This phase of Autoquote

may

last from

little as 30 seconds to as much

as minutes, depending on thg system size and the activity on the

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

computer.

The processing performs engineering and provisioning

calculations to generate a configuration and pricing.

Reports

Reports represent the output of the Autoquote process.

The general

categories of reports are pricing, equipment engineering.

3.2 SECURITY

The Autoquote System is one of Northern Telecom's primary sources of

pricing and configuration information.

As such,

use of the system is

restricted.

Access to the Autoquote System is controlled with various

and passwords which should be-handled conscientiously.

Two levels of passwords are used to restrict access to the Autoquote

system.

The first level allows access to the computer and is changed

approximately every two months.

This password is called

"User

Password."

The second level allows access to the Autoquote programs

within your specific user file. User files are called

"Location Codes."

If the file is not segmented by user ID's,

a "Location Authorization

Code"

is the second level password; this password is changed

approximately every three months.

If user ID's are utilized for

Location Code,

the second level password is called

"User Code Password."

User ID's and associated passwords are maintained by the administrator

or controller of the Location Code; changes typically occur

infrequently.

Since this document provides detailed information on how to access and

use the Autoquote System,

it must be handled with the same attention to

security that is accorded Northern Telecom Pricing Manuals.

3.3 SYSTEM ACCESS PROCEDURES

Accessing the Northern Telecom MBS Autoquote System requires two

separate levels of access procedures.

The first level is accessing the

computer itself.

The second level is accessing the Meridian Autoquote

programs within the computer.

3.3.1 ACCESSING THE COMPUTER

Access to the computer is accomplished by dialing into the computer with

the use of a modem. Various "dumb" terminals

teletypewriters and

personal computers can be used to access the Most

users

will be

dialing in to the computer through the Telenet network. However, if the

user is in the Dallas area or if there are Telenet problems, he will

dial in directly.

Once connected to the computer, you will be required

to enter an account sign-on and user password. These will be provided

by your Sales Channel Point-of-Contact.

Autoquote Userguide April 20,

3.3.1.1 Telenet

The following procedure is required to access the host computer through

Telenet:

Determine your local Telenet dial-in number. These numbers are

contained in Appendix 1.1 at the end of this chapter.

Note that

there are different numbers for different baud rates.

2) Dial the Telenet number with your modem and wait for an audible or

visual connect response.

At this response,

enter two carriage

returns. (For 2400 baud, enter one

then

carriage

3) After the carriage returns, you will see the following prompt:

214

TERMINAL =

Enter and press

4) After responding to step 3, you will see the

following symbol:

Enter

"C 214156" and

carriage return after this prompt.

This designates the host address on Telenet.

5) You will now see "214156 CONNECTED" indicating you are connected to

the host computer.Enter another carriage return and the host will

send a prompt.

6) To access the computer, enter "HELLO XXXXXXXX,YYYY.NTII" at the

prompt, where is your Location Code and is your

account sign-on. For example:

7) The computer will now prompt the following: ENTER USER ( ) PASSWORD:

Enter the User Password supplied by your Sales Channel

Contact.

will include your sales channel I.D.

8) After the password has been successfully entered, the computer will

display

a system

menu from which the SL-1 Autoqoute

System

can be

accessed.

3.3.1.2 Direct Access

Accessing the Computer directly requires fewer steps:

1) Dial (214) 301-7764 with your modem and wait for an audible or visual

connect response.

Wait approximately five (5) seconds, then enter

carriage return. You will then receive a prompt from the

host computer.

You

at the same point as Step 5 described

in paragraph 0 above.

Autoquote Userguide April 20,

2) Perform steps 6 through 8 in paragraph 0 above to complete the logon

procedure.

3.3.2 AUTOQVOTE MENUS

the Autoqoute system has been accessed the following "primary" menu

will be presented allowing the user to-choose between the SL-1 and

100 Autoqoute systems or to EXIT and logoff the system.:

N 0 R T H E R N TELECOM

ME'RIDIAN 1

Communication Systems

Welcome to the Autoquote system.

Select one of the following:

for SL-1 Autoquote

100

for

SL-100

E to Exit

(This system is designed for the exclusive use of and its

authorized distributors and is not for Public Disclosure.)

Selection:-

The primary menu allows the user to select either the SL-1 Autoquote,

SL-100 Autoquote

Exit by entering 1,100 or E respectively.

As this

user guide only addresses the SL-1 Autoquote System, enter at this

selection to continue or an to Exit.

Once a the SL-1 Autoquote been selected, the user will see

the message file. PLEASE PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION TO THESE

MESSAGES

THEY

CONVEY IMPORTANT TO AUTOQUOTE

USERS. Once these INFORM messages have been read, press to

continue.

After the initial INFORM messages have been read and the <RETURN> key

pressed,

the following secondary menu will appear:

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

NORTHERN TELECOM

MERIDIAN 1

Communication Systems

Welcome to SL-1 Autoquote! Select one of the following:

Autoquote Main Menu

Display message file A

INFORMB

Display message file B

Display message file C

INFORMF

Display message file F

Exit SL-1 Autoquote

(This system is designed for the exclusive

use

of and its

authorized distributors and is not for Public Disclosure.)

Selection:-

This menu allows the user to select to enter the Autoquote

application,

to exit to the primary menu or "INFORM-"to view one of

the indicated INFORM messages.

3.3.3 INFORM FILES

After the user selects the SL-1 Autoqoute System the message

file will be displayed.

The message file displays special

access and alert messages, and brief information regarding the contents

of other INFORM message files. Typically, these messages will indicate

new product releases available in Autoquote, changes in the quoting of

existing products or changes to the system itself. INFORMF typically

has the most current on-line input form. The INFORM message files will

be dated to indicate when these files were last updated.

3.3.4

ACCESSING THE

After selecting Autoquote from the secondary menu you see the

following prompt:

Autoquote Userguide April 20,

NORTHERN

TELECOM AUTOQUOTE

SYSTEM:

ENTER LOCATION CODE

sssssssss

Enter the Location Code supplied by your

Sales

Channel Point-of-Contact

and wait for the next prompt.

If the Location Code file is not divided

into User Code ID's, skip the next two steps.

If the file is using User

Code segmentation, the next prompt is:

ENTER USER CODE

sssssssss

Enter the User Code ID supplied by the administrator or controller of

the Location Code,

usually your Sales Channel Point-of-Contact, and wait

for the next prompt:

ENTER PASSWORD FOR THIS USER

sssssssss

Enter the User Code Password supplied with the User Code.

If the Location Code File is not divided into User Codes, the prompt

after ENTER LOCATION CODE is:

ENTER LOCATION AUTHORIZATION

sssssssss

Enter the location authorization code supplied by your Sales Channel

Point-of-Contact.

The next prompt is only applicable to certain Location Codes.

This

input indicates the amount of information to be included on certain

reports.

ENTER REPORT LEVEL ACCESS--

If your access level and the associated passwords are known, enter the

proper indicator here,

otherwise enter

to this prompt. Other

entries will require the user to

enter

the

"Report Level Access

Password."

After successfully entering the previous codes, the following messages

are displayed:

END OF PROGRAM

PLEASE REQUIRED OR CARRIAGE RETURN FOR SERVICE

You are now ready to begin the quoting process. Upon entering a

carriage return,

you will see

the service

menu.

Userguide April 20, 1990

3.4 THE SERVICE MENU

All activities available in the Autoquote System begin at the Service

Menu.

The following message will appear when you are at the Service

Menu:

PLEASE ENTER REQUIRED SELECTION OR FOR SERVICE

It is recommended that novice users always view the Service Menu when

first entering the Autoquote System. To view the menu, enter RETURN.

CODES:

N-

SET

UP NEW QUOTE

0- LOAD OLD QUOTE

G- GENERAL INFORMATION

M- MODEL/SOFTWARE GENERIC

INPUT

S- SAVE QUOTE

X- AUX LOAD

R- REPORT

L- LIST EXISTING QUOTES

C- COPY OLD QUOTE

D- DELETE QUOTE

Q- QUIT AUTOQUOTE

A quote must be loaded into your working file (option N or 0) before the

functions G,M,I,S,X, and R can be used. The general procedure for

setting up

new quote requires using the options to:

Set up a new quote

2) Save the quote

3) Run reports

These major options are explained in the following paragraphs

along

with the other available options shown in the service menu.

3.4.1 N

SET UP NEW QUOTE

Enter

to set up a new quote. The user is prompted for a set of

General Information (G) and Model/Software Generic

(M)

entries.

Upon

completion of these entries, the user is automatically put into the

input phase without having to go back to the Service Menu.

General

Information/Model Code

All entries regarding General Information and Model Code are prompted

when setting up a new quote. The prompts and appropriate responses are

listed below.

Enter the name the user and/or salesperson.

Autoquote Ueerguide April 20,

1990

ENTER RUN TYPE: QUOTE,

QUOTE,

QUOTE

Run types do not affect the result of an Autoquote but are

used in the analysis of Autoguote usage.

A valid entry is

required.

ENTER CITY CODE FOR LABOR RATE

This input applies only to the Direct Sales channel.

Enter

a carriage return for a listing of valid city codes, then

enter the appropriate code.

A valid entry is required; the

entry will be validated by Autoguote.

ENTER END-USER INDUSTRY CODE

Enter a carriage return for a listing of the industry codes,

then enter the appropriate code.

A valid entry is

required;

the entry will be validated by Autoquote.

ENTER END-USER COMPANY NAME

Enter the customer's company name.

ENTER END-USER LOCATION

Enter the company's business location.

ENTER SYSTEM CUTOVER DATE (MMDDYY)

The cutover date must be equal to or greater than the

current date. Format is month,

day and year (MMDDYY). A

valid entry is required.

ENTER MODEL GENERIC CODE

ENTER NUMBER

These prompts determine the product and system type to be

quoted.

Refer to Section 1 of the various product chapters

for valid responses to this prompt.

3.4.1.1 Inputs Phase

After responding to the previous prompts, the is now ready to input

his data for each input class.

For

example, the input classes for

Meridian 1 SL-1 are:

Software Options

Phones,

Lines and Trunks

Miscellaneous/Memory

Basic Information

Autoquote Ueerguide April 20, 1990

The program will prompt for each class in the order listed above.

(Refer to the Inputs section of the various product chapters for

information on the input classes.) In each class, there will be a

prompt phase (questions asked by Autoquote) followed by the statement:

END

PROMPTS

BEGIN MANUAL INPUT

The user simply answers the prompted questions (if any), and then

manually inputs any other requirements. Prompted entries may be changed

during the manual input phase. Refer to paragraph 3.4.5.1 Input

Formats,

page 12 for detailed information of inputting data.

After all input entries have been completed, the Service Menu is

presented. At this point,

the user may change General Information,

Model and/or Inputs by entering G, M and/or I respectively. Refer to

the explanations of these Service Menu selections in paragraphs:

3.4.3,

3.4.4,

and 3.4.5.

IMPORTANT:

is recommended the quote be saved after initial input or

after any changes have been made.

Otherwise,

the data could be lost

a communication line were to go down or the

user

began another quote

without saving the current one.

3.4.2

LOAD OLD QUOTE

When the is selected from the Service Menu, the system will respond

with the following:

PLEASE ENTER

OLD QUOTE NUMBER

Enter the old quote number. The existing quote numbers may be displayed

using the command as described in paragraph .

DO YOU WANT

PRINT OF THE SAVED

Enter

if you want to view the inputs for this quote as the quote is

The inputs are printed out in their "raw" format.

This

feature allows the inputs to be viewed without running a quote (i.e.

entering the Report function paragraph 3.4.8).

ENTER REQUIRED SELECTION OR CARRIAGE RETURN FOR.SERVICE

Now that the quote has been loaded into

the

working file, the user

can

select another option

from

the

Service

Menu such as R for reports or G

to change the General Information.

Autoquote

Userguide April 20, 1990

3.4.3 G GENERAL INFORMATION

This function allows the user to make changes to the General Information

entered when the quote was first created. Upon entering at the

Service Menu,

the user will be prompted for the following:

ENTER SALESMAN NAME

ENTER RUN TYPE: QUOTE, QUOTE

ENTER CITY CODE FOR LABOR RATE

(Direct Sales channel only)

ENTER END-USER INDUSTRY CODE

ENTER END-USER COMPANY NAME

ENTER END-USER LOCATION

ENTER SYSTEM CUTOVER DATE

An explanation of these prompts is given in Section

page 8.

3.4.4 M MODEL/SOFTWARE GENERIC

This function allows the user to change the Model/Software Generic of an

existing quote. For example,

if quote number 10 is an Option 21, it

could be changed to a Option 51 without having to re-input the

requirements.

Please refer to Introduction section of the various

product chapters for the valid Model/Generic codes. Upon entering

at the Service Menu,

the user will be prompted for the following:

ENTER MODEL GENERIC CODE

ENTER RELEASE

An explanation of these prompts is given in Section N-New, page

3.4.5 I INPUT

The is entered at the Service menu when the user wishes to change

the inputs which were specified when the quote was first set up with the

"N" command.

The following prompt will appear:

PLEASE ENTER DESIRED INPUT CLASS, END OR CARRIAGE RETURN FOR THE

If a carriage return is entered, an input menu will-display. For

Meridian 1 SL-1,

the following input menu will appear:

OPTIONS

SOFTWARE OPTION GROUPS

PHONES, LINES AND

MISCELLANEOUS/MEMORY

BASIC INFORMATION

Enter the appropriate letter for the input class desired.

Autoquote

April 20,

1990

Once a user is in a specific input category and all changes are

complete,

may

be entered to get back to the Input Menu or

“ABORT”

to return to the Service Menu. Refer to the Inputs section of each

product chapter for specific inputs.

3.4.5.1 Input Formats

Input of data into the MBS Autoquote System may be required in one of

three different input types. These different types are needed

for some

inputs that require more information than others. For example, a

certain input may need to include just a quantity whereas another might

need to include a quantity and a "type." The three input formats

are as follows:

Input Type

Format

where I = Input code Number

A = an integer value and/or a one decimal value

When entering data, the input code is separated from the input data

values by a slash and data values are separated from each other by

a comma Blank spaces or leading zeros when entering data are not

required or recommended.

Some

example inputs are shown below:

Type 1:

Type 2:

Type 3:

some cases,

not all data values need to be entered as Autoquote

will

supply default

values.

Information on input defaults is included in the

Inputs section of each of the various product chapters.

Input Echo

Whether supplied by the end user or defaulted, the program will echo

each

line

of input back to the terminal

for

verification. not only

allows the user to verify each input, but also to view any-defaulted

value.

The echoed values do not contain a decimal point and appear to

be increased by a magnitude of 10.

For

example, Entering will

appear as

3.4.6 S SAVE QUOTE

When is selected for a new quote, the system will respond by

assigning a quote number and providing a statement confirming the quote

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

has been saved.

The quote will be saved for only four (4) months from

the creation date. If necessary,

the quote may be copied to a new quote

number to extend the life four more months. The creation date

quote is either the date it was saved for the first time or the date it

was copied.

When

is selected for an existing quote,

the system will respond by

providing a statement confirming the quote has been saved.

3.4.7 x

AUX LOAD

Auxiliary loads are used to combine the engineering of a single or

multiple RPE sites and/or other peripheral devices with the main site or

system.

When

is entered,

the system prompts for the AUX quote

numbers one at a time.

After each AUX quote number is entered, press

ENTER and the system will prompt for another. After all AUX quote

numbers have been entered, the user enters "END".

Refer to the Aux Loading section for Meridian 1 SL-1 chapter for a

complete description of the AUX LOAD requirements regarding RPE.

3.4.8

R REPORT

This selection is used to generate reports on the quote. After the

is entered,

there will be a pause while the computer runs through the

calculations.

This phase of Autoquote may last from as little as 30

seconds to as much as minutes, depending on the system size and the

activity on the computer.

After completing the calculations, the system

will print the "Header" report which includes general information and

Autoquote disclaimers. Autoquote disclaimers. The system will t

PLEASE ENTER REPORT NUMBER(S)

Reports may be requested in any order and may be entered one at a

time

or several separated by commas. Refer to the Reports Section

of each

the various product chapters for a list of report numbers and titles.

All reports except the header are optional and can be printed as desired

by the user.

Enter "End" at the prompt to return to the Service Menu.

3.4.9

L LIST EXISTING QUOTES

This option allows a "directory" list to be displayed, showing all of

the quotes in the file.

The quotes are listed by quote number in

descending order.

When

"L" is entered, the system prompts:

PLEASE ENTER QUOTE NUMBER TO LIST PROM OR CARRIAGE

Autoguote Userguide April 20,

Enter the quote number from which you want the list to begin. Carriage

return will cause the list to begin from the latest quote.

PLEASE ENTER NUMBER OF QUOTES TO BE DISPLAYED AT ONE TIRE OR END

When the number is entered,

the system will list the 'number of quotes

specified.

The list will start with the quote number specified and end

after the correct amount has been displayed.

After viewing the quotes in the list, the user can continue with more

listings or enter "END" to return to the Service Menu.

3.4.10 c COPY OLD QUOTE

With this entry,

the system will prompt for the quote number to be

copied.

When the quote number is entered, the

system

makes a copy of

the saved information and assigns it a new

quote

number with a

new

creation date.

This feature allows a quote to be modified and saved without disturbing

the original quote.

3.4.11 D DELETE OLD QUOTE

A quote may be deleted from the file if it is no longer needed.

After

entering

"D" at the Service Menu,

the system will prompt for the quote

number to be deleted. A second prompt will echo back the quote number

to be deleted for verification.

3.4.12 Q

QUIT AUTOQUOTE

Enter

"Q" at the Service Menu to return to the secondary Autoqoute menu.

3.5 HELP

When this User Guide is read and followed, the user will experience

little or no difficulty in using the MBS Autoquote System.

If, however,

questions or problems do arise, read the following subsections for

assistance information. These items are presented in the order problems

may be encountered when using the Autoquote

system. --

3.5.1 Host Access

If, when accessing Autoquote, you encounter problems before getting the

host prompt (:)

Telenet Users call Telenet Customer Service at 800-336-0437.

Direct Users call the Information Center at 214-437-8711

Ueerguide April 20, 1990

3.5.2 COMPUTER RELATED QUESTIONS

For computer access or terminal time-out problems, call the Information

Center at 214-437-8111.

3.5.3 ACCESS OR AUTHORIZATION CODE

Call your Sales Channel Point-of-Contact or password

administrator/controller.

Autoquote Administration cannot give out

password information.

3.5.4 AUTOQUOTE OPERATIONAL OR TECHNICAL QUESTIONS

There are three sources of information available to answer

and/or technical questions.

1) Consult this User Guide for both access and configuration

information.

2) Call your NT support person or group (District Sales Manager).

3) Contact Autoquote Administration at (214) 437-8529.

3.5.5 PRICING QUESTIONS

Many pricing questions can be answered by consulting your pricing

manual. However,

if the pricing manual does not contain the answer,

contact your NT Representative.

CAVEATS

This section contains information on the characteristics and

functionality of the Autoquote system. It is important that this

section is understood to prevent any misuse of the Autoquote system.

4.1 GENERAL

The Meridian Autoquote System is a sales

tool to

be used in preparing

quotations for new systems as well as some peripheral devices.

Although

the

system

contains precise engineering rules, it does not perform an

exhaustive and configuration of every potential

configuration.

The engineering rules are designed to accurately

configure an average system.

Therefore,

the user should always review

the reports produced by the system to ensure a correct and reasonable

configuration.

These reviews are necessitated by Autoquote program

functionality and not by limitations of the products supported in the

Autoquote

System. .

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

Although a concerted effort has been made to engineer each Meridian

system configuration completely with the Autoquote System, there may be

situations requiring further engineering or configuration adjustments.

Because of this,

the price quoted by the Autoquote System applies only

to the items of equipment and software listed in the.Equipment Breakout

Report.

This report contains a line entry for each item of equipment or

software that is quoted. No item is priced into the quote unless it is

detailed in this report. Pricing adjustments will be required if there

are any additions or deletions to this list.

4.2 OPERATIONAL SALES CHANNELS

The Autoquote System is used by all Sales Channels. For each Sales

Channel,

it quotes only those items which Northern Telecom supplies to

that channel.

Autoquote may treat some inputs differently depending on

the Sales Channel.

Autoguote Userguide April 20, 1990

5. APPENDIX 1 TELENET ACCESS NUMBERS

For customer service, call toll-free l-800/336-0437.

From overseas

locations with non-WATS access, call

2400 9600

ST AC CITY BPS BPS BPS CLASS

------------------------------------------------------------------------

AL 205

Anniston

AL 205

Birmingham

AL 205

Decatur

205

AL 205 Florence

AL 205

Huntsville

AL 205

Mobile

AL 205

Montgomery

AL 205

Tuscaloosa

907

Anchorage

AK 907

Barrow

AK 907 Bethel

AK 907 Cold Bay

907

AK 907

Deadhorse

AK 907 Delta Junction

907

Dillingham

907 Fairbanks

907

Glennallen

AK 907

Homer

AK 907 Iliamna

907 Juneau

907

Ketchikan

King Salmon

907

Kodiak

907

Kotzebue

907

907 Name

907

AK 907 Palmer

AK 907 Prudhoe Bay

AK 907 St Paul

AK 907

Seward

907 Sitka

AK 907

Soldotna

907

Talkeetna

907

Tanana

907 Valdez

907

Whittier

907 Yakutat

AZ 602 Phoenix

AZ 602

Flagstaff

AZ 602

Tucson

501

Fayetteville

236-9711

328-2310

355-0206

793-5034

767-7960

539-2281

432-1680

269-0090

752-1472

276-0453

852-2425

543-2411

532-2371

424-3744

659-2777

895-5070

842-2688

456-3282

822-5231

235-5239

571-1364

789-7009

225-1871

246-3049

486-4061

442-2602

524-3256

443-2256

778-2301

745-0200

659-2777

546-2320

224-3126

262-1990

733-2227

366-7167

835-4987

472-2467

254-0244

442-0212

767-0497

539-1631

438-6881

832-4314

758-5799

276-0453

(300 BPS ONLY)

256-6955

254-0040 A

747-9395

442-0212

Autoquote

Userguide April 20,

AR 501 Ft Smith

AR 501 Hot Springs

AR 501 Little Rock

AR 501

Texarkana

805

Bakersfield

916 Chico

CA 714

CA 213

Compton

CA 415

Concord

CA 916 Davis

CA 619

Escondido

CA 707

Eureka

CA 415 Fremont

CA 209 Fresno

CA 714 Garden Grove

CA 818

Glendale

CA 415

Hayward

CA 213 Los Angeles

CA 213 Marina Del Rey

CA 209

Modesto

CA 408

Monterey

CA 213

Norwalk

CA 415

Oakland

CA 619

Oceanside

CA 619 Palm Springs

CA 415 Palo Alto

Pinole

CA 714

Pomona

CA 916

Sacramento

CA 408 Salinas

CA 415 San Carlos

CA 619 San Diego

CA 415 San Francisco

CA 408 San Jose

CA 213 San Pedro

CA 415 San Rafael

CA 415 San

CA 714

Santa

CA 805

Santa

Barbara

CA 408 Santa Cruz

CA 805

Santa Maria

CA 707 Santa Rosa

CA 209

Stockton

CA 805 Thousand Oaks

CA 805

Ventura

CA 209

Visalia

CA 818 West Covina

CA.818 Woodland Hills

CO 719 Colorado Springs

CO 303

Denver

CO 303 Ft Collins

CO 303 Grand Junction

782-2852

623-3159

372-4616

772-6181

327-8146

894-6882

824-9000

516-1007

827-3960

753-4387

741-7756

444-3091

490-2050

233-0961

898-9820

507-0909

881-1382

624-2251

937-3580

306-2984

383-2557

576-2852

646-9092

404-2237

836-4911

430-0613

951-2612

856-9995

724-2400

626-1284

243-0690

448-6262

443-4940

591-0726

233-0233

956-5777

294-9119

548-6141

472-5360

558-7078

682-5361

429-6937

925-7039

578-4447

957-7610

495-3588

656-6760

627-1201

915-5151

887-3160

635-5361

337-6060

493-9131

623-3159

374-2861

772-6181

327-5321

824-8976

674-0127

753-4387

741-9536

490-2050

441-1861

895-1207

246-3886

622-1138

306-4922

646-5122

834-3194

951-2612

856-0484

724-2225

243-0690

443-7434

443-8791

595-8870

231-1703

286-6340

514-1590

550-4625

564-1158

429-9192

925-7039 .

578-1055

957-7627

650-1070

348-7141

635-2551

696-0159

493-4014

937-0233 A

956-6317 A

337-3304 A

Userguide April 20, 1990

CO 303 Greeley

352-8563

CO 719 Pueblo

542-4053

CT 203 Bridgeport

335-5055

CT 203 Danbury

794-9075

CT 203

Hartford

247-9479

CT 203 Middletown.

344-8217

CT 203 New Britain

225-7027

CT 203 New Haven

624-5954

CT 203 New London

447-8455

CT 203

Norwalk

866-7404

CT 203 Stamford

348-0787

CT 203

Waterbury

753-4512

DE 302 Dover

678-8328

DE 302 Newark

454-7710

DC 202

Washington

429-7896

DC 202

Washington

429-7800

FL 407

338-3701

FL 813 Cape Coral

275-7924

FL 407 Cocoa Beach

267-0800

FL 904 Daytona Beach

255-2629

FL 305 Ft Lauderdale

764-4505

FL 813 Ft Myers

275-4153

FL 407 Ft Pierce

466-4566

FL 904

Gainesville

338-0220

FL 904 Holly Hill

257-4770

FL 904

Jacksonville

353-1818

FL 813

683-5461

FL 904

787-0799

FL 407

Melbourne

242-8247

FL 305

Miami

372-0230

FL 813 Naples

263-3033

FL 904

Ocala

351-3790

FL 407

Orlando

422-4088

FL 904 Panama City

763-8377

FL 904

Pensacola

432-1335

FL 305 Pompano Beach

941-5445

FL 813 St Petersburg

323-4026

FL 813 Sarasota

923-4563

FL 904

Tallahassee

681-1902

FL 813

Tampa

224-9920

FL 904

Valparaiso

897-3421

FL 407 West Palm Beach

833-6691

912

Albany

888-3011

404

Athens

548-5590

404

Atlanta

523-0834

GA 404

Augusta

724-2752

404 Columbus

571-0556

404

Gainsville

912

Macon

404

Rome

234-1428

912 Savannah

236-2605

HI 808

Oahu

528-0200

HI 800 Other Islands

272-5299

ID 208 Boise

ID 208 Idaho

Falls

529-0406

367-9130

792-5354

724-9396

7-73-3569

437-0909

359-9404

756-0342

737-4340

429-0956

524-5304

275-4153

466-4566

338-1700

257-4770

791-9201

687-0666

787-0799

372-1355

351-0263

422-8858

763-8377

434-2103

327-1163

925-1499

223-5859

897-3421

655-2993

431-9384

584-0212

724-4494

323-8931

741-2108

236-2875

528-0200 (2 )

272-5299 (2)

343-1272

529-0406

429-9145 A

372-9684 A

523-5512 A

Userguide April 20,

IL 312

Aurora

IL 618

Belleview

IL 309

Bloomington

IL 312

Chicago

IL 217

Decatur

IL 815

Dekalb

IL 815 Joliet

IL 708

Libertyville

IL 708

Naperville

IL 309 Peoria

IL 815

IL 217

Springfield

IL 217

Urbana

IN 812

Bloomington

IN 812

Evansville

IN 219 Ft Wayne

IN 219 Gary

317 Indianapolis

IN 317

Kokomo

IN 317

Lafayette

IN 317

Muncie

IN 219 South Bend

IN 812 Terre Haute

IA 515 Ames

IA 319

Burlington

IA 319 Cedar Rapids

IA 319

Davenport

IA Des Moines

IA 319

Dubuque

IA Iowa City

IA 712 Sioux City

IA 319

Waterloo

KS 913

Lawrence

KS 913

Leavenworth

KS 913

Manhattan

KS 913 Salina

KS 913

Topeka

KS 316

Wichita

KY 502 Bowling Green

KY 502

Frankfort

KY 606

Lexington

KY 502

Louisville

KY 502

Cwensboro

318

Alexandria

LA 504 Baton Rouge

LA 318

Lafayette

LA 318 Lake Charles

LA'318 Monroe

LA 504 New Orleans

LA 318

Shreveport

ME 207

Augusta

ME 207 Brewer

208 743-0099

208

Pocatella

232-1764

IL 312

Arlington

Heights 255-6465

896-0620

227-5483

827-7000

938-0600

429-0235

758-2623

726-0070

362-7838

355-2910

637-8570

965-0400

753-1373

384-6428

332-1344

424-7693

426-2268

882-8800

299-0024

455-2460

742-6000

282-6418

233-7104

232-5329

233-6300

752-2516

364-0911

324-2445

288-4403

556-0783

351-1421

255-1545

232-5441

843-8124

651-0015

537-0948

825-7900

233-9880

262-5669

782-7941

875-4654

233-0312

589-5580

686-8107

445-1053

343-0753

233-0002

436-0518

387-6330

524-4094

622-3123

989-3081

743-5885

232-1764

255-6465

896-3363

227-5483

828-2573

938-8725

429-6054

758-5046

726-8731

362-7838

355-2910

637-8582

965-0696

753-1391

328-0317

428-2522

422-3431

882-1835

299-6766

452-0073

233-4031

234-4119

233-2603

752-2516

362-2764

324-8902

288-6206

354-0676

233-4660

262-7961

782-6380

875-1942

233-7217

583-1006

343-0771

234-8451

322-9826

522-3967

424-2255

622-7364

938-4401 A

524-7337

ME 207 784-0105

ME 207 Portland 761-4000

MD 301

Annapolis

224-8550 224-0795

MD Baltimore 727-6060 752-5555

MD 301 Frederick. 293-9596

617 Boston 292-0662 574-9244

MA 508 Brockton 580-0721

617

Dedham

326-4064

MA 508 Fall River

677-4477

508

Framingham

879-6798

508

Lawrence

975-2273

617

Lexington

863-1550 863-1745

508 Lowell 937-5214

MA 508 New Bedford

999-2915 999-9667

413

Northampton

586-0510

MA 413 Pittsfield 499-7741

MA 508 Salem 744-1559

413

Springfield

737-9285

MA 508 Woods Hole

540-7500 457-9390

508

Worcester

755-4740 792-1785

MI 313 Ann Arbor

996-5995 665-2900

MI 616 Battle Creek

968-0929 968-9851

MI 313 Detroit 964-2988 963-2274

MI 313 Flint 235-8517 235-5477

MI 616 Grand Rapids

774-0966 774-0131

MI 517

Jackson

782-8111

MI 616

Kalamazoo

345-3088 345-3122

MI 517

Lansing

484-0062 484-6301

MI 517

Midland

832-7068

MI 616

Muskegon

726-5723

MI 313 Pontiac 332-5120

MI 313 Port Huron

982-8364

MI 517

Saginaw

790-5166 799-3190

MI 313

Southfield

827-4710

MI 616 Traverse City

946-2121

MI 313

Warren

575-9152 558-8460

MI 313

Wayne

326-4210 326-4210

MN 218

Duluth

722-1719 722-5032

MN 507

Mankato

388-3780

MN 612

Minneapolis

341-2459 338-1661

507

Rochester

282-5917 282-0253

MN 612 St Cloud

253-2064

MS 601

Hattiesburg

264-0815

MS 601 863-0024

MS 601

Jackson

969-0036

969-0152

MS 601

Meridian

482-2210

MS 601

Starkville 324-2155

314

Columbia

449-4404

MO 314 Jefferson City

634-5178 634-8436

MO 816 Kansas City

221-9900 472-1430

816

St Joseph

279-4797

MO 314 St Louis

421-4990 421-0381

417

Springfield

864-4814 864-4945

406 Billings

248-6373

MT 406 Great

Falls

771-0067

Userguide April 20, 1990

727-2044 A

964-3133 A

341-0324 A

421-1376 A

MT 406

Helena

MT 406

Missoula

NE 308 Grand Island

NE 402

Lincoln

NE 402 Omaha

702

Las Vegas

NV 702 Reno

NH 603

Concord

NH 603

Durham

NH 603

Manchester

NH 603

Nashua

NH 603

Portsmouth

NJ 609 Atlantic City

NJ 201

Freehold

NJ 201

Hackensack

NJ 609

Merchantville

NJ 201

Morristown

NJ 201 New Brunswick

NJ 201

Newark

NJ 201 Passaic

NJ 201

Paterson

NJ 609

Princeton

NJ 201

Rahway

NJ 201

Roseland

NJ 201

Sayreville

NJ 201 Summit

NJ 609

Trenton

505

Albuquerque

505 Las

NM 505 Santa

NY 518

Albany

NY 607

Binghamton

NY 716

Buffalo

NY 516 Deer Park

NY 516

Hempstead

NY 607 Ithaca

NY 212 New York City

NY 716 Niagara

Falls

NY 518

Plattsburgh

NY 914

Poughkeepsie

NY 716

Rochester

NY 315

Syracuse

NY 315

Utica

NY 914 White Plains

704

Asheville

NC 704

Charlotte

NC.919 Fayetteville

NC 704

Gastonia

NC 919

Greensboro

919 High Point

Userguide April 20, 1990

443-0000

721-5900

381-2049

475-4964

341-7733

737-6861

827-6900

224-1024

868-2924

627-8725

880-6241

431-2302

348-0561

780-5030

488-6567

596-1500

663-9297

. 455-0275

745-2900

623-0469

778-5600

684-7560

799-5587

815-1885

227-5277

525-9507

273-9619

989-8847

243-4479

526-9191

473-3403

465-8444

772-6642

847-1440

667-5566

292-3800

277-2142

741-8100

741-4950

620-6000

282-1462

562-1890

473-2240

454-1020

472-5583

797-0920

328-9199

252-9134

332-3131

323-8165

865-4708

889-7494

NC 919 North Wilkesboro 838-9034

443-0527

381-2049

475-3839

346-6419

737-5466

827-5290

225-8710

625-8088

880-3901

431-7592

344-8571

780-9122

488-2063

596-8659

665-6860

644-4745

745-7010

623-7122

773-3674

936-0231

227-6722

273-9619

989-7127

242-1742

465-8632

772-9526

847-1825

243-1105

485-3380

272-9980

645-0560

282-3284

473-3200

454-5730

479-5445’

797-022.8

682-3505

252-0133

333-6204

323-4148

275-1251

623-0900 A

799-0244 A

633-1117 A

332-3705

Userguide April 20,

NC 919 Raleigh 834-8254

NC 919 Res Tri Park

549-8139

NC 919

Tarboro

823-0578

NC 919

Wilmington

763-8313

NC 919

Winston-Salem

725-2126

ND 701 Fargo 235-7717

ND 701 Grand Forks

775-7813

ND 701 663-2256

OH 216 Canton 452-0903

OH 513

Cincinnati

579-0390

OH 216

Cleveland

575-1658

OH 614 Columbus 463-9340

OH 513 Dayton 461-5254

OH 216

Elyria

322-8712

419 422-8188

OH 513

Hamilton

863-4116

OH 216 Kent 678-5115

OH 216 960-1771

OH 419

Mansfield

526-0686

OH 419

Sandusky

627-0050

OH 513

Springfield

324-1520

419

Toledo

OH 216

Warren

394-0041

OH 216

Wooster

OH 216

Youngstown

743-1296

918

Bartlesville

336-3675

405 353-0333

OK 405 Oklahoma City

405 Stillwater 624-1112

918

Tulsa

584-3247

503 Corvallis 754-9273

503

Eugene

683-1460

OR 503 Hood River

386-4405

OR 503 Klamath Falls

882-6282

503

Medford

779-6343

OR 503

Portland

295-3028

OR 503

Salem

378-7712

PA 215

Allentown

435-3330

PA 814

Altoona

949-0310

PA 717

Carlisle

249-9311

PA 717

Danville

271-0102

PA 814

Erie

899-2241

PA 412

Greensburg

836-4771

PA 717

Harrisburg

236-6882

PA 814

Johnstown

535-7576

PA 215 King of Prussia

337-4300

PA 717

Lancaster

295-5405

PA 215 946-3439

PA 412

Monroeville

856-1330

PA 215

Philadelphia

574-9462

PA 412

Pittsburgh

288-9950

PA 412

Pittsburgh

288-9974

PA 215

Reading

376-8750

PA 717

Scranton

961-5321

PA 814 State College

231-1510

541-9096

251-8900

777-0312

235-9069

452-6642

241-8008

771-6480

461-9044

461-0755

322-8645

422-8188

579-1583

575-1308

463-9110

678-5043 678-6774

255-1906

743-6843

353-0225

232-9513

743-1447

587-2774

754-0559

342-6626

882-6282

773-7601

241-0496

378-1660

770-1405

295-2936

453-3793

836-4771

236-2007

536-3630

337-2850

295-7128

946-3439

856-1330

574-0990

471-6430

375-6945

961-5480

574-0094

281-8782

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

PA 215

Warrington

343-6010

PA 215 West Chester

436-7406

PA 717

Wilkes-Barre

829-3108

PA 717

Williamsport

494-1796

PA 717

York

846-6550

RI 401

Providence

751-7912

RI 401 North Kingston

295-7100

RI 401

Woonsocket

466-4566

SC 803

Charleston

722-4303

SC 803

Columbia

254-0695

SC 803

Greenville

233-3486

SC 803

Spartanburg

585-1637

SD 605 Pierre

224-0481

SD 605 Rapid City

348-2621

SD 605 Sioux Falls

336-8593

TN 615 Bristol 968-1130

TN 615

Chattanooga

756-1161

TN 615

Clarksville

552-0032

TN 615 Johnson City

282-6645

TN 615

Knoxville

523-5500

TN 901

Memphis

521-0215

TN 615

Nashville

244-3702

TN 615 Oak Ridge

481-3590

TX 915

Abilene

676-9151

TX 806

Amarillo

373-0458

TX 214

Athens

677-1712

TX 512

Austin

928-1130

TX 512

Brownsville

542-0367

TX 409

Bryan

822-0159

TX 512 Corpus

884-9030

TX 214 Dallas 748-6371

TX 817 381-1897

TX 915 El Paso

532-7907

TX 817 Worth

332-4307

TX 409

Galveston

762-4382

TX 713

Houston

227-1018

TX 512

Laredo

724-1791

TX 214

236-4205

TX 806

Lubbock

747-4121

TX 512

686-5360

TX 915

Midland

561-9811

TX 409

Nederland

722-3720

TX 915 San Angelo

944-7621

TX 512 San Antonio

22 S-8004

TX 214

Sherman

893-4995

TX 817

Temple

773-9723

TX 214

Tyler

597-8925

TX 512

Victoria

572-3197

TX 817

Waco

752-9743

TX 817 Wichita Falls

322-3774

UT.801 Logan

752-3421

UT 801

Ogden

627-1630

UT 801 Provo

UT 801 Salt Lake City

359-0149

VT 802

Burlington

864-0808

343-6010

436-7406

824-8209

748-3541 A

332-8424

227-1760 A

843-0039

831-3990

295-7100

466-4566

577-4710

252-0328

271-0231

224-2257

336-6438

968-2480

265-7929

521-5072

527-5175

255-2608

373-1833

929-3622

544-7073

884-6946

745-1359

381-1897

541-1931

332-6794

765-7298

227-8208

686-2452

561-8597

727-4090

949-1231

225-3444

572-3197

752-3421

627-1640

375-2084

359-0578

Userguide April 20, 1990

VT 802

Montpelier

229-4966

VT 802 775-1676

VT 802 White River

VA 703

Blacksburg

552-9181

804

Charlottesville

977-5330

VA 703

Covington

962-2217

703

Fredericksburg

371-0188

703

Harrisonburg

434-7121

VA 703

Herndon

435-1800

804

Lynchburg

845-0010

VA 804 Newport News

596-6600

804

Norfolk

625-1186

703

Occoquan

494-0836

804

Richmond

788-9902

703 Roanoke 344-2036

206

Auburn

939-9982

206

Bellingham

733-2720

WA 206 Everett 775-9929

WA 206

WA 206 Lynwood 774-7466

WA 206

Olympia

754-0460

WA 509 Pullman 332-0172

509

WA 206 Seattle 625-9612

509

Spokane

455-4071

206

Tacoma

627-1791

206

Vancouver

693-6914

509

Wenatchee

663-6227

509

Yakima

575-1060

WV 304

Charleston

345-6471

304

Huntington

523-2802

WV Morgantown

292-0104

304

Wheeling

233-7732

WI 608 Beloit

WI 715 Eau Claire

WI 414 Green Bay

432-2815

WI 414

Kenosha

552-9242

WI 608 La Crosse

784-0560

WI 608

Madison

257-5010

WI 414

Milwaukee

271-3914

WI 414

Neenah

722-7636'

WI 414 632-6166

WI 414

Sheboygan

452-399s

WI 715

Wausau

845-9589

WI 414 West Bend

334-2206

WY 307

Casper

265-5167

WY 307

Cheyenne

638-4421

WY 307

Laramie

721-5878

481-6807

596-2710

625-2408

494-0836

343-4140

344-2404

733-2873

774-7466

786-5066

332-0172

946-2350

623-9951

838-9065

663-9180

345-7140

292-0492

836-0097

432-0346

257-8472

278-8007

731-1560

632-2174

265-8807

637-3958

625-9008 A

271-2238 A

(1) Service is provided by Alascom, Inc. via Alaskanet, which is

restricted to collect call access to U.S. hosts connected to the

network.

If prepaid access is required, contact a US

Sprint representative.

For sign-on information, call Alascom

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

Customer Service at (inside Alaska) or l-8001544-2233

(outside Alaska).

(2) International data rate schedule applies.

* An asterisk indicates a change in number, a service upgrade

anew

location. Refer to the 'New'

listing for further explanations of

these changes.

Meridian I

USER GUIDE

MERIDIAN 1

Autoquote

Userguide April 20, 1990

MERIDIAN 1 SL-1

PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

AUTOQUOTE USER GUIDE CHAPTER

1. INTRODUCTION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION...............................1

1.2 VALID MODELS..

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INPUTS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1 INPUT CLASSES....

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2 INPUT CODES, DESCRIPTIONS, AND DEFAULT VALUES-

...4

2.2.1 Software Option

...............................

2.2.2 Phones, Lines, and Trunks

............................

2.2.2.1 Port Inputs

..................................

Traffic Defaults Table

...................

2.2.3 Miscellaneous/Memory

................................

2.2.4 Basic Information

...................................

3. ENGINEERING/PROVISIONING

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1 SOFTWARE PROVISIONING

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2

PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT CARDS AND MODULES;..........3 0

3.2.1 IPE Cards ...........................................

3.2.2

EPE

Cards

...........................................

3.2.3

Receivers

..................................

3.2.3.1 DTR Traffic

.................................

3.2.3.2

DTR Port Provisioning Table.................3 3

3.2.3.3 DTR Cards

...................................

3.2.4

Tone Detector

.......................................

3.2.5

IPE Modules

.........................................

3.2.6 EPE

Modules

.........................................

3.2.6.1 Controller

.............................

3.2.6.2

Ringing Generators

..........................

3.3 NETWORK LOOP ENGINEERING.........................36

3.3.1

Calculating Network Loops

...........................

3.3.2

Option 21 Special Case

..........

3.3.3

IPE Modules GOS)

..............................

3.3.4

EPE MODULES GOS)

..............................

3.3.5

Network Segmentation

................................

3.3.6

Meridian Mail Loops

.................................

3.3.7

.........................................

3.3.8

Non Blocking

........................................

3.4 PROVISIONING........3 9

3.4.1 Provisioning*

.................................... 39

Ports-

...................................

Userguide April 20, 1990

3.4.1.2 SDI

................................... 39

3.4.1.3

SDI Cables-.................................. 39

3.4.2 ESDI Provisioning-................................... 40

3.4.3 DCHI Provisioning-................................... 40

3.4.4 Card Provisioning:...................4 0

3.5 PROVISIONING........,.................4

3.5.1

General Information ................................. 41

3.5.2 Hardware ............................................

3.6 COMMON EQUIPMENT CARD PLACEMENT RULES............4 3

3.6.1 General Rules

........................................ 43

3.7 MODULE AND COLUMN PROVISIONING...................4 4

3.7.1 Module Provisioning

................................. 44

3.7.1.1 Common Equipment Modules and Placement......4 4

3.7.1.1.1 Common/Peripheral Equipment Module

3.7.1.1.2 CPU/Network Module 4

3.7.1.1.3 CPU Module (CPU)

..........................

Network Module (NET)

.....................

..4 4

3.7.1.1.5 PRI Network Expansion Module 5

3.7.1.2 Peripheral Equipment 5

3.7.1.2.1 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module...4

3.7.1.2.2 Enhanced Peripheral Equipment Module......4 5

3.7.1.3 Other Equipment Modules.....................4 5

3.7.1.3.1 Heridian Hail

(MH)

......................

..4 6

3.7.1.3.2 Remote Peripheral Equipment 6

3.7.1.3.3 Inter-Group Module 6

3.7.2 Pedestals and Kits.................4 6

3.7.2.1 Pedestals

...................................

3.7.2.2

Kits......................4 7

3.8 POWER ............................................

3.8.1 Power Configurations

................................ 48

3.8.2 Power Calculations

.................................. 48

3.8.3 Power Components

.................................... 49

3.8.4

Reserve

Power .......................................

3.8.4.1

Systems

(UPS)

........................... 49

3.8.4.2 DC Systems (Batteries):.....................4 9

3.9

MEMORY

...........................................

3.9.1 Memory Calculations

................................. 50

3.9.2 Memory Capacities

................................... 51

3.9.2.1 Option

21 ........................ .......

3.9.2.2 Option 51 ..................... ...........

3.9.2.3 Option 61 ................................... 51

3.9.2.4 Option 71 ...................................

3.10 REAL TIME .......................................

3.10.1 Rated Call Carrying Capacity.......................5 2

3.10.2 Call Detail Recording 2

Line Calls

.....................................

3.10.4 Calls Per

Hour

..................................... 53

. .

3.11

3.12

3.13

Autoquote

Userguide

April

NON-BLOCKING APPLICATIONS.......................5 4

3.11.1 Non-Blocking Inputs

..............................

..5 4

3.11.2

Recommended Quoting Procedure

....................

..5 4

MERIDIAN MAIL ...................................

3.12.1 Meridian Mail Modular

..............................

3.12.2

Meridian Mail X Cabinet ............................

REMOTE PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT (RPE)

.............

..5 8

4. REPORTS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1

4.2

4.3

4.4

4.5

4.6

4.7

4.8

Header Report

. . . . . . . ...60

Price Summary Report ..............

Report 9 Equipment

..........................

Report 4 Engineering

4.4.1 Memory ..............................................

4.4.2 Power

...............................................

4.4.3 System Traffic

......................................

4.4.4 Real Time

...........................................

5 Equipment 0

4.5.1 Hardware ............................................

4.5.2

Ports

...............................................

Report 6 Input Listing ...........................

Report 7 Auxiliary Quote Summary.................7 3

4.7.1 Main Quote Version

..................................

4.7.2 RPE Quote Version

...................................

Report 20 Unused

Capacity 4

Memory

..............................................

4.8.2 Hardware

............................................

Ports

............................................

5. Auxiliary LOADING

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6. Appendix 1:

Input

Form

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ueerguide April 20,

Autoquote Userguide April 20,

INTRODUCTION

This chapter of the Meridian Business Systems Autoquote User Guide

provides information on quoting the Meridian 1 SL-1 Communication

System. It includes the following sect-ions:

Section

Introduction

Section

Inputs

Section

Engineering/Provisioning

Section

Reports

Section 5:

Auxiliary Loading

Section

Appendix 1: Input Form

The mechanics of using Autoquote are not included in this product

chapter.

Refer to the Introduction and Overview chapter for detailed

information on how to use the Autoquote System.

1.1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

The Meridian 1 SL-1 is a computer controlled, digital switching, Private

Branch Exchange (PBX).

The Meridian 1 SL-1 can support from 40 to

10,000 analog and/or digital lines.

The Meridian 1 SL-1 is available

powered either AC,

DC, or DC with rectifiers for most system options.

The Meridian 1 SL-1 is packaged in stackable modules. A modular version

Meridian Mail Voice Messaging System can be configured as a system

option for the Meridian 1 SL-1 Models. The Autoquote System will

provide for integration the Meridian 1 SL-1 with the following systems:

Remote Peripheral Equipment,

Meridian

Mail

Voice Messaging Systems, and

-Automatic Call Distribution (ACD-MAX) Systems.

1.2 VALID MODELS

There

are

four Meridian 1 SL-1 Autoquote Models currently available:

Model Generic Release

21 o r 21A 21

51 15

71 71

Note: To quote a 21A system enter 21 for the model generic code. A 21A

will be quoted if the system fits within the constraints of the 21A

system.

Note :

The minimum purchase requirements for each Meridian 1 SL-1 Model

that are outlined in the Hardware section of the Meridian 1

Communication Systems Pricing Manual are applied by the Autoquote system

and restrict the configurations that may be quoted.

Autoquote Userguide April

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

INPUTS

This section covers all inputs associated with the Meridian 1.

The

following sections are covered within t-his section.

Input Classes

Input Codes, Descriptions,

and Default Values

Software Options

Phones,

Lines and Trunks

Miscellaneous/Memory

Basic Information

As with all models,

data input consists of responses to

prompted entries and manual inputs associated with specific input codes.

An input can require one, two, or three entries (types 1, 2, or 3).

The

mechanics of using are not included in this product chapter.

Refer to the Introduction/Overview chapter for detailed information on

how to use the Autoquote system.

A blank input form is included in the back of this section.

It is

recommended that copies be used for preparing quotations. An on-line

input form is also available on the Autoquote system, select INFORMF at

the secondary menu prompt

2.1

INPUT CLASSES

Meridian 1 inputs are organized into four input classes:

Software Options

Phones, Lines, Trunks

Miscellaneous

Basic Information

Autoquote will prompt for each input class in the order listed above

when setting up

new quote. The letter designation is used to make

selections from the Input Menu.

Autoguote Userguide April 20, 1990

2.2 INPUT CODES, DESCRIPTIONS, AND DEFAULT VALUES

The following pages contain information on each Meridian 1 input: codes,

descriptions,

and default values where appropriate.

2.2.1 Software Option Inputs

This section gives explanations for Meridian 1 software inputs where

necessary.

Enter a 1 to select a software input or a 0 to remove.

Note

that the software inputs are organized

the order they appear on the

input form and not in numerical sequence.

If information is needed on feature descriptions, please refer to the

Feature Document.

2 Multi-Customer

5 CDR Link

This input indicates that CDR Tape is desired. CDR List is

included in the Meridian Base Software package.

12 Automatic

Number

Identification

This input is used to specify AN1 and AN1 Route Selection.

15 Remote Peripheral Equipment

This option must be present at the main site to support an

RPE quote.

26 Centralized Attendant Service

cannot be quoted with Attendant Overflow

(Input 56).

27 Centralized Attendant Service

cannot be quoted with Attendant Overflow

(Input 56).

56 Attendant Overflow Position

Attendant Overflow cannot be quoted with (Input 26)

or (Input 27).

57 Attendant Alternative Answer

93 Supervisory Console

To support this feature, the Ml250 console, a QPC297

Supervisory Console line card, and EPE module must be

provisioned.

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

Autovon

Autovon and Multi-Tenant (input 86) are mutually exclusive

software options.

Only one of these may be selected in a

quote.

84 Automatic Trunk Maintenance

One QPC442 Tone Detector will be provisioned when this

option is selected.

The Tone Detector requires one EPE card

slot.

86 Multi-Tenant

Multi-Tenant and Autovon (input 68) are mutually exclusive

software options.

Only one of these may be selected in a

quote.

105 Line Load Control

110 Special Application Features

This input is used to quote Trunk Verification from a

Station and Incoming DID Digit Conversion.

150 Directory Number Expansion

102 Hospitality/Healthcare Features

This software input is a prerequisite for PMSI (Input 103).

103 Property Management System Interface

(Input 102) is a prerequisite for

this feature

37 Basic ESN Features

This software input is a prerequisite for Advanced ESN

Features (Input 39).

39 Advanced ESN Features

Basic ESN Features (Input 37) is a prerequisite for this

feature.

58 Network Automatic Route Selection (NABS)

and (Base package) are mutually exclusive software

options.

If this input is selected, BARS will be excluded

from the Meridian Base

Software package.

P-DATA memory

requirements for must be added manually using

Miscellaneous/Memory Input 47.

Autoquote Userguide April 20,

59 Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP)

P-DATA memory requirements for CDP must be added manually

using Miscellaneous/Memory Input 47.

63 Network Authorization Codes

109 Auxiliary Processor Link

This option is required when Meridian Mail is used and will

be included if Meridian Mail is quoted.

This option is required when Meridian Mail is used and will

be included if Meridian Mail is quoted.

77 Meridian Mail

This option is required when Meridian Mail is used and will

be included if Meridian Mail is quoted.

152 Meridian Link Server

This input is mutually exclusive with Meridian

(Input 153).

153 Meridian Link Direct Connect

This input is mutually exclusive with Meridian Link-Server

(Input 152).

45 Basic ACD (ACD-A)

This feature is required when Meridian Mail is used and will

be included when Meridian Mail is quoted.

41 Advanced ACD (ACD-B)

111 ACD Timed Overflow

One of the following ACD applications are a prerequisite for

ACD Timed Overflow

Advanced ACD Features (Input 41)

ACD Reports (Input 42)

ACD Load Management (Input 43)

ACD Link MAX (Input

ACD Link

ACD-D (Input 51)

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

121 Enhanced ACD Overflow

42 ACD Reports (ACD-Cl)

43 ACD Load Management (ACD-C2)

50 ACD Link Application

This option is required if ACD-MAX is used.

51 ACD Link ACD-D Application

114 ACD-D/MAX Report Enhancements

122 Network ACD

The following

are prerequisites for

Network ACD:

Advanced

ACD Features (Input 41)

Enhanced ACD Overflow (Input 121)

Basic

ESN Features (Input 37)

Coordinated Dialing Plan (Input 59)

Advanced

ISDN Features (Input 148)

146 Primary Rate Access (PRA)

147 ISDN Signalling Link (ISL)

117 Call Call Service

(Input 146) is

prerequisite for this input.

148 Advanced ISDN Features

The following are prerequisites for this input:

Basic ESN Features (Input 37)

NAPS (Input 58) or CDP (Input 59)

(Input 146) or ISL (Input 147)

149 Inter-Exchange Carrier

PRA (Input

146) is a prerequisite for this input.

120 Network Message Center

The

following are prerequisites for this-input:

Meridian Mail (Input 77)

(Input

146) or ISL (Input 147)

Advanced

ISDN Features (Input 148)

Autoquote

Userguide April 20, 1990

Phones, Lines, and Trunks

This input class consists of two categories of inputs: ports (lines and

trunks) and terminal devices (telephone sets). Ports inputs generally

accept equipped and wired quantities. It is with wired inputs that the

built-in growth of a system is provisioned.

PE cards' are quoted at the

equipped level,

all other

items are

quoted at the-wired level.

Therefore,

only PE cards must be added to grow a system from the

equipped to the wired size.

2.2.2.1 Port Inputs

Phones, Lines,

and Trunks port inputs are numbers l-43, 101-143, and

171-178.

Inputs 101-143 are for non-blocking ports. Input 101

blocking) corresponds to input 1 input 102 (non-blocking)

corresponds to input 2 etc.

Unless otherwise noted,

all port inputs accept three entries:

1. Ports Desired.

2. Wired Ports Desired.

If no entry is made,

this entry will default to the equipped

quantity entered.

The wired value cannot be less than the

equipped value.

3. Traffic Per Port.

Maximum

traffic allowed is 36 CCS. Traffic defaults that

are

listed below in the Traffic Defaults Table, are for

Grade

of Service (GOS) ports unless otherwise noted.

blocking port inputs default to 36 CCS for those entries not

affecting Receiver (DTR) requirements.

blocking inputs affecting default to the GOS

value.

Note that telephone sets are entered independently of the ports.

Autoguote Userguide April 20,

2.2.2.1.1 Traffic Defaults Table

Quantity

Voice

Default

Data

Voice/Data 1,

Type A Trunk

(no queuing)

-100 31

B Trunk

-100

n designates any quantity

Trunk defaults assume one destination point for the entire

quantity of trunks.

A Oueuins Assumed)

CO Trunks

DID Trunks

FX Trunks

RAN Trunks

Paging Trunks

Dictation Trunks

B Assumed)

WATS Trunks

CCSA Trunks

TIE

TIE Trunks/Loop

Remote Trunks

telemanuals.com

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

Special notes about the Grade of Service port inputs are included

below.

These notes also apply to the corresponding non-blocking inputs.

1 Digital Voice Only Lines

This input is used to enter digital voice lines.

2 Digital Voice/Data Lines

This input differs from Input 1 in that two Terminal Numbers

are counted per port and the CCS per port default is

increased to account for the data portion of the line.

42 Digital ACD Voice Lines

This input specifies digital voice lines to be used in ACD

applications.

ACD applications have a larger impact on

Real Time and may require a higher CCS.

43 Digital ACD Voice/Data Lines

This input is the same as Input 42 with the exception that

two will be counted per port and the CCS may be higher

to account for the data portion.

2500 Lines

500 Lines

Message Waiting 2500 Lines

Message Waiting 500 Lines

OPX

2500 Lines (QPC192)

OPX 500 Lines (QPC192)

OPX 2500 and OPX 500 Lines require an EPE shelf.

Differentiation between 2500 and 500 lines is necessary to properly

determine Receiver (DTR) requirements.

10 Console or QPC297)

One console is quoted for each equipped console port

entered.

The traffic default for consoles is 30 CCS.

Inputs 11-22 are used to quote analog trunk ports.

The Grade of Service traffic defaults depend on the trunk type

(refer to the Traffic Defaults Table).

telemanuals.com

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

The following trunks are Type A (No Queueing Assumed)

11 CO Trunks

12 DID Trunks

Trunks

19 RAN Trunks

20 Paging Trunks or

21 Dictation Trunks

The following trunk are Type B (Queueing Assumed)

13 WATS Trunks

15 CCSA Trunks

16 DX Trunks (QPC71)

DX Trunks require an EPE shelf.

17 TIE Trunks

E&M

18 TIE Trunks Loop

22 Release Link Trunks

Release Link Trunks are used for Remote Centralized

Attendant Service (CAS) applications. Software Input 27

must be selected for these circuits to function. Trunks

require an EPE shelf.

DID (input CCSA (input and TIE (inputs trunk

incoming traffic may use signaling. This information will be

prompted for in the Basic Information input class when setting up a new

quote.

All traffic will affect the number of

Receivers provisioned.

The remaining entries are for data lines, and digital trunks.

23 CPU Terminations (QPC432)

This input is the same as input 28 with the exception of the

traffic default.

The traffic default for CPU terminations

will correspond to Type B trunk values (Queueing assumed)

since they typically have greater usage than station

terminations.

Modem Pool Lines (QPC723

physical ports are provisioned for this modem pool

application-- one QPC723 RILC port and one

port.

The traffic is presented to the switching matrix

twice,

therefore Autoquote will double the traffic input

when determining network requirements. The traffic default

will correspond to Type B Trunk values (Queueing assumed).

telemanuals.com

Userguide April 20, 1990

27 Modem Pool Lines (QPC432

Two physical ports are provisioned for this modem pool

application: one QPC723 RILC port and one NT8D03A.A

port.

The traffic is presented to the switching matrix

twice,

therefore Autoquote will double the traffic input

when determining network requirements. The traffic default

will correspond to Type Trunk values (Queueing assumed).

Data Lines

QPC432 data line cards provide access to the Meridian 1

switching

matrix

for sync or devices. An

Interface Module (ASIM)

High-Speed Data Module (HSDM)

used to interface RS-232 ports to QPC432 ports. An adapter

cable may be used for a V.35 connection on the HSDM.

Data Lines

data line cards provide access to the Meridian 1

switching matrix for devices. An Interface

Module (AIM),

Interface Logical Unit (AILU), or

Personal Computer Interface (PCI) card is used to interface

RS-232 ports to QPC430 ports. Some devices may interface

directly to the data line card using a compatible

RS-422 port.

MCDS Lines

Multi-Channel Data System is a rack or cabinet mounted

version of async-only used primarily to interface to

CPU ports.

This input is used to provision the Meridian 1

EPE (QPC432 data line card) as well as the MCDS hardware.

The traffic default is 30 CCS.

31 CIM Lines(QPC432)

Although this input results in the same Meridian 1 hardware

provisioning as input 28, the specific application

represented is Coax Elimination and Switching using the Coax .

Interface Module (CIM) to interface a coax terminal device.

32 MCCS Lines

This input represents the host/controller end of the Coax

Elimination and Switching application.

It is used to

provision the Meridian 1 PE (QPC432 data line card) as well

as the Multi-Channel Coax System

(MCCS)

hardware.

The

traffic default is 30 CCS.

Autoquote Userguide April 20,

35 RILC Data Lines (QPC723)

This data line card provides

for

direct RS-232 access to the

switching matrix.

Using this card in a modem pool

application will result in traffic being introduced into the

system only once.

CPI

These input accept two entries.

1st entry is number desired.

Equipped/wired quantities are

not used since DTI/CPI hardware is not Peripheral Equipment

DTI/CPI cards interface directly to network loops and

are housed in Common Equipment and/or Network Equipment

shelves.

2nd entry is traffic (in CCS) per channel. This entry will

default to Type trunk values.

(Each DTI/CPI is treated

like 24 trunks.)

A link is essentially non-blocking since it interfaces

directly to a network loop.

There are no corresponding

blocking DTI/CPI inputs.

171 PRI

QPC757)

172 PRI

QPC757)

173 PRI

QPC757)

174 PRI

QPC757)

175 PRI

QPC757)

176 PRI (QPC720 QPC757)

177 PRI

QPC757)

178 PRI

QPC757)

Each input corresponds to a different destination point; up to

eight destinations can be selected. Differentiating between

destinations is required to determine the required number of

D-Channel Interface cards.

PRA (Software input 146) and PBX

Interface (Base package) are prerequisites for this application.

These inputs accept two entries.

1st entry is number desired.

Equipped/wired quantities are

not used since PRI hardware is not Peripheral Equipment

PRI cards interface directly to network loops and are

housed in Common Equipment and/or Network Equipment shelves.

2nd entry is traffic (in CCS) per channel. This entry will

default to Type B trunk values. (Each PRI is treated like

24 trunks.)

Autoquote

Userguide April 20, 1990

Telephone Set Inputs

Phones, Lines,

and Trunks inputs and 206-281 are used for

selecting terminal devices

and

accessories. All phone inputs accept one

entry,

indicating the number of units desired. Please refer to the

sample input sheet at the end of this section for the actual Telephone

set inputs.

Inputs 269,

270 and

271 are used to allow Modular Set Power overrides.

Entering a 1 for Input 271, allows the number of 110 transformers

and

power boards to be entered using Inputs 269 and 270 respectively.

Userguide April

2.2.3 Miscellaneous/Memory

There is are common rules regarding the number of entries a

Miscellaneous/Memory input may accept. Refer to the input sheet and the

information provided below for the entries each input

Information

the Miscellaneous/Memory inputs is included below.

Note

that the input descriptions appear in the order of the Input Sheet and

are not in numerical order.

1 Power Indicator

This input applies to the way in which the system will be

powered. Enter 1 for AC Power,

2 for DC using Customer

Provided Power,

or 3 for DC using Rectifiers and Battery

Backup (input 9).

If this input is set to 2, (DC using

Customer Provided Power),

no rectifiers will be included in

the quote.

9 Battery Backup

This entry accepts two entries.

The 1st entry is the number of hours of battery backup

desired. For Option 71 quotes,

this input will be se

of no entry is made.

The 2nd entry is the battery type indicator:

zero (0

indicates Absolyte and one (1) indicates Lead Calcium

battery hardware.

to 4

Please see Report 4 to determine battery backup

requirements.

Note that no batteries will be included in

the quote.

10 UPS

This input is used to indicate the UPS vendor desired:

one

(1) for Exide, two (2) Best, or three (3) for Alpha.

Please see Report 4 to determine UPS rating requirements.

Note that the UPS system will not be included in the quote.

2 Hard Disk Drive

Enter

one (1)

desired,

enter

(0) to remove from

quote.

This option is available only on the Option 51, 61,

and 71.

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

Emergency

Transfer

Units

Enter the number desired.

The ETU Assembly is

provisioned on all systems. Each one allows eight

phones to be connected to CO lines. Since this unit is

external to the Meridian 1 cabinet, it not impact

system engineering.

4 Attendant Overlay

Enter the number of Overlays desired.

5 Supervisory Console Functionality

This input only applies to Remote Peripheral Equipment

(RPE)

quotes.

Enter one (1) for this input if the QPC297

Supervisory Line Card should be quoted.

Pedestal/Top Cap Provisioning Indicator

This input applies to the Option 21 only.

It is used to

override the calculated Pedestal/Top Cap assembly to a

higher one.

Zero (0) indicates that the most cost effective

'Pedestal/Top Cap assembly will be provisioned; two (2)

indicates that the Two-Module Pedestal will be the minimum

provisioned;

four (4) indicates that the Four-Module

Pedestal will be provisioned.

12 Rectifier/Power Cabinet (Options only)

Enter one (1) to provision the Prime Power Cabinet Assembly.

This cabinet houses up to four 50 Amp rectifiers to be used

in lieu of 30 Amp rectifiers.

CDR Usage

This input is used to calculate CPU Real Time impact of CDR.

Enter one (1) to indicate either Outgoing, Incoming or

Internal usage for CDR.

an example, the input

indicates that the CDR will be used for Outgoing and

Internal calls only.

The default is meaning that

CDR is limited to Outgoing calls only.

15 Code Restriction Route

Enter the number of code restriction routes used in the

system.

This input is used for memory.

16 Speed Call Lists/l Digit

17 Speed Call Lists/2 Digit

18 Speed Call Lists/3 Digit

These inputs

are

used to calculate required P-Data for Speed Call Lists.

They accept three entries:

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

The 1st value is the number of lists desired.

The 2nd value is the number of entries per speed call list.

The maximum is 10 for l-digit lists (input 100 for

digit lists (input

1000 for 3-digit lists (input 18).

This entry will default to 7 digits for l-digit lists (input

16) and 40 for lists (inputs

The 3rd value is the number of digits per speed call list.

The maximum allowed is 31 and the default value is 10 for

all three inputs.

19 Data Modem

Enter the quantity desired.

20 Dual NTP Storage Sleeve

Enter the number of NTP storage sleeves desired.

Each

storage sleeve holds two Typically four sleeves are

required for a complete set of

23 Average Holding

Time

Enter the Average Holding Time per call in seconds.

Autoquote will set this input to 180 seconds if no entry is

made.

MCDS Cabinet

Enter 1 if MCDS cabinets are to be quoted to house the MCDS

shelves.

These shelves can housed in standard 19 inch

racks.

Number

of Entries

This input is prompted on every Meridian 1 model.

It is

used to calculate memory requirements for Auto-Dial, Stored

Number Redial,

and Last Number Redial entries/keys in the

system. This input accepts two entries.

The 1st value is

the number of entries or keys assigned with these features.

The 2nd value is digits per entry.

The maximum is 31 and

the default is 16 digits.

Number of

Do-Not-Disturb Stations

This input is prompted when the Do-Not-Disturb feature is

equipped.

It is used to calculate memory requirements for

feature implementation. Enter the quantity desired.

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

29 Number

Dial Intercom Groups

This input is prompted when the Dial Intercom feature is

equipped.

It is used to calculate memory requirements'for

feature implementation. Enter quantity desired.

Number of Group Call Groups

This input is prompted when the Group Call feature is

equipped.

It is used to calculate memory requirements for

feature implementation. Enter quantity desired.

31 of ACD Queues

32 Number of ACD Agent Positions

Number

of ACD Auto-Terminate Trunk Routes

34 Number of ACD Auto-Terminate Trunk Routes

35 Number of ACD CRT's

Inputs 31,

32, and 34 are prompted when any ACD option group is

equipped.

Input 33 and 35 are prompted only if ACD-Cl or is

equipped.

These inputs are used to calculate memory requirements for

the ACD application.

All of these inputs accept two entries:

1st entry

is equipped quantity, 2nd entry is wired quantity.

40 Number of Customers

The input indicates the number of customers desired. A

maximum number of 32 customers may

BARS (input 41) and Multi-Tenant (input 41) are implemented

on a customer basis.

Memory requirements are determined

using Miscellaneous/Memory inputs 40-42 when applicable.

41 Number of Customers Equipping BARS

This input is prompted if the Multi-Customer and BARS

features are equipped.

BARS is implemented on a customer

basis.

This input is used to calculate memory requirements

for the BARS application.

42 Number o f Customers with Service Equipped

This input is prompted if the Multi-Customer and

Multi-Tenant features are equipped. Multi-Tenant is

implemented on a customer basis. This input is used to

calculate memory requirements for the Multi-Tenant

application.

43 Total Number of Tenants Equipped

44 Total Number of Tenant Stations

These inputs are prompted

the Multi-Tenant feature is equipped. They

are used to calculate memory requirements for Multi-Tenant application.

Userguide April

45 Number of ISDN Links

This input is used to select the number of ISDN Signaling

Links required.

The ISL option (Software input 147)

is a prerequisite for this input.

46 Drive Provisioning Override

Applicable to the Meridian 1 Option 21 only, this input is

used for Disk Drive placement.

There are two scenarios for housing the Disk Drive:

0 CE Placement in the Module.

PE Placement in the Module.

Autoquote will provision the Disk Drive in the CE shelf

unless network requirements force it into PE placement.

The

user may force PE placement by entering a one (1) for this

input.

47 Additional P-Data (kwords)

This input accounts for additional memory requirements.

Values are entered in thousands of words; i.e. if a one (1)

is entered, 1000 P-Data words are added.

48 Additional U-Data (kwords)

This input accounts for additional memory requirements.

Values are entered in thousands of words: i.e. if a one (1)

is entered, 1000 U-Data words are added.

49 Number of Call Party Name Display Entries

These inputs

are

prompted if the Call Party Name Display

feature is equipped.

They are used to calculate

memory

requirements

for

CPND application.

This input accepts two

entries.

The 1st value is the number of entries.

The 2nd

value is characters per entry. The default is 15

characters.

Number of Auth Codes

This input accepts two entries.

Both are used to allocate

P-Data for authorization codes.

is the number of

authorization codes used in the system (maximum allowed is

4096).

2nd

entry

is number of digits per authorization code

(maximum is 14). The default value is 8 digits.

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

21 Additional Ports

Autoquote provisions the number of ports required to

support software and maintenance (local and remote).

This

input is used to specify additional ports for other

applications such as to connect for ACD

supervisors.

One cable is provisioned for each

port.

Autoquote does not determine cable connector type

(M/M or F/F).

The user must specify the connector type when

placing the order.

37 Additional Ports for APL's

This is used to determine the number of ports required

for Application Processor Links. Only the quantity not

included within AUX-Loaded models must be entered.

(Refer

to the Introduction/Overview chapter for more information on

the AUX-Load mechanism.)

38 Additional Conference Cards for

This input is prompted when Music-on-Hold and/or Automatic

Wake-up features are equipped. It is used to specify the

number of additional Conference Cards required to support

these features.

The Automatic Wake-up feature requires one

dedicated Conference Card per system. Music-on-Hold, on the

other hand,

may share a Conference Card with a normal

conference traffic.

The total number of Conference cards

required on any system depends on the specific application.

39 Additional ESDI Ports

Enhanced (ESDI) ports are used to support Command Status

Link (CSL) and Link (The CSL provides the interface

for Meridian Mail).

This input is used to specify the

number of additional ESDI ports required; i.e., ports in

addition to the ports required for Meridian Mail either

AUX- Loaded or system integrated, and/or the default ports

based on software option selection. One ESDI port will be

included when software is quoted. Autoquote will

also include support for one ESDI when CSL software is

quoted and no Meridian Mail application is quoted

(integrated or AUX Loaded.) When Meridian

Mail.

is quoted,

ESDI cards are generally provisioned via Meridian Mail base

hardware packages.

(Refer to the Introduction/Overview

chapter for more information on the AUX-Load mechanism.)

180 Additional Network Groups

This input applies to the Option 71 only. It is used to

increase the

number

of network groups calculated by the

Autoquote. The maximum value is 4.

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

181 Additional Superloops

182 Additional Non-blocking Superloops

These inputs are used to provide additional Superloops to the

system.

The net amount of Enhanced Loops must be greater than or equal

to the minimum required to maintain Grade of Service.

183 Additional Network Loops

184 Additional Non-blocking Network Loops

These inputs are used to provide additional Enhanced Network Loops

(QPC414) to the system.

The number of Enhanced Loops must be greater

than or equal to the minimum required to maintain Grade of Service.

190 Ringing Generator Provisioning Factor

Ringing Generators are required in IPE Shelves which support

Analog Cards.

The calculation to determine the number of

ringing generators is as follows:

Ringing Generators = Analog Cards * Factor * PE Shelves

where Factor defaults to 2.

This input allows the user to

override the default factor of 2 and enter another if

necessary.

The factor may not be less than 1.0.

99 Software Graduation Level Override

This input is used to directly enter the Software Graduation

Level

desired.

This input will override Miscellaneous Input

100 as long as the input value is not less than the minimum

level required.

an example, if the Equipped

configuration equated to Software Graduation Levels and

the Wired configuration equated to 8 Software Graduation

Levels,

this input could be used to request a level of 7, 9

or any level

not

less than 5.

100 Software Graduation Level Indicator

This input is used to select the whether the Software

Graduation Level will be calculated using the Equipped or

Wired configuration.

Enter zero (0) for Equipped or one (1)

for Wired. The

default is Equipped.

Note that this input

will not apply if-Input 99 is used.

101 Module Placement Indicator

This input only applies to Option 71 quotes.

If one (1) is

entered

for this input,

module positions for network groups

will be reserved for future growth.

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

102 Cable Egress Indicator

This input is used to determine the way in which cables will

be wired out of modules. Enter one (1) for Bottom Egress,

two (2) for Top Egress or three (3) for Top Egress with

Cable Tray Kit.

103 Earthquake Bracing Kit

Enter one (1) if Earthquake Bracing equipment is required.

145 TDR Unit

This unit applies to the Direct sales channel only.

It is

applicable to the Meridian 1 Option 21, 51 and 61.

This

input accepts three entries.

1st entry indicates the firmware package: one (1) for the

Business package,

two (2) for the Professional Billing

package,

and three (3) for the Lodging package.

2nd entry is the total number of calls made per month in

thousands.

For

example,

enter three (3) if 3000 calls per

month are to be supported. This value is used to size the

TDR Unit. If no entry is made,

the number of calls will be

a function of the number of calls per station per month (3rd

entry) .

3rd entry is the number of calls per station per month.

This entry will default to 100. The number of calls per

station per month will be used to determine the total number

of calls per month if no entry is made for the 2nd value.

Inputs 150-156 are used to quote the Meridian Mail Option

and associated features.

150 Meridian Mail

The Meridian Mail Software package (Software input 77) is a

prerequisite for this input. This input accepts three

entries:

1st entry is the number of voice processor ports desired.

The maximum value allowed is 48. All entries be

converted to the next voice processor port increment

available on the product 48 ports).

2nd entry is the total number of hours of voice storage

desired.

The maximum value allowed is 240. All entries

will be converted to the next voice storage increment

available on the product 240 hours).

Userguide April 20, 1990

3rd entry is number of registered users supported.

This

entry will determine the number of User Guides provided and

real time impact.

151

Meridian Mail Voice Menus

Enter the number of Voice Menu calls during the busy hour.

Any value entered greater than zero will provision Voice

Menus Software.

The number of voice menu calls during the

busy hour is requested to help determine CPU real time

impact.

152 Meridian Mail Console

Software

Enter one (1) if this option is desired.

153 Meridian Mail Access Development Software

Enter one (1) if this option is desired. Meridian Mail

Console Software is

prerequisite for this'option.

155 Meridian Mail Networking

Ports

Enter the number of ports desired to be used for networking

Meridian Mail Options together. Note that this input is

used to provision the correct amount of Meridian Mail

Networking Hardware and Modem Packages as well as Networking

Software.

The total number of actual Meridian Mail ports

provisioned is only indicated in Input 150.

156 Meridian Secured Messaging

Enter

a one

(1) if this option is desired.

169 Directory Messaging PC

Software

This input is used to specify the PC based CPLUS Attendant

Console Software.

Enter the number of copies desired.

171 Meridian Manager

Work

Order System

Enter one (1) to quote this option.

Note that Meridian

Manager-Station Administration is included with the base

Meridian 1 software package.

172 Meridian Manager-Traffic Reporting

Enter one (1) to quote this option. Note that Meridian

Manager-Station Administration is included with the base

Meridian 1 software package.

Autoquote Userguide April 20,

Inputs 51-84 are used to quote non-blocking PE 'cards and modules. Each

input accepts two entries:

1st entry is equipped quantity, 2nd entry is

wired quantity.

These inputs are required to specify exact quantities

of hardware required for non-blocking application. These values cannot

be calculated by Autoquote since there is a possibility that some ports

and/or some PE slots may be unusable in a non-blocking situation.

Autoquote can determine the minimum required PE cards and shelves based

on port inputs.

During the calculation process Autoquote will make sure

all non-blocking PE quantities are not less than the minimum calculated.

Refer to Non Blocking Applications, page 54.

123 Average Holding Time (non-blocking)

Enter the Average Holding Time per call in seconds.

Autoquote will set this input to 180 seconds if no entry is

made.

Autoquote Deerguide April 20, 1990

2.2.4 Basic Information

All Basic Information inputs accept one entry. Inputs are prompted if

applicable to the hardware/software selected. Changes to prompted

entries may be made during the manual input, phase of this input class.

1 Number of Trunk Groups

This input is prompted for all Meridian 1 models.

This

entry must be greater than zero.

2 Percent Tie Line Traffic that is

3 Percent CCSA Traffic that is

Receivers (DTR's) are required for incoming

calls on tie line and CCSA trunks. All tie line

and CCSA traffic is considered when determining the portion

that is digitone. Therefore,

the percentage entered must

consider which end of the trunk originates the call;

outgoing calls do not require the use of DTR's.

If incoming

traffic is and if total tie line and/or CCSA

traffic is split evenly between incoming and outgoing, 50%

of the traffic is for purposes of determining the

number of required DTR's.

4 DID Traffic is

Enter one (1) if DID trunks will use signaling.

Similar to Inputs 2 and 3,

this input is used to calculate

the number of DTR's required.

5 Amount of DISA Traffic (in CCS)

Enter the Busy Hour DISA CCS.

If all DISA calls occur

outside the busy hour, enter zero (0). As a quick estimate,

multiply estimated DISA calls during the busy hour by 0.2.

6 Number of Type 1 Signaling

Tie Trunks

Type 1 signaling requires the Meridian 1 to provide more

power for 4-wire tie trunks.

This input is used to

accurately determine power requirements.

7 Number of Templates

This input is prompted for all Meridian 1 models.

All

stations entered into the Meridian

1 data base will use

template.

new template is created each time a station

with unique feature and key assignment characteristics is

entered.

If all sets are configured the same (except for

only one template is used.

If 100 sets with minor

differences

are

configured, 100 templates are used.

The

minimum, value-allowed for this entry is 2.

The number of

templates is used to calculate memory requirements.

Userguide April 20, 1990

Number of Autovon Trunks

This input is used to calculate the additional

memory

requirements for Autovon trunks.

9 Percent DTI Traffic that is

Since DTI can function as a tie line or DID trunk,

signaling may

used. Enter percent of total traffic that

is incoming digitone.

See explanations for inputs 2 and 4

for more information.

10 Number of DTI/PRI Tie Lines

Enter

the number of Tie Lines expected in the

configuration.

This input is used to determine CPU Real

Time impact.

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

ENGINEERING/PROVISIONING

This section covers the Engineering/Provisioning rules used in

generating Meridian 1 configurations.

The following sections are included:

Software Provisioning

Peripheral Equipment Cards And Modules

Engineering Provisioning

Provisioning

Common Equipment Card Placement Rules

Module And Column Provisioning

Power

Memory

Real Time

Non-Blocking Applications

Meridian Mail

Remote Peripheral Equipment (RPE)

Autoquote Userguide April 20,

3.1 SOFTWARE PROVISIONING

The following is a list of software packages and the software options

that are included in each package. Packages are selected by entering

the corresponding Software Inputs. Please refer to the Software section

of the input sheet at the end of this section.

Autoguote Userguide April 20, 1990

ORDER

INPUT CODE

DESCRIPTION SOFTWARE OPTIONS

SWOOOOA

110

150

102

103

105

114

121

111

122

146

147

148

149

117

120

109

153

152

MERIDIAN BASE SOFTWARE

SPECIAL APPLICATION FEATURES

DN EXPANSION

AUTOMATIC TRUNK MAINTENANCE

AUTOVON

MULTI-CUSTOMER

MULTI-TENANT

AUTOMATIC NUMBER IDENTIFICATION

HOSPITALITY APPLICATION

PROPERTY MAN. SYS. INTERFACE

ATTENDANT OVERFLOW POSITION

SUPERVISORY CONSOLE

ATTENDANT ALTERNATIVE ANSWER

REMOTE PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

LINE LOAD CONTROL

CAS-MAIN

CAS-REMOTE

CDR LINK

FAST TDS

NARS

COORDINATED DIALING PLAN

NETWORK AUTHORIZATION CODE

BASIC ESN FEATURES

ADVANCED ESN FEATURES

BASIC ACD FEATURES (ACD-A)

ADVANCED ACD FEATURES (ACD-B)

ACD REPORTS (ACD-Cl)

ACD LOAD MANAGEMENT

ACD LINK (ACD-D or MAX)

ACD-MAX REPORTS ENHANCEMENTS

ENHANCED ACD OVERFLOW

ACD TIMED OVERFLOW

NETWORKED ACD

BASIC ISDN FEATURES

PRIMARY RATE ACCESS

ISDN SIGNALING LINK

ADVANCED ISDN FEATURES

INTER-EXCHANGE CARRIER

CALL BY CALL SERVICE

NETWORK MESSAGE CENTER

APPLICATION PROCESSOR LINK

IVMS LINK

MERIDIAN MAIL LINK

MERIDIAN LINK DIRECT CONN

MERIDIAN LINK SERVER

110,113

150,151

86,172

103

174

105

114,155

178

111

207

118,145

146

147

148

149

117

175

109

153

152

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

3.2 PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT CARDS AND MODULES

There are two generations of Peripheral Equipment (PE) which can be

provisioned -- Intelligent PE (IPE) and Enhanced PE (EPE).

This

notation is used throughout this section to distinguish between the two

when.necessary.

3.2.1 IPE Cards

Card Ports

Console (5 ports/3

Digital Voice Data Lines (2

Digital Voice Only Lines

2500 Analog Lines

Analog Lines

Modem Pool Lines

Sync/Async Modem Pool Lines

2500 Analog Lines

500 Analog Lines

Message Waiting 2500 Analog Lines

Message Waiting 500 Analog Lines

CO Trunks

DID Trunks

FX Trunks

Loop Tie Trunks

Paging Trunks

RAN Trunks

WATS Trunks

CCSA Trunks

Dictation Trunks

E&M Tie Trunks

Paging Trunks

Receiver

Modem Pool Lines require both a port and a

QPC723 port,

Sync/Async Modem Pool Lines require both a port

and a QPC432 port.

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

3.2.2 EPE Cards

Card Ports

QPC71

DX Signalling Trunks

QPC192

OPX 2500 Lines

OPX 500 Lines

RLT

Remote Trunks

QPC297

Supervisory Line Card

QPC432 CIM Lines

MCCS Lines

MCDS Lines

MCDS High Speed Lines

Sync/Async CPU Terminations

Data

Sync/Async Modem Pool Lines

Data Lines

QPC422

QPC723

Modem Pool

Lines

RILC Data Lines

Modem Pool Lines require both a port and a

QPC723 port.

Sync/Async Modem Pool Lines require both a port

and a QPC432 port.

Autoquote optimizes the number of PE cards required by assigning

multiple types of ports on the same card.

For

example:

Unused Message Waiting ports are used

for

and Data

Analog lines before the number of Analog card are calculated.

Unused Universal Trunk ports are used for CO, WATS, FX and

Paging lines number of XCOT and E&M cards are

calculated.

3.2.3 Receivers

Receivers interpret all signals for the SL-1

CPU.

The number of DTR cards is determined in three step procedure:

1) Calculate DTR traffic.

2) Determine the DTR ports needed to support DTR traffic.

3) Calculate DTR cards to accommodate required-DTR ports.

Userguide April 20,

3.2.3.1 DTR Traffic

The model below illustrates the port types, autoquote inputs and factors

from which DTR CCS is calculated.

(Note:

The demand on caused by

CAS Authorization Codes, and/or CDR Charge Account Codes is NOT

addressed in the Autoquote system. Additional required for these

applications must be manually added to the quote.j

P3 in

the inputs column denotes Phones Lines and Trunks input 3.

DTR CCS CALCULATION

Inputs

---------------------------------------------------

2500 Lines CCS P3 (Ports *

Message

Waiting Lines CCS

PS (Ports'* CCS)

+ OPX 2500 Lines CCS

(Ports * CCS)

-----------------------------------

Total 2500 CCS

* 10.114 (Constant)

-----------------------------------

= 2500 DTR CCS

DX Signalling Trunks CCS

. P16 (Ports * CCS)

+ E&M Tie Trunks CCS (Ports * CCS)

Loop

Tie Trunks CCS (Ports * CCS)

-----------------------------------

Total

Tie Line CCS

* % Tie Line Traffic

100

* 10.114 (Constant)

-----------------------------------

Tie DTR CCS

CCSA Trunks CCS

(Ports * CCS)

* % CCSA Traffic CCS B3 100

* 10.114 (Constant)

-----------------------------------

CCSA

CCS

DID Trunks CCS (Ports * CCS)

* DID Traffic (0

* 2.5 (Constant)

-----------------------------------

= DID DTR CCS

CCS

+ Tie-DTR CCS

+ CCSA-DTR CCS

+ DID-DTR CCS

-----------------------------------

Total DTR CCS

Average Holding Time

-----------------------------------

CCS (avg)

Userguide April

3.2.3.2 DTR Port Provisioning Table

The number of DTR Ports is determined by cross-referencing the

calculated DTR CCS with the following

table:

RECEIVER TABLE

(assumes 11 second -holding time)

PORTS c c s PORTS

From To

From

-------------------

952 984

393

985

1017 40

10 19 4 1018

1050

20 34 5 1084 42

35 50 6 1085 1118 43

51 69 7 1119 1153 44

70 89 8 1154 1188 45

90 111 9 1189 1223 46

112 133

1224 1258 47

134 157

1259

1293 48

158 182 12

1294

1329 49

183 207 13 1330 1365 50

208 233 14 1366 1400 51

234 259

1401 1435 52

260 286 16 1436 1470 53

287 313 17 1471 54

314 342 18 1506 1540 55

343 371 19 1541 1575 56

372 398 20 1576 1610 57

427 21 1611 1645 58

428 456 22 1646 1680 59

457 487 23 1681 1715 60

488 515 24 1716 1750 61

516 545 25 1751 1785 62

546 576 26 1786 1820 63

577 607 27 1821 1855 64

608 638 28 1856 1890 65

639 667 29 1891 1925 66

668 698 30

1926

1960 67

699 729 31

1961

1995 68

730 761 32

1996

2030 69

762 793 33

2031

794 825 34 2066 2100 71

826 856 35 2101 2135 72

857 887 36 2136 2170 73

888 919 37 2171 2205 74

920 951 38 2206 2240 75

PORTS

From To

2241 2275 76

-2276 2310 77

2311 2345 78

2346 2380 79

2381 2415 80

2416 2450 81

2451 2485 82

2486 2520 83

2521 2555 84

2556 2590 85

2591 2625 86

2626 2660 87

2661 2695 88

2696 2730 89

2731 2765 90

2766 2800 91

2801 2835 92

2836 2870 93

2871 2905 94

2906 2940 95

2941 2975 96

2976 3010 97

3011 3045 98

3046 3080 99

3081 3115 100

3116 3150 101

3151 3185 102

3186 3220 103

3221 3255 104

3256 3290

105

3291 3325

106

3326 3360 107

-- 3361 3395 108

3396 3430 109

3431 3465 110

April 20,

3.2.3.3 DTR Cards

The number of DTR Cards required is calculated by dividing

total DTR Ports by 8 except on the Option 21. The Option 21 has 8 DTR

ports in the base Network/Controller Card. These are used before any

are added. Example:

Cards = Round Up [(DTR

Ports

Ports Per

DTR

Card)]

Options

DTR

Cards = Round

Up [(DTR

Ports Per DTR

Card)]

3.2.4 Tone Detector

A tone detector (QPC422) is provisioned if Automatic Trunk Maintenance

(ATM) software is requested.

The QPC422 requires an EPE shelf.

3.2.5 IPE Modules

IPE shelves have 16 slots for cards plus one slot for a Ringing

Generator and one Slot for a controller card. There are four 4-slot

segments in each IPE shelf.

The Option 21 has one dedicated 10 slot IPE shelf in the base module.

This shelf has no segmentation.

3.2.6 EPE Modules

EPE shelves have 10 Slots for PE cards plus one slot for a Ringing

Generator and one Slot for a

QPC659

Buffer. There are two 5-Slot

segments in each EPE shelf.

3.2.6.1 Controller Cards

An Controller 2 is provisioned for IPE shelves supported by 2

or less Superloops. An 4 is provisioned for IPE

shelves supported by 3 or 4 Superloops. A QPC659 Dual Loop is

used for all EPE shelves.

3.2.6.2 Ringing Generators

Ringing Generators are required in all IPE and PE

shelves which house analog line cards for IPE and

QPC192 for EPE).

The is provisioned for AC powered systems and

the is provisioned

systems.

Userguide April

To determine the quantity of ringing generators the following

calculation is used for IPE and EPE shelves individually.

Ringing Generators = (% Analog) * Factor * (PE Modules)

% Analog Cards = Analog Cards/PE Slots.

Factor defaults to 2.0

This calculation allows for even distribution of Analog Cards while

minimizing the number of Ringing Generators which must be purchased.

The user has the option to use a Factor other than the default of 2.0

(Miscellaneous/Memory Input 190).

A higher factor will more

PE shelves containing Ringing Generators.

The Option 21 has a 10 slot IPE shelf in the base module which gets

ringing current from the Power supply and therefore does not

require a Ringing Generator.

Userguide April 20,

3.3 NETWORK LOOP ENGINEERING

This section covers the rules used for provisioning network loops for

Meridian 1 Systems. Models (Option 21, 51, 61 and 71) are only

mentioned if a rule is different for a particular model.

3.3

Calculating Network Loops

There are two types of network loops: Superloop and Enhanced

Loop (QPC414).

The Superloop supports the traffic in IPE

modules.

The Enhanced Loop (QPC414) supports the traffic in EPE modules

and is also required for Meridian Mail and applications of Primary Rate

Interface (PRI),

Digital Trunk Interface (DTI), and Computer to PBX

interface

Separate calculations for the following are required to provision

network loops.

Option 21

IPE Modules GOS

EPE Modules GOS

Meridian Mail

PRI,DTI,CPI

Non-blocking

3.3.2 Option 21 Special Case

The Option 21 base module contains a combination network/controller card

which is dedicated to the 10 slot IPE shelf in that module. There is no

network loop engineering required for this loop as it will support all

traffic requirements of the 10 slot shelf.

3.3.3 IPE Modules GOS)

Superloop requirements to support IPE modules is determined from the

total IPE modules CCS and the total number of IPE modules:

The GOS capacity for

Superloop is 3500 CCS, 120 time slots.

A maximum of two IPE modules may be supported by a single

Superloop.

The number of Superloops required to support IPE modules is the greater

number of the following calculations:

to Traffic

(Total

IPE CCS) (3500

Reouired to Modules:

(Number of (2

Autoquote Userguide April 20,

3.3.4 EPE MODULES (P.O1 GOS)

Enhanced Loop requirements to support EPE modules is determined from the

total EPE modules CCS and the total number of modules:

The GOS capacity for an Enhanced Loop is 700 CCS, 30 time

slots.

700 CCS is being used for-Enhanced opposed to the

previous 660 CCS because these loops will support a low number of

terminations.

The QPC414 contains two Enhanced Loops.

A maximum of two EPE modules may be supported by a single Enhanced

Loop.

The number of enhanced loops required to support EPE modules is the

greater number of the following calculations:

Enhanced Reuuired to support EPE traffic GOS):

(Total EPE CCS) (700 CCS/Enhanced Loop)

Enhanced Reuuired to EPE modules

(Number of IPE Modules) (2 Modules/Enhanced Loop)

The number of Enhanced Network Cards (QPC414) required is calculated by

dividing the number of Enhanced Loops by two:

Enhanced Network Cards to EPE traffic

(Required Enhanced Loops) 2

3.3.5 Network Segmentation

The IPE

shelves contain four

4-slot segments. One Superloop can support

from one to four segments per IPE module and up to a maximum of two IPE

modules.

The EPE shelves contain two segments. An enhanced loop can

support one

or two segments per EPE module

and up to a maximum

of two

EPE modules.

The assignment of segments to loops for both IPE and EPE modules is

accomplished by:

a) trying to achieve

even distribution same number of

segments assigned to all loops)

b) if even distribution is

not

possible, the next choice is to

choose the quantity of loops and segments per loop which

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

gives the best distribution possible.

In case b,

Autoquote

will display a warning message on the reports

indicating that an

even

distribution of segments to loops was not

possible.

The user has the option to do a manual assignment and

determine that a GOS can be obtained with the uneven distribution

or add additional network loops to make the distribution even.

3.3.6 Meridian Mail Loops

Each Meridian Mail Voice Channel requires 28 CCS of traffic capacity on

an Enhanced Loop.

If the total traffic requirement for Meridian Mail does not increase the

total number of network loops required then Meridian Mail traffic is

assumed to be

"shared" with PE shelf traffic.

If the total traffic requirement for Meridian Mail does increase the

total number of network loops required, then the additional network

loops are assumed to be "dedicated" to Meridian Mail.

The 28 CCS per Voice Channel equates to one network loop being required

for every 24 Voice Messaging Channels.

3.3.7

One Enhanced traffic loop (2 per QPC414) is required to support a

link. No traffic engineering is required since each channel

will always have access to a on the network loop (Refer to

Section ,

Provisioning).

3.3.8 Non Blocking

Superloops and Enhanced Loops for Non Blocking applications are

dedicated Non Blocking only (Refer to Non Blocking Applications, page

54:

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

3.4 PROVISIONING

3.4.1 SDI Provisioning:

3.4.1.1 Ports:

Each system requires a minimum of four ports to serve the following:

system monitor, local maintenance,

remote maintenance, and CDR list. In

addition each of the following inputs provisions an additional port.

INPUT CLASS NUMBER

CDR Link (CDR Mag Tape) SOFTWARE

ACD Load Management

SOFTWARE 4 3

ACD Link (ACD-D) SOFTWARE

Meridian Manager Traffic MISC/MEM

172

The total number of ports quoted is the sum of the four required

ports,

the additional required ports noted above, and additional ports

requested via Miscellaneous/Memory input 21.

3.4.1.2 Cards:

There is one port on the Option and Option 21 CPU (QPC687) card.

There is also one port on each DCHI (QPC757) card. If more

ports are required than are available on the CPU and DCHI cards, than

Paddle Boards may be provisioned.

Each Paddle Board provides two ports. They are

quoted in the AS1052 2-Port Paddle Board Assembly and are housed on the

rear of the or modules (no common equipment slots are used).

The maximum number of Paddle Boards provisioned depends on the

system type.

Svstem

Maximum Paddle Boards

Option 21A

Option 21

Option 51

Option 61

Option 71

If the maximum Paddle Boards is provisioned and-more ports are

still required, then four port cards are quoted.

These

cards are provisioned in the AS1051 4-Port Assembly and are housed

in common equipment slots.

3.4.1.3 Cables:

One 48ft cable is provisioned for each CDR List and/or CDR Link

application.

If a Paddle Board is quoted the is

provisioned, otherwise the is used.

Autoquote Userguide April 20,

One 16ft cable is provisioned for each remaining port. The

is provisioned

for

Paddle Boards and the is provisioned for

CPU, DCHI,

and cards.

3.4.2 ESDI Provisioning:

ESDI ports are determined by software options that require ESDI ports

and engineering adjustments made to inputs. The following software

options require one ESDI port: Command and Status Link and

ISDN/AP Third Party Vendor (153).

Each ESDI Card provides two ESDI ports. They are provisioned

as additional equipment except when included in a Meridian Mail

assembly.

3.4.3 Provisioning:

DCHI Cards are provisioned based on PRI inputs. One card is required

for every 16 PRI links serving a particular destination.

For

example,

if destination A needs three links and destination B needs nineteen

links,

a total of three DCHI cards is required. A maximum of eight DCHI

cards may be configured.

3.4.4 Card Provisioning:

The quantity of cards quoted is the minimum

number of Conference cards required by the system. As noted below, the

minimum number of Conference cards depends on system model and size.

Svstem Minimum Conference Cards

Group

Groups

Additional Conference cards requested by

will be provisioned as QPC444 Conference cards.

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

3.5 PROVISIONING

General Information

Software Requirements

PBX Software is a prerequisite for all three applications.

PRA Software is a prerequisite for applications.

Traffic Engineering

One Enhanced traffic loop (QPC414) is required to support a

link.

No traffic engineering is required since each

channel will always have access to a on the network loop.

General Provisioning

The number of links provisioned corresponds to the quantities

selected via the following Lines, and Trunks inputs:

DTI Input 40

CPI Input 41

PRI

Inputs 171-178

3.5.2 Hardware

PRI

The Primary Rate Interface, QPC757 D-Channel Interface, and

the QPC471 Clock Controller are the primary hardware components

used in PRA applications.

The is also used in DTI/CPI

applications.

The is a double wide card and requires two

adjacent Common Equipment card slots.

Clock Controller

The QPC471 Clock Controller(s) is provisioned when PRA and/or DTI

DCHI

DTI

is quoted.

Only one

(Options 21 and

(Options 61 and 71).

The QPC757 D-Channel

is required for non-redundant systems

two are required for redundant systems

Interface (DCHI) is provisioned for every 16

PRI links terminating at the same destination, and one is

provisioned for each ISDN Signaling Link. A maximum of eight

QPC757 can be provisioned on a system.

The QPC720 and the QPC471 are the primary hardware components used

in DTI applications.

The CPI application uses the only; the QPC471 is not

required.

Userguide April 20, 1990

Expansion (Network) Modules

Additional network modules can be provisioned to house the

cards on all system options. Each module can support up to 6

cards.

Clock Controller Cables

The following cables are provisioned when PRI and/or DTI are

quoted:

(PRI to Clock Controller)

One for each PRI/DTI card, up to a maximum of two on

non-redundant systems (Options 21 and 51) four on redundant

systems (Options 61 and 71).

(Clock Controller to Clock Controller)

One for redundant systems (Options 61 and 71) only.

Autoquote Userguide April 20,

3.6 COMMON EQUIPMENT CARD PLACEMENT RULES

The following is a list of CE cards that must be placed. Other CE cards

that have fixed slot placement are not mentioned.

QPC414

QPC471

QPC757

QPC814

Superloop

Enhanced Network Loop

PRI

Clock Controller

DCHI

ESDI

Conference/TDS

3.6.1

General Rules:

Each Superloop takes one physical slot and one virtual slot on all

Options except the Option 21. This is required because the Superloop

uses 4 consecutive network buses. (e.g.

O-3,4-7,8-11).

This means

that no card that requires a network bus may be placed in a virtual slot

of a Superloop, but other cards can be placed in the virtual slot. If

two Superloops are placed in such a way that the two virtual slot are

adjacent,

then double wide cards (e.g. that only require power

or signalling can be placed between the Superloops.

On the Option 21 Superloops may be placed in adjacent slots.

This is

the only exception to the above rules on Superloops.

The PRI Card and the Floppy Disk Unit are double wide

cards and require two adjacent slots.

The Multi-Disk Unit requires three adjacent slots.

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

3.7 MODULE AND PROVISIONING

3.7.1 Module Provisioning

This section explains module provisioning and module placement rules for

Common Equipment,

Peripheral Equipment and Other Equipment modules.

The

term "Column"

is used to represent a stack of modules. A column can

contain up to four modules.

As such,

the term "Module Level" refers to

the level from the bottom that a module occupies.

Therefore, Column 2,

Level 3 indicates the third module of column two.

3.7.1.1 Common Equipment Modules and Placement

The Common Equipment module types to be provisioned are:

Module

CEPE

Common/Peripheral Equipment

Option 21

CNE

CPU/Network Option

CPU CPU Option 71

NET

Network

Option 71

PRI Network Expansion Option

3.7.1.1.1 Common/Peripheral Equipment Module (CEPE)

The Common/Peripheral Equipment Module (CEPE) is provisioned for all

Option 21 systems.

No other systems use this module. This module

contains the CPU function, network slots and 10 slots of Intelligent PE

(IPE) and is always located at the first module level of an Option 21.

3.7.1.1.2 CPU/Network Module (CNE)

One CPU/Network (CNE) Module is provisioned with the Option 51

network group);

two are provisioned with the Option 61 (full network

The

CNE

Module(s) contain the CPU and Network functions for the

Option 51 and 61. This module is located in module level 1 on an Option

51 and in module levels 1 and 2 on the Option 61.

3.7.1.1.3 CPU Module (CPU)

Two CPU Modules are provisioned on the Option 71, one for and

another for CPU 1.

Each CPU modules are positioned in module level 1 of

adjacent columns.

3.7.1.1.4 Network Module (NET)

The Network Module is only provisioned on the Option 71 as a primary

network module which will house network cards. Two Network modules

comprise a network group. The Option 71 can accommodate up to five

network groups, therefore, ten Network modules. The two network shelves

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

which comprise a network group must be positioned together in a column.

The first two network groups for an Option 71 are positioned directly

above the CPU modules

mentioned above. The remaining three network

groups can be positioned in any remaining module positions.

3.7.1.1.5 PRI Network Expansion Module- (NET/PRI)

The PRI Network Expansion Module can be used on the Option 21, 51, 61

and 71.

Each NET/PRI module can house up to six PRI packs and in

the case of the Option 21 can house the Floppy Disk Unit.

modules are provisioned if primary CE slots are not the

PRI packs. Generally, there is no limit to the number of

modules that can be provisioned with a system; the limiting factor is

Network module space to house the supporting QPC414 network cards, clock

Controller cards and D-Channel Interface cards.

3.7.1.2 Peripheral Equipment Modules

The Peripheral Equipment module types to be provisioned are:

Module Description Svstem

IPE

Intelligent Peripheral Equipment . Option

EPE

Enhanced Peripheral Equipment Option

3.7.1.2.1 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module

The Intelligent Peripheral Equipment module contains 16 slots for

housing Intelligent PE cards.

These modules are provisioned based on

the number required to house the wired for IPE cards. The IPE module

can be housed in any module level.

3.7.1.2.2 Enhanced Peripheral Equipment Module

The Enhanced Peripheral Equipment module contains 10 slots for housing

Enhanced PE cards.

These modules are provisioned based on the number

required to house the wired for EPE cards. The EPE module can be housed

in any module level.

3.7.1.3 Other Equipment Modules

The Other Equipment Modules provisioned are:

Module

Svstem

Meridian Mail Option

RPE

Remote Peripheral Equipment Option

IGM Inter-Group Module

Option 71

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

3.7.1.3.1 Meridian Mail (MM)

There are two basic types of Meridian Mail Modules. The first is the

Prime Node which houses the Tape Drive Module. All additional modules

are referred to as Voice Nodes. The Prime Meridian Mail module will be

provisioned with any Meridian Mail system. Additional Voice Node

Meridian Mail modules will be provisioned based on the number of Network

Voice Processors (NVP) required. The positioning rules for Meridian

Mail modules in Autoquote assume a maximum room temperature of 40

degrees Celsius (104 degrees F). The Prime node can be placed in the

first two module level positions. The additional Voice Nodes can be

placed in the first, second,

or third module positions. In addition,

Meridian Mail modules need to be co-located for connectivity.

3.7.1.3.2 Remote Peripheral Equipment (RPE)

The RPE modules which contains the Local Carrier Interface equipment are

provisioned based on the number of RPE loops required. Each RPE module

supports two. remote loops.

The RPE module can be located in the first

or second module level

3.7.1.3.3 Inter-Group Module (IGM)

The Inter-Group module is only used on the Option 71. One IGM module

will be provisioned per Option 71 system for inter-network group

connectivity.

3.7.2 Pedestals and Kits

In determining the module and column configuration for Meridian 1, the

pedestal types and kits must be considered.

3.7.2.1 Pedestals

The same general pedestal is used in all configurations, however, the

contents of the pedestal assembly can differ as explained below.

Please

refer to the Pricing Manual for package breakdowns and assembly codes.

The Option 21A assembly is used on all

module Option 21A systems. This assembly contains unit

designed for cooling a one module system.

A Two-Module Pedestal Assembly is provisioned on Option 21 systems

which contain two modules. This assembly contains a Pedestal Fan

Unit designed for cooling a two module system.

The standard Pedestal Assembly is used for columns which will

include up to four module levels.

A Special Pedestal assembly is used for systems containing

Autoquote Userguide April 20,

Meridian Mail.

This assembly contains the same pedestal equipment

as in the standard Pedestal Assembly mentioned above, however a

maximum of one of these assemblies can be ordered in systems which

contain Meridian Mail.

The minimum required pedestal assemblies will be provisioned based on

the configuration quoted. However,

Miscellaneous/Memory Input 11 can be

used to override the pedestal provisioning assumptions.

If Input 11 is

set to 2,

at least a two module pedestal assembly will be provisioned

and if Input 11 is set to 4,

a four module pedestal assembly will be

required.

3.7.2.2 Sidepanels/Spacer Kits

Sidepanels are provisioned for all module sides which are exposed.

Spacer Kits are provisioned for every two adjoining modules. The number

of Sidepanels and Spacer Kits provisioned is based on the number of

modules as well as the module placement within columns.

Userguide April 20, 1990

3.0 POWER

3.8.1 Power Configurations

Except for the Option all Meridian 1 systems may be configured for

either an AC or DC power source.

The Option 21A -is strictly an AC

powered system.

A DC powered system may be quoted with or without rectifiers. A

system quoted without rectifiers is assumed to have a customer provided

power source.

The power configuration quoted is determined by the value of

Miscellaneous/Memory input 1.

Customer Provided Power

= DC Using Rectifiers

3.8.2 Power Calculations .

System Power, BTU Output,

and Load are calculated using the following

module power values.

Power

Per Module

CPU/Network

CPU

Network

EPE

Intelligent PE

RPE local side

RPE

remote

side

Meridian

Mail

Intergroup Module

Pedestal (Blowers)

Consumption

(Watts)

500

360

300

270

240

460

175

100

400

Dissipation

(Watts)

450

360

300

270

200

380

175

100

400

Rectifiers: 30 Amp

50 Amp 175

290

System

Power is calculated by summing the power consumption of-all

modules quoted.

System BTU Output is calculated by summing the power Dissipation of all

modules and rectifiers and multiplying

the constant 3.415.

System Load (Amps) is determined by dividing the System Power by the

appropriate divisor: 52 Volts for DC

systems,

230 Volts for AC

systems.

Autoquote Userguide April 20,

3.8.3

Power Components

All power components for AC systems are included in the base system

packages.

DC systems using customer provided power are provisioned the

Customer Provided Power Assembly which includes Battery

Distribution Unit.

DC systems with rectifiers are provisioned the number of rectifiers

required to support the system load.

Quantify of Rectifiers = System Load Amps per Rectifier

Rectifier Output = Quantity of Rectifiers * Amps per Rectifier

Options 21,

51, and 61 are quoted with 30 Amp Rectifiers

These rectifiers

are

housed in a rectifier rack which

supports a maximum of three rectifiers and/or a maximum of eight

modules.

Thus the quantity of racks quoted is the larger of the

following expressions.

Quantity of Racks = Rectifiers 3

Quantity of Racks = Modules

Note that one rectifier and one rectifier rack are included in the base

system packages.

Option 71 utilizes Amp Rectifiers housed in Prime Rectifier

Cabinets (B0225152).

Each cabinet may house up to four rectifiers.

Note that the Option 71 base system package contains one prime cabinet

and one 50 amp rectifier. If desired,

the prime rectifier cabinet may

be quoted on an option 51 or 61 using Miscellaneous/Memory input 12.

3.8.4

Reserve Power

Both AC and DC powered systems may utilize reserve power sources.

3.8.4.1 AC Systems (UPS):

Reserve

power for an AC system is provided by an Uninterruptible Power

Supply (UPS).

Autoquote calculates the UPS rating as follows.

UPS rating = System Power 0.6

One UPS cable is required for any AC system with reserve power.

The

actual cable provisioned is dependent on the UPS vendor as indicted by

Miscellaneous/Memory input 10.

3.8.4.2 DC Systems (Batteries):

Autoquote calculates battery requirements as follows.

Battery System Load * Battery Factor

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

The Battery Factor is dependent on the hours of backup required and the

battery type used.

Hours

Absolyte Lead-Calcium

3.0

3.1 4.0

4.2 5.0

5.2 5.9

6.2 6.9

7.1 7.7

7.8 a.5

a.5 9.3

9.4 10.1

10.2 10.9

If more than 10 hours of backup is required, the factor becomes linear.

For example,

if 15 hours are required the factor is 15.

Note that the Option 71 requires a minimum of 4 hours of battery backup.

3.9 MEMORY

Autoquote calculates three memory components for each Meridian 1 system:

Protected Data (P-Data), Unprotected Data (U-Data), and Program Store.

Utilization of these components is estimated at equipped and wired

levels.

These utilization measures are compared to appropriate

capacities to ensure the system has adequate memory for the quoted

functionality.

3.9.1 Memory Calculations

Autoquote employs memory values and calculations detailed in the

Controlled Release Memory documents. Exceptions and special notations

are listed below.

Each 1024 words equals of memory.

A 5% error factor is included for each memory component.

A 900 word error margin is added to P-Data and U-Data utilization to

account

for

the error factor of low memory systems.

P-Data is not calculated for the following software options:

New Flexible Code Restriction

Network Automatic Route Selection

Coordinated Dialing Plan

P-Data required for these features should be calculated manually based

on specific customer requirements. Additional P-Data may be added to a

quote using Memory input 47.

P-Data required for Basic Automatic Route Selection (BARS) is estimated

to be No factor Is included for Specialized Common Carriers

Userguide

April 20, 1990

requiring 6-digit translation.

An additional 12% P-Data requirement is incorporated for DN translation.

P-Data and U-Data values

used for various line ports are:

Lines

P-Data

U-Data

Ports

10.5

4.5

Digital Voice Ports

< 16

Buttons

22.5 14.5

16 Buttons

26.5 14.5

Sync Data Ports

14.5 14.5

Data Ports

9.5 14.5

3.9.2

Memory Capacities

Memory capacities vary depending on system

type.

3.9.2.1 Option 21

One memory/signaling card is included in each system package.

Although this

card provides 768k total storage,

it is addressed'by pages

of 64k for the following

purposes.

I/O Addressing

U-Data

P-Data

Program Store

Total

Paaes

Storaae

64k

576k .

768k

necessary,

Program Store may overflow into the P-Data page.

Due to

this paging,

memory

utilization is limited as noted below.

U-Data

P-Data

P-Data + Program Store

64k

640k

3.9.2.2 Option 51

One QPC583 memory card is included in each system This card

provides 768k total storage. No paging limitations exist.

The sum of

U-Data, P-Data, and Program Store may not exceed 768k.

3.9.2.3 Option 61

Two QPC583 memory cards are include in each system package.

These cards

provide 768k storage. No paging limitations exist.

The

Userguide April 20, 1990

sum of U-Data, P-Data,

and Program Store may not exceed 768k.

3.9.2.4 Option 71

Two memory cards are include in each system package. These cards

provide 768k redundant storage. No paging limitations exist.

additional QPCS83 memory cards may be added to provide redundant

storage.

Four additional QPC583 memory cards may be added to provide

total redundant storage. The sum of U-Data, P-Data, and Program

Store may not exceed

3.10 REAL TIME

CPU Real Time utilization is estimated for each Meridian 1 system based

on system traffic and applications. A rated call carrying capacity is

determined assuming 70% of the busy hour (2520 seconds) is available for

call processing.

This rated capacity may not be exceeded by the wired

calls per hour.

3.10.1 Rated Call Carrying Capacity

The rated call carrying capacity incorporates the following factors.

Set Calls

Digital Set Calls

Trunk Calls

Tie Line Calls

Call Party Name Display

Coordinated Dialing Plan

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Meridian Mail

Call Detail Recording (CDR)

Authorization Codes

Off-Hook Queuing

Basic Automatic Route Selection (BARS)

Network Automatic Route Selection (NARS)

New Flexible Code Restriction

Primary Access

Superloop Ports

3.10.2 Call Detail Recording (CDR)

CDR has a great impact on CPU real time. To ensure this impact is

accounted for correctly, Miscellaneous Memory input 14 is used to

specify how CDR will be used. Default CDR Usage is outgoing calls only.

3.10.3 Tie Line Calls

TO accurately account for calls, Basic Information input 10 is

used to specify the number of links which will serve

tie

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

lines.

The default is zero.

Calls Per Hour

The number of calls per hour is calculated as follows.

P * 100 * 0.5 H

where P = Total traffic in CCS

H = Average Holding Time

The default Average Holding Time is 180 seconds, but this be altered

using Miscellaneous/Memory input 23.

Autoquote Userguide April 20,

3.11 NON-BLOCKING APPLICATIONS

Non-Blocking applications require that all ports have access to a

network loop at all times.

In other words,

the number of ports

supported by a loop cannot exceed the number of timeslots on that loop.

Options 21,

51, 61 and 71 can be quoted as totally or partially

blocking.

Autoquote assumes that non-blocking modules are

partitioned and separate from normal PE modules.

In addition,

Intelligent PE (IPE) and Enhanced PE (EPE) non-blocking applications

require separate modules.

Generally the number of non-blocking ports

which can be quoted is based on the network capacity of the

system.

Non-Blocking Inputs

Quoting a non-blocking configuration requires entering inputs for

blocking ports, cards and modules. In addition,

the non-blocking

Average Holding Time (AHT) can be adjusted using Miscellaneous/Memory

Input 123.

The non-blocking average holding time defaults to 600

seconds.

Please

refer

to the sample input sheet at the end of this

section for actual inputs.

Non-blocking ports are entered with Phones/Lines and Trunks inputs 101

through 143. For these inputs,

CCS values generally default to 36.

Note that Input 143 is the Voice/Data ISDLC input. Two timeslots are

required for each non-blocking Voice/Data ISDLC port.

Miscellaneous/Memory Inputs 51 through are used to specify the

blocking PE cards and modules. Note that there are separate inputs for

Intelligent PE (IPE) and Enhanced PE (EPE) modules.

Recommended Quoting Procedure

The following steps are recommended to be used when quoting non-blocking

applications:

1) Determine the quantity of non-blocking ports by card type for both

Intelligent PE (IPE) and Enhanced (PE).

2) Determine the number of network loops required.

For

IPE divide the

total non-blocking ports by 120; for EPE divide the total non-blocking

ports by 30.

These values should be rounded up to the nearest-number.

Autoquote Userguide April 20,

3) Determine the number PE cards and shelves required by manually

mapping out each loop with the type of ports to be assigned to that

loop.

PE card calculation should include any Receiver

requirements.

(This drawing can be sent in with the order to assure the

system is built as the non-blocking system quoted) Note that analog

line cards require Ringing Generators. Therefore,

by noting the

quantity of IPE and EPE shelves which contain analog line cards, this

value can be entered into Miscellaneous Inputs Also, for

each Intelligent PE module which require more than 2 Superloops,

Controller-4 Card will have to be entered in Miscellaneous/Memory Input

82.

Total all non-blocking IPE and EPE shelves and cards from step 3..

Enter non-blocking ports in the appropriate non-blocking Phones Lines

and Trunks inputs and enter the

results

of step 4 into the non-blocking

Miscellaneous Memory Input

section.

telemanuals.com

Userguide April 20,

3.12 MERIDIAN MAIL

Meridian Mail may be quoted with Options 21, 51, 61 and 71. Meridian

Mail is quoted by either using Miscellaneous/Memory Input 150 for the

Meridian Mail Modular system or Loading a Meridian Mail X Cabinet

onto an existing quote.

3.12.1 Meridian Mail Modular

The Meridian Mail Modular system can be quoted by entering the desired

Ports,

Hours and Users in Miscellaneous Memory Input 150. When this

input is used,

the complete Meridian Mail hardware and software

packaging will be included in the quote as well as any supporting

equipment such as network loops, ESDI card slots, pedestals and power.

This section addresses the configuration rules for the Meridian Mail

hardware and software.

For information on switch impact of Meridian

Mail, please refer to previous portions of this Engineering/Provisioning

section.

Meridian Mail Hardware is based upon the amount of Voice Processor Ports

and Hours of storage requested. Meridian Mail Modular configurations

consist of a combination of a Base Package, additional Network Voice

Processor Cards (NVP),

Expansion Storage Software and Expansion

Assemblies.

Each NVP card contains

four Voice Processor ports. Voice

Storage hours is determined by the amount of disk space available.

Configurations include different combinations of 300MB and

600MB

disks.

The following chart shows the relationship of these

configurations.

Note that the Ports column shows the capacities with

additional NVP cards added.

With With

With

Base Package Expanded Storage Exp. Assembly

Both

PORTS HOURS

-- -- -- --

11 12

24 20 26 20 54

54 20

20 114

24 45 36 90 60

120

24 120 36 240

The corresponding order

codes for

these configurations are as follows:

Base Base

Software Software EXD.

SW7001 -- --

SW7000 SW7003 AS7000

SW7000 SW7003 AS7001

SW7000 SW7003 AS7004

SW7000 SW7003 AS7005

telemanuals.com

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

As shown in the

above

chart, every Meridian Mail Modular system comes

with a Base Software Package.

For configurations of not more than five

hours of storage,

the SW7001 5 Hour Software base package is included.

All other configurations require the SW7000 Meridian Mail Base Software.

Expansion Storage Software is provisioned to increase voice

storage capacity if required.

The remaining Meridian Mail applications are selected using

Miscellaneous/Memory Inputs 151-156. As most of these inputs are

software applications, enter a 1 to select the option. In the case of

Voice Menus,

any positive number input will provision Voice Menus

software, however, by entering the number of Voice Menu Calls expected

during the busy hour,

this input can also be used in determining the CPU

Real Time impact.

Input 155 is Meridian Mail Networking Ports.

By entering the number of

Meridian Mail Networking Ports required in this input, the Meridian Mail

Networking Software and appropriate hardware will be provisioned.

The

hardware for this application includes a Networking Hardware Package and

a Modem Package.

The Networking Hardware Package includes one 4-port

RS232 board and 2 modems.

The Modem package is provisioned if more than

two total networking ports are required and includes 2 additional

modems.

3.12.2 Meridian Mail X Cabinet

The Meridian Mail X Cabinet can be quoted in conjunction with a Meridian

1 system by creating a separate Meridian

Mail

quote and Aux Loading it

onto the Meridian 1.

Creating the Meridian Mail X quote is accomplished

using the Autoquote Model "MM". Please refer to the Meridian Mail

Product Chapter

for

information on quote the X Cabinet.

Autoquote Userguide April 20,

3.13 REMOTE PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT (RPE)

Remote Peripheral Equipment (RPE) may be quoted with any Meridian 1

Option 21, 51, 61 or 71.

The quoting process is identical to a normal

Meridian 1 quotation with the addition of the AUX Loading function as

described in Section 4 of this User Guide.

As there is no Common Equipment (CE) in an RPE system, the Software

Input Class does not apply.

Therefore the only inputs necessary on an

RPE system are:

Phones Lines and Trunks

Miscellaneous/Memory

Basic Information

To set up an RPE quote, use either the RPE or RPEC Autoquote Models.

(These models do not have an associated release number; enter a RETURN

at the Release prompt.)

The RPE model is used the Meridian 1

modular packaged RPE while the RPEC model is used to quote the QCA74

style RPE cabinet.

Although networks,

receivers and memory are not quoted for an

RPE system,

they are calculated so they can be at the main

site when Aux Loading is performed.

Please reference Section 5, Aux Loading, page 77 of this User Guide for

information on how to Aux Load an RPE system. RPE software must be

selected on the Main circuit switch quote before Auxiliary Loading.

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

REPORTS

This section contains samples of

available on Meridian SL-1

quotation models.

An explanation of each report is also included.

Report

--------------------------

Header Report

Price Summary

Engineering Summary

Equipment Summary

Input Listing

Auxiliary Quote Summary

Equipment List

Unused Capacity Summary

9999

A sample of report 15 Discount Summary and Report 11 Auxiliary Price

Summary will not appear in the User guide. These reports provide

discounting information which may vary for different Autoquote users.

Report 3 is available and is the same as Report 9 without pricing

information.

Please note that many of the engineering and configuration reports

display "Equipped" and

"Wired" values for hardware.

The Meridian SL-1

Autoquote models calculate equipped and wired configurations in the same

run.

Details on these two values are often needed when the customer

requires a certain amount of growth capacity engineered into the system.

For all line,

trunk and data the user can input both the equipped

and wired quantities desired.

The Autoquote will then configure a

system where all hardware needed for the equipped configuration is

included and the only things lacking for the wired configuration are PE

cards.

All other hardware (CE equipment, power equipment, memory,

network capacity,

cabinets and shelves) is quoted to support the wired

configuration.

The mechanics of using Autoquote are not included in this product

chapter.

Refer to the Introduction and chapter for detailed information

on how to use the Autoquote system.

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

4.1 Header Report 9999

The "Report Header"

is produced each time that Report is selected from

the service menu or it can be reproduced by requesting report number

9999. This report displays general information that is input when a New

Quote is created or that has been entered by selecting General

Information at the Service Menu.

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

NORTHERN TELECOM MBS QUOTATION SYSTEM

DATE:

'CREATION DATE

QUOTATION

FOR:

'MERIDIAN 1 SYSTEM OPTION 21

RELEASE 15

QUOTED BY ):

ADMIN

'ORDER DATE:

QUOTATION. NUMBER: 00003556

USER GUIDE

THIS CONFIGURATION IS BASED UPON ENGINEERING RULES IN

EFFECT AS

THIS DATE BUT PRIOR TO DISTRIBUTORS SUBMISSION

AN ORDER.

ALTHOUGH ENGINEERING RULES MAY CHANGE IN THE FUTURE, WILL

HONOR THE QUOTED FUNCTIONALITY FOR SIXTY DAYS FROM THIS DATE.

PRICING IS

GOVERNED SOLELY BY THE CPE DISTRIBUTORSHIP AGREEMENT BETWEEN EACH

DISTRIBUTOR AND NTI, AND THE MERIDIAN BUSINESS SYSTEMS PRICING MANUAL IN

EFFECT ON THE DATE ACCEPTS THE DISTRIBUTORS ORDER.

THE PRICE QUOTED BY THE AUTOQUOTE SYSTEM APPLIES ONLY TO THE ITEMS OF

EQUIPMENT AND SOFTWARE LISTED 'IN THE EQUIPMENT BREAKOUT (IE. REPORT 3).

THESE ITEMS ARE BASED SOLELY ON THE INPUTS. THE ACTUAL SYSTEM PRICE

DEPENDS ON PARTICULAR APPLICATIONS AND FINALIZED SYSTEM ENGINEERING

MAY REQUIRE MANUAL ADDITIONS OR DELETIONS TO THIS QUOTE.

DATE is the date on which the quotation was run

CREATION DATE is the date on which the quote was created as a new

quote or copied to a new quote number.

FOR is the END USER COMPANY NAME entered as part of the

information entered when setting up a new quote or changed within

General Information.

This is the system type being quoted.

The system type is determined

by the response to MODEL/GENERIC entered as part of a new quote or

changed quote using the MODEL command

Either AC or DC depending on the system power option that was selected

under miscellaneous inputs.

The Software Release is input at the RELEASE prompt when creating a

new quote or changing an existing quote using the Model command

Sales Channel Acronym,

entered as part of the system sign on

procedure:

HELLO (Location ID),(Sales Channel).NTII

Salesperson when creating a new quote or changing an existing

Userguide April

quote using the General Information command.

Order

Date

is the anticipated order date input when creating a new

quote or changed quote using the General Information command.

Caveats,

Disclaimers, and Notes

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

4.2 Price summary Report 1

This report subtotals Commercial List Price (CLP) by product group.

SUMMARY PRICE ---

QUOTE: 00003556

SL-1 EQUIPMENT 104615.00

(02) RPE EQUIPMENT 7675.00

(03) SL-1 SOFTWARE 26660.00

(04) TERMINALS PROPRIETARY

6600.00

(13) MERIDIAN MAIL HARDWARE 20100.00

(14) MERIDIAN MAIL SOFTWARE 16000.00

(20) TERMINALS MTD

640.00

FOR USE ONLY BY PERSONNEL AUTHORIZED BY NTI.

NOT FOR PUBLIC DISCLOSURE.

DATE is the date on which the quotation was run

Subtotal of CLP by equipment type;

The numerals in TP (type code)

column of Report 9 correspond to the code on left of the each Equipment

Autoquote Userguide April

20,

1990

4.3 Report 9 Equipment List

This report lists all items which are included in the price quoted. If a

hardware

software item is not listed in this report, it is not

included in the price.

Package and assembly codes are used wherever

possible.

Refer to the Meridian 1 Communication Systems Pricing Manuals

for breakdown of packages and assemblies.

--- EQUIPMENT LIST ---

QUOTE: 00003556

QNTY EQP CODE DESCRIPTION

UNIT EXTENDED

1 OPTION 21 SYS PKG +PE MODULE AC 3760.00

3760.00

'FOLLOWING IS A PARTIAL LIST OF PREPACKAGE ITEMS FOR THE ABOVE SYSTEM. --

-- THEY ARE LISTED FOR REFERENCE ONLY. --

1 TOP CAP AC

1 CARD

1 CONFERENCE/TDS CARD

1 SUPERLOOP NETWORK CARD

2 AS1052 2 PORT PADDLE BOARD ASSEMBLY

1 INTELLIGENT PE MODULE ASSEMBLY AC

1 NETWORK TO CONTROLLER CABLE

4 PO699724 MODULE SIDE COVER

--ADDITIONS REQUIRED TO THE SYSTEM PACKAGE ARE :

QPC414

QPC471

AS1061

AS1013

QPC192

QPC723

SILHUETE

PEDESTAL ASSEMBLY AC

TOP CAP AC

RPE CARRIER MODULE ASSEMBLY AC

LOCAL NETWORK INTERFACE ASSY.

SPECIAL 'PEDESTAL ASSEMBLY AC

2 PORT I/O TO CAB 48'

2 PORT I/O TO DTE/DCE CAB 16'

I/O TO DTE/DCE CABLE 16 FT.

NETWORK CARD

CLOCK CONTROLLER

TO CLOCK CONT

PRI ASSEMBLY

INTELLIGENT PE MODULE ASSEMBLY AC

CONTROLLER CARD-2

PE MODULE ASSEMBLY AC

RING GENERATOR AC

NETWORK TO CONTROLLER CABLE

NETWORK TO PE CABLE

SPECIAL CONSOLE/LINE CARD PKG

DIGITAL LINE CARD

ANALOG LINE CARD

ANALOG MESSAGE WAITING LINE CARD

UNIVERSAL TRUNK CARD

OPX LINE

RILC-RS-232C INTERFACE LINE CARD

M2008 TELEPHONE

SILHOUETTE w/DIAL-IN HANDSET

MERIDIAN MANAGER STATION ADMIN

101 4910.00 4910.00

101 495.00 495.00

so2 4595.00 4595.00

so2

3080.00

101

3000.00

80.00

50.00 150.00

50.00

101 1715.00 1715.00

885.00

40.00

80.00

so1

2760.00

5520.00

101

10220.00

101 3950.00 7900.00

101

3140.00

DO1 1060.00 3180.00

60.

60.00

DO1

40.00

120.00

101

4580.00

4580.00 .

101

3085.00

15425.00

101

3085.00

21595.00

101

3240.00

101 3195.00 9585.00

101 1695.00 1695.00

101

1235.00

2470.00

DO4

165.00

6600.00

H20 64.00

640.00

DO5 . o o .oo

Userguide April 20, 1990

M-MAIL MOD OPT 4PT AC

SW7000

MOD

OPT BASE SW

SW7003

MOD OPT EXPANDED SW

SW7005

MOD OPT VOICE MENUS

COLUMN SPACER KIT

PO699724 MODULE SIDE COVER

SWOOOOA BASE

SOFTWARE

RTU/MULTI-CUSTOMER

RTU/RPE

TDS

RTU/AUX PROCESSOR LINK

RTU/IVMS LINK

MAIL LINK

RTU/BASIC ACD FEATURES (ACD A)

D13 20100.00 20100.00

2000.00 2000.00

12000.00 12000.00

2000.00 2000.00

190.00 570.00

95.00 190.00

R03 5250.00 21000.00

225.00 900.00

103 560.00 560.00

103

.oo .oo

103 125.00 500.00

103 800.00 3200.00

400.00

103 100.00 100.00

INDICATES CONTROLLED RELEASE; PROPER AUTHORIZATION IS REQUIRED

TO QUOTE.

SOFTWARE OPTIONS

1 2

5789

11 14 15 16 17 18 19

21 22

23 24

33 34

36 40

44 45 46

47'

52 53

55 57

71 72

81 83 85 87 88

91 95

107 108 109

115 119

139 140

157

170

173

203 204 205

FOR USE ONLY BY PERSONNEL AUTHORIZED BY NTI.

NOT FOR PUBLIC DISCLOSURE.

A reference listing of the major system package contents is included in

the Equipment List report.

This is only a reference and extends down to

the

Symbols

in the left hand column are used to indicate that a product

requires Controlled Release procedures or Terminals

Division product (T).

The number in the column is the Autoquote equipment type code. It

is used to designate logical groupings of hardware and software.

Autoquote

Userguide April 20, 1990

4.4 Report 4 Engineering

The Engineering Summary Report displays engineering information on

memory, power,

system traffic and processor real time. For details on

calculating these items, please see Section 3, Engineering\Provisioning,

page 27.

Userguide April 20, 1990

--- ENGINEERING SUMMARY ---

- MEMORY (Kwords)

UNPROTECTED DATA

PROTECTED DATA

PROGRAM STORE

PROTECTED DATA + PROGRAM STORE

QUOTE: 00003556

EQUIPPED

15'

-295

310

WIRED

295

313

QUOTED CAPACITY

640

POWER VALUES

EQUIPPED WIRED

SYSTEM POWER (WATTS) 1520 2380

SYSTEM

UPS FACTOR (KVA) 2.53 3.96

SYSTEM HEAT OUTPUT

4439 5737

SYSTEM TRAFFIC (CCS)

DTI/CPI

EQUIPPED WIRED

1536 1536

QUOTED CAPACITY

1728

LINE

TRUNK

OTHER

GOS SUPERLOOP

GOS NET MAIN

TOTAL GOS

995 1770

320 650

91 111

1406 2531

177

247

7000

700

1471 2666

GRAND TOTAL

3007 4202

7700

9428

TRAFFIC AVERAGES

GOS INTELLIGENT PE TRAFFIC

CCS/SHELF

EQUIPPED WIRED QUOTED

6.221 6.375 6.221

83 94 83

703 844 469

703 1266 703

GOS PE TRAFFIC (MAIN)

8.125

9.000

135

8.125

REAL TIME

EQUIPPED WIRED

QUOTED

CAPACITY

CALLS PER HOUR

833 1164 5682

PERCENT

UTILIZATION

21 100

FOR USE ONLY BY PERSONNEL AUTHORIZED

BY NTI.

NOT FOR PUBLIC DISCLOSURE.

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

4.4.1 Memory

For questions regarding Memory values refer to Section 3.9, Memory, page

50.

UNPR

OTECTED

DATA, PROTECTED DATA and PROGRAM STORE memory values are

displayed for the Equipped and Wired configurations. System'capacities

are also displayed when appropriate; e.g. for PROGRAM STORE + P-DATA

and TOTAL MEMORY.

All values are in words of memory.

4.4.2

Power

For questions regarding power values refer to Power, page 47.

SYSTEM POWER is the sum of the modules power in Watts.

SYSTEM UPS Power Supply) FACTOR is (System Power)

for AC Systems.

SYSTEM HEAT OUTPUT is the sum of the modules and rectifiers heat output.

HOURS BATTERY BACXUP is the number of hours of battery backup requested

(For DC Systems).

BATTERY REQUIREMENTS (AMP HOURS) is the amount of amp-hours the

batteries must be rated to support the specified amount of backup

DC Systems). (For

RECHARGE TIME is the number of hours required to recharge the quoted

batteries after they have been completely discharged

(For

DC Systems).

4.4.3 System Traffic

For questions regarding traffic values refer to Network Loop

Engineering, page 36.

Total system traffic is broken into NON-BLOCKING, and

GOS quantities both the Main and RPE sites. OTHER CCS represents

Console,

Receiver (main location) and Meridian Mail traffic

calculated for the system.

4.4.4 Real Time

For

questions regarding real time values refer to Section 3.10, Real

Time, page 52.

The values described in this section of Report 4 deal with the

processing

time

of the CPU.

When applicable,

equipped and wired values

are given.

Userguide April 20, 1990

The equipped and wired CALLS PER HOUR is a measure of the number of

calls made per hour based on traffic and average holding time.

The CALL

PER

HOUR quoted capacity is a rated capacity based on system feature

utilization.

Real time intensive features (CDR, ACD, Meridian Mail)

decrease this CALL PER HOUR quoted capacity since the

utilization

reduces the time

available

for'call processing.

PERCENT UTILIZATION is

Simply

percentage measure of the CALLS PER

HOUR

equipped or wired versus the CALLS PER HOUR quoted capacity.

The

PERCENT UTILIZATION quoted capacity is always 100.

Autoquote Userguide April

4.5 Report 5 Equipment Summary

Report provides a summary of the configuration in terms of the main

hardware components and ports.

--- EQUIPMENT SUMMARY ---

TOTAL ROWS

TOTAL COLUMNS

TOTAL MODULES

RPE CARRIER MODULES

MERIDIAN MAIL MODULES

MODULE

INTELLIGENT PE MODULES

PE MODULES

SUPERLOOPS

NETWORK LOOPS

LOOPS

QUOTE: 00003556

EQUIPPED WIRED

QUOTED

-1

INTELLIGENT PE CARDS

LINE CARDS

TRUNK CARDS

DISK DRIVE SLOTS (N/A)

TOTAL INTELLIGENT PE SLOTS

TOTAL INTELLIGENT PE CARDS

14 23 14

222

PECARDS

TOTAL CARDS

PORTS EQUIPPED

WIRED QUOTED

PORTS

ESDI PORTS

INTELLIGENT PE

VOICE PORTS

TRUNK PORTS

DTR PORTS

TOTAL

202 357 202

226 397 226

AVG. PORTS/SHELF

AVG. PORTS/LOOP

113 133

22.6

397 226

GOS PE

VOICE PORTS

DATA PORTS

TOTAL

. 15

AVG. PORTS/SHELF

AVG.

PORTS/LOOP

TOTAL PORTS (TN's)

8158

364 542 364

Userguide April 20,

4.5.1 Hardware

The information in the Hardware section of this report represents the

number of key of an item equipped, wired and quoted. The quoted level

should correspond to the equipped for calculations of Peripheral

Equipment (EPE IPE) cards, ports , and For all other

calculations the quoted level should correspond to the wired level.

For details

on calculating these

items, see Section Engineering \

Provisioning, page 27.

4.5.2

Ports

SDI, D-Channel Interface,

and ESDI (Enhanced for

Meridian Mail)

ports are listed for reference.

Ports average are calculated at module and network loop level for

Grade of Service (GOS) and Non-blocking

configurations.

Userguide April

20,

4.6 Report 6 Input Listing

This report lists all inputs used to engineer and provision the Meridian

1 SL-1 system.

Default values and input adjustments will be reflected

in this report. Actual "saved"

inputs can be viewed when loading an

existing quote.

The inputs will be stored as shown on this report if

the quote is

after running reports.

--- INPUT LISTING ---

QUOTE:

00003556

SOFTWARE

OPTIONS

002

015

077

PHONES, LINES TRUNKS

001 78 ,

134

5.00

003 113

5.00

005

5.00

007

5.00

010

30.00

011

22.00

012 16.00

035

10.00

040 32.0

100 10

230 40

DATA

001

023

180

040

102

150

4, 12,

100

151

BASIC INFORMATION

001

005

007

009

MULTI-CUSTOMER

REMOTE PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT (RPE)

MERIDIAN MAIL APPLICATION

DIGITAL VOICE LINES

2500

LINES

MSG

WAITING 2500 LINES

OPX 2500 LINES

CONSOLES

CO TRUNKS

DID TRUNKS

RILC DATA LINES

DIGITAL TRUNK INTERFACE (DTI)

SILHOUETTE

M2008

POWER INDICATCR w/RECTIFIERS)

AVERAGE HOLDING TIME

NUMBER OF CUSTOMERS

CABLE EGRESS

MERIDIAN MAIL OPTION

MERIDIAN MAIL VOICE MENUS (# CALLS)

NUMBER

TRUNK GROUPS

AMOUNT

DISA TRAFFIC (IN CCS)

NUMBER OF TEMPLATES

PERCENT DTI TRAFFIC THAT IS

Userguide April 20, 1990

4.7 Report 7 Auxiliary Quote Summary

There are two versions of Report 7:

the Auxiliary Quote Summary and

the RPE Summary.

The latter is available on the RPE models only. If

printed from a "Main" quote,

it provides an overview of any Loaded"

quote run with the "Main" quote. The summary consists of System Traffic

(ccs) and the number of Network Loops for and Voice ports and

Hours of storage

for Meridian Mail.

If-this report is printed from an

RPE quote,

a summary of the engineered values which will impact the

"Main" quote are printed.

Main Quote Version

AUXILIARY QUOTE SUMMARY

QUOTE: 00003556

MAIN/RPE

END-USER QUOTE #

SYSTEM

TRAFFIC NETWORKS

00003556 2942

182290.00

00003557 390

37350.00

SUBTOTAL 3397

TOTAL

219640.00

4.7.2 RPE Quote Version

RPE SUMMARY ---

QUOTE: 00003557

END-USER:

37350

EQUIPPED

WIRED

UNPROTECTED DATA

2475 2475

PROTECTED DATA

4664 4664

ccs

P.O1 TRAFFIC LOOPS

390 390

Userguide April 20,

4.8 Report 20 Unused Capacity Summary

Unused Capacity is the result of hardware being able to support a range

of usage.

For example an IPE module can support form 1 to 16 IPE cards.

If only

one

card is needed at the equipped for level then the

equipped unused capacity is 15 slots. For details on calculating these

items,

please see paragraph 0 Engineering \ Provisioning page 27.

UNUSED CAPACITY SUMMARY ---

QUOTE: 00003556

MEMORY (Kwords)

EQUIPPED WIRED

UNPROTECTED DATA

34 29

AVAILABLE

54 46

PROTECTED DATA

44 '41

% AVAILABLE

PROTECTED DATA + PROGRAM S 3 2 5

322

% AVAILABLE

EQUIPPED WIRED

IPE CARD SLOTS GOS)

PE CARD SLOTS GOS)

SUPERLOOPS --

PE PORTS GOS)

DIGITAL LINE CARD

ANALOG MESSAGE WAITING LINE CARD

QPC192

OPX LINE

QPC723

RILC-RS-232C INTERFACE LINE CARD

UNIVERSAL TRUNK CARD

QUOTED

EQUIPPED

WIRED

FOR USE ONLY BY PERSONNEL AUTHORIZED BY NTI.

NOT FOR PUBLIC DISCLOSURE.

Autoquote Userguide April 20,

4.8.1

Memory

Unused memory capacities are calculated and displayed

when appropriate,

e.g.

UNPROTECTED DATA, PROGRAM STORE + P-DATA, and TOTAL MEMORY.

All

values are in words of memory.

also calculated for each

memory category.

4.8.2 Hardware

PE CARD SLOTS GOS) are the number of card slots available on

PE shelves in the configured system.

Unused card slots for the Quoted

configuration large since modules are quoted at the Wired

quantity while PE cards are quoted at the Equipped quantity.

SUPERLOOPS is the number of loops that may be added to the existing

CE/NET modules.

4.8.3

PE Ports

This section displays the spare number of ports for each line card type

in the system at the Equipped and Wired levels.. REPORTS

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

Autoquote Userguide April 20,

5. AUXILIARY LOADING

Auxiliary Loading is used to combine the engineering of one or more

peripheral devices with

main system. Auxiliary Loading is required

since each system, peripheral or is a unique quote with a unique

quote number. As an example, one or more Remote 'Peripheral Equipment

(RPE) quotes can be Aux Loaded onto a main quote (Option or

71).

Note that Aux Loading DOES NOT COMBINE QUOTES together, but simply

allows the main to be configured with the necessary equipment to support

the peripheral/auxiliary systems.

Please reference the

Engineering/Provisioning Section on RPE and Meridian Mail for specifics

on these products.

The general procedure of how to use the Auxiliary Load function is as

follows:

1) Create, save and run reports for all auxiliary quotes.

Although it is necessary to print all reports, the Report

function must be initiated for each Auxiliary quote to calculate

the required information for inclusion into the Main quote. If

desired,

Reports for each Auxiliary quote may be printed in the

normal manner.

2) Create the Main quote (or Load the main quote if already

created).

Make

sure

all required software to support the

peripherals has been included on the Main quote. At the service

menu, enter

for Aux Load (refer to the Introduction/Overview

chapter for how to select the Aux Load command from the Service

Menu). At this point, the system will prompt you for:

PLEASE ENTER NUMBER OR END

Enter the quote number of the first Auxiliary quote.

Since more

than one Auxiliary quote can be combined with the Main quote, the

system will continue to prompt for Auxiliary quote numbers until

"END" is entered.

3) After "END" has been entered for step 2, the Service Menu will

be displayed. At this point,

Reports can be selected for the Main

site by entering "R".

The configuration calculated and printed

for this main quote will contain the necessary equipment required

to support the peripheral quotes Aux Loaded.. Auxiliary Quote

Summary and the Auxiliary Price- Summary Report (11) may

be printed to verify the Aux Load quote numbers.

The Main quote and any Auxiliary quotes remain separate quotes.

The Aux

Load function simply allows the main quote to be configured to support

auxiliary sites.

The list of Aux Load quotes are not saved with the

input data of the main quote. Therefore,

the process of entering the

auxiliary quotes as described in step 2 above should be completed each

time the main quote is loaded.

If any changes are made to the auxiliary quotes, the Reports option (R)

Autoquote Userguide April

must be selected for each auxiliary quote changed. By doing this, any

configuration changes are calculated and saved for inclusion in the Main

quote. Likewise,

the Main quote will have to be re-run Aux Loading the

auxiliaries with the above steps.

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

6. APPENDIX 1: INPUT FORM

QUOTATION REQUEST FORM

Autoquote Numbers:

TELENET: 214156

301-7764

Salesman Name:

Type of Quote: 1, 2 or 3

City/Labor-Code: End-User Industry Code:

End-User Company Name:

End-User Location:

System Cutover Date (MMDDYY):

Model/Generic Code: Release:

Report Options:

Price Summary

= Equipment List

Engineering Summary'

= Equipment Summary

= Input Listing

= RPE Summary

Equipment List

11 =

Auxiliary Load Summary

15 =

Discount Summary

20 =

Unused Capacity Summary

April 20, 1990

SOFTWARE OPTIONS

All software option inputs are require one entry. Enter 1 if software is

desired;

enter 0 to remove software.

Multi-Customer

CDR Link

Automatic Number Identification

Remote Peripheral Equipment

Centralized Attendant Service (CAS)/Main

Centralized Attendant Service (CAS)/Remote

110

Special Application Features

Attendant Overflow Position

Attendant Alternative Answer

Supervisory Console

Autovon

Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Multi-Tenant

105

Line Load Control

150

Directory Number Expansion

102

Features

103

Property Management System Interface (103)

Basic ESN Features

Advanced ESN Features

Network Automatic Route Selection (NARS)

Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP)

Network Authorization Codes

109

152

153

111

121

114

122

Auxiliary Processor Link

Meridian Mail

Meridian Link Server

Meridian Link ISDN/AP Direct Connect

Basic ACD (ACD-A)

Advanced ACD

ACD Timed Overflow

Enhanced ACD Overflow

ACD Reports (ACD-Cl)

ACD Load Management (ACD-C2)

ACD Link MAX Application

ACD Link ACD-D Application

ACD-D/MAX Report Enhancements

Network ACD

146 Primary Rate Access (PRA)

147 ISDN Signaling Link (ISL)

117

Call By Call Service

148

Advanced ISDN Features

149

Inter-Exchange Carrier

120

Network Message Center

Userguide April

PHONES, LINES, TRUNKS

Inputs (l-35 and 42-43) accept 3 entries: 1st entry is "equipped"

quantity, 2nd entry is "wired" quantity, and 3rd entry is busy hour traffic

(CCS) per port.

Inputs and 171 178 accept 2 entries:

1st entry is

quantity desired and 2nd entry is CCS per channel. All terminal inputs accept 1

entry; enter quantity desired.

14.

-‘-‘-

-I-‘-

-‘-‘-

-‘-I-

-‘-‘-

172

173

174

175

176

177

Digital Voice Only Lines

Digital Voice/Data Lines

ACD Digital Voice Only Lines

ACD Digital Voice/Data Lines

2500 Lines

500 Lines

Msg Waiting 2500 Lines

Waiting 500 Lines

OPX 2500 Lines (QPC192)

OPX 500 Lines (QPC192)

Console

CO Trunks

DID Trunks

WATS Trunks

FX Trunks

CCSA Trunks

DX Signaling Trunks (QPC71)

E&M TIE Trunks

Loop TIE Trunks

RAN Trunks

Paging Trunks

Dictation Trunks

RLT Remote Trunks

Sync/Async CPU Terminations (QPC432)

Modem Pool Lines (QPC723

Sync/Async Modem Pool Lines (QPC432

Data (QPC432)

Data Lines

MCDS Lines

MCDS High Speed Lines

CIM Lines (QPC432)

MCCS Lines

RILC Data Lines (QPC723)

DTI (QPC720)

PRI

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

Unity I

Unity II

Unity III

Quick Touch

Harmony Decorator

Unity

Waiting

Rapport/Msg Waiting

Companion

Unity Wall

Displayphone 220 W/Modem

100

Silhouette

Venture Headsets

Headset Adaptor

RILC Cable (Female)

64 RILC Cable (Male)

HSDM

86 RS232

V.35 Adapter (Male)

87 RS232

v.35 Adapter (Female)

(A0322496)

(A0322493)

ASIM

CIM

AIM

96 PC Interface Card (QPCS12)

206

207

w/Data

209

M3000 Touchphone

210

M3000 Touchphone w/Data

212

213

w/Data

217 M2317

218 M2317

w/Data

225

226

230

231

232

233

235

236

237

238

241

242

243

245

246

248

249

M2006

M2006 w/Data

M2008

M2008 w/Display

M2008 w/Data

M2008 w/Display Data

M2616 w/Display

M2616 w/Data

t42616 w/Display Data

w/Display

w/Data

w/Display Data

M2216 ACD-1

M2216 ACD-1 w/Data

M2216 ACD-2

M2216 ACD-2 w/Data

261

262

265

267

269

270

271

280

Autoquote Userguide April 20,

Key Module (22)

Key Module (44)

External Alerter

ACD Display

Power Supply Board Override

Transformer Override

Modular Set Power Override Enabler

Adjustable Stand for

Busy Lamp Field/Console Graphics Module

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

MISCELLANEOUS/MEMORY

DATA

These inputs are used to quote miscellaneous hardware and to provide information

necessary to calculate memory requirements. There is no common rule regarding

the number of entries a Miscellaneous/Memory input accepts. Some of the inputs

are prompted depending on previous selections. Changes to prompted entries may

be made during the manual input phase.

Power Indicator w/RECTIFIER)

Battery Backup (Hrs, Type)

Hard Disk Drive

Emergency Transfer Units (ETU)

Attendant Admin Overlay

Supervisory Console Functionality

(RPE Only)

Pedestal/Top Cap Provisioning Indicator

(Option 21 Only)

Rectifier/Power Cabinet (Options only)

14.

Data Modem

Dual NTP Storage Sleeve

Average Holding Time (AHT)

MCDS Cabinet

Number of Entries (No.,Length)

Number of Do-Not-Disturb Stations

Number of Dial Intercom Members

Number

of Group Call Groups

Number of ACD Queues

Number of ACD Agent Positions

Number of ACD Auto-Terminate Trunk Routes

Number of ACD Auto-Terminate Trunks

Number of ACD-CRTs

-‘-I-

-‘-‘-

-I-‘-

-‘-

CDR Usage Indicator(Outgoing,Incoming,Internal)

Code Restriction Routes

Speed Call Lists/l Digit

Speed Call Lists/2 Digit

Speed Call Lists/3 Digit

Number of Customers

Number

Customers equipping BARS

Number of Customers, with Multi-Tenant Service

Total Number of Tenants

Total Number of Tenant Stations

Number of ISDN Signaling Links

Drive Provisioning Override (Option 21 Only)

Additional P-Data (kwords)

Additional U-Data (kwords)

Number of Call Party Name Display Entries (No.,Length)

Number of Auth (No.,Length)

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

Additional Ports

Additional Ports for

Additional Conference Cards for

Additional ESDI Ports

Userguide April 20,

180

181

182

183

184

190

100

101

102

103

145

-'-'-

150 ,

151

152

153

155

156

169

Directory

Messaging PC Software

171

Meridian Manager Work Order System

172

Meridian Manager Traffic Reporting

Additional Network Group

(Option 71 Only)

Additional Superloops

Additional Non-blocking Superloops

Additional Network Loops

Additional Non-blocking Network Loops

Ringing Generator Provisioning Factor

Software Graduation Level Override (Enter Level)

Software Graduation Level Indicator

(O=Equipped,l=Wired)

Module Placement Indicator (Option 71 Only)

Cable Egress Indicator Kit)

Earthquake Bracing

TDR Unit

Meridian Mail

Voice Menus Calls)

Software

Access Development Software

Networking Ports

Meridian Secured Messaging

Autoquote Userguide April 20,

BASIC INFORMATION

All inputs accept one entry;

enter required number or indicator. Changes to

prompted entries may be made during the manual input phase.

Number of Trunk Groups

Percent Tie Line Traffic that is

Percent CCSA Traffic that is

1 if DID Traffic is

Amount of DISA Traffic (in CCS)

Number of Type 1 Signalling 4W Tie Trunks

Number of Templates

Number of Autovon Trunks

Percent DTI Traffic that is

Number of DTI/PRI Tie Lines

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

NONBLOCKING INPUTS

PHONES, LINES, TRUNKS

Non-blocking port inputs accept 3 entries: 1st entry is quantity,

2nd entry is "wired"

port.

101

-'-'-

102 NB

142 NB

143 NB

103 NB

104 NB

105 NB

106 NB

107 NB

108 NB

110 NB

111

112 NB

113 NB

114 NB

115 NB

116

-'-'-

117

-'-'- NB

118 NB

119 NB

121 NB

122 NB

124

127

134 NB

131 NB

132 NB

135 NB

quantity,

and 3rd entry is busy hour traffic (CCS) per

Digital Voice Only Lines

Digital Voice/Data Lines

2500 Lines

500 Lines

Msg Waiting 2500 Lines

Waiting 500 Lines

OPX 2500 Lines (QPC192)

OPX 500 Lines (QPC192)

Console

CO Trunks

DID Trunks

WATS Trunks

Trunks

CCSA Trunks

DX Trunks

E&M TIE Trunks

Loop TIE Trunks

RAN Trunks

Paging Trunks

Dictation Trunks

Remote

CPU Terminations (QPC432)

Modem Pool Lines (QPC723

Modem Pool Lines (QPC432

Data (QPC432)

Data Lines

MCDS Lines

MCDS High Speed Lines

CIM Lines (QPC432)

MCCS Lines

RILC

Data

Lines (QPC723)

Userguide April

NON BLOCKING MISCELLANEOUS/MEMORY DATA

All non-blocking Miscellaneous/Memory inputs except 123 accept 2 entries:

1st

entry is "equipped" quantity and 2nd entry is "wired" quantity.

123 NB Average Holding Time (AHT)

-‘-

Digital Line Card

Analog Line Card

NB Msg Waiting Line Card

NB OPX Line Card (QPC192)

NB Supervisory Console Line Card (QPC297)

Universal Trunk Card

E&M Trunk Card

NB DX Signalling Card (QPC71)

RLT Card

NB Intelligent PE Modules

NB PE Modules

NB Controller-4 Cards

Intelligent PE Ringing Generators

PE Ringing Generators

Sync/Async Data Line Card (QPC432)

Data Line Card

RILC (QPC723)

AUTOQUOTE USER GUIDE

MERIDIAN MAIL

northern

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

MERIDIAN MAIL

VOICE MESSAGING SYSTEMS

AUTOQUOTE USER GUIDE CHAPTER.

1. INTRODUCTION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION..................

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

MODELS......................................2

INPUTS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1 INPUT CLASSES..............

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2 INPUT CODES, DESCRIPTIONS, AND DEFAULT VALUES

...3

2.2.1 Software Options .....................................

2.2.2 Ports/Services Usage

.................................

2.2.3 System Options .......................................

2.3 SPECIAL NOTES.....................................8

ENGINEERING/PROVISIONING

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1 OVERVIEW.................

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2 SOFTWARE OPTIONS.................................10

3.3 VOICE PROCESSOR PORT 0

3.3.1 AQ Engineering ......................................

Traffic Table

.............................

3.3.1.1.1 Voice Processor Ports Traffic Table.......1 2

3.3.1.2

Call

Overhead

.............................

Voice Messaging Ports

..................... ..14

Voice Menus Ports

...........................

3.3.1.5 Admin Plus Ports

............................

3.3.2 Override Inputs .....................................

3.4 DISK STORAGE 5

3.4.1 AQ Engineering ......................................

3.4.2 Override Input ......................................

3.5 HARDWARE/SOFTWARE 5

3.5.1 Meridian Mail Modular Option

3.5.2 Meridian Mail X-Cabinet

............................. 16

Meridian Mail Option

..........................

3.5.4 Meridian Mail Option (Cantilever) ................. ..17

3.5.5 Meridian

Mail

Option (Center)

..................... ..17

3.6 POWER VALUES.....................................1 9

3.6.1

System Load Amps ..................................

3.6.2 AC System Power Watts

.............................

3.6.3 Heat Dissipation BTU

..............................

Userguide April 20, 1990

3.7 MERIDIAN 1 EQUIPMENT PROVISIONING................2 0

3.7.1 ROM 0

3.7.2 ESDI Card...........................................2 0

3.7.3 Other Equipment

.....................................

3.8 MERIDIAN 1 IMPACT................................2 1

3.8.1

3.8.1.1 Program Store. ..............................

3.8.1.2 Protected Data/Unprotected Data.............2

3.8.1.3 Protected Data* ............................... 22

3.8.1.4 Unprotected Data

........................... 22

3.8.2

Real Time

...........................................

3.8.3

Network Cards

.......................................

3.8.4

Traffic ..............................................

3.8.5

Meridian Mail Integration Considerations............2 3

3.8.5.1 Meridian Mail Modular Option................2 4

3.8.5.2 Meridian Mail X-Cabinet.....................2 4

3.8.5.3 Meridian Mail Option..................2 4

3.8.5.4 Meridian Mail Shelf Option..................2 4

4. REPORTS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1 Report 1 Price Summary..

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...26

4.2 Report 4 Engineering Summary....................2 7

4.2.1 Voice Messaging Usage

...............................

4.2.2

Dedicated Voice Port Services.......................2 8

4.2.3 Voice Storage

.......................................

4.3 Report 6 Input Listing..........................30

4.4 Report 9 Equipment List........................31

4.5 Report 17 Circuit Switch Impact................32

4.6 Report 21 Power Summary........................34

5. APPENDIX

INPUT FORM

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Userguide April

INTRODUCTION

This chapter of the Meridian 1 Communication Systems Autoquote User

Guide provides information on quoting the Meridian Mail Modular Option,

the Meridian Mail X-Cabinet,

the Meridian

Mail

Option tier, the

Meridian Mail Option shelf. It includes the following sections:

Section 1: Introduction

Section 2: Inputs

Section 3:

Engineering/Provisioning

Section 4:. Reports

The mechanics of using Autoquote are not included in this product

chapter.

Refer to the Introduction and Overview chapter for detailed

information on how to use the Autoquote

System.

1.1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Meridian

Mail is a

dedicated voice services peripheral device which is

functionally integrated with the Meridian 1.

This system can be integrated with the MS, RT, LE, N, NT, XL,

XN, XT, and

all

of the Meridian 1 products. The other versions of the

product are the Meridian Mail Option and the Meridian Mail Option

(for LE, N, NT, XL, XN, and XT).

All of these Meridian Mail versions interface to the Meridian Circuit

Switch via an Enhanced Serial Data Interface (ESDI) port and network

loops (QPC414).

The Option and Shelf Option will support up to 20

ports and 114 hours of voice storage. The Modular Option and X-Cabinet

will support up to 48 ports and 240 hours of storage.

. . l

Autoquote Userguide April 20,

1.2 VALID MODELS

There are two valid Meridian Mail Autoquote models.

Model

Generic

Code Release

Meridian Mail

On-line Input Form

MMF

Neither of the models has an associated release; i.e. enter RETURN at

the release prompt.

Meridian Mail may be ways with the "MM" model. The first way

is to quote the Meridian Mail system as merchandise. The second way is

to quote it along with a Meridian 1 system using the "AUX LOAD"

function.

(See the Meridian 1 Product Chapter in this User Guide for

more information on using the LOAD" function in conjunction with

the generic.)

** All of the versions of the product may be "AUX LOADED" onto a

Meridian 1 configuration except the center mount Meridian Mail Option.

INPUTS

This section covers all inputs associated with the Meridian Mail

generic.

The following subsections are contained within this section:

Input Classes

Input Codes,

Descriptions,

and Default Values

Notes

As with all Autoquote models, data input consists of responses to

prompted entries and manual inputs associated with specific input codes.

A blank input form is included in the back of this chapter.

It is

recommended that copies be used

for

preparing quotations. An on-line

input form is also available on the Autoquote system (Generic Code

) .

2.1 INPUT CLASSES

Meridian Mail inputs

are

organized into three input classes:

Software Options

Ports/Services Usage

System Options

The Autoquote will prompt for each input class in the order listed above

when setting up a new quote. The letter designation is used to make

selections for that input class from the Input Menu.

Userguide April 20, 1990

2.2 INPUT CODES, DESCRIPTIONS, AND DEFAULT VALUES

The following pages contain information on each Meridian Mail input:

codes, descriptions, and default values where appropriate.

2.2.1 Software Options

All Software Option inputs one entry. Enter one (1) if the

software option is desired;

enter zero (0) to

remove

a software

option.

Meridian Mail

This input is used to provision the base Meridian Mail

Software.

This input will automatically be selected by

if necessary.

Autoquote will also select the

appropriate Meridian Mail options depending on the number of

voice processor ports and hours of storage quoted.

2 Voice Menus Options

This will provision Meridian Mail voice menus software.

Meridian Mail Networking

This input provisions Meridian Mail Networking software.

50 Meridian Mail Admin Plus

This input provisions Meridian

Mail

Admin Plus software.

51 Access Development Software

This input provisions Access Development software. Meridian

Mail Admin Plus (input 50) is

prerequisite for this

option.

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

2.2.2 Ports/Services Usage

There is no common rule regarding the number of entries a Ports/Services

Usage input may accept.

Refer to the input sheet or the information

provided below for the number of entries each input accepts..

1 Voice Messaging Users

This input is used to determine the appropriate'number of

voice processor ports and hours of storage needed on the

system based on usage. It accepts three entries.

o Number of Registered Users

If no entry is made,

this input will default to 1.

o Seconds of Usage during the Busy Hour

Default is 39 seconds.

o Voice Storage in minutes for each user

Default is 1.6 minutes.

5 Networking Ports

Enter the number of networking ports desired.

10 Voice Menus

This input accepts two entries.

Number of Menus

Maximum allowed is 1000. If no entry is made, this

input will be set to the number of separate Voice Menu

groups specified via Voice Menu Usage inputs 11-14.

o Hours of Storage for all Voice Menus

Maximum allowed is 48 hours (24 hours for the

and Shelf Options); the default is 1 hour.

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

11 Voice Menu Usage

12 Menu Usage

13 Voice Menu Usage

14 Voice Menu Usage

These inputs accept two entries, and are used to specify

different amounts of traffic for the different menus used in

the system.

o Number of Voice Menu Calls during the Busy Hour

o Average Holding Time per Menu Call in Seconds

The default is 25 seconds. Multiple inputs are

available so that different menu groups with varying

usage characteristics can easily be entered. If no

usage is entered and Voice Menu software is selected,

input 11 will default to 1 for the first 25

for the second value.

20 Voice Menu Usage Indicator

Enter one (1) if the Voice Menu traffic is dedicated, i.e.

ports for menu use will not be shared with ports used for

Voice Messaging. Making an entry in the Voice Menu Ports

override input (Systems Option input 53) also results in

dedicated menu ports.

Dedicating Voice Menu ports will generally result in more

voice processor ports being provisioned on a system because

of a loss in traffic carrying efficiency.

21 Networking Usage Indicator

Enter one (1) if the Networking traffic is dedicated, i.e.

ports for networking use will not be shared with ports used

for normal Voice Messaging.

Dedicating Networking ports will generally result in more

voice processor ports being provisioned on a system because

of a loss in traffic carrying efficiency.

Admin Plus Usage

(Access)

Meridian Mail Admin Plus (Software input 50) is a

prerequisite

for

this application.. This input accepts two

entries.

o Number of Admin Plus Access Ports required

o Storage in Hours for Admin Plus applications

Default is 1 hour.

Userguide April 20,

51 Meridian

Mail PC Users (Access)

* Meridian Mail Admin Plus (Software input 50) is a

prerequisite for this application. This input accepts three

entries.

o Number of Registered Users

o Seconds of Usage during the Busy Hour

Default is 80 seconds.

o Voice Storage in Minutes for each User

Default is 4 minutes.

2.2.3 System Options

All inputs accept 1 entry; enter desired number or indicator. The system

will default to the Meridian Mail Modular Option (Input 47) when setting

up a new quote.

2 Distribution Lists

Spoken Names

Enter the desired number of each.

Both of these inputs,

along with the number of registered users, will impact voice

storage capacity.

5 Modular Option Power

This input will default to- zero (0); for AC power. If DC

power is required,

enter a one (1) for this input.

21 Model Indicator

This input will be prompted when running a new quote.

Valid entries are:

1 LE (SINGLE CPU)

2 LE (DUAL CPU)

3 N (SINGLE CPU)

4 N (DUAL CPU)

6 XN (w/MEMORY ENHANCEMENT)

7 XN (w/out MEMORY ENHANCEMENT)>

10 ST

11 MS

12 Options

Userguide April 20, 1990

This input indicates what type of Circuit Switch the

Meridian Mail system will be interfacing. It is used to

determine if a ROM card must be included in the Meridian

Mail and to calculate Circuit Switch

memory

and real

time impact of the Meridian Mail system.

47 Meridian Mail Modular Option Indicator (1 Modular Option)

48 Meridian

Mail

X-Cabinet Indicator (1 X-Cabinet)

Enter a one (1) to indicate the option desired. When

setting up a new quote,

the

system

will default to the

Meridian Mail Modular Option.

49 Meridian Mail Option Indicator

This input is used to the other Meridian Mail Options.

Valid entries

are:

= Meridian Mail Option (Tier)

= Meridian Mail Shelf Option (Cantilever Mount)

3 Meridian Mail Shelf Option (Center Mount)

The cantilever mount version of the Meridian

Mail

Option is

*used for SL-1 systems utilizing the front/rear entry PE

cabinets.

The center mount version of the Meridian Mail

Option is used for SL-1

systems

utilizing the front entry

only PE cabinets.

50 System Purchase Indicator

Enter 1 if the Meridian Mail system is not purchased with a

Meridian 1 system, i.e.

the quote is for a merchandise

purchase.

No entry or an entry of zero (0) will indicate

that this Meridian Mail configuration is part of a system

purchase.

51 Voice Messaging Ports (Optional Override)

This input allows the user to specify the number of voice

processor ports for Voice Messaging; this value overrides

requirements based on

usage

inputs. This entry includes

shared services (voice menus) when appropriate.

The maximum

48.

52 Hours

Voice Storage (Optional Override)-

This input allows the user to specify the amount of total

voice

storage;

this value overrides requirements calculated

based on the usage inputs (Ports/Services Usage Inputs).

The

maximum is 240.

Userguide April 20,

53 Voice Menu Ports Dedicated (Optional Override)

This input allows the user to specify the number of voice

processor ports dedicated to all Meridian

Mail

Admin Plus

(Access) applications;

this value overrides requirements

based on usage inputs.

The maximum 48.

54 Plus Access Ports (Optional Override)-

This input allows the user to specify the number of voice

processor ports dedicated to all Meridian Mail Access

Gateway applications;

this value overrides requirements

based on the usage inputs. The maximum is 48.

2.3 SPECIAL NOTES

To run a simple Voice Messaging quote where the number of ports and

amount of voice storage required are known, the following inputs are all

that have to be entered:

Software Options:

Meridian

Mail

Ports/Services Usage:

Voice Messaging Users

x number of registered voice messaging users.

Let the other two values default.

System Options:

SL-1 Model Indicator

appropriate SL-1 indicator (1-12)

51/a

Voice Messaging Ports (Optional Override)

a required ports

52/b Hours of Voice Messaging Storage (Opt.Override)

required hours of voice storage.

3. ENGINEERING/PROVISIONING

This section contains the engineering/provisioning rules used to configure the

Meridian Mail Modular Option, Meridian Mail X-Cabinet, and Meridian Mail Shelf

Options.

As the engineering rules for these are

very

similar, they will only be

distinguished when different. The following subsections are contained within

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

this section.

Overview

Software Options

Voice Processor Port Requirements

Disk Storage Requirements

Hardware/Software provisioning

Power Values

Meridian 1 Equipment Provisioning

Meridian 1 Impact

3.1 OVERVIEW

A Meridian Mail configuration generated by is based upon

engineering rules in effect as of the run date but prior to submission of an

order.

Although engineering rules may change in the future, will honor the

quoted functionality for 60 days from the run date.

However, pricing is

governed solely by the CPE Distributorship Agreement between each

distributor and

NTI,

and the Meridian One Communication Systems Pricing Manual

in effect on the date accepts the order.

The price quoted by the Autoquote applies only to the items of equipment and

software listed in the Equipment List report. This report contains a line entry

for each item of equipment and software that is quoted. No item is priced into

the quote unless it is detailed in this report. Pricing adjustments are

required if there are any additions or deletions to this list:

The contents of any quote depends solely on the inputs and the engineering

rules.

The actual configuration depends

particular applications and

finalized system engineering which may require manual additions or deletions. In

this section, inputs will be used in some of the equations. The input class

letter designation and code number will be used to represent specific inputs.

The three input

classes are:

Class Designation

Software Options

Ports/Services Usage

System Options

For example:

refers to Ports/Services Usage input land indicates the

number

of registered Voice Messaging users,

indicates the number of seconds of usage for each user

during the

busy

hour, and

indicates the number of minutes of voice storage

for

each

user.

Unless otherwise noted, the answers to all

calculations used in this subsection are rounded to the

next whole number.

Autoguote Userguide April 20, 1990

3.2 SOFTWARE OPTIONS

The current release of Meridian Mail can support up to 48 voice processor ports

and 240 hours of voice storage. The base software provisioned on a quote

depends on the base system equipped.

The Meridian Mail Modular Option, with the exception-of the 4 port/5 hour

package, uses Meridian Base Software

The 4 port,

5 hour system

package uses the 5 Hour Base Software

For the Meridian Mail Option, Meridian Mail Shelf Option, and the Meridian

Mail X-Cabinet,

use the following to determine which software will

provisioned.

Hours of Storage

Software

<= 5

Meridian Mail Base Software (52601)

Meridian Mail Base Software

(52600)

X-Cabinet Meridian Mail Release 5 Software (63051)

Optional Meridian Mail software is provisioned only when requested.

Meridian Mail Expanded Storage Software will be provisioned if storage

requirements determine it's need.

The

following is a table of basic information about the various Meridian Mail

Modular Option packages.

Base

Hrs Hrs

Max Base Base

Expansion

Ports Hours

Exp S/W Exp Assy

Hours Package Software

Assembly

------------------------------------------------------------------------

4-12

SW7001

4-20

24 26

4-20

24 26

4-20 36 54 a4 114 SW7000

24-48 45 90 90 114 SW7000

120 240 SW7000

3.3 VOICE PROCESSOR PORT REQUIREMENTS

Meridian Mail is engineered primarily on the number of voice processor ports

equipped.

Voice processor ports are based on the number of simultaneously

active voice messaging users, voice menus, Meridian Mail PC users-and Access

Gateway usage.

This section describes how the

required

amount of voice

processor ports are determined and section 3.5, Hardware/Software Provisioning,

explains which packages will be provisioned.

There are two ways the number of voice processor ports are determined:

(1) utilizing Autoquote engineering rules or,

(2) via the override input.

Userguide April 20, 1990

3.3.1 AQ Engineering

Autoquote engineering can be used to determine the number of voice processor

ports required for any

all parts of a Meridian Mail system. The Engineering

rules make use of Traffic Tables and Call Overhead to determine the number of

voice processor ports needed for the system.

3.3.1.1 Traffic Table

When traffic is the

usage

parameter, a delay traffic table is used to

determine the number of required voice processor ports. The standard

grade of service is the probability that the delay-will be greater than

one-sixth the

average

holding time is equal to 5%. This delay

characteristic can

expressed as follows:

Probability of

Delay

Holding Time/ 6 = 6%

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

If the average holding time per voice messaging call is 60 seconds, only

one in 20 calls (5%) will be delayed longer than 10 seconds.

See the

traffic table below for the relationship between traffic and voice

processor ports using this grade of service.

3.3.1.1.1 Voice Processor Ports Traffic Table

Traffic

103

104

130

131

157

158

185

186

214

215

243

244

273

274

303

304

334

335

365

366

396

397

427

428

458

459

490

491

522

523

554

555

586

587

619

620

651

652

684

653

716

717

749

750

782

783

815

816

848

849

881

882

915

3.3.1.2 Call

Overhead

Ports

27.

Traffic Ports

916

948

949

981 34

982

1015

35 .

1016

1048 36

1049

1082

1083

1115 38

1116

1149 39

1149

1183 40

1184

1217 41

1218

1251

1252

1284

43 .

1285

1318 44

1319

1352 45

1353

1386 46

1387

1420

1421

1455 48

1456

1489 49

1490

1523 50

1524

1557

1558

1591

1592

1626

1627

1660

1661

1694

1695

1729 56

1730

1763

1764

1797

1798

1832

1833

1866 60

1867

1901 61

1902

1935

1936

1970

1971

2004 64

The total traffic or usage of a Meridian Mail system is made of many

different elements. The call overhead elements

for

Voice Messaging

include: listening to greetings,

logging in to retrieve messages, and

listening to messages (sometimes repeatedly).

Autoguote Userguide April 20, 1990

There are no overhead elements for Voice Menus since listening to the

system

messages and/or prompts is the service. Overhead elements for

Meridian Mail PC calls will generally be similar to Voice Messaging calls,

therefore,

overhead for those calls are assumed to be the same as

for

Voice Messaging.

Specific overhead assumptions used for Voice

Messaging/Meridian Mail PC in Autoguote are:

Overhead per message left: 15 seconds

Overhead per

20 seconds

Messages received per 2

Average number of replays:

Adjusted message length must be determined to properly calculate Voice

Messaging traffic.

The following equations are used to determine adjusted

message length using the variable a = average message length:

Time

to leave

1 message:

a + 15 seconds overhead

Overhead per message

left:

20 overhead/2 messages per

= 10 seconds

Average time to retrieve

1 message:

Time to listen to messages * 5% replay factor + Overhead/message

= + 10 seconds

Adjusted message

length:

Time to leave message + Time to retrieve 1 message

= (a + 15) + + 10)

+ 25

The above formula allows us to derive the default values for Voice

Messaging users based on the following assumptions:

Messages per day:

Days of storage:

Average length of message: 32 seconds

Busy Hour traffic: 14

The following equations are determine the default values:

Usage

(seconds)

3 messages x x 32 seconds per message)

+ 25 overhead] x 14 % busy hour traffic

39 seconds of usage

Storage (minutes)

3 messages x 32 seconds per message

1.6 minutes

These values are the usage defaults for Voice Messaging users in Autoquote

Pl(min)).

Overhead and usage assumptions can be modified to fit any application for

Voice Messaging and/or Meridian Mail PC users. The resulting busy hour

usage

and storage requirements can be entered into the

Pl(min)),

to accurately determine the number of voice processor ports

required to support those usage assumptions.

Userguide April 20,

3.3.1.3 Voice Messaging Ports

The busy hour Voice Messaging

traffic

(in

CCS) is determined by the

following equation:

x 100

This traffic is taken to Section 3.3.1.1.1, Voice

Processor

Ports Traffic

Table, to determine the number of required voice processor ports for Voice

Messaging.

When Voice Menu shared, the sum of the voice

messaging and voice menus traffic values is taken to the table to

determine required voice processor ports. The maximum number of voice

processor ports supported on Meridian Mail is 48 for the Modular or X-,

Cabinet Options,

and 20 for the and Shelf Options.

3.3.1.4 Voice Menus

Ports

The busy hour Voice Menu traffic (CCS) is determined summing all four of

the voice menu usage inputs by the following equation:

+ x + + x

100

This traffic is taken to Table 3.1 to determine the number of required

voice processor ports for Menus; this number cannot-be greater than

48 for the Modular

X-Cabinet Options, and 20 for the and Shelf

Options.

When Voice Menu ports are dedicated, the number yielded by the

traffic table is the number of ports provisioned. When Voice Menu usage

is shared,

the traffic is added to the Voice Messaging traffic (refer

Section 3.3.1.3, Voice Messaging Ports).

3.3.1.5 Admin Plus Ports

Admim Plus (Access)

usage

is comprised-of Meridian Mail PC and other Admin

Plus applications.

Voice processor ports for other Access applications

are entered directly by the user via Input The sum of the

Meridian Mail PC ports and the number input for other applications is the

total voice processor ports for Admin Plus (Access).

Port requirements for Meridian Mail PC users is determined utilizing

traffic engineering. The busy hour Meridian

Mail

PC traffic (CCS) is

determined by the following equation:

x 100

This traffic is taken to Section 3.3.1.1.1, Voice Processor Ports Traffic

Table, to determine the number of required voice processor ports

for

Meridian Mail PC users; this number cannot be greater than 48 for the

Modular or X-Cabinet Options, and 20 for the and Shelf Options.

Userguide April 20,

3.3.2 Override Inputs

System Options inputs 51,

53, and 54 are used to override AQ engineering of

voice processor ports. In any case,

a non-zero input will result in that number

of ports being provisioned for a particular service, and Autoquote engineering

for that service will be ignored.

Voice Messaging Ports'

Voice Menu Ports Dedicated

Admin Plus Ports

The sum of these entries cannot be greater than the maximum number of voice

processor ports supported by the system 48 for the and X-Cabinet

Options,

and 20 for the and Shelf Options.

3.4 DISK STORAGE REQUIREMENTS

The amount of disk storage provisioned by Autoquote depends first on the voice

storage requirements,

and second on the Meridian Mail system packages. Section

3.5, Hardware/Software Provisioning, lists the available packages.

There are two ways the disk storage requirements are determined:

(1) utilizing Autoquote engineering or,

(2) via the override input.

3.4.1 AQ Engineering

Disk storage requirements are expressed in hours of voice storage.

The voice storage requirement is the sum of all the storage elements determined

using the following equations:

Voice Messaging:

Pl(#) x Pl(min) 60

Voice Menus:

Admin Plus (Access):

Meridian Mail PC:

x 60

If Voice Menu storage requirement is 6 minutes (0.1 hours) or less, there will

be no impact to total storage requirements.

3.4.2 Override Input

To manually override the number of hours of storage required, System Options

input 52 can be used.

A non-zero value entered for this input overrides

Autoquote engineering;

voice storage capacity is 240 hours for the Modular or

Cabinet Options, and 114 hours

for

the Option and Shelf Option.

3.5 HARDWARE/SOFTWARE PROVISIONING

Once the required amount of disk storage and number of voice processor ports are

determined, a Meridian Mail package and other required hardware and software are

matched to meet these requirements. The following subsections summarize the

hardware and software provisioned for different voice processor port/disk

storage

requirements.

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

3.5.1 Meridian

Mail

Modular Option

Ports

Hours

Hardware Description

Software

155 MB Disk Drive

4 Port/5 Hour Modular

300 MB Disk Drive (Standard)

4 Hour Modular

13-20 26

16-20 Port Expansion

l-36

24 Port/45 Hour Modular

37-48 60

36-40 Port Expansion

600 MB Drive (Large)

l-12 36

4 Port/36 Hour Modular

13-20 84

16-20 Port Expansion

1-36 120

24 Hour Modular

37-48 180

36-40 Port Expansion

3.5.2 Meridian

Mail

X-Cabinet

Ports Hours

Hardware Description

Software

1-12

4 Hour Pkg

13-16 26 12-16 Port Exp Assy (Std) 63051

Hrs

Exp S/W

63050 24

l-12 36

4 Port/36 Hour Pkg

13-16 84 12-16 Port Exp Assy (Lg) 63050 63051

114

l-20 26

20 Port/26 Hour Pkg

21-32 45 20-24 Port Exp Assy (Std)

63050

63051 54

l-20 84

20 Port/84 Hour Pkg

21-32 120 20-24 Port Exp Assy (Lg)

63050 63051 114

180

l-36

36 Port145 Hour Pkg

37-44 60 36-40 Port Exp Assy (Std) 63050 63051 90

120

l-36 120

36 Hour Pkg

37-44 180 36-40 Port Exp Assy (Lg)

63050 63051 180

240

l-48 60

48 Port/60 Hour Pkg

63050 63051 120

l-48 180

48 Port/l80 Hour Pkg

63050 63051

240

Hrs

Exp S/W

SW7001 SW7002

SW7000 SW7003 24

SW7000 SW7003 90

120

SW7000 SW7003

114

SW7000 SW7003 180

240

Autoquote April 20,

3.5.3 Meridian Mail Option

Ports Hours Hardware Description

4 Port/5 Hour Pkg

4 Hour Pkg

13-20 26

16-20 Port Exp Assy (Std)

l-12 36

4 Port/36 Hour Pkg

13-20 84

16-20 Port Exp Assy (Lg)

l-20 26

16 Port/26 Hour Pkg

16 Port/84 Hour Pkg

Meridian Mail Option (Cantilever)

Ports Hours Hardware Description

l-12

4 Port/5 Hour Pkg

l-12 11

4 Hour Pkg

13-20 26

16-20 Port Exp (Std)

Assy

l-12 36

4 Port/36 Hour Pkg

16-20 Port

Exp Assy (Lg)

'l-20 26

16 Port/26 Hour

Pkg

l-20 84

16 Port/84 Hour Pkg

3.5.5 Meridian Mail Option (Center)

Ports Hours

Hardware Description

l-12

4 Port/5 Hour Pkg

l-12

4 Hour Pkg

13-20 26

16-20 Port

Exp Assy (Std)

l-12 36

4 Port/36 Hour Pkg

13-20 84

16-20 Port

Exp Assy (Lg)

l-20 26

Port/26 Hour Pkg

l-20 84

16 Port/84 Hour Pkg

1990

Software

52601 52602

Hrs

Exp S/w

52600 52603 24

52600 52603

114

52600 52603

52600 52603 114

Software

52600

Hrs

Exp S/W

52602

52600 52603 24

52600 52603

114

52600 52603

52600 52603 114

Software

52600 52602

Hrs

Exp S/W

52600

52603 24

52603

52600 52603

114

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

telemanuals.com

Userguide April 20, 1990

3.6 POWER VALUES

The Meridian Mail power values used to engineer power, air

conditioning,

rectifier and battery requirements are determined as shown in the

following sections.

3.6.1 System Load Amps

The draw in amperage on the Meridian 1 by the different Meridian Mail

systems are given in the following table:

Option

Modular Option AC

Modular Option DC

X-Cabinet (1 node) AC

X-Cabinet (2 node) AC

X-Cabinet (4 node) AC

X-Cabinet (5 node) AC

X-Cabinet (1 node) DC

X-Cabinet (2 node) DC

X-Cabinet (4 node) DC

X-Cabinet node) DC

Option

Amps

7.7 per module

1.7 per

module

1.2

2.0

3.8

5.0

8.0

15.0

30.0

37.5

5.0

The Meridian Mail Shelf Options draw the same number of Amps as two PE

shelves.

Please see the Meridian 1 Product Chapter for exact numbers.

3.6.2 AC

System

Power Watts

The amount of power in Watts by the Meridian

Mail

options are given in

the table below:

Option

Modular Option (AC/DC)

X-Cabinet (1 node) AC

X-Cabinet (2 node) AC

X-Cabinet (4 node) AC

X-Cabinet (5 node) AC

X-Cabinet (1 node) DC

X-Cabinet (2 node) DC

X-Cabinet (4 node) DC

X-Cabinet (5 node) DC

Option

Watts

400 per module

276

460

874

416

780

1560

1950

500 --

The Meridian Mail Shelf Options require two PE shelf positions.

The

number of Watts for the supporting Circuit Switch Equipment (CSE) is

determined by the number of modules/cabinets equipped. Please see the

Meridian 1 product chapter

for

exact calculations.

3.6.3 Heat Dissipation BTU

Heat dissipation is a function of AC power. Heat dissipation may be

used to determine the air-conditioning load.

Userguide April 20, 1990

Heat dissipation (BTU/hr) is calculated as

follows:

3.415 x

System

Power(watts)

'One ton of air conditioning is required for every:

12,000

sq. ft. of equipment room area.

Other factors to consider:

Lights

Other equipment

People

3.7 MERIDIAN 1 EQUIPMENT PROVISIONING

Interfacing Meridian Mail to the Meridian 1 requires the following

supporting hardware:

3.7.1 ROM Card

In the following system types,

an enhanced ROM card must be added

to support the Command and

Status

Link (CSL):

SL-1 Type

ROM Card

---------------------------------------------

QPC662

QPC573

QPC571

(w/out memory enhancement)

(w/memory enhancement)

Any

system

that does not appear in the list does not require a ROM

card.

The proper card type and number are provisioned based on

System Options input 21 (Model Indicator).

3.7.2 ESDI Card

One Enhanced (ESDI) port is required for each Meridian Mail

system interfacing to the Meridian 1. The Meridian

Mail

Modular

Option uses the ESDI card. This card allows the Meridian

1 CPU a path to talk to the Meridian

Mail

system the Command

and Status Link.

The ESDI card will be provisioned by way

the

Meridian Mail base hardware packages.

The ESDI card can be housed in any slot in the Meridian 1 that is

capable of supporting a normal Serial Data Interface (SDI) card.

. Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

3.7.3 Other Equipment

Two

components are required when provisioning the Meridian Mail

Shelf Option in a PE cabinet:

a Power Distribution Unit and a

Cooling Unit.

The actual equipment provisioned depends on type

mount used, cantilever versus center mount.

Cantilever:

Center:

QBL21 Power Distribution Unit

Cooling Unit

Power Distribution Unit

Cooling Unit

These items are not required if the Meridian Mail Shelf Option is

to be housed in the QCA55 SL-1 XT CE Cabinet in the place of a

network group shelf.

Refer to the Meridian 1 Product Chapter for

more information on CE shelf and PE shelf housing within

and XT systems.

3.8 MERIDIAN 1 IMPACT

Several

areas

of impact to the circuit switch must be addressed: memory,

real time, network cards, ports, and traffic.

3.8.1 Memory

Meridian 1 memory is divided into three segments: Program Store,

Protected Data (PDATA) and Unprotected Data (UDATA).

Program Store

Impact is due to the required software:

Basic Message Center (SWOOOOA)

Auxiliary Processor Link

Link

Basic ACD Features

Meridian Mail Link

3.8.1.2 Protected Data/Unprotected Data

The ACD configuration used in Meridian Mail impacts both Protected

Data and Unprotected Data in the

same

manner-as existing Meridian

1 features:

Voice Processor Ports impacts ACD Agent memory

Meridian Mail configuration impacts ACD Queue

memory

Autoguote Userguide April 20, 1990

3.8.1.3 Protected Data:

Additional impact for Meridian Mail specific

items is

given below:

Voice Processor Port (TN) la.50 words

ESDI Port

23.00

words

Command and Status Link/Other

263.00

words

3.8.1.4 Unprotected Data:

Additional impact for Meridian Mail specific

items is

given below

in words of memory:

Voice Processor Port (TN) 15.25 words

Command and Status Link

367.00

words

3.8.2 Real Time

The number of calls to Meridian

Mail

per hour is used to calculate real

time impact.

The total calls per hour is the sum of the Voice Menu

calls and the non-Menu Meridian Mail calls. The number of Voice Menu

calls is determined using input usage in the following equation:

+ + +

The number of non-Menu calls per hour is the smaller of the following

values:

Number of non-Menu ports x

60 or,

Number of registered Voice Messaging users +

2 x

(Number

of Meridian

Mail

PC Users)

The first equation assumes that one call per non-Menu port per minute

during the busy hour is used, and the second assumes that one call per

registered Voice Messaging

user

and two calls per registered Meridian

Mail PC user during the busy hour.

Using the smaller number ensures the impact of small Meridian Mail

systems is not overestimated.

The actual number of CPU seconds used for Meridian Mail is --

calculated as follows:

Number of Meridian

Mail Calls

per

Hour

ART

where,

ART Average Real Time per VM

Call.

Average Real Time is typically expressed in milliseconds ART

depends on the Meridian 1

system

type.

Userguide April 20,

System ART (ms)

LE 1682

ST/N 1401

21 1401

XL 364

XN 340

221

If the total real time impact of Meridian Mail exceeds 1050 seconds

(50% of 2100 CPU seconds capacity),

an error message display and

the quotation process will stop.

3.8.3 Network Cards

Meridian Mail interfaces to the Meridian 1 switching matrix directly

through a network loop (QPC414).

The number of network loops needed to support the Meridian Mail system

depends on the number of Meridian mail nodes. Each node can house up to

12 voice processor ports.

A single dedicated network loop can support

up to 2 Meridian Mail nodes,

and two dedicated network loops can support

up to 5 nodes.

The Meridian Mail Modular Option packages contain network cards; 1

for each of the 4 port base packages and 2 for the 24

port base packages.

Refer

the Meridian 1 Product Chapter for more information on Common

Equipment cards and network loops.

3.8.4 Traffic

Autoquote assumes 28 CCS will be added to the total system busy hour

traffic for each voice processor port provisioned. For most

systems,

this traffic will be added to total Grade of Service traffic.

For

Meridian 1

systems

provisioned as totally non-blocking, the number of

voice processor ports will be added to the total non-blocking ports. In

either case,

network provisioning may or may not be impacted by the

Meridian Mail requirements depending on the size of the Meridian Mail

system and the amount of traffic on the switch.

Refer to the Meridian 1 Product Chapter for

infurmation on network

loops and traffic engineering.

3.8.5 Meridian

Mail

Integration Considerations

Differences of integration with the Meridian 1 between the various

Meridian Mail Options are covered

the following subsections.

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

3.8.5.1 Meridian Mail Modular Option

The Meridian Mail Modular Option resembles any other Meridian 1 module.

The number of modules provisioned depends on the size of the system.

The following table summarizes the module provisioning:

Ports Modules

13-20

21-36

37-48

The Meridian Mail Modular Option requires at least one pedestal and top

cap, and side

covers

if it is to be used as a stand alone system-.‘

When integrated with a Meridian 1 System 21, 61, or 71, the AUX LOAD

function will determine the appropriate number of pedestals, top caps,

side

covers,

and spacer kits necessary.

Please refer to the Meridian 1

Product Chapter in this User Guide for more information on using the

"AUX LOAD"

function in conjunction with the "MM" generic.

3.8.5.2 Meridian Mail X-Cabinet

The Meridian Mail X-Cabinet is a stand-alone cabinet that

includes all necessary power equipment to function.

The 36 port packages contain an expansion assembly that grows

the system to

second tier. The 48 port packages include two expansion

assemblies that grow the system into three total

tiers.

3.8.5.3 Meridian Mail Option

The Meridian Mail Option tier includes a full tier with one half

dedicated to the Meridian Mail portion and the other half as a

Peripheral Equipment (PE) shelf backplane. The PE shelf backplane can

be equipped with a power card and a QPC659 Dual Loop Buffer card

to make it a functional PE shelf. The Option tier can be

provisioned as any tier on any cabinet except for the first tier.

The

Option tier does not have a base which allows it to sit directly on the

floor;

it requires a base tier beneath it.

3.8.5.4 Meridian Mail Shelf Option

The Meridian Mail Option shelf requires cooling and power. When

provisioned in a PE cabinet, a power distribution unit and cooling unit

must be provided (refer to

Section

3.7.3, Other Equipment). With these

two units,

the Meridian

Mail

Option requires two vertical PE shelf

positions.

The Meridian Mail Option

may

be housed in an network shelf

position if less than six network shelves are housed in the

CE cabinet.

Autoquote Ueerguide April 20, 1990

4. REPORTS

This section provides information on most reports

available

with the

Meridian Mail quotation model. An explanation and example of each

report is included.

Price Summary

Engineering Summary

Input Listing

Equipment List

Circuit Switch Impact

21 Power Summary

A sample of report 15 Discount Summary will not appear in the User

Guide;

this report subtotals price by discount categories. Only

authorized users have access to any discounting information.

The header report (Report 9999) will print out

automatically

when

reports are requested;

this report may also be requested-like any other

report.

Within each subsection there are explanations of the contents of the

report being discussed.

The mechanics of using Autoquote are not included in this product

chapter.

Refer to the Introduction and Overview chapter for detailed

information on how to use the Autoquote system.

Autoguote Userguide April 20, 1990

4.1 Report 1 Price Summary

This report subtotals

Commercial

List Price (CLP) by product group. CLP

subtotals

are

for quoted

items

listed in Report 9 Equipment List.

SUMMARY PRICE ---

QUOTE: 00000002

SL-1 EQUIPMENT

5785.00

MERIDIAN MAIL HARDWARE

108800.00

MERIDIAN MAIL SOFTWARE

9500.00

DOCUMENTATION

459.00

$ 124544.00

FOR USE ONLY BY PERSONNEL AUTHORIZED BY NTI. NOT FOR PUBLIC DISCLOSURE.

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

4.2 Report 4 Engineering Summary

This report is divided into three parts: Voice Messaging Usage,

Dedicated Voice Port Services,

and Voice Storage each part will be

discussed separately.

4.2.1 Voice Messaging

Usage

REGISTERED USERS refers to the number of individuals which have access

to the voice mail system.

INPUT TRAFFIC (CCS) refers to the total Voice Messaging traffic on

the system based on inputs.

REQUIRED PORTS refers to the number of Voice Messaging ports required to

support the system based on inputs. (This may include Menu traffic if

the

user

indicates shared usage.)

DESIRED VU PORTS PROVISIONED is the number of Voice Messaging ports

provisioned based on the override input (Systems Option input 51).

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

4.2.2 Dedicated Voice Port

Services

VOICE MENUS is the total number of Voice Menus supported on the system.

(These ports will appear under Voice Messaging Usage, above, if service

is shared.)

VOICE MENU TRAFFIC (CCS) is the total menu traffic on the

system

based

on inputs.

(This line will appear under Voice Messaging Usage if

service is shared.)

REQUIRED PORTS is the number of dedicated voice processor ports required

to support the

system

traffic.

DESIRED VOICE MENU PORTS PROVISIONED is the number

menu voice

processor ports provisioned based on the override input (Systems Option

input 53).

MERIDIAN MAIL PC TRAFFIC (CCS) is the Meridian Mail PC voice

messaging traffic offered to the

system

based on inputs.

REQUIRED MERIDIAN RAIL PC PORTS is the number of voice processor ports

required to support Meridian Mail PC traffic based on inputs.

OTHER ACCESS GATEWAY PORTS is the number of voice processor ports

required to support other Access Gateway applications.

DESIRED ACCESS GATEWAY PORTS PROVISIONED is the number of voice

processor ports provisioned based on the override input. (System Options

Input 54).

TOTAL REQUIRED

ACCESS

GATEWAY PORTS is the number of voice processor

ports required to support all Access Gateway applications based on

inputs.

4.2.3

Voice Storage

VOICE MESSAGING, VOICE STORAGE, USERS STORAGE and ACCESS

APPLICATIONS STORAGE are all the individual requirements for the

associated application.

TOTAL REQUIRED is the total voice storage requirements based on inputs).

DESIRED VOICE

STORAGE

is the number

of storage provisioned

based on the override input (Systems Option input 52).

Userguide April 20, 1990

--- ENGINEERING SUMMARY ---

QUOTE: 00000002

* TOTAL VOICE PROCESSOR PORTS USED

VOICE MESSAGING USAGE

REGISTERED USERS

INPUT VM'TRAFFIC (CCS) 137

REQUIRED PORTS

PORTS PROVISIONED

DEDICATED VOICE PORT SERVICES

VOICE MENUS

VOICE MENU TRAFFIC (CCS)

REQUIRED PORTS

DESIRED VOICE MENU PORTS PROVISIONED

NETWORKING PORTS

OTHER ACCESS GATEWAY PORTS

DESIRED ACCESS GATEWAY PORTS

VOICE STORAGE

VOICE MESSAGING

VOICE MENU STORAGE

ACCESS APPLICATIONS STORAGE

TOTAL REQUIRED (HOURS) 21

DESIRED VOICE STORAGE HOURS

----

Userguide April 20, 1990

4.3 Report 6 Input Listing

This report lists all inputs used to engineer and provision the Meridian

Mail system quoted.

Default values and input adjustments will be

reflected in this report.

Actual

"saved" inputs can be viewed when

loading an existing quote.

The inputs will be stored'as shown on this

report if the quote is

"saved" after running reports.

R6 ---

LISTING ---

QUOTE: 00000002

SOFTWARE OPTIONS

001 1.0

MERIDIAN MAIL

002 1.0

VOICE MENUS OPTION

003 1.0

MERIDIAN MAIL NETWORKING

004 1.0

SECURED MESSAGING

050 1.0

MERIDIAN MAIL ADMIN PLUS SOFTWARE

051 1.0

ACCESS DEVELOPMENT SOFTWARE

PORTS/SERVICES

USAGE

001 350.0 39.0

1.6

VOICE

005 2.0

NETWORKING PORTS

010 4.0 10.0

VOICE MENUS (No.,Hours)

011 5.0 25.0 VOICE MENU USAGE

012 10.0 25.0 VOICE MENU USAGE

013 15.0 25.0 VOICE MENU USAGE

014 20.0 25.0 VOICE MENU USAGE

020 1.0 VOICE MENU USAGE INDICATOR

021 1.0 NETWORKING USAGE INDICATOR

050 5.0 1.0

CONSOLE USAGE (ACCESS)

SYSTEM OPTIONS

002 1.0 DISTRIBUTION LISTS

005 1.0 POWER OPTION (O=AC,

021 12.0 MODEL INDICATOR

047 1.0 MERIDIAN MAIL MODULAR OPTION INDICATOR

051 10.0 VOICE MESSAGING PORTS (OPTIONAL OVERRIDE)

052 65.0 HOURS VOICE STORAGE (OPTIONAL OVERRIDE)

053 2.0 VOICE MENU PORTS DEDICATED (OPT. OVERRIDE)

054 6.0 ADMIN PLUS ACCESS (OPTIONAL OVERRIDE)

Autoquote Userguide April 20,

4.4 Report 9 Equipment

This report lists all items which are included in the price quoted. If a

hardware or software item is not listed in this report, it is not

included in the price.

Package and assembly codes are used wherever

possible.

For each of these items, the quantity, equipment code, description, type

code,

unit Commercial List Price (CLP) and extended CLP are displayed.

In addition,

the leftmost field of the report displays if the item in

question is in a controlled release status.

An asterisk (*) indicates

that the item is on a controlled release basis.

The number in the column is the Autoquote equipment type code. It

is used to designate logical groupings of hardware and software.

The prices in the following report are not actual prices but are put in

as an example, refer to the Meridian 1

Communications Systems Pricing

Manual for pricing information.

--- EQUIPMENT LIST ---

QUOTE: 00000002

DED

QNTY

EQP CODE

PO699724

PO706431

SW7005

60010

60013

PO702575

PO702577

DESCRIPTION

PEDESTAL ASSEMBLY DC

TOP CAP DC

MODULE SIDE COVER

M-MAIL MOD OPT 4PT 36HR DC

M-MAIL MOD 12 TO 16 EXP (LRG)

NETWORK VOICE PROCESSOR

MERIDIAN MAIL OPTION NETWORK PKG

MOD OPT BASE SW

M-MAIL USER GUIDES (15)

MOD OPT VOICE MENUS

NETWORKING

SECURED MESSAGING SW

ADMINPLUS SW

ACCESS DEVELOPMENT SW

101 5910.00

101 595.00

595.00

105.00 420.00

35800.00 35800.00

39000.00 39000.00

11000.00 33000.00

7000.00 7000.00

3100.00 3100.00

H49 32.00 544.00

D14 2600.00 2600.00

2300.00 2300.00

2200.00 2200.00

1600.00 1600.00

D14 620.00 620.00

UNIT EXTEN

* INDICATES CONTROL RELEASE; PROPER AUTHORIZATION REQUIRED FOR THESE ITEMS.

FOR USE ONLY BY PERSONNEL AUTHORIZED BY NTI. NOT FOR PUBLIC DISCLOSURE.

Autoquote Userguide April

4.5 Report 17 Circuit Switch Impact

This report details the items which will be affected on the Meridian 1

circuit switch supporting the Meridian Mail system.

Memory

is the first area addressed in the report.

The U-data, P-data,

and Program Store values listed reflect the addition of all required

software options plus the ACD configuration and TN requirements.

If the

existing Meridian 1 system is already equipped with one or more of these

features,

the memory requirements for adding Meridian

Mail will be less.

The

required

software options to support Meridian Mail are listed next.

Note that Auxiliary Processor Link software is applicable to Release

10 or later.

REAL TIME capacity is also affected by the Meridian Mail integration.

The impact is listed as TOTAL SECONDS and PERCENT of capacity; the

parameters used to calculate these values are also included.

OTHER

INFORMATION

lists the number of Serial Data Interface (SDI) slots

required to house the ESDI card.

VOICE MESSAGING TRAFFIC (CCS)

is total traffic added to the Meridian 1

because of Meridian Mail

system.

Userguide April 20, 1990

CIRCUIT SWITCH IMPACT ---

QUOTE: 00000002

MEMORY

UNPROTECTED DATA

PROTECTED DATA

PROGRAM STORE

2555

1128

33,144

ACD AGENTS

ACD QUEUES

SOFTWARE

REQUIRED OPTIONS:

MERIDIAN BASE SOFTWARE (SWOOOOA)

AUXILIARY PROCESSOR LINK

109

IVMS LINK

BASIC ACD FEATURES

MERIDIAN MAIL LINK

NOTE:

AUXILIARY PROCESSOR LINK IS ONLY REQUIRED FOR RELEASE 10 OR LATER.

REAL TIME

TOTAL SECONDS

133

PERCENT (OF 2100 SEC)

NUMBER OF VM CALLS

600

REAL TIME PER VM CALL (ms) 121

OTHER INFORMATION

SLOTS (for ESDI)

VOICE MESSAGING TRAFFIC (CCS) 560

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

4.6 Report 21 Power Summary

This report contains information concerning several aspects of power.

(AMPS) is the current load of the system.

(WATTS)

is the total utility power required for the system.

HEAT OUTPUT is the heat output of the system.

POWER SUMMARY ---

QUOTE: 00000002

CURRENT (AMPS) 16.0

POWER (WATTS)

800 .

HEAT OUTPUT

2732

Userguide April 1990

5. APPENDIX 1: INPUT FORM

MERIDIAN MAIL QUOTATION REQUEST

SALESMAN:

TYPE QUOTE: 1 2 3

INDUSTRY CODE:

END-USER NAME: CUTOVER DATE:

END-USER LOC:

MODEL/GENERIC CODE: SOFTWARE RELEASE:

SOFTWARE OPTIONS

MERIDIAN MAIL

VOICE MENUS OPTION

MERIDIAN MAIL NETWORKING

SECURED MESSAGING

GUEST VOICE MESSAGING

MERIDIAN MAIL ADMINPLUS SOFTWARE

ACCESS DEVELOPMENT SOFTWARE

PORTS/SERVICES USAGE

VOICE MESSAGING USERS

NETWORKING PORTS

VOICE MENUS (No.,Hours)

VOICE MENU USAGE

VOICE MENU USAGE INDICATOR

NETWORKING USAGE INDICATOR

CONSOLE USAGE (ACCESS)

MERIDIAN MAIL PC USERS (ACCESS)

SYSTEM

OPTIONS

DISTRIBUTION LISTS

SPOKEN NAMES

MERIDIAN MAIL MODULAR OPTION POWER (

MODEL

MERIDIAN MAIL MODULAR OPTION

O=AC,

Userguide April 20,

MERIDIAN MAIL X INDICATOR

MAIL X)

OPTION INDICATOR

SYSTEM PURCHASE INDICATOR

NUMBER

VOICE MESSAGING PORTS

(OPTIONAL OVERRIDE)

HOURS VOICE STORAGE (OPTIONAL OVERRIDE)

VOICE MENU PORTS DEDICATED

(OPTIONAL OVERRIDE)

CONSOLE ACCESS PORTS (OPTIONAL OVERRIDE)

Meridian

AUTOQUOTE USER GUIDE

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

MERIDIAN ACD-MAX

AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

AUTOQUOTE USER GUIDE CHAPTER.

INTRODUCTION

. . . . . . . . . . . ..*...-............................

1.1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION.........................

. . . . . .

1.2 VALID MODELS........................

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INPUTS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INPUT CLASSES.....................................3

2.2 INPUT CODES, DESCRIPTIONS, AND DEFAULT VALUES

...3

2.2.1 Configuration ........................................

2.2.2 Software ..............................................

2.2.3 Hardware .............................................

ENGINEERING/PROVISIONING

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1

3.2 ACD-MAX SYSTEMS...................................7

3.3 ACD-MAX SOFTWARE..............................

. . . .

3.4 ACD-MAX HARDWARE ...............................

...8

3.4.1 Terminals ............................................

3.4.2 Printers.....................................- ......

3.4.3 Terminal Concentrators/FM

...................

..a

3.4.3.1 Single Tower Configuration:

............... ...9

3.4.3.2 Dual Tower Configuration: ................. ...9

3.4.4 Cables ..............................................

3.4.5 Tapes ............................................... 10

3.5 CIRCUIT SWITCH REQUIREMENTS......................1 0

3.5.1 Software ............................................

3.5.2 Serial Interface (SDI) .......................

4: REPORTS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1 Report 1 Price Summary.........................13

4.2 Report 6 Input Listing.........................14

4.3 Report 9 Equipment List........................15

5. APPENDIX 1: INPUT FORM . ..*............................

Autoquote

Userguide April 20, 1990

1. INTRODUCTION

This chapter of the Meridian 1 Communication Systems Autoquote User

Guide provides information on quoting the ACD-MAX. It includes the

following sections:

Section 1: Introduction

Section 2: Inputs

Section 3:

Engineering/Provisioning

Section 4: Reports

The mechanics of using Autoquote

are

not included in this product

chapter.

Refer to the Introduction and Overview chapter for detailed

information on how to use the Autoquote System.

1.1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

ACD-MAX is a PC based stand alone Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

system providing call report capabilities to the smaller user who

requires sophisticated reporting. ACD-MAX provides real time displays

with exception highlighting,

ad hoc reports and scheduled historical

reports.

1.2 VALID MODELS

There are two valid Meridian Mail Autoquote models.

Model

Generic Code Release

ACD-MAX

On-line Input Form

MAX

MAXF

Neither of the models has an associated release; i.e. enter RETURN at

the release prompt.

Userguide April 20, 1990

Autoguote Userguide April 20, 1990

INPUTS

This section covers all inputs associated with the ACD-MAX generic.

The

following subsections are contained wi-thin this section:

Input Classes

Input Codes, Descriptions,

And Default Values

2.1 INPUT CLASSES

inputs are organized into the three following input classes:

ACD-MAX Configuration

ACD-MAX Software

ACD-MAX Hardware

The letter designation is used to select the input class from the input

menu.

2.2 INPUT CODES, DESCRIPTIONS, AND DEFAULT VALUES

The following section contains information on each ACD-MAX input.

Descriptions and defaults are included where appropriate.

2.2.1 Configuration

The following inputs

are

used to determine the appropriate ACD-MAX

system and

to determine traffic and memory values.

Number

of ACD Agents

Enter the number agent positions on the ACD-MAX; the maximum

500 agents.

2 Number of Supervisory Terminals

Enter the total number of Supervisory Terminals desired on

the

system.

These will include the Terminals

and

any PC's

that will be used as Color-Graphics Terminals.

One

terminal is required,

and a maximum

of 32

terminals is

supported.

Number of

ACD

Queues

Enter the Number of ACD Queues to be supported on the

system.

A maximum of

queues.can be supported.

Userguide April 20, 1990

Calls

per Hour

Enter the maximum number of calls per hour to be handled by

the ACD-MAX system.

A maximum of 10000 calls per hour are

supported on a Dual Tower system

(3000 on a Single Tower).

Dual Tower Required

Enter a one (1) to ignore Autoquote calculations

system

sizing.

A one (1) will automatically provision a dual tower

system.

2.2.2 Software

Software inputs are used to provision optional software that can be used

to enhance the ACD-MAX system.

1 Configuration

Control

Enter a one (1) if Configuration Control software is

desired.

Enter a zero (0) to remove the software.

2 Custom Calculator

Enter a one (1) if Custom Calculator software is desired.

Enter

zero (0) to remove the software.

3 Networked ACD

Enter a one (1) if Networked ACD software is desired.

Enter

a zero (0) to remove the software.

2.2.3 Hardware

The following inputs are used to provision peripheral hardware for the

ACD-MAX system.

1 Amber Terminal

Enter the number

Amber Terminals desired.

2 HP Printer

Enter the number of Printers desired.

3 HP Printer

Enter the number of Printers desired.

4 DeskJet Printer

Enter the

number

of DeskJet Printers desired.

Ueerguide April 20, 1990

5 BP LaserJet Printer

Enter the number of LaserJet Printers desired.

6 Supervisor Color Graphic Cables

Enter the number of Color Graphic Terminals will

be used on the system.

This input to provision

cables for the Color Graphic

7 Additional

Backup Tapes

Enter the number of additional tapes desired for backup of

the

ACD-MAX

system.

telemanuals.com

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

Autoguote Userguide April 20, 1990

ENGINEERING/PROVISIONING

This section contains information about the engineering and provisioning

rules used to configure the ACD-MAX system.

following subsections

are contained within this section:

Overview

ACD-MAX Systems

ACD-MAX Software

ACD-MAX Hardware

Circuit Switch Requirements

3.1 OVERVIEW

An ACD-MAX system consists of a Base system and additional peripheral

hardware.

The equipment provisioned is determined by the user inputs

and Autoquote defaults.

The Autoguote will provision the minimum system

possible base on user inputs.

3.2 ACD-MAX SYSTEMS

There are two packages available of ACD-MAX; the Single Tower and Dual

Tower versions.

Some important information about the two systems is

given below:

System Maximum

Maximum

Terminals Printers

Single Tower

Dual Tower

32 8

For the Single Tower configuration,

all of the peripheral equipment will

reside on the tower via the 8 port terminal concentrator.

One

additional terminal concentrator may be added to a Single Tower system.

In the Dual Tower configuration,

all printers and the high speed link

cable will reside on the first tower.

All terminals and the optional

configuration control cable will reside on the second tower.

Userguide April 20, 1990

3.3 ACD-MAX SOFTWARE

The appropriate base software will be provisioned with the ACD-MAX

system.

Any optional software will only be provisioned if asked for

through the software inputs. The following table summarizes the

software options by system:

Software Single Tower System Dual Tower System

Base Software

Configuration Control

Custom Calculator

Networked ACD

Note:

Configuration Control software requires two additional cables, and

one port

the Terminal Concentrator to function. One PO700816

Configuration Control Cable, and one A0365365 Printer Cable with

Modem Control).

3.4 ACD-MAX HARDWARE

In addition to the basic system, additional peripheral equipment may be

added to the system.

The discussion of additional hardware will be

discussed in the following sections: Terminals, Printers, Terminal

Concentrators, Cables, and Tapes.

3.4.1 Terminals

Up to 32 supervisory terminals may be supported on the Dual Tower

system, 8 on the These may be the Amber

Terminals provisioned through Hardware Input 1, or they may be Color

Graphic Terminals (PC's).

The Color Graphic PC's must be purchased separately, but require a Color

Graphics Cable provisioned through Hardware Input 6.

The total number of terminals is entered in Configuration Input 1.

3.4.2 Printers

Any of printers may be added to the ACD-MAX as long

as it does not exceed a total of 8 supported by the Dual Tower system (2

on the Single Tower). The printers are provisioned via Hardware Inputs

2 through 5.

Each printer also requires a printer cable that will be

provisioned with that printer. Cables provisioning is covered later in

this section.

3.4.3 Terminal

The 8 port Terminal Concentrator (TC) is used to connect all peripheral

Autoquote Userguide April 20,

devices to the system. The Single Tower provides one, and the

Dual Tower provides two with the system, one for each tower. All

Terminal Concentrators provisioned will have Modem Control

functionality. (A0368534)

The following equations are used to determine the number of that

will be provisioned. In the equations-below, if Configuration Control

id equipped then the value is equal to one (1), if not equipped, then it

is equal to zero (0). HSL Cable refers to the High. Speed Link Cable

used to interface with the Meridian 1,

and will always equal to 1. The

value used for Communications Port in the Dual Tower Configuration is 1.

3.4.3.1 Single Tower Configuration:

= Terminals + Printers + Configuration Control + HSL Cable

If the equation is then no additional will be added to

the system.

If the equation is then one (1) additional TC will be added to

the Single Tower system.

3.4.3.2 Dual Tower Configuration:

Because there are two towers, the will be calculated

separately for each tower.

1st Tower Printers + HSL Cable + Communications Port

If the 1st Tower equation 6 than no additional TC will be

provisioned for the first tower.

If the 1st Tower equation 6 than one (1) additional TC will be

provisioned on the first tower.

2nd Tower Terminals + Configuration Control

If the 2nd Tower equation 8 than no additional will be

provisioded on the second tower.

If the 2nd Tower equation and 16 than one (1)

additional TC

will be provisioned for a total of two on the-second tower.

If the 2nd Tower equation and 24 than two (2) additional

will be provisioned for a total of three on the second tower.

If the 2nd Tower equation and 32 than three (3) additional

will be provisioned for a total

four on the second tower.

Autoquote Userguide April 20,

3.4.4

Cables

All cables provisioned will have Modem Control functionality. One cable

is needed for each Terminal, each Printer, and special cables are needed

for Color Graphic Supervisory Terminals and for the Configuration

Control software option. All cables will be provisioned automatically

with the associated hardware that is

The following cable summarizes the cables used when provisioning an

MAX system:

A0353364 Supervisor Color Graphic PC Cable (with Modem Control)

A0356365 Printer Cable (12 ft.) for the

(with Modem Control)

A0365366 Terminal Cable (50 for the (w/Modem Control)

PO700816 Configuration Control Cable

Note:

Configuration Control software requires one Configuration Control

cable and one Printer Cable to function.

3.4.5 Tapes

One tape is provided with each ACD-MAX system for daily backup.

Three

tapes are recommended for each ACD-MAX system. Additional tapes are

provisioned via Hardware Input 7.

3.5 CIRCUIT SWITCH REQUIREMENTS

3.5.1 Software

There is certain required software and some optional software that is

provisioned on the Meridian 1.

Required Software:

Basic ACD Features

Advanced ACD Features

ACD Reports

Load Management

ACD Link

ACD-D/MAX Reports Enhancements

Note: ACD-D/MAX Reports Enhancements should be ordered for-all systems

running Release 13

higher.

Optional Software:

Enhanced ACD Overflow

ACD Timed Overflow

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

Serial Data Interface (SDI)

The ACD-MAX is connected to the Meridian 1 via an port and a High

Speed Link cable.

The High Speed Link cable is provided in the ACD-MAX

system package,

and the port will be provisioned on the Meridian

when ACD Load Management provisioned.

Userguide April 20, 1990

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

REPORTS

This section provides information on most reports available with the

Meridian Mail quotation model. An explanation and example of each

report is included.

Price Summary

Input Listing

Equipment List

The header report (Report 9999) will print Out automatically when

reports are requested;

this report may also be requested like any other

report.

Within each subsection there

are

explanations of the contents of the

report being discussed.

The mechanics of using Autoquote are not included in this product

chapter.

Refer to the Introduction and Overview chapter for detailed

information on how to use the Autoquote.

4.1 Report 1 Price Summary

This report subtotals Customer List Price (CLP) by product group.

subtotals are for quoted items listed on the Report 9 Equipment List.

SUMMARY PRICE ---

QUOTE: 00000023

APPLICATION/PERIPHERAL DEVICE HARDWARE

54404.00

APPLICATION/PERIPHERAL DEVICE SOFTWARE

53350.00

TOTAL CLP ------------------------------------- 107754.00

FOR USE ONLY BY PERSONNEL AUTHORIZED BY NTI.

NOT PUBLIC DISCLOSURE.

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

4.2 Report 6 Input Listing

This report lists all inputs used to engineer provision the

system quoted.

Default values and input adjustments will be reflected

in this report. Actual "saved"

inputs can be viewed when loading an

existing quote.

The inputs will be stored as shown on this report if

the quote is "saved"

after running reports.

--- INPUT LISTING ---

QUOTE: 00000023

CONFIGURATIONS

001 165.0 NUMBER OF ACD AGENTS

002 12.0 NUMBER OF SUPERVISORY

TERMINALS

003 4.0 NUMBER

ACD QUEUES

003 1200.0

MAXIMUM NUMBER

CALLS PER HOUR

SOFTWARE

001 1.0 CONFIGURATION CONTROL

002 1.0 CUSTOM CALCULATOR

003 1.0 NETWORKED ACD

HARDWARE

001 8.0 AMBER TERMINAL

002 2.0 HP RUGGEDWRITER PRINTER

005 1.0 HP LASERJET SERIES II PRINTER

006 2.0 SUPERVISOR COLOR GRAPHIC

007 4.0 ADDITIONAL 3M TAPES FOR BACKUP

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

4.3 Report 9 Equipment List

This report lists all items which are included in the price quoted. If a

hardware or software item is not listed in this report, it is not

included in the price.

Package and assembly codes are used wherever

possible.

For each of these items, the quantity, equipment code, description, type

code,

unit Commercial List Price (CLP) and extended CLP are displayed.

In addition,

the leftmost field of the report displays if the item in

question is in a controlled release status.

An asterisk (*) indicates

that the item is on a controlled release basis.

The number in the column is the Autoquote equipment type code. It

is used to designate logical groupings of hardware and software.

The prices in the following report are not actual prices but are put in

as an example,

refer to the Meridian 1 Communications Systems Pricing

Manual for pricing information.

--- EQUIPMENT LIST

QUOTE: 00000023

QNTY EQP CODE DESCRIPTION TP

HP VECTRA BASIC SYSTEM DUAL

42000.00 42000.00

A0368534 8 PORT W/MODEM CONTROL

950.00 1090.00

A0353378 HP RUGGEDWRITER PRINTER

1884.00

3768.00

A0354417

TERMINAL AMBER

552.00 4416.00

A0362144 HP LASERJET SERIES II PRINTER

5670.00 5670.00

A0314597

3M TAPE CARTRIDGE

35.00 140.00

A0365366 TERMINAL CABLE 50

FT.

67.00 804.00

A0356365

PRINTER FT.

45.00 135.00

A0353364 CABLE/SUP. COLOR GRAPHIC PC

75.00 150.00

A0356365

PRINTER CABLE/12 FT.

36.00 36.00

DUAL TOWER ACD-MAX SOFTWARE

112 29200.00 29200.00

CONTROL OPTION (DUAL)

112 9965.00 9965.00

CUSTOM CALCULATOR OPTION (DUAL) 6850.00 6850.00

ACD-MAX NETWORKING OPTION (DUAL) 112 9945.00 9945.00

UNIT EXTENDED

CLP

* INDICATES CONTROL RELEASE; PROPER AUTHORIZATION REQUIRED FOR THESE ITEMS.

FOR USE ONLY BY PERSONNEL AUTHORIZED BY NTI.

NOT FOR DISCLOSURE.

Autoquote Ueerguide April 20, 1990

Userguide April 20, 1990

5. APPENDIX 1: INPUT FORM

ACD-MAX QUOTATION REQUEST

FORM

SALESMAN:

TYPE QUOTE: 1 2 3

INDUSTRY CODE:

END-USER

NAME:

CUTOVER DATE:

END-USER LOC:

MODEL/GENERIC CODE: SOFTWARE RELEASE:

[C] CONFIGURATIONS INPUT CLASS

Number of ACD Agents

Number of Supervisory Terminals

Number of ACD Queues

Calls Per Hour

[S] SOFTWARE INPUT CLASS

Configuration Control

Custom Calculator

Networked ACD

[H] HARDWARE INPUT CLASS

Amber Terminal

HP Printer

HP DeskJet Printer

HP LaserJet Printer

Supervisor Color Graphic

Additional 3M Tapes for Backup

Meridian I

AUTOQUOTE USER GUIDE

MERIDIAN MS-1

telemanuals.com

Userguide April 20,

MERIDIAN MS-1

MEETING COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

AUTOQUOTE USER GUIDE CHAPTER

INTRODUCTION .............. ...........................

1.1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION .............................

..l

1.2 VALID MODELS ....................................

..l

INPUT ...................................................

2.1 INPUT

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2 INPUT

2.2.1

2.2.2

CODES, DESCRIPTIONS, AND DEFAULT VALUES.....3

System Option.......,.........

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Peripherals.........

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. ENGINEERING/PROVISIONING

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1 SOFTWARE PROVISIONING .............................

3.1.1 MS-1 Software ........................................

3.1.2 Reservations Software

..............................

3.2 HARDWARE PROVISIONING ..........................

...5

3.2.1 Conference Bridge Assembly

.........................

3.2.2 Application Processor

................................

3.2.3 Trunking ............................................

3.2.3.2 Ground Start Bundle

.........................

3.2.3.3 E&M Bundle

...........................

3.2.4 Power Equipment ......................................

Power Supply

........................

3.2.4.2 48V DC Power Converter

..................

3.2.4.3 (-) 48V DC Wiring Harness

...................

3.2.5

Miscellaneous Equipment

..............................

3.2.5.1 Digital Trunk Cable

...................

3.2.5.2 Connector Kit

...............................

3.2.5.3 MS-l Cabinet

................................

3.2.5.4 Cabinet Door Latch

..........................

3.2.5.5 Input Jumper

................................

3.2.5.6 Vertical Jumper

.............................

3.2.5.7 Horizontal Jumper

...........................

3.2.6 Terminal Device

......................................

3.2.6.1

M4020

Terminal

..............................

3.2.6.2 LAN Interface Unit (LIU) ....................

3.2.6.3 System Matrix Printer

.......................

3.2.6.4 Parallel Printer Cable (10') ................

3.2.6.5 Serial Printer Cable (10') ..................

Autoquote

Ueerguide April 20,

REPORTS .................................................

4.1 Price Summary Report ...........................

4.2 Equipment List Report .......................

4.3 Input Listing Report

5. APPENDIX 1: INPUT

FORM

................................ 13

Autoguote Userguide April 1990

1. INTRODUCTION

This chapter of the Meridian Business Systems Autoguote User Guide

provides information on quoting the Meridian Communication

System.

The mechanics of using Autoquote are not included in this

product chapter.- Refer to the Introduction and Overview chapter for

detailed information on how to use the Autoquote System.

1.1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

The Meridian MS-1 Meeting Communication System is a digital, audio tele-

conferencing system providing superior audio quality for up to

eight simultaneous users.

1.2 VALID MODELS

There are two Meridian MS-1 Autoquote models.

Model Generic Release

Meridian MS-1

On-line Input Form

MS1

Since neither model has an associated release, simply enter a carriage

return at the release prompt.

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

Autoquote Userguide April 20,

INPUTS

This section covers all inputs associated with the Meridian MS-l

generic.

As with all Autoquote models,

data input consists of responses to

prompted entries and manual inputs associated with specific input codes.

A blank input form is included in the back of this chapter.

It is

recommended that copies be used for preparing quotations. An on-line

input form is also available on the Autoquote system

(Model/Generic

2.1 INPUT CLASSES

Meridian MS-1 inputs are organized into two input classes:

System Options

Peripherals

When creating a new quote,

Autoquote will prompt for each input class in

the

order

listed above.

The letter designation is used to make

selections from the Input Menu.

2.2 INPUT CODES, DESCRIPTIONS, AND DEFAULT VALUES

The following pages contain information on each Meridian MS-1 input:

codes, descriptions, and default values where appropriate.

2.2.1 System Options

All System Options inputs accept one entry.

Number

of Ports

Enter the number of ports desired for the system.

This

value determines the maximum number of participants (in one

or more conference) supported at one time.

The appropriate

system package, 18, 24, or 48 port, be provisioned.

2 Trunk Start, 3=4-Wire

E&M)

This input indicates the type of trunking to be utilized.

Enter one (1) for Digital two (2) for Analog Ground

Start, or three (3) for 4-Wire E&M trunks.

3 Power Indicator

Enter one (1) to provision AC power equipment or two

(2) to provision -48V DC equipment.

Autoquote Userguide April 20,

50 Reservations Software

Enter one (1) if Reservations functionality is desired.

2.2.2 Peripherals

All

Peripherals inputs accept one entry.

1 M4020 Terminals

Enter the number desired. The MS-1 supports a maximum of

five terminals.

20 Additional Interface Unit

(LIU)

Enter one (1) for an additional LIU.

30 Matrix Printer

to M4020

Enter one (1) if

System Printer is to be connected to a

M4020 terminal.

Only one System Printer may be requested

per system.

32 System Matrix Printer to LIU

Enter one (1) if a System Printer is to be connected to an

Only one System Printer may be requested be per

system.

Userguide April 20, 1990

ENGINEERING/PROVISIONING

This section contains the engineering/provisioning rules used to

generate Meridian MS-1 configurations.

3.1 SOFTWARE PROVISIONING

The current Meridian MS-1 release offers base software features and one

optional feature.

3.1.1 MS-1 Software

Base software features

are

included in each Conference Bridge Assembly.

The assembly provisioned is determined by the number of ports requested

(System Options input 1).

Ports Assembly

1-18

Port

MS-1

Software

19-24 24 Port

MS-l

Software

25-48 48 Port

MS-1

Software

3.1.2 Reservations Software

Reservations Software allows attendants to make reservations up

to 12 months in advance.

This is quoted by entering a one for System

Options input 50.

3.2 HARDWARE PROVISIONING

The following subsections summarize the hardware provisioned for

different input parameters.

3.2.1 Conference Bridge Assembly

One assembly is provisioned for each quote. The actual assembly is

determined by the

number

of ports requested (System Options input 1).

Ports

1-18

19-24

25-48

Assembly

NTMS1800

Port Conference Bridge

Assembly

NTMS2400 24 Port

Conference

Bridge

Assembly

NTMS4800 48 Port Conference Bridge

Assembly

3.2.2 Application Processor

One 3 MB Applications Processor is required to support

Reservations Software.

It is quoted if a one is entered for System

Options input 50.

Autoquote Userguide April 1990

3.2.3 Trunk'ing

An MS-1 system may be configured to support Ground Start, or 4-Wire

E&M trunking.

The appropriate hardware is provisioned as follows.

3.2.3.1 Digital Trunk Link SRU

The Digital Trunk Link SRU is provisioned if a one is entered

for System Options input 2, indicating trunking. Two are quoted if a

48 Port Conference Bridge Assembly is provisioned, otherwise only one is

quoted.

One cable is required for each Digital Trunk Link.

3.2.3.2 Ground Start Bundle

Ground Start trunking is quoted if a two is entered for input number 2,

indicating Ground Start trunking.

The

assembly

provisioned is

determined by the number of ports requested (System Options input 1).

Ports Assembly

l-18

18 Port Ground Start Bundle

19-24

24 Port Ground Start Bundle

25-48

48 Port Ground Start Bundle

3.2.3.3 4-Wire E&M Bundle

4-Wire E&M trunking is quoted if a three is entered for input number 2,

indicating 4-Wire E&M trunking. The

assembly

provisioned is determined

by the number of ports requested,

(System Options input 1).

Ports

l-18

19-24

25-48

18 Port E&M Bundle

Port E&M Bundle

48 Port E&M Bundle

3.2.4 Power Equipment

An MS-l system

may be

provisioned with either AC or -48V DC power.

The appropriate equipment is provisioned as follows.

3.2.4.1 AC Power Supply

Each cabinet requires one AC Power Supply if AC power is requested

by entering a 1 for

System

Option input 3.

3.2.4.2 (-) 48V DC Power Converter

Each cabinet requires one -48V DC Power Converter if DC power is

requested by entering a 2 for System Option input 3.

Userguide April 20, 1990

3.2.4.3 (-) 48V DC Wiring Harness

One is provisioned for each

-48V DC Power Converter quoted.

3.2.5 Miscellaneous

Equipment

Additional equipment is provisioned according to the following rules.

3.2.5.1 Digital Trunk Cable (50')

One is provisioned for each Digital Trunk Link quoted.

3.2.5.2 Connector Kit

Two are quoted if a 48 Port Conference Bridge Assembly is provisioned,

otherwise only one is quoted.

3.2.5.3 MS-l Cabinet

The number quoted depends solely on card slot requirements for the

equipment provisioned.

There are no power or thermal restrictions for

the

MS-l

Cabinets.

The following guidelines specify the number quoted:

All 18 port systems require two cabinets.

Three cabinets are necessary for 24 port systems utilizing

Wire E&M trunking.

All other 24 port systems require two

cabinets.

Two cabinets are needed for 48 port systems with trunking, AC

power, and no Reservations software. All other 48 port systems

require three cabinets.

3.2.5.4 Cabinet Door Latch

Each cabinet requires a Cabinet Door Latch.

3.2.5.5 Input Jumper

One is provisioned for each quote.

3.2.5.6 Vertical Jumper

One is provisioned for each quote.

3.2.5.7 Horizontal Jumper

The number provisioned equals the number of cabinets quoted minus one.

3.2.6 Terminal Devices

The following terminal devices are provisioned as follows.

Userguide

April

3.2.6.1 M4020 Terminal

The number quoted equals the number requested (Peripherals input 10).

A maximum of five terminals may be supported by an

MS-1

system.

3.2.6.2 LAN Interface Unit (LIU)

One is quoted if either a LAN Interface Unit input 20) or a

System Matrix Printer (Peripherals input 32) to LIU is requested. A

maximum of one LIU may be included in a quote.

3.2.6.3 System Matrix Printer

quoted if either a System Matrix Printer to M4020 (System Options

input 30) or System Matrix Printer to LIU (System Options input 32) is

requested.

A maximum of one may be supported by an MS-1 system.

3.2.6.4 Parallel Printer Cable (10')

One is provisioned for each System Matrix Printer to LIU requested

(System Options input 32).

3.2.6.5 Serial Printer Cable (10')

One is provisioned

for

each System Matrix Printer connected to a M4020

terminal.

Userguide April 20, 1990

4. REPORTS

This section provides information on most'reports available with the

Meridian MS-l quotation model.

An explanation of each report is also

included.

A sample of report 15 Discount Summary will not appear in the User

Guide.

This report provides discounting information which may vary for

different

users.

4.1 Price Summary Report 1

This report subtotals Commercial List Price (CLP) by product group.

subtotals are for quoted items listed in Report 9 Equipment List.

The

Installation and Basic Monthly Maintenance prices are also listed.

--- PRICE SUMMARY --- QUOTE: 00003574

MS-1 HARDWARE

36231.00

PERIPHERALS 4255.00

TOTAL CLP

40486.00

INSTALLATION 586.00

BASIC MONTHLY MAINTENANCE

323.00

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

4.2 Equipment List Report 9

This report lists all items which are included in the price quoted. If

a hardware

software item is not listed in this report, it is not

included in the price.

Package and assembly codes are used whenever

possible.

For

each of these

items,

the quantity, part number, description, type

code,

unit CLP and extended CLP are listed. The number in the Type Code

column is the equipment type code used to designate logical

groupings of hardware and software. The letter in the Type Code column

is the product discount category.

--- EQUIPMENT LIST --- QUOTE: 00003574

TYPE UNIT EXTENDED. .

QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION

CODE

NTMS1800 MS-1 18 PORT CONFERENCE

BRIDGE 27025.00 27025.00

-- FOLLOWING IS A PARTIAL LIST OF ITEMS CONTAINED IN THE ABOVE SYSTEM.

-- THEY ARE LISTED FOR REFERENCE ONLY.

1 PRIMARY PROCESSOR SRU

1 5MB APPLICATIONS PROCESSOR SRU

80 MB DISK STORAGE SRU

1 3MB CONFERENCING SERVICE SRU

1 SRU

1 NETWORK SERVICES SRU

1 DIGITAL TONE RECEIVER

1 A0321335 CROSS CONNECT PANEL

A0328670

CABLE/ 25 PR, 25 FT.

1 M4020 DATA/VOICE TERMINAL

-- ADDITIONS REQUIRED TO THE 18 PORT CONFERENCE BRIDGE ARE:

DIGITAL TRUNK LINE CABLE

50' FT.

G31 3500.00 3500.00

AC POWER SUPPLY

G31 1000.00 2000.00

MS-1 CABINET

G31 1320.00 2640.00

2 MS-1 CABINET LATCH

G31 .oo .oo

DIGITAL TRUNK LINK CABLE

FT. G31 70.00 70.00

CONNECTOR KIT

6.00 6.00

INPUT JUMPER

G31 330.00 330.00

VERTICAL JUMPER

G31 330.00 330.00

HORIZONTAL JUMPER

330.00 330.00

M4020 DATA/VOICE TERMINAL

1395.00

A0317073 SYSTEM MATRIX PRINTER

2860.00 2860.00

Userguide April 20, 1990

4.3 Input Listing Report 6

This report lists all inputs used to engineer and provision the Meridian MS-1

system quoted.

Default values and input adjustments will be reflected in this

report.

Actual saved inputs can be viewed when loading an existing quote.

The

inputs will be stored as shown on this the quote is saved after

generating reports.

--- INPUT LISTING ---

QUOTE:

00003574

BASE

SYSTEM

001 18.0 NUMBER OF PORTS

002

1.0

TRUNK TYPE

E&M)

003

1.0

POWER INDICATOR

PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

010

2.0 M4020

TERMINALS

030

1.0

SYSTEM MATRIX PRINTER on M4020

Userguide April 20,

Ueerguide April 20, 1990

5. APPENDIX 1: INPUT FORM

NORTHERN TELECOM MBS QUOTATION SYSTEM

MERIDIAN CONFERENCING SYSTEM

VERSION: 88.01

SALESMAN:

TYPE QUOTE: 1

INDUSTRY CODE:

2 3

END-USER NAME: CUTOVER DATE:

END-USER LOC:

MODEL GENERIC CODE: MS1

SYSTEM OPTIONS

NUMBER OF PORTS

TRUNK TYPE E&M)

POWER INDICATOR

RESERVATIONS SOFTWARE

PERIPHERALS

TERMINALS

LAN INTERFACE UNIT

SYSTEM MATRIX PRINTER to

M4020

SYSTEM MATRIX PRINTER to LIU

PERSONAL PRINTER

----------------------------------------------------

Autoquote Ueerguide April 20,

Meridian

AUTOQUOTE USER GUIDE

MERIDIAN MESSAGE

CENTER

telemanuals.com

Autoguote Userguide April 20, 1990

MERIDIAN MESSAGE CENTER

AUTOQUOTE USER GUIDE CHAPTER'

INTRODUCTION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.1 PRODUCT

1.2 VALID MODELS......................................1

INPUT

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INPUT

2.2 INPUT CODES, DESCRIPTIONS, AND DEFAULT VALUES.....3

2.2.1 System Option...............

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

2.2.2 Peripherals...........................

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. ENGINEERING/PROVISIONING ................................

3.1.1 DTMF-ASCII Converter Box

.............................

3.1.2 DTMF-ASCII Converter Box Cable

....................

...7

3.1.3 SL-1 RS232 Connection Cable

..........................

3.1.4 M4010 Terminal .......................................

3.1.5 NT220 Registry Terminal ..............................

3.1.6 Registry Terminal Cable

...........................

...7

3.1.7 Registry Terminal Enclosure

.......................

...7

3.1.8 1200 Baud Modem

......................................

3.1.9 224 AT/D Modem

.......................................

3.1.10 202 T Modem

.........................................

3.1.11 Modem Cable .........................................

3.1.12 Printer Cable .......................................

3.1.13 Serial Ports...; ....................................

Ports

......................................

3.1.15 MUX Option

.................................

..a

3.1.16 Conversion Cable

..............................

3.1.17 LAN Interface Unit ..................................

3.1.18 Lanlink SRU .........................................

4. REPORTS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1 Price Report ........................

4.2 Equipment List

.......

..............

. 4.3 Input Listing

Report

5: APPENDIX 1: INPUT FORM

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

INTRODUCTION

This chapter of the Meridian Business Systems Autoguote User Guide

provides information on quoting the Meridian Message Center.

The

mechanics of using Autoquote are not included in this product chapter.

Refer to the Introduction and Overview chapter for detailed information

on how to use the Autoguote System.

1.1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

The Meridian Message Center provides text messaging capabilities to

business and medical applications.

1.2 VALID MODELS

There are two Meridian Message Center models.

Model Generic Release

Meridian Message Center

MSG

On-line Input Form

MSGF

model has an associated release, simply enter a carriage

return at the release prompt.

Ueerguide April 20, 1990

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

INPUTS

This

section covers all inputs the Meridian Message

Center generic.

As with all Autoquote models,

data input consists of responses to

prompted entries and manual inputs associated with specific input codes.

A blank input form is included in the back of this chapter.

It is

recommended that copies be used for preparing quotations. An on-line

input form is also available on the Autoquote system (Model/Generic

"MSGF").

2.1 INPUT CLASSES

Meridian Message Center inputs are organized into two input classes:

System Options

Peripherals

When creating a new quote,

Autoquote will prompt for each input class in

the order listed above.

The letter designation is used to make

selections from the Input Menu.

2.2 INPUT CODES, DESCRIPTIONS, AND DEFAULT VALUES

The following pages contain information on each Meridian Message Center

input: codes, descriptions, and default values where appropriate.

2.2.1

System

Options

All System Options inputs accept one entry.

1 SYSTEM INDICATOR

. ANSWERING, REGISTRY)

Enter one (1) for the Basic Message Center system package,

two (2) for the Physicians Answering system package, or

three (3) for the Physicians Registry system package.

DEMAND PRINT

Enter one (1) if desired.

MESSAGING

Enter one (1) if desired.

Autoquote Userguide April 20,

52 PAGER INTERFACE

Enter one (1) if desired.

53 PHYSICIANS

REFERRAL

Enter one (1) if desired.

54 PRE-PROGRAMMED

MESSAGES

55 REMOTE DEMAND PRINT

Enter one (1) if desired.

56 USER CHANGE OF STATUS

Enter one (1) if desired.

57 SL-1 AUTO SCREEN ACTIVATION

Enter one (1) if desired.

60 SMDI

AUTO

SCREEN ACTIVATION LINES)

Enter one (1) if required to support less than 1000 lines.

61 SMDI AUTO SCREEN ACTIVATION ( LINES)

Enter one (1) if required to support

over

1000 lines.

2.2.2 Peripherals

All Peripherals inputs accept one entry.

1 M4010 TERMINALS

Enter the quantity desired.

' 2 REGISTRY TERMINALS (NT220)

Enter the quantity desired.

REGISTRY TERMINAL ENCLOSURES

Enter the quantity desired.

10 ADDITIONAL LAN INTERFACE

UNITS

the quantity desired.

ADDITIONAL UNITS

Enter the desired.

Autoquote Userguide April

8-PORT MUX OPTIONS

Enter the quantity desired.

13 PAGING INDICATOR

If paging functionality is desired, the type(s) of paging to

be supported must be specified.

Enter one (1) for Tone or

Digital paging

Only,

two (2) for Alphanumeric paging only,

or three (3) for both Tone/Digital and Alphanumeric paging.

30 SYSTEM PRINTERS to LIU

Enter the number of system printers that are to be connected

to a LAN interface unit.

31 SYSTEM PRINTERS to M4010

Enter the number of system printers that are to be connected

to a

M4010.

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

ENGINEERING/PROVISIONING

section contains the engineering/provisioning rules used to

generate Meridian Message Center configurations.

3.1.1 DTMF-ASCII Converter Box

One is required for each of the following software options: Demand

Print, Pre-Programmed Messages, and User Change of Status. Note that

one is included in the Demand Print assembly.

3.1.2 DTMF-ASCII Converter Box Cable

One is required for each DTMF-ASCII Converter Box

3.1.3 RS232 Connection Cable

One is required for Auto-Screen Activation. Note that one is included

in the Basic Message Center base package.

3.1.4 M4010 Terminal

The number provisioned is equal to the number requested at Peripherals

input 1. Two are included in all base system packages.

3.1.5 NT220 Registry Terminal

The number provisioned is equal to the number requested at Peripherals

input 2.

One is included in the Physicians Registry base system

package.

3.1.6 Registry Terminal Cable

The number provisioned is equal to the number of NT220 Registry

Terminals provisioned.

One is included in the Physicians Registry base

system package.

3.1.7 Registry Terminal Enclosure

The number provisioned is equal to the number requested at Peripherals

input 3.

3.1.8 1200 Baud Modem

One is included in

every

system package. An additional 1200 Baud Modem

is required for Alphanumeric paging.

Userguide April 20, 1990

3.1.9 224 AT/D Modem

One is required for Remote Demand Print.

3.1.10 202 T Modem

One is required for SMDI Auto-Screen Activation.

3.1.11 Modem Cable

One is required for each of the following modems: 1200 Baud Modem, 224

AT/D Modem, and 202 T Modem.

One is included in every base system

package.

3.1.12 Printer Cable

One for each system printer to be connected to an LIU

(Peripherals input 30).

3.1.13 Serial Ports

One serial port is required for each of the following: NT220 Registry

Terminal,

SL-1 RS232 Connection Cable, 1200 Baud Modem, 224

Modem, 202 T Modem, and DTMF-ASCII Converter Box.

Serial ports are

found on both the LAN Interface Unit and 8-Port

MUX

Option.

3.1.14 Parallel Ports

One

parallel port is required for each system printer to be connected to

an LIU, indicated with Peripheral input 20.

Parallel ports are found on

both the LAN Interface Unit and 8-Port MUX Option.

3.1.15 MUX Option

Each 8-Port MUX Option supports eight serial ports and one parallel

port.

The number provisioned is the number requested at Peripherals

input 12.

3.1.16 Conversion Cable

One is provisioned for each 8-Port MUX Option.

3.1.17 LAN Interface Unit

Each LAN Interface Unit (LIU) supports two serial ports and one parallel

port.

The number of required to support serial and parallel ports

is calculated independently.

where S

to support serial ports.

Serial ports required.

Number of Options.

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

= (PR (8 * M))

where P

LIU's to support parallel ports.

PR = Parallel ports required.

= Number of MUX Options.

The maximum number of LIU's required to meet serial and parallel port

requirements plus any additional requested at Peripherals input 10

determine the total number of LIU's provisioned.

L= + A

where L =

Number of LIU's provisioned.

= LIU's to support serial ports.

to support parallel ports.

A = Additional LIU's desired (Peripherals input 10).

Note that one LIU is contained in each base system package.

3.1.18 SRV

Each Lanlink SRU has eight ports to support the following: LAN Interface

Unit, M4010 Terminal,

and

MUX

Option. The number provisioned is

determined as follows.

where S =

Number of Lanlink SRU's provisioned.

Number of LIU's provisioned.

T = Number of Terminals provisioned.

Number of MUX Options provisioned.

A Additional Lanlink SRU's desired (Peripherals input 11).

A maximum of four Lanlink SRU's may be configured on any one Message

Center system.

Note that one Lanlink SRU is contained in each base

system package.

telemanuals.com

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

REPORTS

This section provides information on

reports available with the

Meridian

Message

Center quotation model. An explanation of each report

is also included.

A sample

report 15 Discount Summary will not appear in the User

Guide.

This report provides discounting information which may vary for

different Autoquote users.

4.1 Price Summary Report 1

This report subtotals Commercial List Price (CLP) by product group.

subtotals are for quoted

items

listed in Report 9 Equipment List.

The

Installation and Basic Monthly Maintenance prices are also listed.

--- PRICE SUMMARY ---

QUOTE:

MESSAGE CENTER HARDWARE

55780.00

MESSAGE CENTER SOFTWARE

5000.00

TOTAL CLP

60780.00

INSTALLATION 1540.00

BASIC MONTHLY MAINTENANCE

638.00

telemanuals.com

Userguide April 20, 1990

4.2 Equipment List Report 9

This report lists all items which are included in the price quoted. If

a hardware or software

item

is not listed in this report, it is not

included in the price.

Package and assembly codes are used whenever

possible.

For each of these items,

the quantity, part number, description, type

code,

unit CLP and extended CLP are listed. The number in the Type Code

column is the Autoquote equipment type code used to designate logical

groupings of hardware and software. The letter in the Type Code column

is the product discount category.

EQUIPMENT LIST ---

QUOTE:

TYPE UNIT EXTENDED

QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION

CODE

1 NTMSG-01 MESSAGE CENTER SYSTEM

G3 41400.00 41400.00

-- FOLLOWING IS A LIST OF ITEMS CONTAINED IN THE ABOVE SYSTEM:

1 PRIMARY PROCESSOR SRU

1 DISK STORAGE SRU

1 SMB SASI FILE PROCESSOR SRU

1 170MB DISK SRU

1 LAN INTERFACE UNIT

1 LANLINK SRU

2 AC POWER SUPPLY

2 MS-1 CABINET

1 INPUT JUMPER

1 HORIZONTAL JUMPER

1 VERTICAL JUMPER

1 A0321335 CROSS CONNECT PANEL

1 A0328670 CABLE/ 25 PR, 25

FT.

1 SL-1 RS232 CONN CABLE 25 FT.

1 DXMS OPERATING SYSTEM

1 DVIX V TIMESHARING SOFTWARE

1 MESSAGE CENTER SOFTWARE

SL-1 AUTO SCREEN ACTIVATION

1 DEMAND PRINT MODULE

2 M4010 DATA TERMINAL

1 A0344322 1200 BPS MODEM

1 CABLE/ RS232 MODEM 10 FT.

-- ADDITIONS REQUIRED TO THE MESSAGE CENTER SYSTEM ARE:

1 LAN INTERFACE UNIT

G3 950.00 950.00

1 LANLINK SRU

G3 3000.00 3000.00

1 INTRA-OFFICE MESSAGING

G3 5000.00 5000.00

8 M4010 DATA TERMINAL

G3 1295.00 10360.00

2 10 FT. PARALLEL CABLE

G3 35.00 70.00

telemanuals.com

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

4.3 Input Listing Report 6

This report lists all inputs used to engineer and provision the Meridian

Message Center system quoted.

Default values and input adjustments will

be reflected in this report.

Actual saved inputs can be viewed when

loading an existing The inputs will be stored as shown on this

report if the quote is saved after generating reports.

R6 --- INPUT LISTING --- QUOTE:

SYSTEM

001 1.0

SYSTEM INDICATOR

050 1 . 0 DEMAND PRINT

051 1.0

MESSAGING

PERIPHERALS

001 10.0

030 2.0

M4010 TERMINALS

SYSTEM PRINTERS

telemanuals.com

Autoquote Userguide April 20, 1990

telemanuals.com

Ueerguide April 20, 1990

5. APPENDIX 1: INPUT FORM

NORTHERN TELECOM MBS QUOTATION SYSTEM

MERIDIAN MESSAGE CENTER SYSTEM

VERSION: 88.01

SALESMAN:

TYPE QUOTE: 1

INDUSTRY CODE:

2 3

END-USER NAME: CUTOVER DATE:

END-USER LOC:

MODEL GENERIC CODE: MSG

521

SYSTEM OPTIONS

SYSTEM INDICATOR

ANSWERING, REGISTRY)

DEMAND PRINT

INTRA-OFFICE MESSAGING

PAGER INTERFACE

PHYSICIANS REFERRAL

PRE-PROGRAMMED MESSAGES

REMOTE DEMAND PRINT

USER CHANGE OF STATUS

SL-1 AUTO SCREEN ACTIVATION

SMDI AUTO SCREEN ACTIVATION LINES)

SMDI AUTO SCREEN ACTIVATION ( LINES)

PERIPHERALS

M4010 TERMINALS

REGISTRY TERMINALS (NT220)

REGISTRY TERMINAL ENCLOSURES

ADDITIONAL LAN INTERFACE UNITS

ADDITIONAL LANLINK UNITS

8-PORT MUX OPTIONS

PAGING INDICATOR

SYSTEM PRINTERS to LIU

SYSTEM PRINTERS to

M4010

telemanuals.com

PDF Meridian SL 1 Engineering Update

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation